Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya ... - Avaya Support

Hardware Description and 

Reference for 

Avaya Communication Manager 

555-245-207 

Issue 6 

February 2007

© 2007 Avaya Inc. 

All Rights Reserved. 

Notice 

While reasonable efforts were made to ensure that the information in this 

document was complete and accurate at the time of printing, Avaya Inc. can 

assume no liability for any errors. Changes and corrections to the information 

in this document may be incorporated in future releases. 

For full legal page information, please see the complete document, 

Avaya Legal Page for Hardware Documentation, document number 

03-600759. 

To locate this document on our Web site, simply go to 

http://www.avaya.com/support and search for the document number in 

the search box. 

Documentation disclaimer 

Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any modifications, additions, or deletions to 

the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications, 

additions, or deletions were performed by Avaya. Customer and/or End User 

agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya, Avaya's agents, servants and 

employees against all claims, lawsuits, demands and judgments arising out of, 

or in connection with, subsequent modifications, additions or deletions to this 

documentation to the extent made by the Customer or End User. 

Link disclaimer 

Avaya Inc. is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web 

sites referenced elsewhere within this documentation, and Avaya does not 

necessarily endorse the products, services, or information described or offered 

within them. We cannot guarantee that these links will work all of the time and 

we have no control over the availability of the linked pages. 

Warranty 

Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales 

agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s 

standard warranty language, as well as information regarding support for this 

product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: 

http://www.avaya.com/support. 

Copyright 

Except where expressly stated otherwise, the Product is protected by copyright 

and other laws respecting proprietary rights. Unauthorized reproduction, 

transfer, and or use can be a criminal, as well as a civil, offense under the 

applicable law. 

Avaya support 

Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask 

questions about your product. The support telephone number 

is 1-800-242-2121 in the United States. For additional support telephone 

numbers, see the Avaya Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support.

Contents 

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 

About Avaya Communication Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 

About Avaya media servers and gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 

Media servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

Categories of media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 

Carrier types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 

Common architectural aspects of media gateways for central locations . . . 23 

Port networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 

Center Stage Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 

System Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Avaya Integrated Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Media Server Web-browser-based interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

Avaya communications devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Adjuncts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 

Linux-based media servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Avaya S8300 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 

Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

S8300 Media Server/G700 Media Gateway configuration . . . . . . . . . . 31 



Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

UPS or power backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

RAM disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

Related hardware and adjuncts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 

Call center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 

Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

S8300 Media Server in an LSP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Automatic fallback to primary controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 

Number of LSPs supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

LSP installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 

IP addressing of the primary controller, the LSP, and IP telephones . . . 38 

High-level capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 

Issue 6 February 2007 3

Contents 



Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

S8400 IP Interface (SIPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 

Solid state drive and hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Faceplate USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Compact flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 

Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 

USB modem port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

Related hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

Media server cable adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 


Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 

Ethernet connectivity with the TN8412AP/TN2312BP circuit pack . . . . . 50 

Ethernet connectivity with the TN2302BP circuit pack . . . . . . . . . . . 51 




Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

S8500C Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 

Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 

Compact Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 



RAM disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 

S8500 Media Server as an Enterprise Survivable Server . . . . . . . . . . 61 

S8300 Media Server in an LSP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

Power outages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 


Avaya S8700-series Media Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 


IPSIs required based on PNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 

S8700-series media server control complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 

S8720 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 

S8710 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 

4 Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager


Altitude, air pressure and air purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 

EMI and RFI specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 

Power supply specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 

Regulatory certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 

Data rack mounting and media gateway floor loading . . . . . . . . . . . 80 


Ethernet switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

UPS or power backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

USB modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Reliability for IP-PNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Reliability when sending voice bearer over direct-connect, ATM, or CSS. 84 

Multiple reliabilities among PNs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 


S8700-series Media Server as an Enterprise Survivable Server . . . . . . 85 



Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 

Connectivity with voice bearer over direct-connect, ATM, or CSS . . . . . 86 

Connectivity when sending voice bearer over IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

Combining IP- and fiber-PNC port networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 


DEFINITY-based media servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

DEFINITY Server CSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 


High level capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 

Other Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

Server for Avaya SIP Enablement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 


Edge server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

Home server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 

Home/Edge server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 

Local failover option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 

Contents 


Contents 


SIP endpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 

Toshiba SIP Business Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 

Avaya Expanded Meet-me Conferencing Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 


Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

Backup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 


Media gateways and integrated gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

G150 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

G150 2T + 4A (4 VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 

G150 4T+4A (16 VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 


G150 WAN Expansion Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 


Operation in survivable mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 

Return of control to server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 

Optional Wireless LAN Card & Access Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 

Wireless specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 


Avaya G250 Media Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 


Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 

Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 


Power cord specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 







Deployment modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

Expanded capacity and multiple G350 gateways in a branch . . . . . . . 127 


Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 

Ports and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 


Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 

Power cord specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 


Media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 



IG550 Integrated Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 


Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

G550 and J4350 Services Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

Slot locations on J4350 Services Router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

Fixed ports and buttons on the Juniper J4350 Services Router . . . . . . 137 

IG550 and J6350 Services Router. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 

TGM550 Gateway Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 


J4350/J6350 Services Router specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

J-series Services Router power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 

TGM 550 Gateway Module specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 

Grounding cable for IG550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 


Supported optional modules in the IG550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

TIM combination limitations in the IG550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 





Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 

G860 Trunk Media Processing Module (TP-6310) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

System controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 

Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 


Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 

Electro magnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 

Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 

Electrical aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 

Contents 


Contents 


Ethernet switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 

Power supply and power entry module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 

Element Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 


Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 




G700 Media Gateway with an S8700-series Media Server. . . . . . . . . . 158 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Octaplane stacking fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 

Media module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 

System-level LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 


Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 

Thermal protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Manual reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

AC and load center circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

AC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

AC grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 

Related Hardware and adjuncts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

X330 WAN Access routing module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

Avaya P330 LAN expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 

C360 Converged stackable switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 

Media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 



Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 

Required circuit packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 

Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 


Rack mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 

Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 

Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 


Heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 




Single G650. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 

Multiple G650s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 

Carrier addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 

Required circuit packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 

Optional circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 

I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 

I/O adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 

Fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 



Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 

Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 

CMC1 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 


Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

Required circuit packs for a CMC1 Media Gateway for 

187 

DEFINITY Server CSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 


187 

S8700-series and S8500 Media Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 

SCC1 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 



Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 

MCC1 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 


Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

Auxiliary cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

Processor Port network cabinet for DEFINITY Server SI . . . . . . . . . . 

Port network cabinet for the S8700-series Media 

199 

Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

Port network cabinet for Avaya S8500 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 

Expansion port network cabinet for DEFINITY Server SI . . . . . . . . . . 201 


Carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 

Control carrier for DEFINITY Server SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 

Duplicated control carrier for DEFINITY Server SI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 

Contents 


Contents 

Expansion Control Carrier for all server models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 

Port carrier for DEFINITY Server SI, 

S8700-series Media Server, or S8500 Media Server (J58890BB) . . . . . 207 

Switch node carrier for S8700-series Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 

Circuit packs, channel service units, 

and power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 

120A channel service unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 

1217B AC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 

631DA1 AC power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 

631DB1 AC power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

649A DC power converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

650A AC power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

655A power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 


Input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 

655A ring generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 

655A replaceable DC-input fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 

676D DC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 

982LS current limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 

CFY1B current limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 

ED-1E568 DEFINITY AUDIX R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 

J58890MA-1 Multiapplication Platform for DEFINITY (MAPD) . . . . . . . . . . . 219 

NAA1 fiber-optic cable adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 

TN429D incoming call line identification (ICLID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 

TN433 speech synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 

TN436B direct inward dialing trunk (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 

TN438B central office trunk (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 

TN439 tie trunk (4 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 

TN457 speech synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 


TN464HP DS1 interface, T1 (24 channels) or E1 (32 channels) . . . . . . . . . . . 222 

TN465C central office trunk (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 

TN479 analog line (16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 

TN497 tie trunk (4 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 

TN556D ISDN-BRI 4-wire S/T-NT interface (12 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 


TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice Mail System (part of ED-1E568) . . . . . . . . 225 

TN570D Expansion Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 

TN572 Switch-Node Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN573B Switch-Node Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN574 DS1 Converter — T1, 24 Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN725B speech synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 

TN726B Data Line (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 

TN735 MET line (4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 

TN744E call classifier and tone detector (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 

TN746B analog line (16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 

TN747B central office trunk (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 

TN750C recorded announcement (16 channels). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 


TN754C DCP digital line (4-wire, 8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 

TN755B neon power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 

TN758 Pooled Modem (2 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 

TN760E tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 

TN762B hybrid line (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 

TN763D auxiliary trunk (4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 

TN767E DS1 interface, T1 (24 channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 

TN769 analog line (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 

TN771DP maintenance and test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 

TN775C maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 

TN780 tone clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 

TN787K multimedia interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 

TN788C multimedia voice conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 

TN789B radio controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 

TN791 analog guest line (16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 

TN792 duplication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 

TN793CP analog line with Caller ID for multiple countries (24 ports) . . . . . . . 241 

TN797 analog trunk or line circuit pack (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 

TN799DP control LAN (C-LAN) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 

TN801B MAPD (LAN gateway interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 

TN802B MAPD (IP interface assembly). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 

TN1654 DS1 converter, T1 (24 channels) and E1 (32 channels) . . . . . . . . . . 245 

TN2138 central office trunk (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 

Contents 


Contents 

TN2139 direct inward dialing trunk(8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 

TN2140B tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 

TN2146 direct inward dialing trunk (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 

TN2147C central office trunk (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 

TN2181 DCP digital line (2-wire, 16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 

TN2182C tone clock, tone detector, and call classifier (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . 248 

TN2183/TN2215 analog line for multiple countries (16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . 249 

TN2184 DIOD trunk (4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 

TN2185B ISDN-BRI S/T-TE interface (4-wire, 8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 

TN2198 ISDN-BRI U interface (2-wire, 12 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 

TN2199 central office trunk (3-wire, 4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 

TN2202 ring generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 

TN2207 DS1 interface, T1 (24 channels) and E1 (32 channels) . . . . . . . . . . . 252 

TN2209 tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 

TN2214CP DCP digital line (2-wire, 24 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

TN2215/TN2183 analog line for multiple countries 

253 

(16 ports) (international offers or Offer B only for US and Canada) . . . . . . . 253 

TN2224CP DCP digital line (2-wire, 24 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 

TN2242 digital trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 

TN2301 logic switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 

TN2302AP IP media processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

TN2305B ATM-CES trunk/port-network 

256 

interface for multimode fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 


257 

interface for single-mode fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 

TN2308 direct inward dialing trunk (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 

TN2312BP IP server interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 


Dedicated and nondedicated network for control messages . . . . . . . . 258 

IPSI capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 

IPSI support for system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 

Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 

Number of IPSI circuit packs per configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 

TN2313AP DS1 interface (24 channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 

TN2401 network control/packet interface for SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 

TN2401/TN2400 network packet interface 

263 

complex assembly for SI upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 

TN2402 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 


TN2404 processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 

TN2464CP DS1 interface with echo cancellation,T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 

TN2501AP voice announcements over LAN (VAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 

TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 


Load balancing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 

Bearer duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 

Virtual IP and MAC addresses to enable bearer duplication . . . . . . . . 269 

Requirements for bearer duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 

Combining duplication and load balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 

Hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 

TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 

TN8412AP S8400 server IP interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 


SIPI capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 

SIPI support for system maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 

Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 

I/O adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 

TNCCSC-1 PRI to DASS converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 

TNCCSC-2 PRI to DPNSS converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 

TNCCSC-3 PRI to DPNSS converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 

TN-C7 PRI to SS7 converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 

TN-CIN voice, fax, and data multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 

Media modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 

MM312 DCP Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 

MM314 LAN Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 

MM316 LAN Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 

MM710 T1/E1 Media Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 


Echo cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 

CSU function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 

Loopback and BERT functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 

E1 impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 

Bantam jacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 

DB 25 DCE connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 

Loopback jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 

Contents 


Contents 

MM711 Analog Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 


External interfaces on the CO trunk side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 

Caller ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 

Analog line interface requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 

Companding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 


Hardware interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 

MM714 Analog Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 


External interfaces on the CO trunk side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 

Caller ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 

Analog line interface requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 

Companding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 

MM716 Analog Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 


MM720 BRI Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 

MM722 BRI Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

MM340 E1/T1 data WAN Media Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 

MM342 USP data WAN Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

MM760 VoIP Media Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 


Ethernet interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 

Voice compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 

Telephony Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 

TIM514 analog media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 

TIM510 E1/T1 Telephony Interface Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

Juniper Physical Interface Modules for serial and WAN connectivity . . . 307 

Telephones and speakerphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 

Avaya IP Softphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 

Avaya IP Softphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 

Avaya IP Softphone for Pocket PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 

Avaya one-X Deskphone family of IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 

9610 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 

9620 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 

9630 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 


9640 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 

9650 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 

Avaya IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 

Avaya 4601 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 

Avaya 4602 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 

Avaya 4602SW IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 






Avaya 4630 IP Screenphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 

Avaya 4690 IP conference telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

Avaya digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

Avaya 2402 digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 



Avaya 6402 and 6402D digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 

Avaya 6408D+ digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 

Avaya 6416D+M digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 

Avaya 6424D+M digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 

Avaya Callmaster IV (603H) digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 

Avaya Callmaster V (607A) digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 

Avaya Callmaster VI (606A) digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 

Avaya attendant consoles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 

Avaya 302D attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 

Avaya Softconsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 

Avaya analog telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 

Avaya 2500 and 2554 analog telephones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 

Avaya 6211 analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 



AT&T TTY 8840 Analog Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

AT&T 958 Analog Telephone Caller ID and Speakerphone . . . . . . . . . 344 

Avaya EA401 and EA401A Explosive Atmosphere telephones. . . . . . . . . 345 

Avaya wireless telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 

Avaya TransTalk 9040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 

Avaya 3410 wireless telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 

Avaya 3606 wireless VoIP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 



Contents 


Contents 

Avaya 3701 IP DECT Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 

Avaya 3711 IP DECT Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 

Supported Avaya telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

Power for Avaya IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 

Power for Avaya 4601, 4602, 4602SW, 4610SW, and 4620 family IP telephones 356 

Power for Avaya 4630 IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 

Power for Avaya 4690 IP telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 

SoundPoint and SoundStation speakerphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 

Highlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 

3127 SoundStation speakerphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 

Highlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 

3127 SoundStation Premier audioconferencing speakerphone . . . . . . . . 359 

Highlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 

Avaya Video Telephony Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 

Avaya UPS Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 

AS1 1000 VA 120 V online uninterruptible power supply (UPS) . . . . . . . . . . 365 

AS1 1000VA 230V online UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 



UPS add-on modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 

Extended battery module-EBM24 1000 VA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 

Extended battery module-EBM48 1500 VA to 2000 VA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 

SNMP Module 1000 VA to 2000 VA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 

Bypass distribution module 120V 1000 VA to 1500 VA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 

PWR UPS bypass distribution module S1 1000 VA to 2000 VA . . . . . . . . 368 

Avaya Wireless Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 

W310 WLAN Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 

Voice-Enabled Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) Infrastructure . . . . . 370 

Superior infrastructure for Voice over IP (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 

Investment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 

Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 



W310 WLAN Gateway for Seamless Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Wireless Services Manager (for Seamless Communications) . . . . . . . . . 374 

W110 Light Access Point (for Seamless Communications) . . . . . . . . . . 375 

Additional documentation for Seamless Communications . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

Avaya Ethernet switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 

Avaya C360 Ethernet switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 


Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 

Layer 2 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 


Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 

Power over Ethernet (PoE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 


Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 

Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 

Safety and quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 

Avaya P133 and P134 Ethernet switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 


Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 

Standards supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 


Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 


Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 


Avaya P330 Ethernet switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 


Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 

Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 



Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 

Power over Ethernet (PoE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 


Physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 




Contents 


Contents 

Appendix A: Specifications for DEFINITY media gateways . . . . . . . 395 

Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 

Altitude and air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 

Air purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 

Cabinet dimensions and clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 

Floor load requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 

Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

Global AC MCC power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

AC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 

DC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 

MCC1 power system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

AC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

Power backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 

DC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 

AC and DC grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

SCC1 power systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

Cabinet cooling fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 

System protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

Appendix B: Optional components for media servers . . . . . . . . . . 421 

Media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 

Circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 

Power circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 

Line circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 

Trunk circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 

Control circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 

Service circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 

Application circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 

Wireless circuit packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 

Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 

Avaya telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 


Overview 

About Avaya Communication Manager 

This Hardware Description and Reference provides information on hardware that can be used 

with Avaya Communications Manager. Use this book to find information on Avaya media 

servers and gateways, as well as circuit packs, media modules, telephones and other hardware 

used with Communication Manager software. 

This books contains information on the following hardware: 

● Linux-based media servers 

● DEFINITY-based media servers 

● Other servers 

● Media gateways and integrated gateways 

● Circuit packs, channel service units, and power supplies 

● Media modules 

● Telephones and speakerphones 

● UPS units 

● Ehternet switches 

For each hardware component, an overview and description is provided. When appropriate, 

information is also provided on models, configurations, components, LEDs, specifications, 

supported and related hardware, reliability and survivability, and high-level capacities. 

About Avaya Communication Manager 

Avaya Communication Manager software provides call processing solutions for large and small 

customer environments. Communication Manager is an open, scalable, highly reliable and 

secure telephony application. Avaya Communication Manager provides user and 

system-management functionality, intelligent call routing, application integration and 

extensibility, and enterprise communications networking. The standards-based Communication 

Manager also uses H.248 for gateway control. Communication Manager offers over 500 

features, in the following categories: 

● Call center 

● Telephony 

● Localization 

● Collaboration 

● Mobility 


Overview 

● Messaging 

● Telecommuting 

● System management 

● Reliability 

● Security, privacy, and safety 

● Hospitality 

● Attendant features 

● Networking 

● Intelligent call routing 

● Application programming interfaces 

For more information about these solutions, see the Overview for Avaya Communication 

Manager, 03-300468. 

Avaya Communication Manager software runs on the following hardware platforms: 

● Linux-based servers 

- S8300 Media Server 



- S8700-series Media Servers 

● DEFINITY servers 

- DEFINITY CSI Server 

- DEFINITY SI Server 

About Avaya media servers and gateways 

Avaya’s media servers and media gateways provide smart ways to rethink networking. They 

add top-tier scalability and reliability, while supporting critical applications in a distributed, yet 

secure, multivendor environment. To provide businesses with maximum flexibility, the server 

and gateway components in Avaya’s family of Communication Manager applications follow a 

modular mix-and-match approach. A wide range of custom configurations can be deployed to 

meet a broad spectrum of business needs: 

● From a single location, upgrading to a converged IP network for 200 employees 

● To a complex multinational converged network that is capable of supporting 10,000-plus 

voice/data users 


Note: Some 

Media servers 


Note: 

of Avaya’s media servers and gateways were tested against extreme 

physical and environmental requirements such as shock, vibration, and EMI. 

These tests were performed by the United States Navy for media server and 

gateway use on their ships. The Navy uses specialized racks and reinforcements 

although no physical changes have been made to the servers and gateways 

themselves. Customers that are interested in obtaining information for the design 

and implementation of such a ruggedized solution can contact the Avaya Custom 

Engineering Group. 

Avaya’s line of media servers provides a robust application platform based on industry-standard 

operating systems. This platform supports distributed IP networking and centralized call 

processing across multiprotocol networks. These servers are available as an integrated solution 

with other servers or can operate independently. 

Avaya media servers have the following features and benefits: 

● Redundant, survivable call processing and media processing supports crucial business 

continuity. 

● Standards-based computing supports Linux, Microsoft Windows, and the Avaya 

DEFINITY ® operating system. 

● Distributed survivable IP networking supports campus, global-multisite, and branch 

environments. 

Media gateways 

Avaya media gateways connect to an Avaya media server, either directly or indirectly through 

other media gateways. Media Gateways are the stackable and modular hardware elements of 

your communication system, and they deliver connectivity to a variety of endpoint and trunk 

types – allowing data, voice, FAX, video, and messaging capabilities on your network. The 

connections between media gateways that allow the passage of these media types is called the 

"bearer network." The connections between the media server and the media gateways for call 

control signaling is called the "control network." 

Avaya media gateways support both bearer and signaling traffic that is routed between packet- 

and circuit-switched networks. Avaya media gateways provide a variety of flexible deployment 

options. These options include 100% Internet Protocol (IP) environments and blended 

environments such as IP and Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). 


Overview 

Avaya media gateways have the following benefits: 

● Interoperable with standards-based data networks 

● Stackable, modular, and configurable component solutions 

● Can provide redundant equipment and capabilities 

● Can provide distributed networking 

● Compatible with cabinets in traditional Avaya systems 

Categories of media gateways 

There are two primary categories of media gateways: 

● Those that use media modules to connect to endpoints and trunks. These media gateways 

are usually used at branch and smaller locations and include: 

- G700 Media Gateway 




● Those that use circuit packs to connect to endpoints and trunks. These media gateways 

are usually used at central and large locations, and include: 


- G600 Media Gateway (no longer sold, but still supported) 

- CMC1 Media Gateway 

- SCC1 Media Gateway (no longer sold, but still supported) 

- MCC1 Media Gateway (no longer sold, but still supported) 

Carrier types 

Most media gateways that use circuit packs may also be further classified by carrier type. A 

carrier holds a row of circuit packs and connects them to power, the TDM bus, and the packet 

bus. There are five types: 

● A control carrier that contains the processor circuit pack(s). The DEFINITY Server CSI 

uses one CMC1 Media Gateway of this carrier type, and the DEFINITY Server SI uses one 

SCC1 Media Gateway of this carrier type because control carriers are required to house 

the DEFINITY processor circuit packs. 



● A duplicated control carrier that also contains the processor circuit pack(s). This type of 

carrier is an option of the SCC1 Media Gateway and is used for the DEFINITY SI server 

only. 

● A port carrier that contains various port circuit packs and does not contain a processor. 

The G600 and G650 Media Gateways are exclusively of this carrier type. The CMC1 and 

SCC1 Media Gateways may also be of this type. The MCC1 Media Gateway can 

simultaneously house this type of carrier along with other carrier types. 

● An expansion control carrier that contains an IPSI or tone clock circuit pack and a 

maintenance circuit pack. This type of carrier is an option when using expansion port 

networks with a DEFINITY SI server. This carrier is also used in all SCC1 and MCC1 

Media Gateways for connections to the server or to other media gateways in an S8500 or 

S8700-series media server configuration. 

● A switch node carrier that holds switch node interface cards to allow an S8700-series 

media server to use the center stage switch configuration. Only an S8700-series media 

server can support a center stage switch configuration and switch node carriers are one 

type of carrier that can be simultaneously housed in an MCC1 media gateway. 

The following media gateways all contain only one carrier: 

● G600 media gateway 

● G650 media gateway 

● CMC1 media gateway 

● SCC1 media gateway 

The MCC1 media gateway contains multiple, up to five, carriers. 

Common architectural aspects of media gateways for central 

locations 

A media gateway consists of the following architectural components: 

● TDM bus. The TDM bus has 512 time slots. The TDM bus runs internally throughout each 

media gateway and terminates on each end. The TDM bus consists of two 8-bit parallel 

buses, bus A and bus B. Bus A and bus B carry circuit-switched digitized voice and data 

signals. Bus A and Bus B can also carry control signals to all port circuits and between port 

circuits and the SPE. The port circuits place digitized voice signals and data signals on a 

TDM bus. Bus A and bus B are usually active simultaneously. However, only one bus is 

active at any one time for control signaling. 

● Packet bus. The packet bus runs internally throughout each media gateway and 

terminates on each end. The packet bus carries logical links and control messages from 

the SPE. The links and messages are carried through port circuits, to endpoints such as 

terminals and adjuncts. The packet bus carries logical links for both on-switch and 

off-switch control between some specific port circuits in the system. These circuits include, 


Overview 

for example, IPSI, expansion interface, and IP Media Resource 320 circuit packs, control 

D-channels, and remote management terminals. 

● Port circuits. The port circuits form analog or digital interfaces between the media 

gateway and external trunks and linking devices. These linking devices provide links 

between the gateway and external trunk and the TDM bus and the packet bus. Incoming 

analog signals are converted to pulse-code modulated (PCM) digital signals and placed on 

the TDM bus by port circuits. Port circuits convert outgoing signals from PCM to analog for 

external analog devices. All port circuits connect to the TDM bus. Only specific ports 

connect to the packet bus. 

● Interface circuits. Interface circuits allow the media server to: 

- communicate with the media gateways 

- connect two or more media gateways together 

- connect port networks together via switch nodes 

Interface circuits with traditional server architectures use optical fiber for the connections. 

The S8500 Media Server and S8700-series Media Server architectures also use optical 

fiber for connecting media gateways together. But they also use Ethernet connections from 

the servers to the connected media gateways. The S8300 Media Server uses Ethernet 

connections exclusively to connect to the media gateways. 

● Service circuits. For traditional servers, S8500 Media Servers, and S8700-series Media 

Servers, service circuits provide tone production and detection, call classification, 

recorded announcements, and speech synthesis. The S8300 Media Server uses built-in 

service circuits in the G250, G350, and G700 Media Gateways. 

Port networks 

The architectures for DEFINITY servers, the S8500 Media Server, and the S8700-series Media 

Server use an entity called a port network (PN). A PN uses combinations of media gateways to 

provide physical ports and interfaces for handling calls. A port network can be one of the 

following: 

Note: The 

● One single-carrier media gateway: G600, G650, CMC1, or SCC1 

● A stack of single-carrier media gateways that are connected with a TDM bus cable and 

share connections to the media server or port circuit packs 

● An individual carrier or a set of TDM cable-connected carriers housed within the MCC1 

media gateway 

Note: 

G700, G350, and G250 Media Gateways are controlled by a Communication 

Manager Media Server via H.248 and are not considered port networks. 

However, they may reside within a configurations including port networks. 


A port network for a DEFINITY server is one of two types: 

Port networks 

● A processor port network (PPN) 

A PPN consists of at least one gateway, or carrier in the case of an MCC1 gateway. The 

PPN houses the carrier that contains the DEFINITY Server, which is the main call 

processor. The DEFINITY Server controls any other gateways or carriers in the PPN stack. 

The call processor is connected through the TDM cable connections. A communications 

system has only one PPN. 

● An expansion port network (EPN) 

An EPN is another gateway or gateway stack that is connected to the PPN using fiber links, 

DS1 links, ATM links, or IP links. An EPN has its own tone clock and power. It may also 

have its own maintenance circuit pack or can share a maintenance circuit pack with another 

PN in the same stack. But the DEFINITY Server in the PPN otherwise controls the EPN. 

EPNs are optional and usually expand the number of port connections, especially remote 

connections. 

A port network for an S8500 or S8700-series Media Server is always an EPN because the call 

processor resides in the media server, not in a gateway or port network. As a result, the term 

"port network" (PN) is sufficient to describe the gateway or gateway stack with an S8500 or 

S8700-series Media Server. 

For information on port network connectivity, see Administration for Network Connectivity for 

Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504. 

Center Stage Switch 

For the S8700-series, an MCC1 media gateway can also contain a center-stage switch (CSS), 

which allows fiber link connections to 44 PNs. In this case, the MCC1 is equipped with a Switch 

Node carrier. The Switch Node carrier contains one or more Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit 

packs that allow fiber links between the MCC1 Media Gateway and the PNs. The MCC1 Media 

Gateway that houses the CSS may also contain one or more PNs. 

An S8700-series Media Server can support from one to three CSSs simultaneously. Each CSS 

contains a single switch node carrier for a system with a single fiber port network connectivity 

(fiber-PNC) bearer network. Each CSS contains two switch node carriers for a system with a 

duplicated fiber-PNC bearer network. 

Note: The 

Note: 

MCC1 and Center Stage Switch are no longer sold, but are still supported. 


Overview 

System Management 

Avaya Integrated Management 

Avaya Integrated Management offers a comprehensive set of Web-based network management 

solutions and system management solutions that support the Avaya converged voice solutions. 

Integrated Management combines individual applications into five offers: 

● Standard Management 

● Standard Management Solutions Plus 

● MultiService Network Management 

● Enhanced Converged Management 

● Advanced Converged Management 

For more detailed information on the Avaya Integrated Management suite see 

http://www.avaya.com. Click Products and Services>Products A-Z. 

Media Server Web-browser-based interface 

The Web-browser-based interface on the Avaya media servers allows you to perform server 

administration tasks, such as: 

● Backing up and restoring customer data 

● Viewing current alarms 

● Maintaining the media server including: 

- Checking the media server’s status 

- Busying out and releasing busy out the media server 

- Shutting down the media server 

● Executing security commands to: 

- enable and disable the modem, 

- start and stop the FTP server, and 

- view the license 

● Accessing SNMP to configure trap destinations and to stop and start the master agent 

● Accessing the media server to acquire configuration information and upgrade access 


Avaya communications devices 

The media server’s Web-browser-based interface contains an extensive Help system that 

describes each Web screen and the procedures associated with the screen. 

Avaya communications devices 

Avaya provides new mobility opportunities and devices that are innovative and 

standards-based. Avaya offers a wide selection of flexible, intelligent, mobile, and easy-to-use 

communication devices to meet your company’s unique needs. With analog, digital, and IP 

telephones, the spectrum is covered. Highlights of the portfolio include: 

● Avaya Softconsole – A software attendant console that brings features and functionality of 

a high-end attendant console to your converged network. 

● Avaya IP Softphone – A collection of computer telephony integration (CTI) applications 

that allows you to control telephone calls, both incoming and outgoing, directly from your 

personal computer (PC). 

● Avaya IP Softphone for Pocket PC – Brings the full functionality of an Avaya office phone 

to your hand-held pocket PC. 

● Avaya IP Agent – An advanced PC-based application. IP agent allows access to the 

contact center agent functionality of Communication Manager over the private network or 

public network. Use IP Agent to handle calls associated with an IP telephone or Callmaster 

VI telephone. 

● Avaya 4630 Screenphone – A full-color touch-screen phone with Web access. 

Avaya IP communication devices are supported without special power requirements. 

Adjuncts 

The following list contains some of the adjuncts from Avaya that the Avaya Media Servers and 

DEFINITY Servers support: 

● Call Detail Recording (CDR), when a terminal server is used 

● INTUITY AUDIX R5.1 Messaging Solutions 

● INTUITY AUDIX LX Messaging system 

● Modular Messaging system 

● Avaya Basic Call Management System (BCMS) 


Overview 

● Avaya Call Management System, which is available in three packages: 

- Avaya Call Center Basic 

- Avaya Call Center Deluxe 

- Avaya Call Center Elite 

● Avaya Interactive Response system 

● Call Accounting Systems supported with the use of a terminal server. 

● DEFINITY Translator ATM Manager (DTA). (DTA is not supported by the S8300 Media 

Server) 


Linux-based media servers 

Avaya S8300 Media Server 


An S8300 Media Server is an Intel Celeron-based processor that runs the Linux operating 

system. It resides in one of three media gateways: G700, G350, or G250. 

Detailed description 

S8300 version B 

An S8300 Media Server (version B) is an Intel Celeron-based processor that runs the Linux 

operating system. The S8300 Media Server resides in Slot V1 of a G700 Media Gateway and 

includes: 

● A 30-GB hard disk 

● 512 MB RAM 

● Two USB ports and a 10/100 Base-T port 

One USB port supports a readable CD-ROM, which is used for system upgrades. 

● One services port. 

S8300 version C 

An S8300 Media Server (version C) is an Intel Celeron-based processor that runs the Linux 

operating system. The S8300 Media Server resides in Slot V1 of a G700 Media Gateway and 

includes: 

● A 60-GB hard disk 

● 1 GB RAM (with one 1 GB DIMM) 

● Three USB ports and a 10/100 Base-T port 

- One USB port supports a readable DVD/CD-ROM drive, which is used for system 

installations and upgrades. 

- One USB port can be used for a USB modem. 

- Another USB port can be used for a Compact Flash drive. 

● One services port. 

● One internal Compact Flash drive, which is used as the primary reboot device and 

provides additional reliability with the RAMdisk and hard drive 



Software 

In addition to Avaya Communication Manager software for applications, the S8300 Media 

Server runs the following software: 

● A Web server that is used for: 

- Backing up and restoring customer data 

- Viewing current alarms 

- Server maintenance, including busy out and release busyout, shutdown, and status of 

an S8300 Media Server. 

- Security commands to enable and disable the modem 

- Security commands to start and stop the FTP server 

- Security commands to view the software license 

- SNMP access to configure trap destinations and to stop and start the master agent 

- Configuration information about the S8300 Media Server 

- Upgrade access to the S8300 Media Server 

● Maintenance software 

● Linux Red Hat operating system 

● Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server 

● Secure HTTP server for IP phone file downloads 

● H.248 Media Gateway Signaling Protocol 

● Control messages tunneled over H.323 Signaling Protocol 

Configurations 

The Avaya S8300 Media Server has three basic hardware configurations: 

● S8300 Media Server/G700 Media Gateway configuration on page 31 



An Avaya S8300 Media Server with a G700, G350, or G250 Media Gateway and the gateway’s 

media modules converge voice and data into one infrastructure. The S8300 Media Server is an 

Intel Celeron-based processor that resides in one of these media gateways. The server has the 

same dimensions and shape as a media module. 

In addition, an S8300 Media Server can serve as a local survivable processor (LSP). See 

S8300 Media Server in an LSP configuration on page 37. 


Note: The 


Note: 

S8300 Media Server must be version B or C to operate Communication 

Manager R4.0 software. Versions earlier than R2.1 of the S8300 Media Server 

must be replaced with the S8300B or S8300C in order to upgrade to 

Communication Manager R4.0. 

S8300 Media Server/G700 Media Gateway configuration 

The S8300 Media Server resides in Slot V1 of a G700 Media Gateway. 

A G700 Media Gateway, which is architecturally-based on the Avaya P330 and C360 switches, 

contains VoIP resources and modular interface connectivity. The media modules provide 

analog, digital, T1/E1, BRI, and additional VoIP capabilities. 

Figure 1: S8300 Media Server in a G700 Media Gateway (S8300C shown) 

Figure notes: 

Number Description 

1. S8300 Media Server in Slot V1 (S8300C shown) 

2. Services port 

3. USB ports 

1 

V1 

ALM 

APP 

ACT 

OK TO 

REMOVE 

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 

ALM PWR CPU MSTR LNK COL Tx Rx FDX FC Hspd LAG EXT 1 

SHUT DOWN 

msdcs83c LAO 092906 

4. Slot for a P330 expansion module 

5. Dual 10/100 Base-T Ethernet switch ports 

6. Media module, Slot V2 



2 

4 

9. Console connection for on-site administration 

3 

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 

EXT 2 

S8300C 

C_V1 

SERVICES USB 1 USB 2 USB 3 

V2 

V3 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

SIG 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

SO EI SM EM SI EO 

E1/T1 EIA 530A DCE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

V4 

ALM 

TST 

EXT 1 EXT 2 

ACT 

CONSOLE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 



An S8300 Media Server with a G700 Media Gateway (Figure 1) has the following components: 

● Survivability on page 37 

● Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 156, which can include: 

- Media modules on page 283: 

- Avaya P330 LAN expansion modules on page 166 

- X330 WAN Access routing module on page 166 

● S8300 Media Server in an LSP configuration on page 37 

● System Management on page 26 

For more detail on the G700 Media Gateway, see Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 156. 

For more detail on the S8300 Media Server, see Survivability on page 37. 


The G350 Media Gateway features a VoIP engine and WAN router and provides full support for 

legacy digital and analog telephones. Like the G700 Media Gateway, the media modules in a 

G350 Media Gateway provide analog, digital, T1/E1, BRI, and additional VoIP capabilities. The 

following figure shows an S8300 Media Server and media modules in a G350 Media Gateway. 


Figure 2: S8300 Media Server in a G350 Media Gateway (S8300B shown) 

Figure notes: 

Port Description 

TRK An analog trunk port. Part of an integrated analog media module. 

LINE 1, 

LINE 2 

Analog telephone ports of the integrated analog media module. 

An analog relay between TRK and LINE 1 provides Emergency 

Transfer Relay (ETR) feature. 

CCA RJ-45 port for ACS (308) contact closure adjunct box. 

WAN 1 RJ-45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet port. 

LAN 1 RJ-45 Ethernet LAN switch port. 

CON Console port for direct connection of CLI console. RJ-45s 

connector. 

USB USB port for remote access modem. 

RST Reset button. Resets chassis configuration. 

ASB Alternate Software Bank button. Reboots the G350 with the 

software image in the alternate bank. 




An S8300 Media Server and a G350 Media Gateway configuration has the following 

components: 


● Avaya G350 Media Gateway on page 126, which includes Related hardware on page 131 

● Avaya Communication Manager (see About Avaya Communication Manager on page 19) 





The G250 Media Gateway features a VoIP engine, WAN router, and Power over Ethernet 

switch. The G250 Media Gateway is available in four models — analog, BRI, DCP, and DS-1. 

The G250 Media Gateway supports analog and IP telephones. The G250 Media Gateway has 

built-in media modules. The G250 Media Gateway has two slots available for optional modules 

— slot V1 houses an optional S8300 Media Server and slot V2 houses one of two optional WAN 

media modules. 

The following figure shows an S8300 Media Server in a G250 Media Gateway (analog version). 

Figure 3: S8300 Media Server in a G250 Media Gateway (analog version) (S8300B shown) 

3 

1 

Figure notes: 

1. V1 — S8300/LSP Slot 

2. V2 — WAN Media Module Slot 

3. Analog port LEDs 

4. Analog trunks 

5. Analog line ports 

6. System LEDs 

7. Console port 

4 

8. USB port 

9. Contact Closure (CCA) port 

10. Ethernet WAN (ETH WAN) port 

11. PoE LAN (ETH LAN PoE) ports 

12. Reset (RST) button 

13. Alternate Software Bank (ASB) 

button 

34 Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager 

5 

6 7 

8 

9 

10 

2 

11 

12 

13


An S8300 Media Server and a G250 Media Gateway configuration has the following 

components: 


● Avaya G250 Media Gateway on page 115 

● Avaya Communication Manager (see About Avaya Communication Manager on page 19) 




Components 

For a list of S8300 components used in each S8300 configuration, see Configurations on 

page 30. 

UPS or power backup 

For the S8300 Media Server, any of the available UPS units can instantly supply power during a 

power outage. See Avaya UPS Units on page 365. 

RAM disk 

RAM disk is a portion of memory used as a disk partition. In the event of a hard disk failure, the 

S8300 Media Server uses only RAM disk to provide call processing for up to 72 hours. 

Administration and backups are prohibited. Also, IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging is 

unavailable during a hard disk failure, so secondary call coverage points for users should be 

administered, even with RAM disk enabled. 

Related hardware and adjuncts 

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX Messaging 

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging is an optional voice mail system used with an S8300 Media 

Server. IA770 INTUITY AUDIX messaging is a software-only version of INTUITY AUDIX 

messaging that uses a QSIG-MWI H.323 virtual trunk for communication between the 

Communication Manager and IA770 software. This version is available on the G700, G350, and 

G250 Media Gateway configurations. Without the need for additional hardware, IA770 INTUITY 

AUDIX software processes touchtones, converts messages to the G.711 format, and converts 

text to speech. 



Note: The 

Note: 

IA770 INTUITY AUDIX application is included with Avaya Communication 

Manager R4.0 on either the S8300B or S8300C Media Server. 

Note: 

Note: For upgrades only, a G700 or G350 Media Gateway that previously used a 

CWY1 board may no longer use the CWY1 board. Instead, the integration of 

Communication Manager with IA770 INTUITY AUDIX software must use the 

QSIG-MWI H.323 virtual trunk. As a result, the integration with IA770 must be 

readministered. The CWY1 board, while no longer available for use, does not 

need to be removed from the S8300. 

The IA770 INTUITY AUDIX system can be a solution for one location in a stand-alone S8300 

configuration. The system can also be networked with other voice mail systems using TCP/IP 

and Avaya Message Networking. 

An IA770 uses many resources of the S8300 Media Server and the media gateway where it 

resides. The following list outlines the S8300’s shared resources used by the IA770 INTUITY 

AUDIX system: 

● Hardware for data storage and retrieval 

● TFTP server for: 

- Downloading and updating the license file for feature activation 

- Backing up and restoring data over a LAN or a WAN, including translations and 

messages 

- Updating and upgrading software 

● IP address for administration access 

● General Alarm Manager for alarm display 

● Web interface to start and stop the system 

The IA770 system also shares the same switch-tone parameters established for the S8300 

Media Server. The S8300 Media Server handles switch tones on behalf of the IA770 system 

and passes on the control information to the IA770 system using QSIG signaling. 

Note: Neither 

Call center 

Note: 

Communication Manager R4.0 nor the S8300C supports the CWY1 card. 

An S8300 Media Server provides an excellent solution for a small call center. An S8300 Media 

Server supports up to 250 call center agents with a G700 Media Gateway and up to 10 call 

center agents with a G350 Media Gateway. The S8300 also offers the following call-center 

capabilities: 

● A maximum of 16 ASAI links 

● Announcement software 


Printers 


The S8300 Media Server is connected to the customer's LAN. Therefore, you can send print 

requests to any printer within the LAN and IP region of the S8300 Media Server. 

A system printer is supported when a terminal server is used. In this case, the printer is 

connected to an adjunct PC such as a CDR system, CMS, or Call Accounting System. 

A journal printer is supported when a terminal server is used. 

Survivability 

S8300 Media Server in an LSP configuration 

An S8300 Media Server in a Local Survivable Processor (LSP) configuration uses the S8300 

hardware component and a software license to activate a standby feature. This software allows 

the LSP with a G700/G350/G250 Media Gateway to be a survivable call-processing server for 

remote locations and branch locations. 

The branch locations can have the following Media Servers as their primary controller: 

● S8300 

● S8500 

● S8710 

● S8720 

An S8300 Media Server and the LSP cannot reside in the same G700/G350/G250 Media 

Gateway. 

If for any reason communication between a G700/G350/G250 Media Gateway and its primary 

controller stops, an LSP activates. This "fail-over" from the primary controller to the LSP is an 

automatic process without human intervention. The LSP assumes control of any IP telephone 

provided that telephone has the LSP in its list of controllers. 

The LSP can continue to support calls as the primary controller for 30 days. The LSP is in 

"license-error" mode when it is supporting calls. After 30 days in license-error mode, the LSP 

administration is blocked and display telephones show License Error in their display windows. 

However, even after 30 days, telephone operations can continue. 

Automatic fallback to primary controller 

Based on administration of Communication Manager, the G700/G350/G250 LSP can return 

control of the G700/G350/G250 Media Gateway to the primary controller (server) automatically 

when the connection is restored between the media gateway and the primary controller. By 

returning control of the media gateways to the primary controller automatically, Communication 



Manager software easily and quickly eliminates the fragmentation between remote gateways in 

the network created by LAN/WAN communication failures with the primary controller. 

The G700/G350/G250 Media Gateway preserves stable calls when control changes from the 

LSP to the primary controller. Stable calls are calls that are carrying active two-way or 

multi-party conversations. Other calls such as those that are on hold are not preserved. 

Note: The 

Note: 

fall-back from the LSP to the primary controller may also be manual using a 

reset on the LSP. This reset breaks the communication between the LSP and 

each registered endpoint. This break causes the endpoints to register with the 

primary controller. However, most active calls are preserved. 

Number of LSPs supported 

The number of LSPs that a configuration can support depends on the controlling media server. 

An S8500 Media Server, S8710 Media Server, or S8720 Media Server can support up to 250 

LSPs. An S8300 Media Server can support up to 50 LSPs. 

Translations 

An automatic process copies translation changes when customers make changes on the 

primary controller to each LSP. 

LSP installation 

The hardware for the S8300 Media Server as primary controller is identical to the hardware for 

the S8300 Media Server as LSP. The difference between the two configurations is entirely in 

software. 

Note: An 

Note: 

S8300 Media Server and the LSP cannot reside in the same G700 Media 

Gateway. 

IP addressing of the primary controller, the LSP, and IP telephones 

An LSP is administered with a different IP address than the IP address of the primary controller. 

In addition, IP telephones obtain their own IP address from a DHCP server. The DHCP server 

also sends a list of controllers, LSPs, and their associated IP addresses. The IP telephone then 

registers with the controller corresponding to the first IP address in this list. When connectivity is 

lost between the controller and the endpoint, the endpoint registers with the second IP address 

in the list, and so on. This list can be administered for telephones on the DHCP server. 


High-level capacities 

The S8300 Media Server supports: 


● 900 ports by a combination of trunks and stations 

- 450 IP stations, 450 non-IP stations, or a combination of 450 IP and non-IP stations 

- 450 trunks 

● 50 G700/G350/G250 Media Gateways 

Table 1: High-level capabilities 

Capability S8300 Media Server 

Call processing feature set Avaya Communication Manager 3.0 

Maximum number of stations 450 (IP or TDM) 

Maximum number of trunks 450 

Reliability options Simplex 

Port-network connectivity Not applicable 

Supported media gateways G700, G350, G250 

Maximum number of 

supported gateways 

50 (supported by one S8300 Media Server) 

Survivability options G350 and G700 with S8300 LSP 

Number of LSPs in one 

configuration 

Port networks Not applicable 

Maximum of 50 when supported by an S8300. 

Maximum of 250 when supported by an S8500 or 

S8700-series Media Server 

For more detailed system capacity information, see the Avaya Communication Manager System 

Capacities Table (03-300511) 



The S8400 Media Server is a Linux-based server that provides Communication Manager 

processing functionality in stand alone, single port network (PN), telephony systems requiring 

up to 900 stations. The S8400 Media Server is composed of the: 

● TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack 

● TN8412AP S8400 IP Interface (SIPI) circuit pack 


For new installations, the PN uses the G650 Media Gateway. In current installations, the S8400 

Media Server is used as an upgrade path for a current PN based on G650 and G600 Media 

Gateways and CMC carriers. A G650 Media Gateway cannot be added to an S8400 system 

that carries forward a CMC1 or G600 Media Gateway as a result of a migration. 

The S8400 Media Server provides a Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) based integrated 

messaging capability for up to 450 light duty users. This option requires 8 ports of VoIP 

resources be provisioned with the S8400 Media Server. The hard disk drive (HDD) stores the 

messages and a TN2302BP IP Media Processor circuit pack usually provides the VoIP 

resources. 

An external messaging system is required when an S8400 Media Server based system is 

configured for more than 450 light duty users that require messaging. 

The S8400 Media Server supports a single PN composed of G650, G600, or CMC carriers and 

all the functions provided by those carriers or PNs. The system also supports up to five media 

gateways including but not limited to: 

● G700 

● G350 

● G250 

● Multi-Tech 

The system supports up to 80 G150 media gateways. 

Figure 4: S8400 Media Server on page 41 shows the S8400 Media Server circuit pack. 


Figure 4: S8400 Media Server 

Figure notes: 

3 

1. Compact flash 

2. Hard disk drive 

2 

SILICON 

SYSTEMS 

SSD-C04G-3012 

ILICON RIVE 

CF 

4GB 

S D 

3. Ribbon cable to hard disk drive 

4. Solid state drive 


Figure 5: TN8400AP Media Server faceplate layout on page 42 shows the faceplate layout of 

the TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack. 

4 

OK TO REMOVE 

CARD IN USE 

ALARM 

SERVICE 

SILICONDRIVE CF 

2GB 

SSD-C02G-3012 

SILICON 

SYSTEMS 

h2dp8400 LAO 062405 

Issue 6 February 2007 41 

1

Figure 5: TN8400AP Media Server faceplate layout 

Figure notes: 

1. TN8400 Circuit Pack Failure LED 

2. Shutdown button 

3. OK to Remove LED 

4. Major Alarm Status LED 

5. Not used 

6. Services Ethernet Link Status LED 

7. Removal latch 

8. RJ45 connection to the Services laptop 

9. Compact Flash in Use LED 

10. Compact Flash slot 

11. USB port for the USB CD-ROM drive 

12. Server Active LED 

13. Application Up/Test LED 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ckdf8400 LAO 120605 

700327604 

TN8400AP Media Server 

AVAYA 

04J247701575 HV0 

13 

12 

11 

10 

9 

8 

7

Components 

S8400 IP Interface (SIPI) 


The S8400 Media Server uses the TN8412AP S8400 IP Interface (SIPI) circuit pack to provide: 

● Circuit pack control within its port network 

● Cabinet maintenance 

● Tone-clocks 

● Emergency transfer switch functionality 

● Customer/external alarms. 

Communication between the S8400 Media Server and the TN8412AP is by IP link. You can 

connect this link by an external switch or point-to-point by a single Ethernet crossover cable. 

The TN8412AP has a single Ethernet interface for control. 

Note: An 

Circuit packs 

Note: 

S8400 system is shipped with a TN8412AP SIPI circuit pack. However, the 

TN2312BP IPSI circuit pack is also compatible with S8400 systems. 

The S8400 Media Server can include three separate TN circuit packs: 

● TN8400AP Media Server that provides: 

- Avaya Communication Manager call processing 

- Coresident voicemail 

- On board diagnostics 

- Autonomous alarming 

● TN8412AP S8400 server IP interface (SIPI) that provides: 

- Low-level control functions and services for a TN port network 

- Tone detection and generation 

- Carrier maintenance and diagnostics 

- Input/output of alarm leads 

- Emergency transfer 

● An optional TN2302BP IP Media Processor if you run the optional embedded messaging 

(IA770) or run IP telephones. When running IP telephones, the TN2302BP interfaces 

between the Time Division Multiplex (TDM) bus and the IP network. 


In addition, the TN799DP Control-LAN (C-LAN) circuit pack provides firmware download 

functionality and the TN2501 Voice Announcement over LAN (VAL) circuit pack provides 

announcement functionality. 

Solid state drive and hard disk drive 

The S8400 Media Server uses a solid state drive (SSD) and a hard disk drive (HDD) to: 

● Run Avaya Communication Manager 

● Hold translations (The SSD does not save translations; the Compact Flash performs that 

task.) 

● Function as the primary storage device 

The SSD and CD/DVD-ROM drive each can be configured as a bootable device. 

Critical Communication Manager application files and translations are loaded onto the SSD. 

This means that in the event of a hard disk drive failure, many critical functions are still 

available, and the S8400 Media Server will come back into service if the server is rebooted. 

Faceplate USB connector 

The TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack supports a USB connector on the faceplate. This 

interface supports a CD/DVD-ROM drive for software upgrades and connects to the 

microprocessor. 

Compact flash 

Note: 

Note: Use only the prescribed compact flash. Using a nonapproved compact flash can 

cause your system to malfunction. 

The TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack supports a Compact Flash on the faceplate. This 

interface supports removable media for applications such as: 

● Backing up software and translations 

● Storing software and translations 

The Compact Flash connects to the Communication Manager processor complex. For 

translations, the primary method of backup is through the LAN. You can remove or insert the 

Compact Flash only when the In Use LED is not lit or flashing. The Compact Flash is not 

bootable. 

A warning is raised when any of the following conditions occur during a scheduled backup 

involving the CompactFlash: 

● Anytime that a backup or restore operation to the CompactFlash is attempted without the 

installed CompactFlash. 



● Anytime a backup or restore operation to the CompactFlash is attempted and fails for any 

reason. 

● Anytime the partition table associated with the CompactFlash is determined to be 

corrupted. 

● Anytime a mount or unmount operation associated with the CompactFlash is 

unsuccessful. 

Ethernet ports 

All backplane Ethernet ports on the backplane I/O adapter can connect to the customer LAN. 

Figure 6: Media server cable adapter on page 47 shows the media server cable adapter. These 

ports are labeled ETH-A through ETH-D. Table 3: Media server cable adapter port labeling on 

page 47 describes each port and its function. For control and adjunct connectivity, the S8400 

Media Server supports the internal processor ethernet, PCLAN, or separate CLAN. Messaging 

and administration use the customer link. If LAN connectivity is required only for administration, 

PCLAN or processor ethernet are not required. 

USB modem port 

The TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack supports a USB modem available from the media 

server cable adapter. Connect the USB modem to the port labeled USB. The adapter is 

mounted on the rear of the TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack. The modem provides 

Services with remote alarming and dial-in and dial-out access. The modem communicates 

directly to the maintenance processor or tunnels through to the Communication Manager 

processor application. 

For more information, see Figure 6: Media server cable adapter on page 47. 


Specifications 

Table 2: Avaya S8400 Media Server specifications on page 46 outlines the features and 

specifications of the Avaya S8400 Media Server. 

Note: Some 

Note: 

values are shown at maximum configuration. 

Related hardware 

Table 2: Avaya S8400 Media Server specifications 

Feature Specifications 

Microprocessor One Intel Celeron M (600 MHz) 

Memory 512 MB RAM 

Storage Single 2-Gbyte IDE SSD 

Single 30-Gbyte IDE hard disk. 

Environment: Air 

Temperature 

Media server cable adapter 

The media server cable adapter is mounted on the rear of the TN8400AP Media Server circuit 

pack. The media server cable adapter provides the connection between the backplane pins and 

RJ-45 connectors for: 

● four backplane Ethernet ports 

Media server on: 

Environment: Humidity ● 10% to 90% 

Voltage and Current 

Requirements 

+5 VAC, 10 A 

● 41.0° to 104.0° F (5° to 40° C) 

● altitude: -1,257 to 10,617 feet (-383 below sea level 

to 3,286 meters above sea level) 

● one backplane USB port 

Figure 6: Media server cable adapter on page 47 shows the media server cable adapter. 


Figure 6: Media server cable adapter 

Figure notes: 

1. USB modem connector 

2. Ethernet connector ETH-A 

3. Ethernet connector ETH-B 


Table 3: Media server cable adapter port labeling on page 47 describes the connections for the 

media server cable adapter. 

Table 3: Media server cable adapter port labeling 

Location (counting from 

the top of the adapter) 

USB 

Port Name Adapter 

Label 

USB Backplane USB 

modem port 

Top Ethernet Ethernet 

connectivity with 

the TN8412AP 

circuit pack 

Second Ethernet Ethernet 

connectivity with 

the TN2302BP 

circuit pack 

1 

ETH-A 

2 

ETH-B 

3 

ETH-C 

addp84bk LAO 112905 

4. Ethernet connector ETH-C 

5. Ethernet connector ETH-D 

4 

ETH-D 

5 

Function 

USB Provides power to the USB 

modem, can hard reset the USB 

modem, provides a USB modem 

interface to support Services 

remote alarming and access. 

ETH-A 10/100Base T Ethernet Interface 

for the control links - uses 

crossover cable to connect 

directly to the SIPI. 

ETH-B 10/100Base T Ethernet Interface 

for Messaging over IP - connects 

to the customer LAN. 

1 of 2 


Table 3: Media server cable adapter port labeling (continued) 

Location (counting from 

the top of the adapter) 

Third Ethernet Future ETH-C Not used 

Bottom Ethernet Future ETH-D Not used 

Figure 7: TN8412AP and TN8400AP backplane connectors on a CMC1 on page 48 shows the 

locations of the two backplane adapters. 

Figure 7: TN8412AP and TN8400AP backplane connectors on a CMC1 

Figure notes: 

1. Media server cable adapter on the 

TN8400AP Media Server circuit 

pack 

Port Name Adapter 

Label 

8400mg5c LAO 112905 

Function 

2. IPSI-2 cable adapter on the TN8412AP SIPI 

circuit pack 


RS232 DEBUG 

RS232 DEBUG 

RS232 DEBUG 

USB 

ETH-A 

ETH-B 

1 

10/100bT ETHERNET 



2 

ETH-C 

ETH-D 

2 of 2


Figure 8: TN8412AP and TN8400AP backplane connectors on a G600 Media Gateway on 

page 49 shows the locations of the two backplane adapters. 

Figure 8: TN8412AP and TN8400AP backplane connectors on a G600 Media Gateway 

Figure notes: 

1. Media server cable adapter on the 

TN8400AP Media Server circuit 

pack 

Survivability 

The S8400 Media Server does not support Enterprise Survivable Server (ESS) or local 

survivable processor (LSP) functions. However, a G700, G350, or G250 Media Gateway or a 

Multitech system that is connected to an S8400 Media Server can have an LSP installed. This 

LSP can support telephony operations in the event of: 

● An S8400 failure 

8400mg5d LAO 112905 

RS232 DEBUG 

2. IPSI-2 cable adapter on the TN8412AP SIPI 

circuit pack 

● The failure of the connection path between the S8400 and the G700, G350, or G250 

Media Gateways 

RS232 DEBUG 

2 

RS232 DEBUG 

1 

10/100bT ETHERNET 10/100bT ETHERNET 


USB 

ETH-A 

ETH-B 

ETH-C 

ETH-D 


In the event that the G700, G350, or G250 Media Gateway can no longer communicate with the 

S8400 Media Server, the LSP takes over all call processing functions for that gateway or 

Multitech. However, the LSP does not take on any of the call processing functions for those 

trunks and endpoints that are directly connected to the S8400 Media Server. 

Connectivity 

Ethernet connectivity with the TN8412AP/TN2312BP circuit pack 

The S8400 Media Server supports connectivity with the TN8412AP (SIPI) /TN2312BP (IPSI-2) 

circuit pack through a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet twisted pair on the IPSI-2 cable adapter. 

Note: 

Note: An S8400 system is shipped with a TN8412AP SIPI circuit pack. However, the 


This interface is for control only - no bearer traffic is carried over this connection. This Ethernet 

is connected to the Communication Manager Processor complex. The IPSI-2 cable adapter is 

mounted on the rear of the TN8412AP SIPI circuit pack. 

The physical connection between the TN8412AP/TN2312BP and the S8400 circuit packs is 

made by either: 

1. Using an external crossover cable that directly interconnects the appropriate backplane 

pins of the two circuit packs. The interface between the TN8400AP and the TN8412AP is by 

a 10/100 Base T Ethernet crossover cable on the backplane connector. An RJ45 cable, that 

plugs into the TN8400AP media server cable adapter ETH-A port and the TN8412APIPSI-2 

adapter control port, provides the direction connection between the TN8400AP and the 

TN8412AP. 

2. Through the customer LAN connection. 

Figure 9: IPSI-2 cable adapter on page 51 shows the IPSI-2 cable adapter for the TN8412AP 

SIPI circuit pack. 


Figure 9: IPSI-2 cable adapter 

Figure notes: 

1. D9 connector 

2. RJ45 

Ethernet connectivity with the TN2302BP circuit pack 


The S8400 Media Server supports connectivity with the TN2302BP IP Media Processor circuit 

pack through a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet twisted pair interface on the backplane connector when 

the optional Messaging functionality is used. This interface transports both messaging signaling 

and bearer traffic between the S8400 Media Server and the TN2302BP IP Media Processor 

circuit packs. This Ethernet is connected to the Communication Manager Processor complex. 

This port is used as the PC LAN port. 

You can have more than one TN2302BP circuit pack, up to the maximum allowed by the G650 

Media Gateway. 

The physical connection between the TN2302BP and the S8400 circuit packs is made through 

the customer LAN connection. 


The S8400 Media Server supports a maximum of a single PN. 

1 

addpipsi LAO 112905 



● A single PN (or a cabinet) can be composed of 1 to 5 G650 Media Gateways or 1 to 3 

G600 Media Gateways or 1 to 3 CMC1 carriers 

● Trunks and line card capacities remain the same as the CSI capacities that are 400 trunks 

and 900 stations 

2 


Any mix of up to 5 H.248 Gateways such as G700/G350/G250 can be connected by a 

TN799DP Control-LAN (C-LAN) circuit pack or processor ethernet. The S8400 Media Server 

supports up to 80 G150 Media Gateways (in addition to the 5 H.248 Gateways). 

The optional IA770 integrated messaging supports the equivalent of 8 ports of voice messaging 

simultaneously, and up to 450 light duty users. If more than 450 users are required or where the 

450 users are "exceptionally heavy users," you need an external messaging system. The 

exceptionally heavy users are defined as users who require more than 4.5 disk minutes/user/ 

day or 10 port minutes/user/day. 


Capacities Table (03-300511). 




The Avaya S8500 Media Server is a rack mounted telephony server. The S8500 runs the Linux 

operating System, and features Avaya Communication Manager. The S8500 can support 

Internet Protocol (IP), Session Initiation Protocol (SIP), and traditional endpoints. This tri-level 

support enables new technology and eases migration from legacy Avaya systems. The S8500 

Media Server is a perfect solution for mid-sized customers, with growth of up to 3200 ports. 


An S8500 Media Server configuration includes the following: 

Note: If 

Note: Media 

● S8500C Media Server on page 54 

● Media gateways for main locations, which individually or as stacks connect to port 

networks through one or more of the following gateways: 

- Avaya G650 Media Gateway on page 174, which is always sold with new systems 

- G600 Media Gateway on page 169, with a migration system only 

- CMC1 Media Gateway on page 183, with a migration system only 

- SCC1 Media Gateway on page 188, with a migration system only 

- MCC1 Media Gateway on page 198, with a migration system only 

Note: 

used as an LSP, the Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 156, the Avaya 

G350 Media Gateway on page 126, the Avaya G250 Media Gateway on 

page 115, and the G150 Media Gateway on page 103 are supported through the 

processor ethernet interface. 

Note: 

Gateway types cannot be mixed within the same port network (PN). 

● TN2312BP IP server interface on page 258, which provides control signaling between the 

media server and the port networks (PNs). At least one PN in a fiber-connected 

configuration must contain a TN2312BP circuit pack. In an IP-connect configuration, each 

PN must contain one TN2312BP circuit pack. 

● TN2302AP IP media processor on page 256 or TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 on 

page 267, which provides TDM-to-IP conversions of audio signals. At least one of these 

circuit packs is required in each IP-connected PN. 

● One Ethernet switch for single control reliability. The switch is one of the following types: 

- Avaya C360 Ethernet switches on page 379 (for new installations and migrations) 

- Avaya P133 and P134 Ethernet switches on page 385 


Models 

- Avaya P330 Ethernet switches on page 387 

- Customer Ethernet switch 

● About Avaya Communication Manager on page 19 


● Server Availability Management Processor (SAMP) on page 57 

● Modem on page 57 

The S8500 Media Server supports secure HTTP server for IP phone file downloads. 

The S8500 Media Server supports the following methods of port network connections: 

● IP-PNC (single control network) 

● Direct-connect (single control network) 

In addition, a single MCC1 cabinet can be configured to house multiple PNs that use the 

IP-connect configuration. 

An S8500 Media Server’s IP-connect configuration can be combined with the direct-connect 

configuration. 

There are three S8500 models, the S8500, S8500B, and S8500C. While their functionality is 

similar, the three models have slightly different hardware components. 

Note: The 

Note: 

S8500C is the only model currently being sold; the earlier models are no 

longer sold, but are still supported. This section contains information that applies 

to all three models, as well hardware information specific to the S8500C model. 

S8500C Media Server 

This section contains a detailed description of the S8500C Media Server. See 

Figure 10: S8500C Media Server (front) on page 55 and Figure 11: S8500C Media Server 

(back) on page 56 for examples of the front and back of the S8500C Media Server. 


Figure 10: S8500C Media Server (front) 

Figure notes: 

1 

2 3 

DVD CD-RW 

4 

5 

7 

6 8 

10 11 

1. Power-on LED 7. USB port 

2. Power button 8. USB port 

3. Reset button 9. Hard disk drive 

4. Hard disk drive activity LED 10. CD eject button 

5. Locator LED 

6. System error LED 

11. CD drive activity LED 

9 


h3msf8cc LAO 031706 


Figure 11: S8500C Media Server (back) 

Figure notes: 

Components 

The S8500C Media Server comes standard with the following hardware components: 

Note: The 

1 

1. Power cord connector 10. Mouse connector (not used) 

2. SAMP power 11. USB port 

3. USB connection (to USB modem) 12. USB port 

4. SAMP Ethernet (not used) 13. Ethernet 1 

5. SAMP services port 14. Ethernet 2 

6. SAMP card 15. Video connector 

7. Dual NIC 16. Serial connector 

8. Ethernet 4 

9. Ethernet 3 

17. Keyboard connector (not used) 

● Pentium IV 41024-KB Level-2 cache, 3.0GHz 800MHz FSB processor. 

● 512 MB RAM 

h2msb85c LAO 030606 

h2msb8cc LAO 031706 

● IDE CD/DVD-ROM drive 

● 80-GB (minimum) SATA hard drive 

Slot 1 

● Two USB ports on the front and two USB ports on the back. One of the four ports is used 

for the Compact Flash drive. 

Note: 

SAMP card also has one USB port that is in addition to the four specified on 

the S8500C itself. The Compact Flash memory reader is always connected to a 

USB port on the S8500C chassis, not on the SAMP card. 

● One serial port can be used for console redirection 

Slot 1 


2 

3 

4 

5 

7 

6 8 

11 

1 

2 

12 

13 

1 

2 

Slot 2 

9 

Slot 2 

15 

14 16 

10 

17

● A keyboard port (not used) 

● A mouse port (not used) 

● Two 10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet ports 

● A Server Availability Management Processor (SAMP) card for maintenance 

● An external Compact Flash Memory Reader 

● A Compact Flash 128 MB industry media (optional) 

● One USB modem 

● AC-powered 

● Includes RAM disk 

● Dual-NIC card 

Server Availability Management Processor (SAMP) 

Modem 


The SAMP card is a remote maintenance and serviceability card that is preinstalled in the 

S8500C Media Server. 

The SAMP card: 

● Monitors the server state of health: fans, voltages, and temperature 

● Reports server failure and other alarms to INADS by modem 

● Provides remote server power-on and reset capability 

● Provides secure dial-in connection to the SAMP, and subsequently the host, using SSH, 

secure shell 

● Provides Services laptop access to the SAMP, and subsequently the host 

Power to the SAMP is derived from an external power source. This power source uses its own 

built-in transformer or receives power from the S8500C Media Server through its connection at 

the PCI bus. Avaya recommends that an external power source on a different circuit from the 

S8500C be provided for the SAMP. In this way, if the SAMP’s power fails, the S8500C can 

provide backup power. 

The S8500C Media Server is equipped with a USB modem that connects to the USB port on the 

SAMP. The modem provides remote access to: 

● O/S and environmental alarms through port 10022 

● Communication Manager alarms through port 22 

See Figure 12: Modem connectivity to the S8500C on page 58 for an example of modem 

connectivity to the S8500C Media Server. 


Figure 12: Modem connectivity to the S8500C 

Compact Flash 

DVD 

CD-RW 

Figure notes: 


1. Modem 

2. USB cable connecting modem to the USB port 

3. Telephone line connecting the modem to an outside trunk (must be 

touchtone) 

You can backup the S8500 Media Server to a server on the LAN or to the Compact Flash 

memory reader. This reader is installed in one of the USB ports. The Compact Flash memory 

reader uses a 128-MB Compact Flash card. Avaya recommends use of the industrial grade 

Compact Flash card for the following reasons: 

● Improved data integrity and reliability 

- Powerful error correction 

MultiModem MultiTech 


Software 

1 

Slot 1 

2 

3 

h3msm85c LAO 032406


● Extreme endurance 

- 2,000,000 program/erase cycles per block 

● Increased reliability 

- Mean time between failures (MTBF) greater than 3 million hours 

● Industry-leading 7-year warranty 

● Enhanced durability 

- New RTV silicone for added strength and stability 

The industrial grade Compact Flash is available through Avaya and Avaya business partners. 


The following table outlines the environmental specifications of the S8500 Media Server. For a 

complete feature and specification table refer to the S8500 Installation Manual. 


Note: Some 

Note: 

values are shown at maximum configuration. Avaya values are slightly 

lower then maximum. 

Type Description 

Acoustical Noise Emissions ● Sound power, idling: 6.5 bel maximum 

● Sound power, operating: 6.5 bel maximum 

Environment: Air Temperature Server on: 

Environment: Humidity Server on: 

● 8% to 80% 

Server off: 

● 8% to 80% 

● 50.0 °F to 95.0 °F (10 °C to 35 °C) 

● Altitude: 0 to 914 m (2998.7 ft) 

Server off: 

● -104 °F to 140 °F (-40 °C to 60 °C) 

● Maximum altitude: 2133 m (6998.0 ft) 

Heat Output BTU output per hour (approximate): 

● Maximum configuration: 512 BTU (150 watts) 

Electrical Input ● Sine-wave input (47-63 Hz) required 

● Input voltage low range: 

- Minimum: 100 V ac 

- Maximum: 127 V ac 

● Input voltage high range: 

- Minimum: 200 V ac 

- Maximum: 240 V ac 

● Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA) (approximate): 

- Minimum: 0.0870 kVA 

- Maximum: 0.150 kVA 

● Receptacle U.S.: XXXX 87=NEMA 5-15 

● Circuit breaker: XXXX 87=15 amp 

● Pole: XXXX 87=1 

● Amp Draw: XXXX 87=3 


Survivability 


Note: 

Note: This section applies to all three models of the S8500 Media Server. 

Recovery capability is embedded in the Communication Manager software that resides on the 

S8500 Media Server. Thus, the S8500 Media Server can use the following recovery options: 

RAM disk 

● RAM disk on page 61 

● Servers, port networks, and gateways that an S8500 ESS supports on page 61 

● S8300 Media Server in an LSP mode on page 62 

RAM disk is a portion of memory used as a disk partition. In the event of a hard disk failure, the 

S8500 Media Server uses only RAM disk to provide call processing for up to 72 hours. 

Administration and backups are prohibited. 

S8500 Media Server as an Enterprise Survivable Server 

A Communication Manager configuration may use the S8500 Media Server as an Enterprise 

Survivable Server (ESS). The ESS option provides survivability to a configuration by allowing 

backup servers to be placed in various locations in the customer’s network. An ESS assumes 

call processing control of all or part of the configuration in case the main server, either an S8500 

or S8700-series Media Server, fails or network connections to the main server fail. 

A main server may have many, up to 63, ESSs available to provide backup service. The 

placement of the ESS or ESSs in the configuration is typically targeted at ensuring that port 

networks that are configured in different segments of the customer’s LAN/WAN can receive 

service even when LAN/WAN connections are lost. 

Once the communication failure to the main server has been corrected, control of call 

processing may be returned from the ESS to the main server either manually port network by 

port network or automatically for all port networks at once. 

Note: In 

Note: 

the transition of control from the main server to an ESS, all calls are dropped 

while the media gateways carrying the calls reset to connect to the ESS. 

Servers, port networks, and gateways that an S8500 ESS supports 

An S8500 Media Server may serve as the ESS for either an S8500 or an S8700-series main 

server. If the main server is a S8500 Media Server, any and all ESS servers in the configuration 

must also be S8500 Media Servers. If the main server is an S8700-series Media Server with a 

duplicated control network or both duplicated control and bearer networks, the S8500 ESS can 


maintain the duplication when it takes call processing control from the main server. To support 

duplication, an S8500 ESS must also contain a dual-NIC card. 

Note: An 

Note: 

ESS may support a G150, G250, G350, or G700 Media Gateway through the 

C-LAN connection of the ESS-connected port network. 

Note: 

Note: An S8500 Media Server, as a main server, does not support a duplicated control 

network. Additionally, if the main server is an S8500 Media Server, any ESS that 

supports the main server must also be an S8500 Media Server. 

An ESS can support CSS-connected or ATM-connected port networks, as well as IP-connect 

port networks, in the main server’s configuration. However, the ESS normally uses the 

customer LAN, and therefore IP-connect port network connectivity, to provide both backup 

control and bearer traffic when the main server connection is lost. 

Requirements to support CSS- and ATM-connected port networks 

Each CSS-connected port network that is to receive ESS service must also contain a 

TN2312BP IPSI circuit pack and TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs with vintage D or 

higher. Vintage D of the TN570 allows the TN570 to appropriately share control from the server 

with the IPSI. To be survivable, any CSS-connected port networks must have an IPSI to get 

service from an ESS and a TN2302AP IP Media Processor or a TN2602AP IP Media Resource 

320 to have port network connectivity to the other PNs. A PN without an IPSI will lose service 

when the main server connection fails. 

Each ATM-connect port network that is to receive ESS service must also contain TN2305 or 

TN2306 ATM Interface circuit packs with vintage B or higher. Vintage B of the TN2305/2306 

allows the TN2305/2306 to appropriately share control by the server with the IPSI. Any 

ATM-connected port network that does not have an IPSI may still receive service if the port 

network maintains its connection to the ATM switch and the ATM switch still communicates with 

one or more IPSI-controlled port networks. 

For more information about ESS setup, operation, or feature functionality, see Avaya Enterprise 

Survivable Servers (ESS) User Guide, 03-300428. 

S8300 Media Server in an LSP mode 

The S8300 LSP is located in the G700 Media Gateway and provides survivability when the 

S8500 Media Server is inaccessible. Each S8500 Media Server can have up to 250 LSPs. The 

S8300 LSP can support up to 50 H.248 media gateways.The LSP has a copy of the S8500 

Media Server customer translations. 

Power outages 

In most cases, an Avaya solution can recover from a power outage or other failure instantly, 

regardless of the source of the failure. Each PN includes a set of segmented, parallel buses. If 

one of the paired segments fails, the other bus segment continues to handle communications. 

The UPS units supply power to the control complex. 



Note: This 

Note: 

section applies to all three models of the S8500 Media Servers. 


Capability S8500 Media Server 


Reliability options Simplex control and duplicated bearer 

Port-network connectivity IP and direct-connect 

Supported port network 

media gateways 


supported media gateways 

for branch offices 


Voice bearer over IP: G650, G600, CMC1, SCC1, 

and MCC1. 

Voice bearer over direct-connect: G650, SCC1, and 

MCC1. 

250 (includes G700, G350, G250, and G150 Media 

Gateways in any combination) 

Maximum locations 64 port networks, plus up to 250 G700/G350/G250 

Media Gateways 

Survivability options G250, G350 and G700 Media Gateways with 

S8300 LSP 

S8500 ESS or LSP 

Number of LSPs in one 

configuration 

Number of ESSs in one 

configuration 

Maximum of 250 LSPs 

Maximum of 63 ESSs 

Port networks per IPSI One with IP-connect port networks. Three with 

direct-connect port networks. 


Capacities Table (03-300511) 

In addition to voice calls, the S8500 Media Server, through Communication Manager and the 

use of an appropriate media processor (T2302AP or TN2602AP), supports transport of the 

following messages: 

- Fax, Teletypewriter device (TTY), and modem calls using pass-through mode 

- Fax, V.32 modem, and TTY calls using proprietary relay mode 


SECURITY ALERT: Faxes 

Note: V.32 

! SECURITY ALERT: 

sent to non-Avaya endpoints cannot be encrypted. 

Note: 

modem relay is needed primarily for secure SCIP telephones (formerly 

known as Future Narrowband Digital Terminal (FNBDT) telephones) and STE 

BRI telephones. 

- T.38 Fax over the Internet, including endpoints connected to non-Avaya systems 

- 64kbps clear channel transport in support of firmware downloads, BRI secure 

telephones, and data appliances 

Note: 

Note: The path between endpoints for modem tone transmissions must use Avaya 

telecommunications and networking equipment. 

See TN2302AP IP media processor on page 256 or TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 on 

page 267 for more information. See also Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya 

Communication Manager, 555-233-504, for more information. 

. 


Avaya S8700-series Media Servers 


The Avaya S8700-series (including S8720 and S8710) media servers use a standard 

microprocessor engine on a commercial server. 

The S8700-series media servers use high-speed connections to route voice, data, and video 

between the following trunks and lines: 

● Analog and digital trunks 

● Data lines that are connected to host computers, data-entry terminals, personal 

computers, and internet addresses 

The S8720 and S8710 media servers are very similar in architecture, components, and 

functionality. Both servers support Communication Manager. The main differences between the 

two are: 

● The S8720 has greater call processing performance than the S8710 

● The S8710 uses a Pentium 4 processor, whereas the S8720 uses an AMD Opteron 

processor. 

● Software duplication is available on the S8720. The S8720 is ordered without the DAL1 or 

DAL2 card used for hardware duplication. Hardware duplication, and the DAL1 or DAL2 

card, can be purchased as an option for the S8720. 

● The S8720 has a third USB port, which is located on the front panel. 


The S8720 media server is available in two configurations: 

● Standard configuration 

● Extra large configuration, available with Avaya Communication Manager R4.0 and later 

releases. This configuration requires the DAL2 card. 

The extra large configuration provides higher capacities. 

Both the S8720 and S8710 Media Servers support two types of port network configurations, or 

a combination of both: 

● Voice bearer over IP (IP-PNC): An all-IP configuration that carries both control and bearer 

information. 

● Voice bearer over fiber-PNC, with direct-connect expansion interface circuit packs, Center 

Stage Switch (CSS), or Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). 


Note: For 

In fiber-PNC configurations, the bearer paths and control paths are separate. The control 

information for port networks travels over a control network. The control information 

terminates on the S8720 or S8710 Media Server at one end and an IP Server Interface 

(IPSI) circuit pack on the other. The control network can be of one of the following networks: 

- A dedicated control network in which an Ethernet switch is used only for the control 

network and therefore creates a private LAN 

- A nondedicated control network in which control data passes through an Ethernet switch 

that is also connected to the customer LAN 

Note: 

information on port network connectivity, see Administration for Network 

Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504. 

IPSIs required based on PNs 

For configurations where voice bearer is over IP, there must be one IPSI in each PN. 

For a direct connect configuration, a single IPSI is installed in only one of the PNs, and this IPSI 

controls the other PNs. 

For configurations where voice bearer is over CSS or ATM, each IPSI usually controls up to five 

port networks. The IPSI tunnels control messages over the bearer network to PNs that do not 

have IPSIs. 

Note: 

Note: An IPSI cannot be placed in: 

- A PN that has a Stratum-3 clock interface 

- A Survivable Remote Expansion Port Network (SREPN) 

For more information on the IP Server Interface, see TN2312BP IP server interface on 

page 258. 

Components 

S8700-series media server control complex 

Both configurations, voice bearer over IP and voice bearer over direct-connect, CSS or ATM, 

use the following components and software: 

● Two media servers. See either S8720 Media Server on page 68 or S8710 Media 

Server on page 72. 


Note: Both 

Note: The 

Note: Media 


Note: 

media servers must be of the same type, either S8720 or S8710 Media 

Servers. You cannot have a server pair with an S8720 and an S8710 Media 

Server. 

● Media gateways for main locations, which individually or as stacks serve as port networks 

and include one or more of the following types: 

- Avaya G650 Media Gateway on page 174, which is always sold with new systems 

- G600 Media Gateway on page 169, with a migration system only 

- CMC1 Media Gateway on page 183, with a migration system only 

- SCC1 Media Gateway on page 188, with a migration system only 

- MCC1 Media Gateway on page 198, with a migration system only 

Note: 

Avaya G700 Media Gateway on page 156, the Avaya G350 Media 

Gateway on page 126, the Avaya G250 Media Gateway on page 115, and the 

G150 Media Gateway on page 103 are supported through the C-LAN circuit 

pack. The C-LAN circuit pack can be mounted in any of the gateways previously 

listed. 

Note: 

Gateway types cannot be mixed within the same port network (PN). 

● TN2312BP IP server interface on page 258, which provides control signaling from the 

media server to the port networks (PNs). At least one PN in a fiber-PNC configuration 

must contain a TN2312BP circuit pack. In an IP-PNC configuration, each PN must contain 

one or two TN2312BP circuit packs. 


page 267, which provides TDM-to-IP conversions of audio signals. At least one of these 

circuit packs is required in each PN that uses the IP-PNC connection method to the media 

server. 

● One Ethernet switch for duplex, single control reliability or two Ethernet switches of the 

same type for high or critical reliability. Critical reliability is available with voice bearer over 

direct-connect, CSS or ATM only. The switch or switches are one of the following types: 

- Avaya C360 Ethernet switches on page 379 (for new installations and migrations) 

- Avaya P133 and P134 Ethernet switches on page 385 

- Avaya P330 Ethernet switches on page 387 

- Customer Ethernet switch 

● UPS or power backup on page 82. 

● USB modem on page 83. 

● System Management on page 26. 

● Avaya Communication Manager. See About Avaya Communication Manager on page 19. 


The following sections describe each of the main components. 

S8720 Media Server 

Note: 

Note: For a description of the S8710 Media Server hardware, see S8710 Media 


The S8720 server’s dimensions are (HxWxD) 3.38 in. (8.6 cm.) x 17.50 in. (44.5 cm.) x 25.75 in. 

(65.4 cm.). The S8720 Media Server has a 2U form factor. 

Characteristics of the S8720 Media Server include: 

● AMD Opteron processor 


● 1 GB memory 

● 72GB 10,000 RPM SCSI hard disk drive 

● 2 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports on the motherboard to support IPSI network control links, 

services access, and administration 

● Three USB ports, for modem connection, Compact Flash drive connection, and other 

connections 

● External (USB) Compact Flash 

● 4-port (10/100BaseT) network interface card (quad NIC) 

● A SCSI CD/DVD-ROM 

● Supports software duplication. Hardware duplication is available with the optional DAL1 

memory duplication card or (for the extra large configuration) the DAL2 memory 

duplication card. A distance limitation of 10 km between the S8720 Media Servers in the 

pair. 

● Support for global power ranges from 100V to 250V AC 

● Active/standby status LED for easy in rack server identification 

● Supports secure HTTP server for IP phone file downloads. 

● Transport, using Communication Manager and an appropriate media processor (T2302AP 

or TN2602AP), of the following messages: 






Note: V.32 


Note: 







Note: 






The software duplication feature of the S8720 eliminates the need for the DAL1 or DAL2 

memory duplication card. If software duplication is used, the functions of the Eth0 and Eth2 

interfaces are reversed with respect to the hardware duplication functions. Memory duplication 

messages are sent over the server duplication TCP/IP link. 

Note: 

Note: Using software duplication may reduce system performance. Avaya recommends 

a dedicated duplication link for software duplication. If the duplication is routed or 

switched, the link should have a bandwidth of 1 Gigabit per second. 

A DAL1 or DAL2 board is available as an option for connections to the duplicated server. If 

purchased, the DAL1 or DAL2 memory duplication cards and the dual fiber cable linking the 

DAL1 or DAL2 cards are installed in the S8720 media servers separately. 

Note: 

Note: DAL2 cards are required for the extra large configuration of the S8720 media 

server. 

The S8720 Media Server is usually mounted in a 4-post rack with square holes. It can, however, 

also be mounted in a 2-post rack if you use an adapter kit. In either case, the server must slide 

out using rails or a slide-out shelf. 

The power supply of the S8720 Media Server has the following input requirements: 

● Line Voltage Range: 90 to 132 VAC/180 to 265 VAC 

● Nominal Line Voltage: 100 to 120 VAC/220 to 240 VAC 

● Rated Input Current: 6A (110V) to 3A (220V) 

● Rated Input Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz 

● Rated Input Power: 600W 


See the following figures for an example of the S8720 Media Server. Figure 13 shows a front 

view. Figure 14 shows a back view for a configuration when hardware duplication is used. 

Figure 15 shows a back view for a configuration in which software duplication is used. 

Figure 13: S8720 Media Server (front view) 

Figure notes: 

3 

Number Description of Device 

1. CD/DVD-ROM drive 


3. USB port 

5 

4 5 

4 

4. Active/standby server LED (lit when active) 


3 

2 3 

2 

COMPACT 

disc 

1 

1 

0 

0 

2 

1 

Simplex Duplex ch 1 ch 2 

msds872f LAO 102805 

UID 

1 

2 

4

Figure 14: S8720 Media Server (back view) with hardware duplication 

Figure notes: 


Figure 15: S8720 Media Server (back view) with software duplication 


1. Optional DAL1 or DAL2 Duplication board (used for memory duplication 

between servers when hardware duplication used) 

2. 4-port NIC card, first port on left used for data duplication between servers 

(Eth 2) 

3. 1 iLO NIC port (not used) 

4. Services port (Eth 1) 

5. Control network A (Eth 0) 

6. USB ports for modem and Compact Flash drive 

Figure notes: 

3 

2 

3 

2 


1 

RECEIVE 

MODE 

TRANS 

MODE 

VDCI 

VDCI 

LINC 

SYNC 

LINC 

ACTIVE 

DAL1 

DUP 

MEMORY 

3 

100 MGz 

2 

100 MGz 

1 

133 MGz 

2 

3 

100 MGz 

2 

100 MGz 

1 

133 MGz 

1 

1. 4-port NIC card, first port on left used for control network (Eth 2) 



4. Port used for data duplication between servers (Eth 0) 


3 

iLO 

6 

2 

iLO 

5 

2 1 

4 

2 1 

3 

5 

4 

UID 

UID 

msds872b LAO 113005 

msds872d LAO 113005 



Note: 

Note: For a description of the S8720 Media Server hardware, see S8720 Media 


The S8710 server’s dimensions are (HxWxD) 3.38 in. (8.6 cm.) x 17.50 in. (44.5 cm.) x 25.75 in. 

(65.4 cm.). The S8710 Media Server has a 2U form factor. 

Characteristics of the S8710 Media Server include: 

● 3.06 GHz P4 processor 


● 512 MB memory 

● 72GB 10,000 RPM SCSI hard disk drive 

● 2 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports on the motherboard to support IPSI network control links, 

services access, and administration 

● Two USB ports, one of which you use for a modem connection and the other to connect 

the Compact Flash drive 

● External (USB) Compact Flash 

● 4-port (10/100BaseT) network interface card (quad NIC) 

● A SCSI CD/DVD-ROM 

● A DAL1 Duplication board for connections to the duplicated server. 

A DAL1 board resides in a PCI slot on both the active server and the standby server. The 

DAL1 operates in either active or standby mode to match the mode of its server. The active 

server saves data to its DAL1 board. Then, the data is also sent over the fiber link to the 

DAL1 board on the standby server. 

● A distance limitation of 10 km between the S8710 Media Servers in the pair 

● Support for global power ranges from 100V to 250V AC 

● Active/standby status LED for easy in rack server identification 

● Supports secure HTTP server for IP phone file downloads. 

● Transport, using Communication Manager and an appropriate media processor (T2302AP 

or TN2602AP), of the following messages: 






Note: V.32 


Note: 







Note: 






The S8710 Media Server is usually mounted in a 4-post rack with square holes. It can, however, 

also be mounted in a 2-post rack if you use an adapter kit. In either case, the server must slide 

out using rails or a slide-out shelf. 

The power supply of the S8710 Media Server has the following input requirements: 

● Line Voltage Range: 90 to 132 VAC/180 to 265 VAC 

● Nominal Line Voltage: 100 to 120 VAC/220 to 240 VAC 

● Rated Input Current: 6A (110V) to 3A (220V) 

● Rated Input Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz 

● Rated Input Power: 600W 

See the following figures for an example of the S8710 Media Server. 


Figure 16: S8710 Media Server (front view) 

Figure notes: 


1. CD/DVD-ROM drive 


3. Floppy disk drive 

4. Active/standby server LED (lit when active) 

Figure 17: S8710 Media Server (back view) 

Figure notes: 

5 

4 5 

4 

msds871f KLC 102004 

3 

2 

1 


RECEIVE 

MODE 

TRANS 

MODE 

VDCI 

LINC 

SYNC 

LINC 

ACTIVE 

1. DAL1 Duplication board (used for memory duplication between servers) 

2. 4-port NIC card — first port on the left used for data duplication between 

servers 



5. Control network A (Eth 0) 



DAL1 

DUP 

MEMORY 

3 

100 MGz 

2 

100 MGz 

1 

133 MGz 

2 

3 

2 3 

2 

3 

iLO 

6 

3 

2 1 

4 

5 

COMPACT 

disc 

1 

1 

0 

0 

UID 

2 

1 


1 

2 

UID 

msds871b KLC 093004 

4


Altitude, air pressure and air purity 


The normal operating air pressure for the S8700-series Media Server ranges from 9.4 pounds 

per square inch (psi) to 15.2 psi (648 millibars to 1048 millibars). For altitudes above 5,000 feet 

(1,525 meters), you must reduce the maximum short-term temperature. Reduce this 

temperature limit by 1 oF (1.8 oC) for every 1,000 feet (304.8 meters) of elevation above 5,000 

feet (1,525 meters). At 10,000 feet (3,048 meters), for example, the maximum short-term 

temperature limit is 115 oF (46.1 oC). Do not install the equipment in an area where it might be exposed to any of the following 

contaminants: 

● Excessive amounts of 

- dust 

- lint 

- carbon particles 

- paper fiber contaminants 

- metallic contaminants 

● Corrosive gases, such as sulfur and chlorine 

Avaya recommends that the S8700-series Media Server and related equipment not be 

collocated with copiers, printers, or plain paper fax machines. These devices produce excessive 

amounts of fine dust. 

Contaminant Average 

Particulate matter 185 microgram per cubic meter 

Nitrate in particulate matter 12 microgram per cubic meter 

Total hydrocarbons equivalent to methane 10 parts per million (ppm) 

Sulfur dioxide 0.20 ppm 

Oxides of nitrogen 0.30 ppm 

Total oxidants equivalent to ozone 0.05 ppm 

Hydrogen sulfide 0.10 ppm 


Temperature and humidity 

Install the S8700-series Media Server in a well-ventilated area. Maximum equipment 

performance is obtained at an ambient temperature between 40° to 110 °F (4 °C to 43 °C) for 

continuous operation. The maximum performance temperature for short term operation is 

between 40° and 120 °F (4° and 49° C). The short-term operational limits is a period less than 

72 consecutive hours or a total of not more than 15 days in a year. 

The relative humidity range is 10 to 95 percent up to 84 °F (29° C). Above 84 °F (29° C), 

maximum relative humidity decreases from 95 percent down to 32 percent at 120 °F (49° C). 

Installations outside these limits might reduce system life or impede operation. 

The following table correlates room temperature with allowable relative humidity. 


Recommended 

temperature range (° F) 

Recommended 

temperature range (° C) 

65 to 85 18 to 29 20 to 60 

40 to 84 4.4 to 28.8 10 to 95 

86 30.0 10 to 89 

88 31.1 10 to 83 

90 32.2 10 to 78 

92 33.3 10 to 73 

94 34.4 10 to 69 

96 35.6 10 to 65 

98 36.7 10 to 61 

100 37.8 10 to 58 

102 38.9 10 to 54 

104 40.0 10 to 51 

106 41.1 10 to 48 

108 42.2 10 to 45 

110 43.3 10 to 43 

112 44.4 10 to 40 

114 45.6 10 to 38 

116 46.7 10 to 36 

118 47.8 10 to 34 

120 48.9 10 to 32 


Recommended 

humidity range (n%) 


EMI and RFI specifications 

Country Specification 

US FCC74 CFR Parts 2 and 15 

Verified Class A limit 

Canada IC ICES-003 Class A limit 

Europe EMC Directive, 89/336/EEC; EN55022, Class A 

Limit, Radiated and Conducted Emissions; 

EN55024, Immunity Standard for Information 

Technology Equipment; EN61000-3-2 Harmonic 

Currents; EN61000-3-3 Voltage Flicker 

Australia and New Zealand AS/NZS 3548 

Class A limit 

Japan VCCI, Class A ITE (CISPR 22, Class A Limit); IEC 

1000-3-2; Harmonic Currents 

Taiwan BSMI 

Class A (CISPR 22) 

Russia Gost approval 

International CISPR-22 

Class A limit 

Power supply specifications 

Voltage and frequency 

Power Voltage and frequency 

AC 100 VAC to 127 VAC 

200 VAC to 240 VAC 

DC 200 watts 

+5 VDC 22 A maximum 

+5 VDC standby 1.0 A maximum 

+12 VDC 3.5 A maximum 

+3.3 VDC 13.0 A maximum 

-12 VDC 0.25 A maximum 


BTU ratings 


The maximum British thermal units (BTU) output of the Intel SRTR1 server is 988 BTUs. This 

rating represents a SRTR1 with the following components: 

● SRTR1 server board 

● Front panel board 

● PCI riser board 

● One 80-millimeter fan 

● Three 40-millimeter fans 

● 850-MHz Pentium III with a heat sink fan 

● Four Micron 32-M × 72 256 megabyte (MB) DIMM modules 

● IDE hard disk drive 

● Slimline CD-ROM drive 

● Slimline diskette drive 

● Three PCI cards 

The BTU number is rated at the lowest efficiency or worst case of the power supply. Under 

normal conditions the power supply performs above the 70% efficiency level, which lowers the 

BTU ratings. 

Regulatory certification 

Product-safety standards and approvals 

The following table lists the standards for product safety and approval. 

Country Safety standards and approval summary 

US and Canada UL 1960, CSA 22.2, No. 950M95, 3 rd edition 

Europe Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC 

TUV/GS to EN60950 2 nd Edition with Amendments, A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11 

International CB Certificate and Report to IEC 60950, 2 nd edition including EMKO-TSE 

(74-SEC) 207/94 and other national deviations 


Electromagnetic-compatibility (EMC) standards and approvals 

The following table lists the standards and approvals for product electromagnetic compatibility 

(EMC). 

Country EMC standards and approvals 

US FCC 47 CFR Parts 2 and 15, Verified Class A Limit 

Canada IC ICES-003 Class A Limit 

Europe EMC Directive, 89/336/EEC 

EN55022, Class A Limit, Radiated and Conducted Emissions 

EN55024, Immunity Standard for Information Technology Equipment 

EN61000-3-2 Harmonic Currents 

EN61000-3-3 Voltage Flicker 

Australia and C-Tic: AS/NZS 3548, Class A Limit 

New Zealand 

Japan VCCI Class A ITE (CISPR 22, Class A Limit) 

IEC 61000-3-2, Harmonic Currents 

Taiwan BSMI Class A (CISPR 222) 

Russia Gost Approval 

International CISPR 22, Class A Limit 

Data rack mounting and media gateway floor loading 

The S8700-series Media Server configuration includes the following hardware components: 

● Two S8700-series Media Servers 

● Ethernet Switch 

● Modem 

● Two UPS units 

19-Inch (48.3 centimeter) rack 

The customer provides a data rack. This rack holds equipment that is not necessarily specified 

or provided by Avaya. The footprint of the data rack is 19 inches (48.3 cm) by 21 inches (53.3 

cm). 

S8700-series Media Server 

The S8700-series Media Servers are designed for mounting in an open 19-inch (48.3 

centimeters) data rack. The S8700-series Media Servers weigh approximately 25 pounds 

(11.33 kilograms). 


Avaya 700VA or 1500VA UPS units 


For configurations that require 28 minutes to 410 minutes of battery holdover, the Avaya 700VA 

UPS can be used. The 700VA is available in the following voltages: 

● 700 VA, 120 volts for US and Canada 

● 700 VA, 230 volts Online for International 

● 700 VA, 100 volts and 200 volts for Japan 

The physical characteristics of the Avaya 700VA are: 

● Width: 17 inches (43.2 centimeters) 

● Depth: 19 inches (48.2 centimeters) 

● Height: 3.5 inches (8.9 centimeters) 

● Weight: 34 pounds (15 kilograms) 

For configurations that require 411minutes to 480 minutes of battery holdover the Avaya 

1500VA UPS can be used. The 1500VA is available in the following voltages: 

● 1500 VA 120 volts for US and Canada 

● 1500 VA 230 volts Online for International 

● 1500 VA 100 volts and 200 volts for Japan 

The physical characteristics of the Avaya 1500VA are: 


● Depth: 24 inches (70 centimeters) 

● Height: 3.5 inches (8.9 centimeters) 

● Weight: 50 pounds (22.68 kilograms) 

Avaya Ethernet switches 

The physical characteristics of the P133G2 and the P134G2 equipped with center stage switch 

(CSS) port network connectivity (PNC) are: 

● Depth: 13.8 inches (35 centimeters) 


● Height: 3.5 inches (8.9 centimeters) or 2U 

● Weight of the P133G2: 11.4 pounds (5.2 kilograms) 

● Weight of the P134G2: 13.2 pounds (6.0 kilograms) 

The P333T and the P334T equipped with ATM PNC: 

● Depth: 17.7 inches (45 centimeters) 


● Height: 3.5 inches (8.9 centimeters) or 2U 

● Weight of the P333T or P334T: 11.4 pounds (7.5 kilograms) 



The equipment room floor must meet the commercial floor loading code of at least 50 pounds 

per square foot (242 kilograms per square meter). Floor plans usually allocate space around the 

front, the ends, and, if necessary, the rear for maintenance access of the Media Gateways. 

Additional floor support might be required if the floor load is greater than 50 pounds per square 

foot (242 kilograms per square meter). 

The following table shows the weight and floor loading of the media gateways. 

Media gateway Weight (pounds) Floor loading (pounds per square foot) 

SCC1 125 (56 kg) 31 (148.9 kg/m 2 ) 

MCC1 200 to 800 (90 to 363 kg) 130 (624.2 kg/m 2 ) 

G700 16.5 (7.5 kg) Floor loading depends on load on the rack 


Ethernet switch 

An Ethernet switch provides connectivity between the servers and the IPSI circuit packs that 

reside in some PNs. For duplex reliability, one Ethernet switch is provided. For high and critical 

reliability, the Ethernet switches are duplicated. An S8700-series media server supports two 

Ethernet connections to the Ethernet switch in the control network. 

An S8700-series media server usually uses an Avaya Ethernet switch as part of the control 

complex. The Avaya Ethernet switch extends Ethernet connectivity to the PN where the switch 

connects to an IPSI. One Ethernet switch is required for duplex reliability. Two are required for 

high or critical reliability of voice bearer over CSS or ATM only. If desired, customer-provided 

non-Avaya Ethernet switches can be substituted for Avaya Ethernet switches. 

The control network for an S8700-series media server does not have to be a dedicated one. 

However, an installation that uses a dedicated set of Ethernet switches provides simplicity and 

greater reliability. 

UPS or power backup 

Power backup for an S8700-series media server is highly desirable. Power backup avoids 

power problems and ensures that the system processes shutdown gracefully if the power fails. 

The Avaya 1000-VA UPS provides approximately 30 minutes of power backup. Combinations of 

battery extension modules and a 1500-VA UPS provide up to eight hours of power backup. See 

Avaya UPS Units on page 365. 



The Avaya UPS units send SNMP traps to the S8720/S8710 Media Server when power fails. 

The server’s Global Maintenance Manager can then send an alarm to the services organization 

or send a trap to a network management system. When a separate 48V-DC battery string is 

used, it might be possible to send an alarm when voltage is below a threshold. However, 

shutdown will not be mechanized. 

USB modem 

Each S8700-series media server in a server pair requires a Universal Serial Bus (USB) modem 

for maintenance access and to call out an alarm. The modems can share a common phone line 

if the media servers are colocated. When the media servers are separated an additional phone 

line is required. The online server answers incoming calls. The callers can access the offline 

server by means of a telnet session. Each modem connects to a USB port on the media server. 

The USB modems used must conform to the Communication Device Class (CDC) specification, 

and usually to the Abstract Control Model (ACM) subclass. A modem will not work with the 

media server driver if the modem does not comply with the specifications. 

Reliability 

Reliability for IP-PNC 

The S8720/S8710 Media Server supports the following reliability configurations with IP-PNC 

configurations: 

Note: Duplicated 

● Standard reliability 

Standard reliability includes duplicated S8700-series servers. When the active server fails, 

an automatic interchange occurs, and standby server assumes call processing control. 

During the interchange, most IP phone calls continue. All other calls are dropped. 

● Duplicated control 

High reliability includes duplicated control networks and duplicated servers. The servers are 

each connected to two Ethernet switches, which are in turn connected to the customer LAN. 

In each IP-PNC port network, two separateTN2312BP IPSI circuit packs are also connected 

to the customer LAN. If the control connection through one Ethernet switch fails or the 

connection to one IPSI fails, the other Ethernet switch and IPSI complete the connection to 

the server. 

● Duplicated control and duplicated bearer 

In addition to the standard duplicated servers, duplicated IPSIs for control reside in each PN 

and duplicated TN2602AP circuit packs reside in each PN to provide duplicated bearer. 

Note: 

bearer can be implemented without duplicated control. 


For information on port network connectivity, see Administration for Network Connectivity for 

Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504. 

Reliability when sending voice bearer over direct-connect, ATM, or CSS 

The S8720/S8710 Media Server supports the following reliability configurations with 

direct-connect, CSS, or ATM port network configurations: 

● Standard reliability 

Standard reliability includes duplicated S8700-series servers. When the active server fails, 

an automatic interchange occurs, and standby server assumes call processing control. 

During the interchange, most IP phone calls continue. All other calls are dropped. 

● High reliability 

High reliability includes duplicated control networks and duplicated servers. The servers are 

each connected to two Ethernet switches. These Ethernet switches are normally each 

connected to the IPSI-connected port networks. Two separateTN2312BP IPSI circuit packs 

in each IPSI-connected PN is connected to one of the Ethernet switches. If the control 

connection through one Ethernet switch fails or the connection to one IPSI fails, the other 

Ethernet switch and IPSI complete the connection to the server. 

● Critical reliability 

Critical reliability includes duplicated servers, duplicated control networks, and duplicated 

bearer networks. In addition to the control duplication of the high reliability option, fiber 

connections between port networks are duplicated. For direct-connect configurations, 

TN570 Expansion Interface connections are duplicated. For CSS configurations, each CSS 

node has two switch node carriers, such that switch node interfaces are duplicated. For 

ATM configurations, the ATM switches are duplicated. 

Multiple reliabilities among PNs 

The port networks that are connected together with fiber in direct-connect, CSS, and ATM 

configurations must all share the same reliability level. However, when IP-PNC port networks 

are added to a configuration that includes fiber-PNC port networks, the IP-PNC port networks 

may have a different reliability level. Additionally, IP-PNC port networks in the same 

Communication Manager configuration can have different reliability levels. 

Survivability 

In addition to the high reliability of the duplicated S8720 or S8710 Media Servers, recovery 

capability is embedded in the Communication Manager software that resides on the S8720 or 

S8710 Media Server. Thus, the S8720 or S8710 Media Server can use the following recovery 

options: 

● S8700-series Media Server as an Enterprise Survivable Server on page 85 

● S8300 Media Server in an LSP mode on page 86 


S8700-series Media Server as an Enterprise Survivable Server 


A Communication Manager configuration may use the S8700-series Media Server as an 

Enterprise Survivable Server (ESS). The ESS option provides survivability to a configuration by 

allowing backup servers to be placed in various locations in the customer’s network. An ESS 

assumes call processing control of all or part of the configuration in case the main server, 

another S8700-series Media Server, fails or network connections to the main server fail. 

A main server may have many, up to 63, ESSs available to provide backup service. The 

placement of the ESS or ESSs in the configuration is typically targeted at ensuring that port 

networks that are configured in different segments of the customer’s LAN/WAN can receive 

service even when LAN/WAN connections are lost. 

Once the communication failure to the main server has been corrected, control of call 

processing may be returned from the ESS to the main server either manually port network by 

port network or automatically for all port networks at once. 

Note: In 

Note: 

the transition of control from the main server to an ESS, all calls are dropped 

while the media gateways carrying the calls reset to connect to the ESS. 

Servers, port networks, and gateways that an S8700-series ESS supports 

An S8700-series Media Server may serve as the ESS for an S8700-series main server only. If 

the main server is a S8500 Media Server, any and all ESS servers in the configuration must 

also be S8500 Media Servers. If the main server is an S8700-series Media Server with a 

duplicated control network and duplicated bearer network, the S8700 ESS can maintain the 

duplication when it takes call processing control from the main server. 

Note: 

Note: An ESS may support a G150, G250, G350, or G700 Media Gateway through the 

C-LAN connection of the ESS-connected port network. 

An ESS can support CSS-connected or ATM-connected port networks, as well as IP-PNC port 

networks, in the main server’s configuration. However, the ESS normally uses the customer 

LAN, and therefore IP-PNC port network connectivity, to provide both backup control and bearer 

traffic when the main server connection is lost. 

Requirements to support CSS- and ATM-connected port networks 

Each CSS-connected port network that is to receive ESS service must also contain a 

TN2312BP IPSI circuit pack and TN570 Expansion Interface circuit packs with vintage D or 

higher. Vintage D of the TN570 allows the TN570 to appropriately share control from the server 

with the IPSI. To be survivable, any CSS-connected port networks must have an IPSI to get 

service from an ESS and a TN2302AP IP Media Processor or a TN2602AP IP Media Resource 

320 to have port network connectivity to the other PNs. A PN without an IPSI will lose service 

when the main server connection fails. 

Each ATM-connect port network that is to receive ESS service must also contain TN2305 or 

TN2306 ATM Interface circuit packs with vintage B or higher. Vintage B of the TN2305/2306 


allows the TN2305/2306 to appropriately share control by the server with the IPSI. Any 

ATM-connected port network that does not have an IPSI may still receive service if the port 

network maintains its connection to the ATM switch and the ATM switch still communicates with 

one or more IPSI-controlled port networks. 

For more information about ESS setup, operation, or feature functionality, see Avaya Enterprise 

Survivable Servers (ESS) User Guide, 03-300428. 


The S8300 LSP is located in the G700 Media Gateway and provides survivability when the 

S8720/S8710 Media Server is inaccessible. Each S8720/S8710 Media Server can have up to 

250 LSPs. The S8300 LSP can support up to 50 H.248 media gateways. The LSP has a copy of 

the S8720/S8710 Media Server customer translations. For details, see S8300 Media Server in 

an LSP configuration on page 37. 


The S8500 LSP provides survivability when the S8720/S8710 Media Server is inaccessible. 

Each S8720/8710 Media Server can have up to 250 LSPs. The S8500 LSP can support up to 

250 H.248 media gateways.The LSP has a copy of the S8720/8710 Media Server customer 

translations. For the S8500 Media Server in an LSP mode, the processor ethernet interface 

must be set (it is not on automatically). 

Connectivity 

The S8720/8710 Media Server supports the following methods of port network connections. 

Note: For 

Note: 

information on port network connectivity, see Administration for Network 

Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504. 

Connectivity with voice bearer over direct-connect, ATM, or CSS 

The following connection methods are available with fiber connections: 

● Direct-connect (duplicated control network) 

● Direct-connect (duplicated control network) 

● Center Stage Switch (single control network) 

● Center Stage Switch (duplicated control network) 

● Center Stage Switch (duplicated control and bearer networks) 

● ATM Switch (single control network) 


● ATM Switch (duplicated control networks) 

● ATM Switch (duplicated control and bearer networks) 

Connectivity when sending voice bearer over IP 

The following connection methods are available with IP-PNC configurations: 

● IP-PNC (single control network) 


● IP-PNC (duplicated control network) 

In addition, a single MCC1 cabinet can be configured to house multiple PNs that use the voice 

bearer over IP configuration. 

Note: When 

Note: 

using IP-PNC between PNs, video cannot be sent directly between port 

networks. In this case, video calls must be routed through the public network and 

back into the media server’s network. 

Combining IP- and fiber-PNC port networks 

An S8700-series Media Server supports only one type of configuration from the list of available 

direct-connect, CSS, or ATM configurations. However, the two IP-PNC configurations can be 

mixed together, and either or both of the IP-PNC configurations can be mixed with any one of 

the direct-connect, CSS, or ATM configurations. 


The S8720/S8710 Media Server provides a large scale solution with a high number of 

endpoints. 


Capability Description 

Call processing feature set Communication Manager 

Reliability options Voice bearer over IP: Standard, duplicated control, 

duplicated control and duplicated bearer 

Voice bearer over direct-connect, CSS, or ATM: 

Duplex, high, and critical 

PN connectivity Voice bearer over IP 

Voice bearer over Center Stage Switch (CSS), ATM, 

or Direct 

1 of 2 


Table 5: High-level capabilities (continued) 

Capability Description 

Supported port network media 

gateways 

Maximum supported branch media 

gateways 




Voice bearer over IP: G600, G650, and CMC1 

Voice bearer over direct-connect, CSS or ATM: G650, 

SCC1, and MCC1 

250 (includes G700, G350, G250, and G150 Media 

Gateways in any combination) 

Maximum number of PNs Voice bearer over IP: 64 

Voice bearer over CSS or ATM: 

● 44 in a CSS network 

or 

● 64 in an ATM-PNC network 

Survivability options Voice bearer over IP: LSP and ESS 

Voice bearer over direct-connect, CSS, or ATM: LSP 

and ESS 

LSP options S8300 Media Server in an LSP configuration 

(maximum of 250) 

PNs per IPSI 

(voice bearer over direct-connect, 

CSS, or ATM only) 

Modem calls Supported 

Up to five 

Note: A high reliability configuration or a critical 

reliability configuration requires two IPSIs per 

IPSI-connected PN. 

Wideband connections Supported, except video not supported for direct 

transmission between PNs 

2 of 2

DEFINITY-based media servers 

DEFINITY Server CSI 


Avaya’s Communication Manager on a DEFINITY Server CSI is a solution for a mediumsized 

location with 50 to 900 stations. This solution uses DEFINITY TN circuit packs and the 

CMC1 Media Gateway. As a company grows. it is easy and cost-effective for that company to 

migrate from a DEFINITY Server CSI to another Avaya solution. All DEFINITY CSI applications 

and most of the hardware can be reused, so the company’s initial investment is protected. 

The DEFINITY Server CSI can be used at a single site or can be networked with other servers 

in multiple locations using DCS and QSIG. For example, DEFINITY Server CSI might provide a 

solution for a satellite office within a larger business or branch locations around the world. 

Multisite companies can use remote diagnostics and alarming to maintain the DEFINITY Server 

CSI from a central location. An administrator can use a system administration tool to administer 

the system from a central location. 

Components 

A DEFINITY Server CSI consists of the following main components: 

● TN2402 processor on page 265 

● TN2182C tone clock, tone detector, and call classifier (8 ports) on page 248 

● TN771DP maintenance and test on page 236 

● At least one CMC1 Media Gateway on page 183 

● About Avaya Communication Manager on page 19 

A DEFINITY Server CSI can include up to 3 cabinets in a single PPN: 

● One control cabinet, with a TN2402 processor circuit pack, a TN2182 tone clock circuit 

pack, and a TN771DP maintenance circuit pack 

● Up to two expansion gateways connected with a TDM bus cable 

The DEFINITY Server CSI does not support expansion port networks (EPNs). 

See Typical vertical installation, front view of the CMC1 Media Gateway, DEFINITY Server CSI 

configuration on page 186. 



Reliability 

The DEFINITY Server CSI provides the following capabilities for reliability and recovery: 

● Can survive minor power surges, including lightning-induced surges up to 2500 volts 

without service interruption. Surge protectors can be purchased for increased coverage. 

● Can operate in conditions that include above-average temperatures and above-average 

humidity. 

● In case of a power failure, automatically restores the last saved version of the user 

translations and runs the translations when the system restarts. 

● Supports the remote diagnostics capability, which enables quick troubleshooting and 

maintenance. 

● Conducts self-diagnostics and can self correct many system errors. If further technical 

assistance is required, DEFINITY Server CSI uses an external modem to place a call for 

support. 

● Conducts standard maintenance routines automatically. 

● Backs up all the user translations each day at midnight by default. 

● The single-processor configuration provides 99.9% reliability. 


For a partial list of the adjuncts that the DEFINITY Server CSI supports, see Adjuncts on 

page 27. 

High level capacities 


Capability CSI Media Server 


Maximum number of stations 900 (IP or TDM) 

Maximum number of trunks 400 

Ports 1300, limited by slots, not software 


1 of 2


Capability CSI Media Server 

IP endpoints 390 


Port-network connectivity Not applicable 

Supported media gateways CMC1 

Maximum number of supported 

gateways 

50 

Maximum locations One 

Survivability options Not available 

Number of LSPs in one configuration Not applicable 

Port networks One 


2 of 2 






Other Servers 

Server for Avaya SIP Enablement Services 


Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES) is dedicated to providing a variety of converged 

communications services based on the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). SIP is an 

endpoint-oriented, network messaging standard defined by the Internet Engineering Task 

Force. The fundamental concept behind SIP is that a user can have multiple devices. 

SES provides the necessary proxy, registrations, and redirection tasks necessary for SIP 

applications, such as Instant Messaging (IM). The server also provides the presence for use by 

SIP endpoints. An SES Release 3.1 server is set to communicate with one or more Linux-based 

media servers that run Avaya Communication Manager 3.1 or later. Then, the SIP proxy server 

supports communication among the various non-SIP endpoints and new SIP-enabled 

endpoints. Non-SIP endpoints supported by Communication Manager include analog, DCP, or 

H.323 stations and analog, digital or IP trunks. SIP endpoints include the Avaya 46XX Series 

SIP telephones, Avaya IP Softphone Release 5.1 and later, and Avaya SIP Softphone R2 and 

later. These SIP endpoints are registered with the Avaya proxy. Therefore, Avaya media servers 

can manage the SIP endpoints. 

Among other features, the SES Server proxies instant messages and provides presence 

functionality to support the Avaya IP Softphone. Meanwhile, Avaya Communication Manager 

handles the voice and telephony features in the Avaya IP Softphone R5. Avaya Communication 

Manager provides added value to SIP endpoints by extending the SIP telephony feature set. 


Avaya’s SIP architecture supports servers running SES of different types. 

There are several types of host architecture in the SES system: 

Edge server 

● SIngle edge server with one to 20 home servers 

● Combined home/edge server. 

The Edge server handles SIP requests from all domains, forwarding requests. These requests 

can be received from Home servers, from within the enterprise’s domain, and from other SIP 

proxies outside the enterprise’s domain. If an Edge server is used, then one or more Home 

servers must also exist in this architecture. Only one Edge server, or combined Home/Edge 

server, is allowed for any one domain. Edge servers can be duplexed for local failover. 


Other Servers 

Home server 

A Home server handles SIP requests for the specific domain assigned for this server. The 

Home server also forwards any requests pertaining to other domains to the Edge server. One to 

20 Home servers and exactly one Edge server is required in this scenario. Each Home server 

can support up to 15,000 SIP users. Home servers can be duplexed for local failover. 

Home/Edge server 

A combined Home/Edge server performs the functions of both a Home server and an Edge 

server for an enterprise. This is a single-server scenario. That is, no other Home or Edge 

servers can exist in this architecture. Home/edge combined servers can be duplexed for local 

failover. 

Figure 18: SIP Architecture 

3rd Party SIP 

Endpoints 

"Edge" 

Domain 

Server 

Domain 

Servers 

Multi-Vendor SIP 

Clients and Applications 

CM Features 

SIP Domains 

Internet, Intranet, Extranet 

Service Providers 

Toshiba SIP 

Phone 

SES 

Server 

sip:customer.com 

sip:customer.com 

SIP Phones 

XX Series 

SEAMLESS 

Communications 

IP Softphone 

SIP/Simple 

Instant Messaging 


PSTN 

Communication 

Manager 3.1 

"Feature" 

Server 

5 

4 5 

4 

5 

4 5 

4 

3 

2 3 

2 

3 

2 3 

2 

COMPACT 

disc 

1 

1 

0 

0 

COMPACT 

disc 

1 

1 

0 

0 



1 

2 

UID 

1 

2 

UID 

IP, Wireless, Digital 

and Analog Endpoints 

cydssip3 LAO 110805

Local failover option 


An optional local failover option may be configured to replicate the SES database and server 

software for any particular system node (home, edge, or combination home/edge). In this 

duplicated (duplex) configuration, one server is active and the other is in standby mode. If the 

active server fails or is taken out of service, it "fails-over" to the duplicated server. The 

duplicated server then becomes active and maintains service. When the originally active server 

is put back into service, it goes into standby mode. The duplicated server continues in active 

mode, providing service to the SIP endpoints. 

In each server in a duplex server configuration, a dual-port NIC card must be installed. One port 

of the dual-port NIC card on each server is then connected to that of the other server with a 

CAT5e or Cat 6 cable. The servers use this link to maintain database synchronization. 

Additionally, an RS-232 serial port on each of the servers must be cabled together. Each server 

uses this link for monitoring the status of the other server. 

Components 

The server hardware required for an Avaya SES Server Release 3.1 is the IBM e-server xSeries 

305 (S8500A), an IBM xSeries 306 (S8500B), or an IBM xSeries 306m (S8500C). These 

servers are referred to as the x305 or x306. 

Note: 

Note: SES runs on simplex x305 (S8500A) platforms only, not on duplex x305 

platforms. 

IBM includes various CDs with its e-servers, including Director CDs, NetXtreme gE CD, eServer 

xSeries 305 CD, and Enhanced Diagnostics CD. 

! CAUTION: 

CAUTION: The IBM CDs are not used for installation of SES. You must use the Avaya SES 

Setup and Install CD. 

An IBM Installation Guide is provided with the server. This guide includes instructions for 

installing the IBM Remote Supervisor Adapter (RSA) module and for installing the dual inline 

memory module (DIMM). Note that this memory must be added before use. 

The IBM Installation Guide for the x306 includes instructions to install the SAMP card, and 

instructions on how to install extra memory. 

To be used as an SES Home Server with fewer than 3,000 users, the x305 or x306 needs one 

additional 512MB DIMM of PC2100 266MHz CL2.5 ECC DDR SDRAM added to the existing 

512MB installed by default. The total installed RAM is then 1GB. 

To be used as an SES Edge Server, or as a Home supporting more than 3,000 but less than 

6,000 users, the x305 or x306 needs two 1GB DIMMs in addition to the RAM above. The total 

installed RAM is then 3GB. 


Other Servers 

Before you install any software, you must first disable the loader watchdog on the RSA or SAMP 

card. You must also verify and update the remote servicing card firmware. 

If you are installing a duplex system, then install an additional Intel ProShare dual Network 

Interface Card (NIC) in each server. 

One universal serial bus (USB) modem must be connected to each server, one modem for each 

of the duplex servers, for remote access. A simplex server also requires a serial modem be 

connected to its RSA module. Multiple modems can be configured to share one analog phone 

line. Each phone line answers after a different number of rings. Implementation and 

maintenance services require remote access in this way. 

The x305 or x306 arrives with a blank, unpartitioned hard-disk drive, and without an operating 

system or any Avaya server software files installed. These components must be installed and 

configured properly before SES use. 

In addition, the IP connectivity must be configured correctly on all Avaya media server(s) 

running Communication Manager. 

Support for SIP is enabled in Avaya Communication Manager running on any one of the 

Linux-based media servers. These servers include the following Avaya Media Servers: 

● S8700-series 

● S8500, or 

● S8300. 


SIP endpoints 

You can administer users’ SIP endpoints as an Outboard Proxy SIP (OPS) application type in 

Avaya Communication Manager for a traditional telephony experience and features. This 

application type provides additional telephony service to SIP endpoints. 

Endpoints for SIP include the following models: 

● Avaya SIP Softphone Release 2 or higher 

● Avaya IP Softphone Release 5.1 or higher 

● Avaya one-X Deskphone 9600-series telephones 

● 1600-series telephones 

● 4602SW IP telephone 

● 4610SW IP telephone 

● 4620SW/4621SW IP telephone 

● Toshiba SIP Business Phone SP-1020A 



Third party endpoints that are RF3261 compliant might be interoperable with the Converged 

Communications Sever. But Avaya supports only Avaya endpoints and select third party 

endpoints, such as the Toshiba SIP handset. 

Toshiba SIP Business Phone 

TheToshiba ® SIP Business Phone SP-1020A is designed for the Japanese market. The phone 

communicates with Avaya Communication Manager through a SIP trunk group. The phone 

interacts with the Communication Manager server using SIP signaling. Communication 

Manager communicates with the SES Server by a SIP trunk. The phones have a high 

functionality with current telephony features and access the features through Communication 

Manager. 


Other Servers 

Avaya Expanded Meet-me Conferencing Server 

The Avaya Expanded Meet-me Conferencing Server connects to a Communication Manager 

server over the customer’s LAN to provide Expanded Meet-me Conferencing. Expanded 

Meet-me Conferencing (EMMC) supports a conference bridge of up to 300 ports. This capacity 

is much greater than the limit of a 6-port conference bridge on a Communication Manager 

system without EMMC. 

Note: 

Note: The actual ports available for EMMC are determined by the Communication 

Manager license file, which licenses ports in blocks of 50 (50, 100, 150, 200, 250 

and 300).The maximum number of parties included in any single conference is 

administered with Communication Manager. 

All SIP-enabled media servers (S8300, S8500, or S8700-series Media Servers) can use the 

EMMC feature of Communication Manager. 

All Communication Manager telephones can use EMMC. However, for SIP telephones and SIP 

softphone to be able to use EMMC, the Communication Manager configuration also requires 

the SIP Enablement Services (SES). 


The Expanded Meet-me Conferencing application, which runs on the EMMC Server, requires 

that the EMMC Server is connected to a Communication Manager media server. With the 

following exception, the EMMC Server hardware is identical to that of the Communication 

Manager S8500C Media Server (see S8500C Media Server (front) on page 55 and S8500C 

Media Server (back) on page 56): 

● The optional NIC card with 2 additional Ethernet ports is not used with Expanded Meet-me 

Conferencing. 

The Server Availability Management Processor Board (SAMP) on the EMMC Server is used for 

remote maintenance and for remote reboot of the server. 



On an S8300 Media Server running Communication Manager, the internal Voice over IP (VoIP) 

resources enable the S8300 Media Server to communicate with the EMMC Server. For an 

S8500 or S8700-series Media Server running Communication Manager, the port network 

connected to the EMMC Server must have the following: 

Architecture 

● At least one TN2302AP IP Media Processor or TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 circuit 

pack for IP/TDM voice processing. 

The EMMC application supports only G.711 codec (both A-law and Mu-law), which means 

Communication Manager software must do the conversion. When TN2302AP is used, 

firmware vintage 72 and greater is required for RFC2833 for transport of DTMF as in the 

SIP case. 

● At least one TN799DP C-LAN circuit pack for the signaling links between the 

Communication Manager server and the EMMC Server. 

An example of the EMMC architecture is shown in Figure 19. 

Note: The 

Note: 

EMMC feature does not require SES for SIP trunking. SES is an optional 

service if SIP endpoints also will use Expanded Meet-me Conferencing. SES 

cannot communicate with the EMMC Server directly. SES must establish all 

conference calls via the Communication Manager server. 


Other Servers 

Figure 19: Expanded Meet-me Conferencing architecture 

6 

1 

disc disc disc 

7 

10 

Figure notes: EMMC architecture (example with an S8500 Media Server for Communication 

Manager) 

1. S8500 (shown), S8700-series, or S8300 Media Server 

NOTE: The S8300 Media Server uses its own G700 Ethernet interface to connect a SIP trunk over the LAN, not a 

media gateway (such as the G650 Media Gateway) and C-LAN circuit pack as shown in the figure. 

2. Ethernet Switch (does not apply to S8300). For local LAN connections that use the customer LAN, the same Ethernet switch 

may connect the media server, the media gateway (both C-LAN and IPSI), and the Meeting Exchange Server. 

3. Port network (G650 Media Gateway or stack [shown in figure]). May also be an G600, SCC1 stack, or MCC1 Media 

Gateway. 

4. IPSI-to-server control network connection via Ethernet switch 

5. TN799DP C-LAN for control of IP endpoints and adjunct connections 

6. Meeting Exchange Server 

7. SIP trunks 

8. Customer LAN 

9. Optional Converged Communication Server (also an IBM X306 server) for SIP endpoints 

10. Conferencing endpoints (analog, DCP, and BRI) 

11. SIP telephone conferencing endpoints 

12. SIP Softphone conferencing endpoints 


3 

LNK COL Tx Rx FDX Hspd LAG PoE 2 4 6 8 10 12 

14 16 18 20 22 24 

ROUT SYS PWR 

2 

S1 S2 1 3 5 7 9 11 

13 15 17 19 21 23 

4 

7 

8 

9 

7 

12 

11 

cycmemmc LAO 031405

Backup options 


You can backup the EMMC Server to a server on the LAN or to the Compact Flash memory 

reader. This reader is installed in one of the USB ports. The Compact Flash memory reader 

uses a 128-MB Compact Flash card. Avaya recommends that use of the industrial grade 

Compact Flash for the following reasons: 

● Improved data integrity and reliability 

- Powerful error correction 

● Extreme endurance 

- 2,000,000 program/erase cycles per block 


- Mean time between failures (MTBF) greater than 3 million hours 

● Industry-leading 7-year warranty 

● Enhanced durability 

- New RTV silicone for added strength and stability 

The industrial grade Compact Flash is available through Avaya and Avaya business partners. 


The EMMC feature has the following capabilities and capacities: 


Description Capacity Comments 

EMMC Servers per system 

configuration 

Maximum number of EMMC 

ports 

Maximum number of EMMC 

ports simultaneously active 

Maximum number of SIP 

trunks simultaneously active 

1 

300 

300 

300 Each call to an EMMC Server is a SIP 

trunk call from the calling party to the 

Expanded Meet-me conference bridge. 

There are a maximum of 255 trunks per 

trunk group, which means two trunk 

groups must be administered to achieve 

the 300 maximum trunks (and ports). 1 

1 of 2 


Other Servers 


Description Capacity Comments 


simultaneous conference 

calls 

150 The maximum assumes two parties for 

each call, using all 300 ports. 

Number of trunk groups 2 If the maximum of 300 EMMC ports is 

purchased, two trunk groups (and 

signaling groups) must be administered. 

Number of signaling groups 2 (one per trunk 

group) 


supported gateways 

Transport Layer Security 

(TLS) links 

Codec used G.711 



If the maximum of 300 EMMC ports is 

purchased, two signaling groups (and 

trunk groups) must be administered. 

The maximum for the connected media 

server (S8300, S8500, or S8700-series) 

1 If two signaling groups are administered, 

they both use the same TLS link, since 

they use the same IP addresses for the 

C-LAN circuit pack and EMMC Server. 

Connectivity SIP trunking, either through a C-LAN circuit pack (S8500 or 

S8700-series Media Server) or though the G700 Ethernet port 

(S8300 Media Server) 

Supported media gateways All media gateways supported by Communication Manager 

2 of 2 

1. The actual number of SIP trunks for the EMMC feature may vary due to other SIP applications such as SES for 

SIP endpoints and OPTIM (Off-PBX Telephony Integration with Communication Manager) wireless endpoints, 

as well as the platform configurations. The total number of SIP trunks that Communication Manager can 

support is 2000.

Media gateways and integrated gateways 

G150 Media Gateway 


The Avaya G150 Media Gateway is an H.323 media gateway that is managed by a server 

running Communication Manager software. The G150 Media Gateway is a high-performance 

converged telephony and networking device that sits in a small branch location. The G150 

Media Gateway is designed for very small branch offices with four to 20 users. The G150 Media 

Gateway provides local trunk and telephone exchange and data networking. 

The G150 integrates seamlessly with a remote server running Avaya Communication Manager, 

Release 3.0 or later, call processing software. The remote server can be one of the following 

servers: 

● DEFINITY Server CSI 

● DEFINITY Server SI 

● S8700-series Media Server 

● S8500 Media Server 

● S8300 Media Server in a G700 Media Gateway configuration 

Note: 

Note: The S8300 Media Server running in a G350 Media Gateway does not support the 

G150 Media Gateway. 

The G150 Media Gateway provides an effective way to connect IP phones, analog phones, and 

trunks at a remote site to a Communication Manager server. The G150 Media Gateway 

provides full Communication Manager functionality and features to the remote site either 

through a WAN or LAN using the IP protocol. 

Note: The 

Note: 

G150 Media Gateway uses the basic hardware and design of the IP Office 

product. However, unlike the IP Office, the G150 Media Gateway usually serves 

as an H.323 gateway in accordance with the Communication Manager Remote 

Office group. As such, the Communication Manager media server manages the 

G150 Media Gateway. The G150 Media Gateway operates as a stand-alone 

gateway only when it enters survivable mode. 



Models 

The G150 Media Gateway is available in two fixed-configuration variants which provide a 

different mix of analog trunks, analog extensions, and Voice-over-IP capacity. Depending on the 

model chosen, up to a maximum of 20 extensions can be supported (4 Analog and 16 IP). 

The two predefined configurations are detailed in the following table. 

G150 2T + 4A (4 VoIP) 

The G150 2T+4A (4 VoIP) provides: 

● Two Analog Loop Start Trunks with Caller ID enabled. 

● Four analog extension interfaces. 

● Three VoIP Codecs (G.723.1, G.711 and G.729a). 

● 4 Switched Ethernet ports (Layer 2). 

● Dedicated Switched Ethernet WAN port (Layer 3). 

● Built-in DHCP and TFTP servers 

● Two PCMCIA slots for wireless and flash card support. 

● A 64 MB Flash Card for IP phone file storage and TFTP server download to IP phones. 

● WAN slot for optional WAN card (V.35, V.24, X.21, BRI, T1 PRI). 

● DTE port. 

G150 Model Analog 

Trunks+ 

● Audio port for external music on hold source. 

Analog 

Extensions 

G150 2T + 4A (4 VoIP) 2 4 4 

G150 4T+4A (16 VoIP) 4 4 16 

● Two relay switch port for door entry systems (External O/P socket) —. currently not used. 


Voice Over 

IP Channels

Figure 20: G150 2T+4A (4 VoIP) Front Panel 

Figure notes: 

1 2 3 4 


1. 2 x analog trunk ports 

2. 4 x analog extension ports (POT) 

3. 4 x switched LAN ports 

4. Ethernet WAN port (at default LAN2) 


G1502T LAO 030505 



Figure 21: G150 2T+4A (4 VoIP) Back Panel 

Figure notes: 


1. DC power I/P socket 

2. DTE port 

1 2 3 4 

5 6 7 

3. External O/P socket (not used) 

4. Audio I/P socket 

5. Functional Earth jack socket 

6. Knockout panel(s) for trunk module kits 

7. 2 x PCMCIA slots for wireless and memory card support. 

8. WAN X.21/V.35 trunk module 

9. Quad BRI trunk module 

10. PRI trunk module 

8 9 10 


G1502Tb KLC 102304

G150 4T+4A (16 VoIP) 

The G150 4T+4A (16 VoIP) provides: 

Note: Although 

● Four Analog Loop Start Trunks with Caller ID enabled. 

● Four analog Extension interfaces. 


● Sixteen VoIP Codecs (G.723.1, G.711a, G.711u, and G.729a) for supporting the conversion 

between IP voice and TDM voice. 

● 4 Switched Ethernet ports (Layer 2). 

● Dedicated Switched Ethernet WAN port (Layer 3). 

● Built-in DHCP and TFTP servers 

● 2 x PCMCIA Slots for Wireless and Memory card support. 

● A 64 MB Flash Card for IP phone file storage and TFTP server download to IP phones. 

● WAN Slot for Optional WAN card (V35, X.21, quad-BRI, T1 PRI). 

● DTE port. 

● Audio port for external music on hold source. 

● Two relay switch port for door entry systems (External O/P socket) —. currently not used. 

Note: 

the G150 4T+4A model has 8 DS (digital) ports, they are not currently 

supported. 



Figure 22: G150 4T+4A (16 VoIP) Front Panel 

Figure notes: 


1. 4 x analog trunk ports 

2. 8 x analog extension ports (POT) 

3. 4 x switched LAN ports 

5 5 

1 2 3 4 

4. Ethernet WAN port (at default LAN2) 

5. 8 x digital station ports, not currently used 


G1504T KLC 102804

Figure 23: G150 4T+4A (16 VoIP) Back Panel 

Figure notes: 


1. DC power I/P socket 

2. DTE port 


1 2 3 4 

5 6 7 

3. External O/P socket (not used) 

4. Audio I/P socket 

5. Functional Earth jack socket 

6. Knockout panel(s) for trunk module kits 

7. 2 x PCMCIA slots for wireless and memory card support. 

8. WAN X.21/V.35 trunk module 

9. Quad BRI trunk module 

10. PRI trunk module 

G150 WAN Expansion Interfaces 

8 9 10 


All G150 units include an expansion slot for an optional WAN interface of the following types. 

Check locally for availability. These WAN interface cards expand voice PSTN trunk options to 

include BRI and T1/ISDN PRI. The local serving PSTN provider may offer one or the other of 

these interfaces. Each of these interface cards are described in more detail. 

G1502Tb KLC 102304 



G150 WAN Expansion Module 

This expansion card provides a single WAN connection (X.21 or V.35) by a standard 37-way 

D-Type socket. For details of the relevant cable specifications and pin-outs, see the "Getting 

Started with the G150 Media Gateway" document. Line speeds up to and including 2Mbps are 

supported on the interface. The carrier providing the line dictates the actual operating speed, 

i.e. in some territories the maximum speed might be 1.544Mbps. 

G150 BRI Module 

The G150 Media Gateway supports the standard a Basic Rate ISDN (BRI) trunk module, which 

provides 4 European Basic Rate ISDN 4-wire S/T-Bus interfaces (8 trunks). 

Details of the supported supplementary services on BRI interfaces are given in the 'Public and 

Private Voice Networks' section. 

Note: This 

Note: 

module is not available in all territories. Check for availability. 

G150 PRI Module 

The G150 Media Gateway also supports the PRI module. This module provides a single T1 

primary rate trunk interface for supporting voice services and fractional leased lines. This 

interface supports up to 256kbps bandwidth on IP and Frame Relay services. 

Note: This 

Survivability 

Note: 

module is not available in all territories and does not support E1. Check for 

availability. 

If, for any reason, communication stops between a G150 Media Gateway and the media server 

running Communication Manager, the G150 Media Gateway automatically assumes control of 

call processing for local extensions and trunks. The G150 Media Gateway enables a built-in 

H.323 gatekeeper, which allows collocated branch office IP telephones to register with the G150 

Media Gateway. Once the IP telephones are registered, the G150 Media Gateway assumes 

control of all lamps, displays, and buttons on the IP telephones. Only IP-to-IP shuffled calls are 

preserved during the transition of control to the G150 Media Gateway. Any other calls end. 

Note: The 

Note: 

IP address of the G150 survivable gatekeeper is the last entry in the 

alternate gatekeeper list for any IP telephone that was originally registered with 

Communication Manager. 


Operation in survivable mode 


In survivable mode, a G150 Media Gateway uses the parameters that the system administrator 

administers in the G150 administration interface. These parameters, which must match as 

closely as possible those established on the Communication Manager server, include the 

following features: 

● Dial plan 

● Trunk access codes 

● System parameters 

● Feature assignments 

In survivable mode, the G150 allows locally connected endpoints to: 

● Call other locally-connected endpoints 

● Make and receive external calls over the public network. 

● Use the following features: 

- Called List Identification (CLI) and Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 

- Hold 

- Transfer 

- Call waiting indication 

- Last number redial 

- Drop call 

In addition, G150 Media Gateway assumes control of the front panel LEDs of the G150 Media 

Gateway. As a result, G150 LED indications in survivable mode differ from those when the 

G150 Media Gateway is under control of the remote server. 

While in survivable mode, incoming calls that go to voice mail coverage connect to the G150 

voice mail cache. The G150 Media Gateway uses this cache to capture and store voice 

messages. Service to the media server running Communication Manager is restored. Then, the 

G150 Media Gateway forwards the messages to the server’s central messaging system (for 

example, Modular Messaging). Users can then get their messages. 

Return of control to server 

In survivable mode, the G150 Media Gateway can continue to support calls indefinitely. 

However, while in survivable mode, the G150 Media Gateway attempts to reregister with the 

remote server according to administered time intervals. When the G150 Media Gateway 

successfully reregisters with the remote server, the G150 Media Gateway exits survivable 

mode. The G150 relinquishes call processing control to the remote server. The G150 forces the 

local endpoints to also reregister with the remote server. Active calls are preserved when call 

processing control returns to the remote server. When the call is completed, any endpoint that is 

on an active call reregisters with the remote server. 



Connectivity 

Optional Wireless LAN Card & Access Point 

All G150 units can be configured to support connectivity to an 802.11 Wireless LAN 

infrastructure. This is enabled using the combination of the PCMCIA-format Wireless LAN Card 

and the Access Point License Key. 

An Access Point acts as a Hub in a wireless network providing connectivity between devices in 

the vicinity. In ideal conditions a range of up to 550m (1,750 ft) is achievable. But this range is 

reduced if walls and other obstacles are present. Use this capability where local conditions 

impair coverage and additional Access Points need to cover the black spots. 

Figure 24: G150 WiFi Access Point 

When deployed as part of a wireless network, access to the G150 Media Gateway can be 

secured against intruders. Security is based on either the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) or 

RC4. WEP uses 64 bit encryption key and RC4 uses a 128 bit encryption key. Only devices with 

a matching security key can participate on the network. 

The Wireless Access Point that can be enabled on the G150 Media Gateway complies to the 

IEEE 802.11 and IEEE 802.11b standards. These standards meet the Wireless Ethernet 

Compatibility Alliance (WECA) Wireless Fidelity Wi-Fi requirements for interoperability. 


Wireless specifications 

● 2.4 GHz to 2.5 GHz band. 

● Automatic fallback 11Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 2Mbps or 1Mbps. 

● IEEE 802.11 and IEEE 802.11b Compliance. 

● Wireless Fidelity Wi-Fi Compliance. 

● Interoperable with other 802.11b compliant devices. 

● WEP or RC4 security. 

● Range up to 550M (1750ft). 

Table 8: G150 WiFi ranges 


Range (meters/ft) 11Mbps 5.5Mbps 2Mbps 1Mbps 

Open 160m/252ft 270m/885ft 400m/1300ft 550m/1750ft 

Semi-Open 50m/165ft 70m/230ft 90m/300ft 115m/375ft 

Closed 25m/80ft 35m/115ft 40m/130ft 50m/165ft 

Receiver Sensitivity dBm -82 -87 -91 -94 

Delay Spread (at FER of


S8300 Media Server (in a 

G700 Media Gateway) 

Each G150 Media Gateways supported by a media server uses IP stations, IP trunks, and 

signaling groups. This usage counts against the following maximum capacities: 

Each G150 Media Gateway affects the system capacity limits of the controlling media server in 

the following ways: 

● Each analog port on a G150 Media Gateway counts as one IP station against the media 

server’s capacity limits. 

● Each analog trunk and each DS0 channel on a BRI or T1 digital trunk connected to a G150 

Media Gateway counts as on IP trunk. This number counts against the media server’s 

capacity limits. 

● Each G150 Media Gateway requires a signaling group on the media server to handle 

traffic over the G150 Media Gateway’s analog trunks. These G150 trunks appear to 

Communication Manager as a group of virtual trunks. 

● Each G150 Media Gateway requires a signaling group on the media server to handle 

traffic over the G150 Media Gateway’s digital trunks. These G150 trunks also appear to 

Communication Manager as a group of virtual trunks. 


50 

DEFINITY Server SI 80 

DEFINITY Server CSI 80 

Capacity limit S8700series 

S8500 S8300 DEF SI DEF CSI 

Total IP stations (max) 12000 2400 450 1500 390 

Total IP trunks (max) 8000 800 450 400 400 

Number of signaling 

groups (max) 

Server Number of G150 Media 

Gateways Supported 

650 650 650 110 110

Avaya G250 Media Gateway 


The Avaya G250 Media Gateway is an H.248 media gateway that is managed by a server 

running Communication Manager software. The Avaya CM Branch Gateways (G250 and G350) 

form part of Avaya’s solution for extending communication capabilities from the headquarters of 

an organization to all collaborative branch locations. Avaya CM Branch Gateways help you 

provide the same high quality services to all organization members regardless of their location. 


The G250 Media Gateway is a high-performance converged telephony and networking device 

that is located in small branch locations, providing all infrastructure needs in one box — 

telephone exchange and data networking. The G250 is designed for used in a two to 12 user 

environment, aimed at small branch offices with two to eight stations. The G250 features a VoIP 

engine, WAN router, and Power over Ethernet LAN switch. The G250 supports legacy analog 

telephones, but not DCP telephones. 

The G250 Media Gateway integrates seamlessly with the following Avaya media servers: 

● S8700-series 

● S8500, and 

● S8300 

Note: 

Note: The G250 is supported only by the "B" version of the S8300 Media Server. In this 

section, any references to the S8300 Media Server imply the S8300B version. 

These servers run Avaya Communication Manager call processing software to provide the 

same top quality telephony services to the small branch office as to the headquarters of the 

organization. The media server can be located at the headquarters and serve the G250 

remotely. 

The G250 can optionally house an internal Avaya S8300 media server as a local survivable 

processor (Enhanced Local Survivability) or as the main media server for stand-alone 

deployment. As a local survivable processor, the S8300 is capable of providing full 

Communication Manager functionality in the event that the connection with the server is lost. 

As an alternative to the local survivable processor, the G250 can instead be configured for 

Standard Local Survivability (SLS). See Survivability on page 123. 

The G250 supports the connection of PCs, LAN switches, IP phones, analog telephones, and 

trunks, via fixed analog and PoE ports on the chassis. A media module slot supports either of 

two WAN media modules, for connection to a WAN. 

There are four models of the G250, with various port combinations for support of analog, BRI, or 

T1/E1 trunks or DCP telephones, as described in Models on page 116. 


Models 

The G250 Media Gateway supports STRP media encryption. 

For more information about features of the G250 Media Gateway, see 03-300435, Overview of 

the Avaya G250 and G350 Media Gateways. 

The G250 is available in the following models: 

CAUTION: The 

● Analog model (G250-Analog). The G250-Analog includes four analog trunk ports, two 

analog line ports, a Fast Ethernet WAN port, and eight PoE LAN ports. 

● BRI model (G250-BRI). The G250-BRI includes two ISDN BRI trunk ports, one analog 

trunk port, two analog line ports, a Fast Ethernet WAN port, and eight PoE LAN ports. 

● DCP model (G250-DCP). The G250-DCP provides twelve DCP (Digital Communications 

Protocol) ports, as well as four analog trunk ports, two analog line ports, a Fast Ethernet 

WAN port, and two LAN ports. 

! CAUTION: 

DCP ports on the G250-DCP are intended for in-building use only. Phone 

lines connected to those ports are not to be routed out-of-building. Failure to 

comply with this restriction could cause harm to personnel or equipment. 

● DS1 model (G250-DS1). The G250-DS1 provides a T1/E1 and a PRI trunk port, enabling 

support of fractional T1/E1 and PRI. The G250-DS1 also includes one analog trunk port, 

two analog line ports, a Fast Ethernet WAN port, and eight PoE LAN ports. 


Components 

Chassis 


Figure 25 shows the G250-Analog Media Gateway chassis. Figure 26 shows the G250-BRI 

Media Gateway chassis. Figure 27 shows the G250-DCP Media Gateway chassis. Figure 28 

shows the G250-DS1 Media Gateway chassis. 

Figure 25: The Avaya G250-Analog Media Gateway Chassis 

V1 

V3 

3 

Figure notes: 

1 

ETR 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

Remove before removing or inserting S8300 module 

1. V1 — ICC/LSP Slot 







4 

ETR 

TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK TRUNK LINE LINE 

3/1 3/2 3/3 3/4 

5 

3/5 3/6 

V4 

SYSTEM 

6 

MDM 

ALM 

CPU 

PWR 

V2 

7 

CONSOLE USB 

CCA ETH WAN 

Interface InterfaceContact 

Closure 

10/1 I/F FE 10/2 

Console USB 

8 

9 

2 

10 

ETH LAN PoE 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

10/310/4 10/510/6 10/710/8 10/910/10 

RST ASB 

G250 

8. USB port 





13. Alternate Software Bank (ASB) button 

11 

12 

13 

h2cmg25a LAO 120605 


Figure 26: The Avaya G250-BRI Media Gateway Chassis 

3 

Figure notes: 




4. Analog trunk 


6. ISDN BRI LEDs 

7. ISDN BRI trunks 



10. USB port 






Figure 27: The Avaya G250-DCP Media Gateway Chassis 

3 

V1 

V3 

ETR 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

Figure notes: 

4 

1 2 







5 

6 


8. USB port 



11. ETH LAN ports 

12. DCP ports 

13. DCP port LEDs 


7 


TRUNK 

1 2 3 4 

ETR 

LINE 

5 6 

SYSTEM 

8 9 

MDM 

ALM 

CPU 

PWR 

10 

11 

12 

1 2 

4 5 

6 

1 2 

13 

14 

15 

V2 

RST 

V10 

ASB8 

ETH LAN 2 DCP 

12 

V4 

CONSOLE USB CCA 

4 

ETH WAN 

ALM 

TST 

3 

ACT 

3 4 

1 11 

7 9 10 11 12 

G250-DCP 

13 

h2cmg25p LAO 111605

Figure 28: The Avaya G250-DS1 Media Gateway Chassis 

V3 

3 

ETR 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

V1 

TRUNK 

ETR 

Figure notes: 

LINE 

1 2 3 

4 5 


ALM 

TST 

ACT 

SIG 




4. Analog trunk 


6. T1/E1/PRI trunk interface 

LEDs 

7. T1/E1 interface 

8. Service 

6 

T1/E1 

1 

1 


SERVICE ONLY 

V4 

SYSTEM 

MDM 

ALM 

CPU 

PWR 

CONSOLE USB 

CCA ETH WAN 

1 2 



11. USB port 






4 

3 

3 4 

ETH LAN PoE 


5 6 7 8 9 10 

7 8 9 10 12 13 14 

11 

2 

10 

9 

V10 

RST ASB 

15 16 


V2 

G250-DS1 

h2cmg251 LAO 111605

Front panel 

Table 9: Fixed ports and buttons on the G250 front panel on page 120 describes the functions 

of the fixed ports and buttons on the G250 front panel. 

Table 9: Fixed ports and buttons on the G250 front panel 


TRUNK Four analog trunk ports (G250-Analog Media 

Gateway, G250-DCP Media Gateway) or one 

analog trunk port (G250-BRI Media Gateway, 

G250-DS1 Media Gateway). These fixed trunk 

ports support loop-start, DIOD (for Japan only) 

trunks and caller ID detection. 

LINE Two analog telephone ports. 

An analog relay provides Emergency Transfer 

Relay (ETR) feature. 

For the G250-Analog and G250-DCP, the relay is 

between TRUNK port 3/4 and LINE port 3/5. 

For the G250-BRI and G250-DS1, the relay is 

between TRUNK port 3/1 and LINE port 3/2. 

Also used for incoming analog DID trunks. 

The G250 integrated analog line ports support 

three ringer loads, which is the ringer equivalency 

number (REN), for the following loop lengths: 

- 20,000 feet (6096 meters) over 0.65 mm 

(.025 in.) wire (22 AWG) 


(.02 in.) wire (24 AWG) 


(.016 in.) wire (26 AWG) 

At .1 or less REN ringer loads, the supported 

loop length is 20,000 feet (6096 meters) at 

22, 24, and 26 AWG. 

ISDN BRI TRUNK 

(G250-BRI Media 

Gateway) 

Two 4 wire S/T ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) 

2B+D access ports with RJ-45 jacks. Each port 

interfaces to the central office at the ISDN T 

reference point. The ISDN BRI trunk ports do not 

support: 

● BRI stations 

● Combining both B channels together to form 

a 128-kbps channel 


1 of 3

Table 9: Fixed ports and buttons on the G250 front panel (continued) 


CONSOLE Console RS-232 interface port for direct 

connection of CLI console. RJ-45 connector. 

USB USB port. Supports the connection of 

● USB flash drive 

● USB externally powered hub 

● The Multitech MultiModemUSB 

MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB modem. 


CCA RJ-45 port for ACS (308) contact closure adjunct 

box. 

ETH WAN RJ-45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet port for 

connection to a cable or DSL broadband modem/ 

router. 

ETH LAN POE 

(G250-Analog, G250-BRI, 

and G250-DS1) 

Eight Power over Ethernet (PoE) LAN ports with 

80 watts (aggregated for all ports) for connecting 

IP phones or any Ethernet devices, such as PCs. 

RST Reset button. Resets chassis configuration. 

ASB Alternate Software Bank button. Reboots the G250 

with the software image in the alternate bank. 

DCP (G250-DCP) Twelve DCP ports. These DCP ports are intended 

for in-building use only. The G250-DCP ports 

support a loop length as follows: 

● 5500 feet (1676 meters) over 0.65 mm (.025 

in.) wire (22 AWG) 

● 3500 feet (1067 meters) over 0.5 mm (.02 

in.) wire (24 AWG) 

● 2200 (671 meters) over 0.4 mm (.016 in.) 

wire (26 AWG) 

2 of 3 



Site requirements 

Table 9: Fixed ports and buttons on the G250 front panel (continued) 


T1/E1 port (G250-DS1) For T1, this port is capable of supporting inband 

signalling across all 24 channels (supports a 

maximum bandwidth of 1.536 Mbps). 

For E1, this port is capable of supporting R2MFC 

signalling across all 30 channels (supports a 

maximum bandwidth of 1.92 Mbps). 

PRI ports (G250-DS1) The PRI ports are capable of supporting PRI 

signalling for 23 or 30 bearer channels. NFAS 

signalling is not supported. 

The following table shows you the site requirements of the G350 Media Gateway. 

Description Value 

Ambient working temperature 32-104 °F (0-40 °C) 

Operation altitude up to 10,000 ft. (3048 m) 

Front clearance 12 in. (30 cm.) 

Rear clearance 18 in. (45 cm.) 

Humidity 95% non-condensing relative humidity 

Power rating 100-240 V~, 50-60 Hz, 2.2 A Max 

Power cord specifications 

Following are specifications for power cords suitable for use with the G250: 

For North America: The cordset must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, 16 AWG, 3-conductor (3rd 

wire ground), type SJT. One end is to be terminated to an IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector 

rated 10A, 250V. The other end terminates to either a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug for nominal 

125V applications or a NEMA 6-15P attachment plug for nominal 250V applications. 

For Outside North America: The cord must be VDE Certified or Harmonized (HAR), rated 

250V, 3- conductor (3rd wire ground), 1.0 mm2 minimum conductor size. The cord terminates at 


3 of 3


one end to a VDE Certified/CE Marked IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector rated 10A, 250V. 

The cord’s other end terminates to a 3-conductor grounding type attachment plug rated at a 

minimum of 10A, 250V. The configuration is specific for the region/country in which the cord is 

used. The attachment plug must bear the safety agency certifications mark(s) for the region/ 

country of installation 


The media modules reside in the G250 Media Gateway and interact with the motherboard and 

backplane. 

Note: 

Note: For stand-alone mode, the S8300 Media Server is inserted into slot 1. See Avaya 

S8300 Media Server on page 29. 

There are two WAN media modules: 

● MM340 T1/E1 data WAN – For information, see MM340 E1/T1 data WAN Media 

Module on page 300. 

● MM342 USP data WAN – For information, see MM342 USP data WAN Media Module on 

page 301. The MM340 and MM342, are not supported by the Avaya G700 Media 

Gateway. Do not insert an MM340 or MM342 media module into an Avaya G700 Media 

Gateway. 

Survivability 

The G250 Media Gateway supports Standard Local Survivability (SLS). SLS is a configurable 

software module that allows a local G250 to provide a core set of Media Gateway Controller 

functions when no link is available to the server, an LSP, or an Enterprise Survivable Server 

(ESS). SLS is configured on a system-wide basis using the new Provisioning and Installation 

Manager (PIM), or SLS can be configured on an individual G250 using the command line 

interface (CLI). 

SLS is supported as follows on the G350: 

● G250-Analog: SLS supported for all analog interfaces, IP phone, and IP Softphone 

● G250-BRI: SLS supported for all analog interfaces, ISDN BRI trunk interfaces, IP phone, 

and IP Softphone 

● G250-DCP: SLS supported for all analog and DCP interfaces, IP phone, IP Softphone, and 

DCP phone 

● G250-DS1: SLS supported for all analog interfaces, ISDN PRI trunk interfaces, non-ISDN 

digital DS1 trunk interfaces, IP phone, and IP Softphone 



The following table outlines the capacities of various G250 services. 

CAUTION: Some 

! CAUTION: 

capacities might change. For the most up-to-date list, see Avaya 

Communication Manager System Capacities Table (03-300511). 

Table 10: G250 Capabilities 

Description Capacity* Comments 

Media Gateway Limits 

Maximum number of G250 

Media Gateways controlled by 

an S8500 or S8700-series 

Media Server 

Maximum number of G250 

Media Gateways controlled by 

an external S8300 media 

server housed in a G700 

Media Gateway 

Media servers registered as 

Media Gateway Controllers. If 

an MGC becomes unavailable, 

the G250 uses the next MGC 

on the list. 

250 This number also applies if a combination of 

Avaya G700 Media Gateways, G250 Media 

Gateways, and G350 Media Gateways are 

controlled by the same external media server. 


50 

4 The built-in SLS module can be considered a 

fifth MGC, although its functionality is more 

limited than that of a full scale media server. 

Media module slots 2 One S8300 media server slot (V1) for 

insertion of S8300 only. One WAN media 

module slot (V2) for insertion of a WAN media 

module only. 

Maximum number of WAN 

media modules 

Maximum number of voice 

media modules 

Maximum total number of 

telephones supported by the 

G250 

Maximum number of IP 

telephones 

1 Always in slot v2. 

0 

14 

12 Limited by the number of VoIP resources 

used and the calling patterns (VoIP to VoIP 

conferencing, VoIP to non-VoIP etc.) 

1 of 2

Table 10: G250 Capabilities (continued) 

Description Capacity* Comments 

Maximum number of analog 

phones 

Maximum number of DCP 

phones 

Maximum number of BRI 

endpoints 

2 


12 G250-DCP only. None in the other G-250 

models. 

0 

DS-1 facilities 1 T1/E1 G-250 DS1 only. None in the other G-250 

models. 

Maximum number of all trunks 

of any type 

Maximum number of analog 

trunks 

Maximum number of BRI 

trunks 

Maximum number of E1/T1 

voice trunks 

Simultaneous two-way 

conversations from IP phone 

to legacy telephone or trunk 

Miscellaneous 

4 (5 on 

G250-BRI, 

10 on 

G250-DS1) 

4 (Analog, 

G250-DCP) 

1 

(G250-BRI, 

G250-DS1) 

2 (G-250 

BRI only) 

All ports are fixed. 

Four voice channels, two D-channels. 

1 G250-DS1 only. None in the other G250 

models. 

10 (Analog, 

G250-BRI) 

16 

(G250-DCP, 

G250-DS1) 

True for all codecs, and all encryption 

combinations. 

Fax capacity 4 Simultaneous fax transmissions using VoIP 

resources 

Touch-tone recognition (TTR) 8 Receivers 

Tone Generation As much as necessary for all TDM calls 

Announcements (VAL) 6 playback channels for playing announcements. 

10 minutes for G711-quality stored announcements and up 

to five minutes for music-on-hold. 

2 of 2 



The Avaya CM Branch Gateways (G250 and G350) form part of Avaya’s solution for extending 

communication capabilities from the headquarters of an organization to all collaborative branch 

locations. Avaya CM Branch Gateways help you provide the same high quality services to all 

organization members regardless of their location. 


The G350 is a high-performance converged telephony and networking device that sits in a small 

branch location, providing all infrastructure needs in one box. These needs include telephone 

exchange and data networking. The G350 is designed for use in an eight to 72 user 

environment, aimed at branch offices with 16 to 40 stations. The G350 features a VoIP engine, 

WAN router, and Power over Ethernet LAN switch, and provides full support for IP, DCP, and 

analog telephones. 

The G350 Media Gateway integrates seamlessly with the following Avaya media servers: 

● S8700-series, 

● S8500 

● S8400, and 

● S8300 

These servers run Avaya Communication Manager call processing software to provide the 

same top quality telephony services to the small branch office as to the headquarters of the 

organization. The media server can be located at the headquarters and serve the G350 

remotely. 

The G350 can optionally house an internal Avaya S8300 media server as a local survivable 

processor or as the main media server for stand-alone deployment. As an alternative to the 

local survivable processor, the G350 can instead be configured for Standard Local Survivability 

(SLS). See Survivability on page 132. 

In addition to advanced and comprehensive telephony services, the G350 provides full data 

networking services, precluding the need for a WAN router or LAN switch. 

The G350 is a modular device, adaptable to support different combinations of endpoint devices. 

Pluggable media modules provide interfaces for different types of telephones and trunks. A 

combination is selected to suit the needs of the branch. 

A LAN media module with Ethernet ports that are PoE standard compliant provides support for 

IP telephones as well as all other types of data devices. A range of telephony modules provides 

full support for legacy equipment such as analog and digital telephones. 




For more information about features of the G350 Media Gateway, see 03-300435, Overview of 

the Avaya G250 and G350 Media Gateways. 


Deployment modes 

The G350 is a modular device with multiple configuration possibilities to meet specific individual 

needs. Six slots in the G350 chassis house a customized selection of media modules. These 

media modules connect to different types of circuit switched phones, trunks and data devices. 

One of the slots can house an internal media server. A major configuration option is of which 

type of media server to deploy. The media server can be a media module or a stand-alone 

device. 

The G350 can be deployed in one of two basic working modes: 

● Distributed Avaya CM Branch Gateways. In this mode, an external media server controls 

the G350. This can be a stand-alone media server, such as the S8500 or the 

S8700-series server, or a separate media gateway in a standalone configuration. 

The G350 can also house an S8300 Media Server module to function as a Local 

Survivable Processor (LSP). This LSP can take over control of the G350 if the external 

media server stops serving the G350. For a summary of how the LSP in a G350 works, 

see S8300 Media Server in an LSP configuration on page 37. 

● Stand-alone. In this mode, an internally housed S8300 Media Server module controls the 

G350. See Avaya S8300 Media Server on page 29. 

Multiple G350s can be deployed in many remote branches of a large organization. Large 

branches or main offices can deploy an Avaya G700 Media Gateway, which provides similar 

functionality to the G350 for a larger number of users. Up to 50 G350 and G700 Media 

Gateways can be controlled by a single S8300 Media Server housed in a G700 Media Gateway. 

Up to 250 G350 and G700 Media Gateways can be controlled by a single S8500 or 

S8700-series Media Server. 

Expanded capacity and multiple G350 gateways in a branch 

You can deploy multiple G350 media gateways in branch offices and benefit from increased 

capacities and additional configuration options. Beginning with Avaya Communication Manager 

release 3.1.X, the advanced mode in Avaya Solution Designer reflects these additional 

capacities. The Solution Designer allows you to build a G350 configuration and verify that it 

meets system resource limitations. 

You can use the G350 media gateway with a S8300B as a primary server for up to five G250 or 

G350 media gateways. You can install any combination of media modules. These 

configurations are subject to traffic engineering rules. See Table 14: G350 Capabilities on 

page 133 for more information. 


Note: Maximum 

Components 

Chassis 

Note: 

capacities depend on the specific configuration of the branch gateway. 

Verify your planned configuration with Avaya Solution Designer. 

The following figure shows the G350 chassis. 

Figure 29: G350 chassis 

The G350 Media Gateway chassis has the following dimensions: 

The chassis features: 

Table 11: Dimensions of the G350 chassis 


Height 13.3 cm (5.24 in.) 

Width 48.3 cm (19 in.) 

Depth 40 cm (15.7 in.) 

Weight of empty chassis 9-10 kg (19.8 - 22 lb.) 

● Six media module slots, V1 to V6. 

● Fixed ports and buttons, including embedded analog media module V7. 


Ports and buttons 

Table 12: Ports on the G350 chassis 



TRUNK An analog trunk port. Part of an integrated analog media module. The 

fixed trunk port supports loop-start, ground-start, CAMA, and DIOD (for 

Japan only) trunks. 

LINE Two analog telephone ports of the integrated analog media module. An 

analog relay between TRUNK port 7/1 and the furthest left LINE port 7/2 

provides Emergency Transfer Relay (ETR) feature. Also used for 

incoming analog DID trunks. 

The G350 integrated analog line ports support three ringer loads, which 

is the ringer equivalency number (REN), for the following loop lengths: 

- 20,000 feet (6096 meters) over 0.65 mm (.025 in.) wire (22 AWG) 



At .1 or less REN ringer loads, the supported loop length is 20,000 

feet (6096 meters) at 22, 24, and 26 AWG. 

CCA RJ-45 port for ACS (308) contact closure adjunct box. 

ETH WAN 1 RJ-45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet WAN port. 

ETH LAN 1 RJ-45 10/100 Base TX Ethernet LAN port. 

CONSOLE Console port for direct connection of CLI console. RJ-45 connector. 

USB USB port. Supports the connection of 


● USB externally powered hub 

Table 13: Buttons on the G350 

Button Description 

● The Multitech MultiModemUSB MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB 

modem. 

RST Reset button. Resets chassis. 

ASB Alternate Software Bank button. Reboots the G350 with the software 

image in the alternate bank. 



Site requirements 

This table shows you the site requirements of the G350 Media Gateway. 


Ambient working temperature 32-104°F (0-40°C) 

Operation altitude up to 10,000 ft. (3048 m) 

Front clearance 12 in. (30 cm.) 

Rear clearance 18 in. (45 cm.) 

Humidity 95% non-condensing relative humidity 

Power rating 100-240 V~, 50-60 Hz, 7 A Max 

Power cord specifications 

Following are specifications for power cords suitable for use with the G350: 

For North America: The cordset must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, 16 AWG, 3-conductor (3rd 

wire ground), type SJT. One end is to be terminated to an IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector 

rated 10A, 250V. The other end terminates to either a NEMA 5-15P attachment plug for nominal 

125V applications or a NEMA 6-15P attachment plug for nominal 250V applications. 

For Outside North America: The cord must be VDE Certified or Harmonized (HAR), rated 

250V, 3- conductor (3rd wire ground), 1.0 mm2 minimum conductor size. The cord terminates at 

one end to a VDE Certified/CE Marked IEC 60320, sheet C13 type connector rated 10A, 250V. 

The cord’s other end terminates to a 3-conductor grounding type attachment plug rated at a 

minimum of 10A, 250V. The configuration is specific for the region/country in which the cord is 

used. The attachment plug must bear the safety agency certifications mark(s) for the region/ 

country of installation. 

The G350 Media Gateway relies on two ground connections. These connections are a mains 

plug with an earth contact and a permanent Supplementary Ground Conductor. Because of 

unreliable earthing concerns in Finland, Norway, and Sweden, the G350 Media Gateway must 

be installed in a Restricted Access Location (RAL). Only trained service personnel or customers 

can access the RAL. They know the reasons for the restricted access and any safety 

precautions that must be taken. In these cases, these personnel or customers must use a lock 

and key or other means of security when they access the G350 Media Gateway. 



Media modules 


Avaya media modules convert the voice path of the traditional circuits, such as analog trunk, T1/ 

E1, and DCP, to a TDM bus. The VOIP engine then converts the voice path from the TDM bus 

to packetized VoIP, compressed or uncompressed, on an Ethernet connection. 


backplane. 

Note: 

Note: For stand-alone mode, the S8300 Media Server is inserted into slot V1. See 

Avaya S8300 Media Server on page 29. 

There are nine telephony media modules: 

● MM710 T1/E1 ISDN PRI – For information, see MM710 T1/E1 Media Module on 

page 286. 

● MM711 Analog – For information, see MM711 Analog Media Module on page 289. 

● MM712 DCP – For information, see MM712 DCP Media Module on page 292. 


● MM716 Analog – For information, see MM716 Analog Media Module on page 296 


● MM720 BRI – For information, see MM720 BRI Media Module on page 298. 



There are two WAN media modules: 

● MM340 T1/E1 WAN – For information, see MM340 E1/T1 data WAN Media Module on 

page 300. 

● MM342 USP WAN – For information, see MM342 USP data WAN Media Module on 

page 301. 

There are two LAN media modules: 

● MM314 – For information, see MM314 LAN Media Module on page 284. 

● MM316 – For information, see MM316 LAN Media Module on page 285 


! CAUTION: 

CAUTION: The Avaya G700 Media Gateway does not support the MM316, MM340, or 

MM342. Do not insert an MM316, MM340, or MM342 Media Module into an 

Avaya G700 Media Gateway. 

For more information about the G350 Media Gateway, see 03-300435, "Overview of the Avaya 

G250 and G350 Media Gateways." 

Survivability 

The G350 Media Gateway supports Standard Local Survivability (SLS). SLS is a configurable 

software module that allows a local G350 to provide a core set of Media Gateway Controller 

functions when no link is available to the server, an LSP, or an Enterprise Survivable Server 

(ESS). SLS is configured on a system-wide basis using the new Provisioning and Installation 

Manager (PIM), or SLS can be configured on an individual G350 using the command line 

interface (CLI). 

SLS is supported as follows on the G350: 

● G350 with C/S (hardware vintage) 2.0 and up: SLS supported for all analog interfaces, 

ISDN BRI/PRI trunk interfaces, non-ISDN digital DS1 trunk interfaces, IP phone, IP 

Softphone, and DCP phone. 


The following table outlines the capacities of various G350 services. 

CAUTION: Some 

! CAUTION: 

capacities might change. For the most up-to-date list, see Avaya 

Communication Manager System Capacities Table (03-300511). 


Table 14: G350 Capabilities 

Description Standard 

Configuration 

Media Gateway 

Limits 


G350 Media Gateways 

controlled by an S8500 

or S8700-series Media 

Server 


G350 Media Gateways 

controlled by an S8300 

Media Server housed 

in a G700 Media 

Gateway 


G350 or G250 Media 

Gateways controlled 

by an S8300 Media 

Server housed in a 


Maximum total number 

of telephones 

supported by the G350 


IP telephones per 



analog phones per 



DCP phones per G350 

Media Gateway 


BRI endpoints per 


Enhanced 

Configuration 

Comments 


250 This number also applies if the 

same external media server 

controls a combination of Avaya 

G700 Media Gateways and 

G350 Media Gateways. 

50 

5 An S8300 housed in a G350 

can also control G150 or 

Multitech gateways. 

40 72 Limited by the physical 

hardware resources and what is 

supported in Avaya Solution 

Designer 

40 72 (using an 

external 

switch) 

40 72 

40 72 . 

Limited by the physical 

hardware resources and what is 

supported in Avaya Solution 

Designer 

16 64 Up to three MM720 BRI Media 

Modules can be inserted in any 

standard media module slots. 

1 of 2 


Table 14: G350 Capabilities (continued) 

Description Standard 

Configuration 


conversations from IP 

phone to legacy 

telephone or trunk. 

Transcoding from 

G.711 to G.729 IP 

phones 

Transcoding from TDM 

phones to G.729 IP 

phones 


BRI trunks 


PSTN trunks 

Miscellaneous 

32 – G.711 

16 – G.729a, 

G.726, G723 



conversations limited by the 

VoIP engine, including call 

progress tones. 

16 Simultaneous 2-way 

conversations. 

16 Simultaneous 2-way 

conversations. For TDM 

transcoding, the quantity of 16 

applies to conversations where 

one end of each conversation is 

on a G350 and transcoding 

occurs for that endpoint on the 

G350. If transcoding must occur 

on both ends of the 

conversation, the quantity of 

conversations is 10. 

16 32 Up to three MM720 BRI Media 

Modules can be inserted in any 

G350 media module slots. 

24 (T1) 

30 (E1) 

48 (T1) 

60 (E1) 

Up to three MM711 Media 

Modules can be inserted into 

standard media module slots 

and used as trunks. The base 

unit has one analog trunk port. 

A full E1/T1 trunk group is 

supported for PSTN. An 

additional 15 IP trunks are also 

supported. 

Fax capacity 8 Simultaneous fax transmissions 

using VoIP resources 

Touch-tone recognition 

(TTR) 

15 

Tone Generation 15 

Announcements (VAL) 6 Playback, 

1 Record 

Enhanced 

Configuration 

Comments 

2 of 2

IG550 Integrated Gateway 


The IG550 Integrated Gateway is a part of Avaya’s growing solutions for extending 

Communication Manager communication capabilities from the headquarters of an organization 

to all collaborative branch locations.The IG550 Integrated Gateway is an H.248 media gateway 

that combines Avaya’s high-performance telephony and Voice over IP (VoIP) communications 

with the sophisticated routing capabilities of the Juniper J-Series Services Routers. 


The IG550 consists of the TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module (TGM550) and Telephony 

Interface Modules (TIMs). The IG550 is inserted into either a Juniper J4350 or J6350 Services 

Router. The IG550 is also connected over a LAN or WAN to an Avaya media server running 

Communication Manager. Therefore, Avaya S8700, S8710, S8720, S8500, S8400, and S8300 

Media Servers are able to provide the same top quality telephony services to the small branch 

office as to the headquarters of the organization. As a result, the IG550 provides full feature 

support for IP and analog telephones. 

The IG550 is designed for use in a 20-to-100 user environment, with optimal performance at 

branch offices with 20 to 80 telephones. 

The IG550 features Standard Local Survivability (SLS). SLS provides partial backup media 

gateway controller (MGC) functionality in the event that the connection with the primary MGC is 

lost. 

In addition to advanced and comprehensive telephony services that are provided by the 

TGM550, the Juniper J-series Router, either the J4350 or J6350, provides full data networking 

services, precluding the need for a WAN router. The J-series routers use Juniper Physical 

Interface Modules (PIMs) for the hardware components to support network and routing 

features. The J-series routers also provide Ethernet connections to a separate Ethernet switch 

that IP phones connect to. 

For more information about features of the IG550 Integrated Gateway and features of the 

J4350/J6350 Services Router, see 03-601548, Overview of the Avaya IG550 Integrated 

Gateway. 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 135

Components 

G550 and J4350 Services Router 

Figure 30: The IG550 Integrated Gateway in a J4350 Services Router 

Figure notes: 

1. Juniper Services Router, 

J4350 shown 

2. TGM550 Telephony Gateway 

Module (in slot V1) 

3. TGM550 console port 

4. TGM550 analog trunk ports 

5. TGM550 analog line ports 

6. TIM521 BRI telephony 

interface module (in slot V4) 

7. TIM514 analog telephony 


Slot locations on J4350 Services Router 

8. TIM510 E1/T1 telephony interface 

module (in slot V3) 

9. J-series Router Alarm LEDs 

10. J-series Router Power LEDs 

11. Power button 

12. Reset button 

13. Gigabit Ethernet ports 


15. Aux port 

16. USB ports 

17. Slot V5 (empty in illustration) 

18. Slot V6 (empty in illustration) 

The slots on the J4350 Services Router are identified as follows: 

Figure 31: Slot numbers on the Juniper J4350 Services Router 



The J-series router chassis has six slots. The TGM550 can be housed in any of the six router 

slots. The TIMs can also be housed in any slot. Gigabit Ethernet and Fast Ethernet PIMs can be 

housed only in slots 3 or 6. Other optional PIMs can be housed in any slots. 

Fixed ports and buttons on the Juniper J4350 Services Router 

Table 15: Fixed ports and buttons on the Juniper J4350 Services Router 


Gigabit Ethernet Four Gigabit Ethernet ports. The JuNOS software 

identifies the port locations, from left to right, as 

ge-0/0/0, ge-0/0/1, ge-0/0/2, and ge-0/0/3. One 

port can serve as a management interface, 

typically ge-0/0/0. 

Alarm LED Lights yellow for a minor alarm condition, red for a 

major alarm condition, or is off when no alarm 

conditions exist. Alarm notification applies only to 

the J-series router, not to the TGM550. 

Power LED Green light that lights steadily, blinks, or is off to 

show power on/off status. 

Status LED Blinks to show startup of the router, lights steadily 

to show normal operation after startup, and red to 

indicate an error condition upon startup. 

Console Console RS-232 interface port for direct 


USB Two USB ports. Support the connection of 

● Disk on Key USB memory stick 


● The Multitech MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB 

modem. 

Power button Turns on power to the router and TGM550. 

Reset button Resets chassis configuration to either rescue 

configuration or factory default, if rescue not 

available. Resends configuration data to the 

TGM550. 

Aux Not activated. 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 137

IG550 and J6350 Services Router 

Figure 32: The IG550 Integrated Gateway in a J6350 Services Router 

Figure notes: 

1. Juniper Services Router, 

J4350 shown 

2. TGM550 Telephone Gateway 

Module (in slot V1) 

3. TGM550 console port 

4. TGM550 analog trunk ports 

5. TGM550 analog line ports 

6. TIM521 BRI telephony 


7. TIM514 analog telephony 


Slot locations on J6350 Services Router 

8. TIM510 E1/T1 telephony interface 

module (in slot V4) 

9. J-series Router Alarm LEDs 

10. J-series Router Power LEDs 

11. Power button 

12. Reset button 

13. Gigabit Ethernet ports 


15. Aux port 

16. USB ports 

17. Slot V5 (empty) 

18. Slot V6 (empty) 

The slots on the J6350 Services Router are identified as follows: 

Figure 33: Slot numbers on the Juniper J6350 Services Router 



The J-series router chassis has six slots. The TGM550 can be housed in any of the six router 

slots. The TIMs can also be housed in any slot. Gigabit Ethernet and Fast Ethernet PIMs can be 

housed only in slots 2, 3, 5, or 6. Other optional PIMs can be housed in any slots. 

Fixed ports and buttons on the Juniper J6350 Services Router 

Table 16: Fixed ports and buttons on the Juniper J6350 Services Router 


Gigabit Ethernet Four Gigabit Ethernet ports. The JuNOS software 

identifies the port locations, from left to right, as 

ge-0/0/0, ge-0/0/1, ge-0/0/2, and ge-0/0/3. One 

port can serve as a management interface, 

typically ge-0/0/0. 

Alarm LED Lights yellow for a minor alarm condition, red for a 

major alarm condition, or is off when no alarm 

conditions exist. Alarm notification applies only to 

the J-series router, not to the TGM550. 

Power LED Green light that lights steadily, blinks, or is off to 

show power on/off status. 

Status LED Blinks to show startup of the router, lights steadily 

to show normal operation after startup, and red to 

indicate an error condition upon startup. 

Console Console RS-232 interface port for direct 


USB Two USB ports. Support the connection of 

● Disk on Key USB memory stick 


● The Multitech MultiModemUSB 

MT5634ZBA-USB-V92 USB modem. 

Power button Turns on power to the router and TGM550. 

Reset button Resets chassis configuration to either rescue 

configuration or factory default, if rescue not 

available. Resends configuration data to the 

TGM550. 

Aux Not activated. 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 139

TGM550 Gateway Module 

Figure 34: The TGM550 Gateway Module 

Figure notes: 

1. Alarm LED 

2. ACT LED 


4. RST button 

Fixed ports and buttons on the TGM550 Gateway Module 

Table 17: Fixed ports and buttons on the TGM550 

Port/Button Description 


5. ASB LED 

6. ETR LED 

7. Analog trunk ports 


ALM LED Lights red to indicate an alarm on the TGM550 or a 

reboot. 

ACT LED Lights yellow to show activity of trunk or line ports. 

Also lights yellow during a reboot. 

CONSOLE Console port for direct connection of TGM550 CLI 

console. 

RJ-45 connector. 

RST Reset button. Resets the TGM550 configuration. It 

also reboots the TGM550 with the software image 

in the alternate bank. 

ASB Alternate Software Bank LED. Lights green if the 

software is not running from the selected boot 

bank. 

ETR Lights green if the Emergency Transfer Relay is 

active or the TGM550 reboots. ETR uses trunk port 

2 and line port 3. 

1 of 2


Table 17: Fixed ports and buttons on the TGM550 (continued) 

Port/Button Description 

Analog Trunk Two analog trunk ports 

Analog Line Two analog trunk lines 


The IG550 technical specifications include physical dimensions and tolerances of the Juniper 

J-series Services Router, power cord specifications and TGM550 Gateway Module 

specifications. 

J4350/J6350 Services Router specifications 

The table of technical specifications provides detailed information on the physical dimensions 

and tolerances of the J4350 Services Router: 

Table 18: J4350 Services Router specifications 


Height 3.5 in. (8.9 cm) 

Width 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 

Depth 21.5 in. (54.6 cm) 

Weight of empty chassis 23.0 lb. (10.4 kg) — J4350; 25.0 lb. (11.3 kg) — 

J6350 

Ambient working temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 

Operation altitude up to 10,000 ft. (3,048 m) 

Front Clearance 6 in. (15 cm) 

Rear Clearance 6 in. (15 cm) 

Humidity 10-90% relative humidity 

2 of 2 

Power rating AC: 100-240 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, 6 to 3 A, 350 Watts; 

DC: -48 to -72 VDC, 420 watts 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 141

J-series Services Router power cord specifications 

AC Power Cord 

Detachable AC power cords, each 2.5 m (approximately 8 ft) long, are supplied with the 

Services Router. The appliance coupler at the female end of the cord inserts into the appliance 

inlet on the faceplate of the AC power supply. The coupler is type C19 as described by 

International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug at the male end of 

the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your geographical 

location. 

Note: In 

Note: 

North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 m (approximately 14.75 

ft) in. length, to comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 

(NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and 210-52, and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section 

4-010(3). The cords supplied with the router are in compliance. 

DC Power Cord 

Country Electrical 


Plug Standards 

Australia 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz AS/NZ 3112 1- 993 

China 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz GB2099.1 1996 and 

GB1002 1996 

(CH1-10P) 

Europe (except 

Italy and United 

Kingdom) 

250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEE (7) VII 

Italy 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz CEI 23 - 16/VII 

Japan 125 VAC, 12 A, 50 Hz 

or 60 Hz 

JIS 8303 

North America 125 VAC, 10 A, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15 

United Kingdom 250 VAC, 10 A, 50 Hz BS 1363A 

Each DC power supply has a single DC input (-48 VDC and return) that requires a dedicated 15 

A (-48 VDC) circuit breaker. If the J6350 router contains redundant DC power supplies, one 

power supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed A, and the other 

power supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed B. This 

configuration provides the commonly deployed A/B feed redundancy for the system. 



Most sites distribute DC power through a main conduit that leads to frame-mounted DC power 

distribution panels, one of which might be located at the top of the rack that houses the router. A 

pair of cables (one input and one return) connects each set of terminal studs to the power 

distribution panel. 

Each DC power cable (ñ48 VDC and return) must be 14 AWG single-strand wire cable, or as 

permitted by the local code. Each lug attached to the power cables must be a ring-type, 

vinyl-insulated TV14-6R lug, or equivalent. 

TGM 550 Gateway Module specifications 

Grounding cable for IG550 

When housing a TGM550, the J-series router must use a grounding cable that meets the 

following specifications: 

● 10 AWG 

● Able to handle up to 8 Amp current 

● Have a ring-type, vinyl-insulated TV14-6R lug, or equivalent, to accommodate the 10 AWG 

cable 

The original grounding cable for Juniper Services Routers is 14 AWG only and must be 

replaced with a 10 AWG cable 


Table 19: TGM550 Gateway Module 


Ambient working 

temperature 

32° to 158°F (0° to 70°C) 

Operation altitude up to 10,000 ft. (3,048 m) 

The IG550 Gateway Module supports a variety of swappable internal boards called Telephony 

Interface Modules (TIMs). In addition, the Juniper J-series Services Routers support swappable 

internal components called Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 143

Supported optional modules in the IG550 

Table 20: Supported interface modules 

Modules Description 

Telephony Interface Modules 

TIM514 4 analog telephone ports and 4 analog trunk ports 

TIM510 1 E1/T1 trunk port, a DS1 level port that provides a wide 

variety of E1 or T1 circuit support. Can provide up to 30 

E1 or 24 T1 channels 

TIM521 4 ISDN BRI trunk ports providing up to 8 bearer channels 

J-series Router Physical Interface Modules 

Dual-Port Serial 

PIM 

Dual-Port T1 or 

E1 PIM 

2 Fast Ethernet ports and two serial ports 

2 Fast Ethernet ports and two E1/T1 ports, each 

providing up to 30 E1 or 24 T1 data channels for WAN 

connections 

T3 or E3 PIM 1 E3/T3 port for WAN connections 

Dual-Port Fast 

Ethernet PIM 

4-Port ISDN BRI 

S/T PIM 

4-Port ISDN BRI 

U PIM 

ADSL PIM 

(Annex A) 

ADSL PIM 

(Annex B) 

2 Fast Ethernet ports 

4 ISDN BRI data-only ports 

4 ISDN BRI data-only ports 

1 port for DSL over an analog trunk 

One port for ADSL over ISDN providing up to 32 virtual 

channels 

G.SHDSL PIM Two ports for 32 virtual channels of ATM over SHDSL 

connections 


TIM combination limitations in the IG550 

The following limitations apply to combining TIMs in the IG550: 

● Maximum of four TIMs in either J-series Services Router 

● Maximum of two TIM521s in either J-series Services Router 


● Maximum of one TIM510 in the J4350 Services Router and a maximum of twoTIM510s in 

the J6350 Services Router 

● Maximum of three TIM514s in the J4350 Services Router and a maximum of four TIM514s 

in the J6350 Services Router 

For more information on each of the TIMs, see Telephony Interface Modules on page 305. 

Survivability 

You can configure Standard Local Survivability (SLS) to enable a local media gateway to 

provide a degree of MGC functionality when no link is available to an external MGC. SLS is 

configured on a system-wide basis using the Provisioning and Installation Manager (PIM). 

Alternatively, SLS can be configured from the individual media gateway itself using the CLI. SLS 

supports all analog interfaces, ISDN BRI/PRI trunk interfaces, non-ISDN digital DS1 trunk 

interfaces, IP phone, and IP Softphone. 


For information on system capacities of the IG550 Integrated Gateway, see 03-601548, 

Overview of the Avaya IG550 Integrated Gateway and Avaya Communication Manager System 


Issue 5.1 June 2006 145


The G860 media gateway is a high channel density, standards-compliant, VoIP media gateway. 

It provides a robust, scalable and modular solution designed for a large campus or call center, 

with high availability and reliability. For maximum reliability, the G860 features protection 

switching and full redundancy of all common equipment. 

Figure 35: G860 media gateway 

SYSTEM 

CRITICAL 

MAJOR 

MINOR 

SHELF 

ACO 


CONSOLE 

CONSOLE 

PMC 

233 

PMC 

233 

FAIL 

ACT 

FAIL 

ACT 

GBE PSTN 

LINK/ 

ACT 

1 2 

LINK 

ALARM 

LINK 

ALARM 

A B C 

GBE PSTN 

LINK/ 

ACT 

1 2 

LINK 

ALARM 

P 

M 

C 

- 

B 

P 

M 

C 

- 

B 

LINK 

ALARM 

CPC6600 

24 PORT 

10/100/1000M 

SWITCH 

The G860 media gateway chassis is only available in a redundant configuration, providing full 

duplication. the Trunk Processing Module can be used either in a simplex configuration or in a 

N+1 redundant configuration. 

Channels can be configured for one of the following: 

● Protected - backup capability for the media gateway boards in which voice and signaling 

trunks are guaranteed constant service. 

● Non-protected - no backup capability provided. 

Configurations may vary according to the precise needs of the customer. 


LINK 

ALARM 

CPC6600 

24 PORT 

10/100/1000M 

SWITCH 

LINK 

ALARM 

A B C 

ALARM 

SYSTEM FAULT 

SYSTEM FAULT 

1 2 

ACT/LINK 

SPEED 

ACT/LINK 

SPEED 

1 2 

6310 Series 

6310 Series 

ACT/LINK 

SPEED 

ACT/LINK 

SPEED 

3 4 

3 4 

P 

M 

C 

- 

A 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

1A 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

1A 

5 6 

5 6 

7 8 

7 8 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

9 10 

9 10 

2A 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

11 12 

11 12 

RX/TX 

13 14 

13 14 

ALRM 

3A 

ATM 

ATM 

ACTIVITY COM 

P 

M 

C 

- 

A 

ACTIVITY COM 

2A 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

3A 

15 16 

15 16 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

17 18 

17 18 

1B 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

1B 

19 20 

19 20 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

21 22 

21 22 

2B 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

2B 

23 24 

23 24 

CP2300S-650 

CP2300S-650 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

3B 

RX/TX 

ALRM 

ABORT 

ABORT 

3B 

MGMT (MDI) 

MGMT (MDI) 

IOIO 

LINK SPEED 

LINK SPEED 

RESET 

RESET 

IOIO 

ALARM 

USER 

ALARM 

USER 

10/100M 

10/100M 

READY 

READY 

PWR 

SWAP 

PWR 

SWAP 

RESET 

RESET 

CompacIPCI 

CompacIPCI 

HOT 

SWAP 

HOT 

SWAP 

READY 

READY 

FMR-5 

PSU-5/30/DC 

PSU-5/30/DC 

PSU-5/30/DC 

POWER 

HSR 

SWAP 

READY 

POWER 

POWER 

POWER 

FAULT 

FAULT 

FAULT 

hwmgg860 LAO 111806

Components 

Table 21: G860 Media Gateway Components 

Each G860 is accompanied by an accessories kit, which includes: 

● RS-232 straight cable for System Controller Console Terminal (not crossed-over) 

● RS-232 straight cable for Ethernet Switch Console Terminal 

● CD containing system software and documentation 


Component Redundant 

configuration 

Chassis 1 

System Controller (SC) 2 

Synchronization and Alarm Rear Transition Module (SA/RTM) 2 

ES/6600 (Ethernet Switch Board - 24 Gigabit Ethernet) 2 

ES/6600/RTM (Ethernet Switch 7 I/O Rear Transition Module 2 

Trunk Processing Modules (TP-6310) Up to 4 

6310/RTM (TP-6310 I/O Rear Transition Module) Up to 3 

6310/RTM/HA/Redundant (TP-6310 I/O Rear Transition Module 

- Redundant) 

1 

PS/DC/5K or PS/AC/5K (DC Power Supply Modules) 3 

PEM/DC/5K or PEM/AC/5K (DC Power Entry Modules) 2 DC; 1 AC 

FM/5K (Fan Tray Module) 1 

AF/5K (Air Filter) 1 

FMR/5K (Auxiliary Fan Tray Module) 1 

FPM/5K (DC Fan Tray Power Supply Module) 2 

Blank panels (full configuration): 

Blank panel - panel only 

Blank panel - baffled filler panel 

Fiber cables (provided by customer) that connect to back of 

Trunk Processing Module 

1 

1 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 147

● CD containing optional Element Management System software 

● AC power cable 

For more information, see Installing and Operating the G860 Media Gateway, 03-601918. 

G860 Trunk Media Processing Module (TP-6310) 

The G860 Trunk Processing Module (TP-6310) is a high-density, hot-swappable, compactPCI 

resource board with a capacity of 672 DS0 channels, supporting all necessary functions for 

voice, data, and fax streaming over IP networks. 

Note: 

Note: The Trunk Processing Module is hot-swappable for redundant systems. However, 

the board must be locked in order to be replaced, which takes the board out of 

service. 

The Trunk Processing Module provides STM-1/OC-3 (future), PSTN, ATM, and T3 interfaces 

via its Rear Transition Module (RTM). The 6310/RTM panel contains Tx and Rx transceivers for: 

● 1+1 (total 2) PSTN STM-1/OC-3 interfaces (future) 

● 3 (1 active) T3 (DS-3) PSTN interfaces (6 connectors - 3 RX and 3 TX) 

The T3 PSTN interface port is an SMB connector with Tx and Rx transceivers. 

The 6310/RTM is designed for protection capabilities. The 6310/RTM/HA/Redundant itself does 

not provide any PSTN ports. The same redundant RTM should be used for both STM-1 (future) 

and T3 versions. 

To ensure full integrated Automatic Protection Switching (APS) for PSTN interfaces, the fiber 

optic cables must be connected to corresponding PSTN connectors on the TP-6310 RTMs. The 

PSTN interface and the ATM interfaces are provided with 1+1 protection. 

Slots 7 to 10 are used for up to 4 Trunk Processing Modules (including the redundant TP-6310) 

according to customer requirements. The corresponding RTMs are located in the rear cage of 

the G860 in the corresponding slot.The appropriate rear RTMs are located in the rear cage of 

the G860 in the corresponding slot. 

For redundant N:1 protection, the 6310/RTM/HA/Redundant Standby board is provided. It 

contains no port connections and occupies slot 10. 

System controller 

The system controller (SC) board controls and monitors the G860 media gateway operation. 

The SC board incorporates a 650 Mhz UltraSparc processor with 512 MB memory and uses the 

robust Solaris operating system environment enhanced for advanced high-availability features. 

The G860 contains two SC boards, which are installed into their dedicated slots. Each controller 

contains an on-board hard disk, which stores the system controller software and configuration 

and performance database. 



The SC board is designed according to PICMG CompactPCI standards for high-availability 

systems. It supports hot-swap operation, system management, and environmental monitoring. 

The SC board has two PCI Mezzanine Connectors (PMCs). One is occupied by the SC board 

with on-board hard disk and the second is reserved for future expansion of board functionality. 

The two 10/100 Base-TX redundant Ethernet ports connect the SC board with the two Ethernet 

Switch boards via cPSB dedicated links in the midplane. The front panel PS2 COM serial port 

provides RS-232 console connection. The RS-232 console connection can be made via the SC 

front panel PS2 Com serial port or via the RS-232 serial port on the SA/RTM. 

The SC board is accompanied by a Synchronization and Alarm (SA) Rear Transition Module 

(RTM) board. The SA board is inserted into the midplane directly behind the main SC board and 

contains an RS-232 port for connecting to a console terminal. 

Cooling system 

LEDs 

G860 media gateway components are cooled by a fan tray unit (FM/5K), located at the left of 

the card cage. An auxiliary fan tray unit (FMR/5K) is located in the top right-hand corner of the 

chassis, above the power supply units. 

The FM/5K fan tray unit panel contains the system’s alarm indicators (LEDs) Alarm Cutoff and 

Reset Buttons. 

The alarm indicators are connected to the fault detection and alarm system provided with the 

G860. As needed, LEDs indicate critical, major or minor system faults as well as system and 

shelf alarms. 


Dimensions 

Table 22: G860 + TP-6310 Chassis Dimensions 

Dimension Value 

Width 48.3 cm (19 inches) 

Height 22.2 cm (8.75 inches) 

Depth with projections 36.5 cm (13.7 inches) 

1 of 2 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 149

Power requirements 

For Avaya G860 media gateway with Trunk Processing Module, the average power 

consumption for a full complement of boards is approximately 696 watts (14.5 A at 48 VDC). 

Two Power Entry Modules (PEM) are provided for DC connections on the rear of the chassis. 

Power is required to be between -40.5 and -60 VDC. Each PEM unit contains one input 

terminal. Each of the DC input terminals is reverse current protected. The input terminals on 

each of the PEM units provide redundancy protection for the power entry circuitry. 

The following are recommendations for DC power input: 

● When using DC power as the primary input, ensure that the power supply complies with 

the safety requirements of Call Agent CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-00 and UL 60950, and 

EN 60950. 

● For high availability, connect two separate DC power sources to avoid total power failure if 

one of the DC power sources fails. 

Electro magnetic compatibility 

Table 22: G860 + TP-6310 Chassis Dimensions (continued) 

Dimension Value 

Depth without projections 30 cm (11.8 inches) 

Weight (fully loaded) 20.45 kg (45.1 lbs) 

The chassis is designed to comply with known EMC/RFI standards, including FCC Part 15, 

Class B; ICES-003, Class A; EN 55022, Class B; EN 300 386. 

Compliance measures include: 

● Venting holes - for intake and exhaust, sized to provide for blockage of frequencies within 

the specified range 

● Blank panels with contact fingers - used for covering empty slots when a configuration 

requires this 

● RFI filters - built-in to the DC power inputs, assuring that conductive interference does not 

reach the power supply modules, or that switching signals generated by the power supply 

modules do not propagate over the main feed 

● Air filters - integrates a honeycomb EMI shield in its assembly. The honeycomb structure 

consists of "cells" that are engineered to trap and absorb EMI noise while maintaining 95% 

to 99% aperture for minimal airflow impedance. A gasket installed around the frame makes 

sure there is conductivity of the frame to the enclosure. 


2 of 2

Environmental requirements 

Table 23: Environmental requirements 

Physical protection 

requirements 

Test level 

Humidity 5 to 90% 

Altitude -60 to 3048m (10,000 ft) 

Drop test, packaged Drop height: 600 mm 

Drop test, unpackaged Drop height: 75 mm 

Earthquake Zone 4 

Office vibration 5-100-5 Hz/0.1g, 

0.1 oct/min; 3 axes 

Transportation vibration 5-100 Hz, 0.1 oct/min; 

100-500 Hz, 0.25 oct/min 

Thermal shock -40 to +25 degrees C/ 

-40 to 77 degrees within 5 

mins 

+70 to +25 degrees C/ 

-158 to 77 degrees F within 

5 mins 

The following summarizes environmental conditions for the G860 media gateway: 


● Temperature 

- Extended short-term range for operation: -50C to +55 degrees C; -58 to +131 degrees F 

- Recommended ambient temperature: +5 to +40 degrees C; +40 to +104 degrees F 

● Humidity 

- Relative humidity range for operation: 5 to 90% 

- Nominal relative humidity: 70% (wet bulb) 

Issue 5.1 June 2006 151

● Lightning protection 

In addition to correct earthing, sufficient lightning protection must be included at the site in 

order to prevent damage to the equipment. Damage can result either from a direct strike of 

lightning or from propagated high voltage surges. 

In order to avoid damage caused by lightning surges, installation of equipment should be 

compatible with Class 3 classification as defined by EN61000-4-5 Annex B, where the 

surge level may not exceed 2kV. 

● Altitude: up to 3048m (10,000 ft) 

● Earthquake: zone 4 

● Rack requirements 

- Telco rack: 19-inch 

- Space: as per GR-63-CORE; maintenance access 762 mm (2 ft 6 in); wiring access 610 

mm (2 ft) 

Electrical aspects 

The main midplane routes all signals and power to and from the plug-in boards residing in the 

slots, in both the front and rear sections of the chassis. Each slot is equipped with a key on the 

midplane to match the appropriate board type in order to prevent inserting a wrong board type 

into the slot. 



All of the VoIP traffic (media and signaling) is routed between the gateway and the IP network 

via the Ethernet switch. The media gateway board communicates with the Ethernet switch via 

two redundant 100/1000 Mbps cPSB links. 

The SC boards communicate with the Ethernet switch via two redundant 100 Mbps cPSB links. 

This configuration ensures redundant operation protection upon failure of any of the 

communication elements. 

Both Ethernet switch boards are interconnected according to the PICMG 2.16 cPSB standard in 

a dual-star configuration, with one ES board in active mode and the other in standby mode. This 

configuration ensures full redundant Ethernet routes to all boards in the chassis. Failure of the 

active ES board automatically switches the second ES board from standby to active mode. 

Each of the ES boards has two fiber optic or copper Gigabit uplink interfaces for connection to 

the IP backbone network. 

The ES/6600 board provides 24GbE ports, of which five are 1000 Bade-T ports for connection 

to external equipment. 


Power supply and power entry module 

The power supply has the following features: 

● DC input 

● AC input 

- Universal 100 to 240 v AC input 

- Power factor correction 

- Class B EMI input filter 

● Wide range: -40.4 to -72 V DC input 

● Active current load sharing on positive outputs (V1, V2 & V3) 

● DC input, reverse-polarity protected 

● Integral LED status indicators 

● Hot-pluggable connector, with staged pin lengths 

● Hot swappable 

● Optimized thermal management 

● No minimum load, any output 

● Control and monitoring features 

PS/DC/5K or PS/AC/5K PEM Technical Specifications 

● Output: 

- Output power 250 watts maximum, continuous 

- Outputs (V1-V5) +3.3 V at 40 A; +5 V at 40A, +12 V at 5.5 A; -12 V at 1.5 A 

- Temperature coefficient +/- 0.02% / degrees C 

- Controls and signaling TTL 

● General characteristics: 

- Efficiency 75% at full load 

- Safety standards EN 60950, UL 1950, CSA 22.2 No. 950 

● AC input: 

- PEM/AC Power Entry Module for AC 

- Input 100 to 240 V AC 

● DC input: 

- PEM/DC Power Entry Module for DC 

- Input -40.5 to -60 V DC 


Issue 5.1 June 2006 153

APM/5K and FPM/5K - Advanced Fan Power Module 

The Advanced Fan Power Module is the power supply for the fan tray unit. It is provided in 

either a DC or AC version according to the main power configuration. Two FPM/5K units are 

provided for redundant protection. The APM/5K and FPM/5K are not hot-swappable. 

Element Management System 

The Element Management System (EMS) is an advanced solution for standards-based 

management of media gateways within VoIP networks, covering all areas vital for the efficient 

operation, administration, management, and provisioning of the G860 Media Gateway. The 

EMS features a client/server architecture, enabling customers to access the EMS from multiple, 

remotely located work centers and workstations. 

The EMS server runs on Sun Microsystems Solaris. 


Table 24: G680 maximum capacities for simplex and redundant configurations 

Capacity Simplex Redundant 

T3 links non-protected 

T3 links protected 

12 12 

12 


Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router 

Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router 

The Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router in a branch office works with Avaya Communication 

Manager (release 3.1.2 and later) and Avaya SIP Enablement Services (SES) as part of an 

end-to-end SIP solution. Avaya SIP phones can be connected to the router at the branch, and 

connectivity is provided to Avaya Communication Manager through a SES server at the main 

office. The SES home and home/edge server configurations are supported. 

Supported configurations include the following media servers: 

● S8700 

● S8710 

● S8720 

● S8500 

A G650 media gateway is required. 

Note: The 

Note: 

Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router is currently only available from Avaya in 

China, Germany, India, and Korea. 

For information on the Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router, see the Samsung documentation, 

available at www.samsung.com. 



An S8300 Media Server (version B) is an Intel Celeron-based processor that runs the Linux 

operating system. It resides in one of three media gateways: G700, G350, or G250. 


The G700 Media Gateway is scalable and offers options. It is functional on its own or with other 

G700 Media Gateways. The G700 is also functional in a stack that is mixed with Avaya C360 

devices. 

A maximum of 50 G700 Media Gateways can be supported using the S8300 Media Server. A 

maximum of 250 G700 Media Gateways can be supported using the S8700-series Media 

Server or the S8500 Media Server. 

To power IP telephones without additional cables, stack the G700 Media Gateways with the 

Avaya C363T-PWR, or C364T-PWR. 

The following list describes the basic architecture of the G700 Media Gateway: 

● Intel i960 controller that hosts all the base switch-control and management software. 

● Fits in an EIA-310-D standard 19-inch rack. 

● Supports 15 ports of tone detection. 

● Contains four media-module slots. 

● One P330 expansion-module slot. 

● One slot for the Octaplane stacking fabric. 

● Can sit on a desktop or be rack-mounted. 

● Contains an internal motherboard. For more information, see Motherboard on page 161. 

● Standard based 10/100 Ethernet Interface connection types. A wall field or breakout panel 

is not required. 

● Internal global AC/DC power supply that provides low-voltage DC power to the fans, 

motherboard, and media modules. 

● Four internal fans that provide cooling for the internal components. 

● A LED board that indicates system-level status. 

● A serial port for command-line access. 

● An eight-port layer-2 switch or two 10/100BaseT external ports. 


Note: An 

Note: The 



Note: 

expansion module can be ordered for additional 10/100T, 100FX, ATM, or 

Gigabit Ethernet ports. 

● A VoIP engine that supports up to 64 G.711 single-channel calls. In addition to voice calls, 

it supports transport of the following information: 

- Fax, Teletypewriter device (TTY), and modem calls over a corporate IP intranet using 

pass-through mode 

- Fax and TTY calls using proprietary relay mode 

Note: 

path between endpoints for fax transmissions must use Avaya 




- 64kbps clear channel transport in support of BRI Secure Phone and data appliances 

(does not include support for H.320 video) 

- T.38 Fax over the Internet (including endpoints connected to non-Avaya systems) 

- Modem tones over a corporate IP intranet 

Note: 



See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 

555-233-504, for more information. 


The G700 Media Gateway has an architectural design that is similar to the Avaya stackable 

switching products. The following figure shows the G700 Media Gateway with two Avaya C360 

switches. The G700 is shown at the top of the stack. 


Figure 36: G700 Media Gateway with two Avaya C360 switches 


51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 

ALM PWR CPU MSTR LNK COL Tx Rx FDX FC Hspd LAG EXT 1 EXT 2 

V1 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

SHUT DOWN 

OK TO 

REMOVE 

sccmrack LAO 083104 

G700 Media Gateway with an S8700-series Media Server 

The G700 Media Gateway with an S8700-series Media Server as its primary controller connects 

through a LAN to a TN799DP C-LAN circuit pack. This circuit pack is mounted in a media 

gateway. This configuration is basically the same whether the G700 Media Gateway has an 

S8300 Media Server as a local survivable processor (LSP) or does not have an LSP. The 

following figure is an example of G700 Media Gateway connectivity. 


LNK COL Tx Rx FDX Hspd LAG PoE 

ROUT SYS PWR 

S1 S2 

1 

2 

3 

SERVICES USB 1 USB 2 

4 

5 

6 

59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 

LNK COL Tx Rx FDX Hspd LAG PoE 

2 4 6 8 10 12 

ROUT SYS PWR 

S1 S2 

1 

3 

5 

7 

7 

8 

9 

9 

10 

11 

11 

12 

13 

13 

14 

14 

V2 

ALM 


TST 

ACT 

SIG 


V3 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

V4 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

EXT 1 EXT 2 CONSOLE 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

15 

15 

16 

16 

17 

17 

18 

18 

19 

19 

20 

20 

21 

21 

22 

22 

23 

23 

24 

24


Figure 37: The G700 Media Gateway connecting to the S8700-series Media Server 

Figure notes: 


1 

3 

6 

2 

5 

4 5 

4 

5 

4 5 

4 

LAN 

Voice Mail 

1. Two S8700-series Media Servers. 

2. An Ethernet switch, must be provided by Avaya. 

3. Two uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs), one for each server. 

4. G650 Media Gateway. 

5. Dedicated LAN connectivity to the media gateway’s IPSI circuit pack 

6. IP telephones connected through the customer’s LAN 

7. Voice mail. INTUITY AUDIX is shown connected through IP. 

8. A G700 Media Gateway is connected by the LAN to the C-LAN circuit pack 

that is located in a G650 Media Gateway. The S8300 Media Server in an LSP 

configuration is located in the G700 Media Gateway. In the event of a loss in 

communication between the S8700-series Media Server and the G700, the 

LSP provides a backup for its registered endpoints. 

9. DCP telephones — Avaya multifunction digital telephones 

10. Analog connectivity, such as analog telephones, lines, and trunks 

11. Ethernet switch (optional) 

3 

2 3 

2 

3 

2 3 

2 

7 

COMPACT 

disc 

1 

1 

0 

0 

COMPACT 

disc 

1 

1 

0 

0 

1 

2 

UID 


1 

2 

UID 


A 

5 

IPSI 

CLAN 

IP Media 

Processor 

cymsrbro LAO 110805 

8 

V1 

A 

4 

11 

9 

10 


Components 

Octaplane stacking fabric 

"Octaplane" is a name for an Avaya hardware capability to bundle stackable components using 

4-Gbps communication in each direction. This technology combines separate units into a larger 

logical switch using different lengths of cables. These cables connect to the expansion slots in 

the rear of the units. These cables are wired in a ring configuration, which provides redundancy 

to the stack. If a single unit fails, the stack integrity is maintained. You can remove, or replace, 

any single unit without disrupting operation or performing stack-level reconfiguration. 

The following table lists the cables available to create an Octaplane stack. 

Table 25: Octaplane cabling 

Cable Description and function Length Length 

(metric) 

X330SC short A light-colored cable used to connect 

adjacent switches 

X330LC long A light-colored cable used to connect 

switches from two different physical stacks 

X330RC redundant A black cable used to connect the top and 

the bottom switches of a stack. 

X330L-LC extra long A light-colored cable used to connect 

switches from two different physical stacks 

X330L-RC long 

redundant 

Power supply 

A black cable used to connect the top and 

the bottom switches of a stack 

The G700 Media Gateway uses an AC/DC power supply. A power supply located in the G700 

Media Gateway converts AC or DC input power to voltages needed by the system. 


12 

inches 

30 cm 

6 feet 2 m 

6 feet 2 m 

24 feet 8 m 

24 feet 8 m

Motherboard 


The motherboard resides within the G700 Media Gateway. The motherboard controls the 

following elements: 

Note: The 

● The VoIP Engine, which supports up to 64 channels. If more than 64 channels are needed, 

a VoIP media module is required. The VoIP Engine performs the following functions: 

- IP/UDP/RTP processing 

- Echo cancellation 

- G.711 A-/µ-Law 

- G.729 and G723.1 encode/decode 

- T.38 and Avaya Proprietary FAX relay 

- FAX pass-through 

- Modem pass-through 

- Modem relay 

- Clear channel 

- Teletypewriter device (TTY) tone relay 

- Silence suppression 

- Jitter buffer management 

- Packet loss concealment 

- Avaya Encryption Algorithm (AEA) and Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption 

of VoIP audio 

- Packet reorder 

● The gateway processor complex controls all the resources that are inside the gateway. 

The gateway processor functions include the Media Module Manager, tone clock, and 

H.248 signaling to the gateway controller. 

● An Avaya P330 processor complex, which is based on the Avaya P330 data-switch 

architecture. This complex provides an 8-port Layer-2 switch function and manages the 

Expansion and Cascade modules. 

● The electrical connectivity and the physical connectivity for the four media-module slots. 

Note: 

motherboard cannot be replaced in the field. 

For more information about the VoIP Media Module, see MM760 VoIP Media Module on 

page 302. 


Fans 

LEDs 

The G700 Media Gateway contains four 12-volt fans. These fans are monitored and SNMP can 

provide reports to a management station. 

The G700 Media Gateway uses two types of LEDs: 

● Media module 

● System-level 

Although some media modules have additional LEDs, a standard 3-LED pattern on each of their 

faceplates indicates the following conditions: 

● Red – Fault condition 

This LED also lights when the media module is physically inserted, and turns off when the 

board initializes. 

● Green – Test condition 

● Yellow – In-use condition 

See the following figure for the LEDs on the media module. 

Figure 38: Media modules LEDs 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

Figure notes: 

1. ALM – Alarm LED 

2. TST – Test LED 

3. ACT – Active LED 

mmdcled KLC 031402 


1 

2 

3

Media module LEDs 

Media-module LEDs have the following characteristics: 


● Each media module has at least three LEDs to indicate module and port status or 

maintenance and administration modes. 

● The location, spacing, and labeling is fixed for all LEDs on all media modules. 

● The LEDs are mounted on the media module’s printed wiring board, and placed so the 

LEDs show through an opening. 

System-level LEDs 

The system-level LED board: 

● Provides visual indication of both system and Ethernet-port status and allow customers to 

change between these status-indication modes. 

● Resides in the upper-left front of the G700 Media Gateway. The LEDs themselves reside 

in the board’s oblong fascia panel. 

You must insert or remove the LED board when you insert or remove the S8300 Media Server. 

The LED panel is not the same size as a standard media module. You cannot insert a media 

module into the LED board’s slot, or vice versa. 


The following table lists environmental considerations for the G700 Media Gateway. 

. 

Consideration Description 

Heat dissipation The G700 Media Gateway uses global AC, 100 VAC to 240 

VAC, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 to 4.9 A, which translates to 360 to 400 

Watts. However, some heat is passed out the front, by -48 

VDC (up to 32 ports at 1.5 watts each for a total of 48 watts). 

Altitude Functions at altitudes of minus 197 feet (60 meters) to 10,000 

feet (3,048 meters). 

Air pressure Air pressure is not specified. 

Temperature and humidity Long-term operation at 41 °F (+5 °C) to 104 °F (+40 °C) at 5% 

to 85% humidity. Short term operation at 23 °F (-5 °C) to 122 

°F (50 °C), at 5% to 90% humidity, noncondensing. 

Air purity Requires an indoor environment that is suitable for continuous 

human occupancy. 


Consideration Description 

Lightning The user is protected under the UL codes against over voltage 

in the system. However, the system itself is susceptible to over 

voltage, such as lightning, depending on the configuration. The 

loss of service because of an over voltage condition can result 

in the loss of one or more of the following elements: 

● Terminal loss 


● Port loss 

● Media Module loss 

Acoustic noise generated 50 dBA maximum 

Electromagnetic 

compatibility standards 

● Power supply within the G700 

Conforms to the electromagnetic compatibility standards for 

the countries in which it operates. 

European union standards Approved to Safety Standard EN60950. 

Air flow with a single fan 

failure 

Air flow with the power 

supply fan failure 

In front of the backplane, airflow is 264 linear feet per minute 

average. If a fan fails in front of the backplane, airflow 

becomes 174 lfpm average, with a range from 42 to 340 lfpm. 

Minimal air flow at power supply if power supply fan fails. 

The power supply complies with FCC Part 15, Subpart B Class B and EN55022 Class B 

requirements for conducted and radiated electromagnetic interferences (EMI). You can use the 

power supply in single or multiple G700 Media Gateways. The power supply must allow the 

system to comply with Class B requirements with +6 dB of margin. 

This power unit can be a single power supply or multiple modules that are sized and scalable for 

the load. The Avaya Ethernet switches have a power unit that meets the 802.3 AF standard and 

provides remote power for the telephone. The power supply meets all applicable global 

standards for safety, immunity, and emissions, and is verified by in-country testing. 


Thermal protection 


Thermal protection shuts down the power supply if the internal temperature exceeds the 

maximum rated safe operating temperature. The minimum thermal shutdown point is at an 

ambient temperature of 122 °F (50° C) at 10,000 feet (3,048 meters) elevation or 140 °F (60° C) 

at sea level. These temperature minimums are constant under all input and load conditions. You 

must consider the effects of component tolerances when you define the shutdown point. This 

consideration ensures that the supply does not shut down at ambient temperatures that are less 

than those previously specified. This ambient temperature is measured with a forced air flow 

from input to output at a nominal rate of 46 cubic feet (1.3 cubic meters) per minute (CFM) or 

300 linear feet (91.4 linear meters) per minute (LFM). 

Manual reset 

The power supply requires a manual reset after the power supply shuts down because of over 

voltage or overheating. To reset the power supply, recycle the AC input power. 

AC and load center circuit breakers 

For AC power, each of the G700 Media Gateways has a detachable AC power cord. This cord 

plugs into a wall socket or into a power strip on the rack. A circuit breaker for the panel that 

serves the outlet protects this circuit. 

As a result, the G700 Media Gateway itself does not have circuit breakers or on/off switches. 

However, any customer AC load center must have circuit breakers that protect the power feeds 

to the G700 Media Gateways as required by electrical codes. 

AC power distribution 

AC power distribution is plugged into an outlet or a power strip and can be backed up by an 

optional uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 

AC grounding 

The G700 Media Gateway contains a grounding screw on the back of the chassis. You must 

maintain ground connection whether you connect the G700 Media Gateway directly to the 

branch circuit or to a power distribution strip. The G700 Media Gateway also requires a cabinet 

ground connection directly to an approved ground. 


Related Hardware and adjuncts 

Expansion modules 

The G700 Media Gateway is architecturally based on the Avaya P330 and C360 switches. 

Therefore, customers can use selected P330 expansion modules with the G700 Media 

Gateway. The P330 local-area network (LAN) and wide-area network (WAN) expansion 

modules connect directly to the G700 Media Gateway without requiring additional hardware. 

Two types of expansion modules are available from Avaya: 

● X330 WAN Access routing modules 

● P330 LAN expansion modules 

X330 WAN Access routing module 

Customers with multiple branch offices need network solutions that are simple flexible and 

scalable. The Avaya X330 WAN Access routing module allows customers to deploy a unified, 

high-performance LAN/WAN infrastructure in one data stack. 

Highlights of the Avaya X330 WAN Access Router 

● Provides integrated WAN access that can be used with external firewalls or VPN 

Gateways 

● Works with the following WAN and routing protocols 

● Point-to-Point (PPP) over channeled E1/T1 

● Frame Relay 

● Routing Information Protocol (RIP) v1/v2 

● Single-Area Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) 

● VRRP Redundancy 

● Throughput: wire-speed WAN routing 

Avaya P330 LAN expansion modules 

Highlights of the Avaya P330 LAN expansion modules: 

● Maximum flexibility to the data stack 

● Standard auto-negotiation 

● Link Aggregation Group (LAG) 

● LAG redundancy 

● Link redundancy 


CAUTION: Avaya 

● Congestion control 

● 802.1Q/p VLAN and priority 


! CAUTION: 

expansion modules and Octaplane stacking modules are not 

hot-swappable. The system must be turned off to before you remove or insert an 

expansion module. 

C360 Converged stackable switches 

For information about C360 converged stackable switches, see Avaya C360 Ethernet 

switches on page 379. 

Media modules 

Avaya media modules convert the voice path of the traditional circuits, such as analog trunk, T1/ 

E1, and DCP, to a TDM bus. The VOIP engine then converts the voice path from the TDM bus 

to packetized compressed or uncompressed VoIP on an Ethernet connection. 


backplane. The following figure shows a top view of a media module. 

Figure 39: Top view of media module 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

SIG 

E1/T1 

SO EI SM EM SI 

EO 

mmdciso KLC 031502 


There are eight media modules: 

● MM710 T1/E1 ISDN PRI – For information, see MM710 T1/E1 Media Module on 

page 286. 







● MM760 VoIP – For information, see MM760 VoIP Media Module on page 302. 




The Avaya G600 Media Gateway is supported by the current release of Avaya Communication 

Manager, but it is no longer available for new installations. The G600 Media Gateway can be 

used in an upgraded system with an S8700-series or S8500 Media Server or in a system that 

migrates to the S8700-series or S8500 Media Server. 


The G600 Media Gateway has the following characteristics: 

Note: You 

● There is a maximum of 64 port networks when used with the S8700-series and the S8500. 

● A maximum of four G600 Media Gateways can be in each Port Network (PN) with the 

S8700-series and S8500 media servers. The four G600 Media Gateways must be in one 

data rack due to TDM cable length. 

● A PN consists of a control G600 Media Gateway that is designated A, and second, third, 

and fourth optional G600 Media Gateways that are designated as B, C, and D, 

respectively. The DIP switch on the backplane sets the cabinet address ID within the PN. 

● 19 inches (48.3 centimeters) wide, 13 inches (33 centimeters) high, and 21 inches (53.3 

centimeters) deep 

● A weight of 40 pounds to 50 pounds (18 to 22.5 kilograms) 

● A choice of floor mounting or rack mounting 

Note: 

cannot stack the floor mounted version of the G600 Media Gateway. 

● Ten universal slots and one power-supply slot 

● AC-powered only 

There are no internal batteries, and internal DC power is not an option. However, a UPS is 

supported. 

● Circuit packs that are inserted and removed from the front of the cabinet. 

● Cabinet I/O is through the back and through a front cable pass-through slot on the right 

See the following figure for an example of the G600 Media Gateway. 


Figure 40: G600 Media Gateway 

Components 

Required circuit packs 

The G600 Media Gateway or G600 stack is always connected as a PN to the S8700-series or 

S8500 Media Server using the IP-PNC method. Therefore, the following circuit packs are 

always required in the PN: 

● TN2312BP IP server interface on page 258 

650A 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 

● TN2302AP IP media processor on page 256 

If the G600 PN connects to media gateways in branch locations or adjuncts in the network, if the 

G600 supports IP endpoints, or if the G600 uses IP trunks, the following circuit pack is also 

required: 

● TN799DP control LAN (C-LAN) interface on page 244 

For each physical location of a PN or group of PNs, the following circuit pack is also required: 



CLK 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

N 

E 

T 

W 

O 

R 

K 

TN2312 

BBI 

LINK 

TRMT 

RCV 

100bT 

LINK 

TRMT 

RCV 

BBI 

LINK 

TRMT 

RCV 

TN2302 

scdlip60 KLC 031302

Fans 


Three 12-volt DC variable-speed fans cooling for the G600 Media Gateway. The fans are 

integrated into the back of the cabinet. The fans pull air through the front and the left side and 

up through the cabinet. Air exits from the back of the cabinet. The 650A Global Power supply 

controls the speed of the fans. The 650A Global Power supply varies the fan input voltage 

between 8 VDC and 14 VDC, depending on a temperature sensor that is mounted in the power 

supply, and adjusts each fan’s operating speed accordingly 

The fan assembly includes the three fans, a base plate to which the fans are attached, wiring, 

and an AMP connector. The AMP connector plugs into a cable that connects to the backplane. 

The assembly is easily installed and removed. You must replace the entire assembly if a fan 

fails. If a fan fails, the following events take place: 

● An alarm through the power supply is detected as a power alarm. 

● The remaining fans go into high speed. 

● The red LED on the 650A Global Power supply faceplate lights up. 


Rack mounting 

The G600 Media Gateway can be mounted in a standard 19-inch (48 centimeter) data rack that 

is preinstalled and secured according to the EIA 464 or equivalent standards. The G600 Media 

Gateway can be front mounted as shipped or mounted at its midpoint. 

The customer must provide the rack, and the rack must be installed and secured prior to the 

G600 Media Gateway installation. The customer must also provide AC power to the rack. The 

technicians who install the G600 Media Gateway do not usually have the tools or proper training 

for data rack installation. 

Installation requires 1 foot (30 centimeters) of clearance in the rear, and 18 inches (45 

centimeters) of clearance in the front, which is consistent with the EIA 310 standards. In a 

2-cabinet configuration, the dimensions of the TDM/LAN cable require that you mount the B 

cabinet directly over the A cabinet. 



The G600 Media Gateway must be installed in a well-ventilated area. Maximum equipment 

performance is achieved at an ambient temperature between 40 °F and 120 °F (4 °C and 49 °C) 

for a short-term operation of not more then 72 consecutive hours or 15 days in one year. A 

continuous operation requires up to 110 °F (43 °C). 

The relative humidity range is 10 to 95% at up to 84 °F (29 °C). Above 84 °F (29 °C), maximum 

relative humidity decreases from 95% to 32% at 120 °F (49 °C). Installations outside these limits 

might reduce system life or affect operation. The recommended temperature range and 

humidity range is 65 °F to 85 °F (18 °C to 29 °C) at 20 to 60% relative humidity. 


The G600 Media Gateway has the following AC power requirements using the 650A integrated 

power supply. 

Note: There 

Note: 

is no integrated DC power supply. DC rectifiers can be used if desired; 

follow manufacturer’s instructions. 

Power sources Power input receptacles 1 

Single-phase 120-VAC with 

neutral 

Single-phase 240-VAC with 

neutral 

120-VAC, 60-Hz NEMA 5-15R 15 

240-VAC, 50-Hz IEC 320 10 

1. Japan installations use country-specific receptacles for 100 VAC and 200 VAC, 

50/60 Hz. 


Circuit 

Amperes

Heat dissipation 


The following table describes the amount of heat dissipation that is required by a G600 Media 

Gateway configuration. These estimates are dependent on the inclusion of telephones with the 

media gateways and the amount of time that the telephones are off-hook. 

Note: Typical 

Note: 

systems assume typical trunking, sparing, call rate, and a typical mixture 

of high-function telephones and low function telephones. Worst-case systems 

assumes typical trunking and call rate, but no spare slots, and all ports configured 

with high-function terminals. The G600 Media Gateway that was tested used the 

worst case of 16 port analog circuit packs that were fully populated with analog 

sets. 

BTUs per hour Number of G600 Media 

Gateways only 

1 400 1000 

2 900 2200 

3 1400 3475 

4 1900 4700 

Worst case 3200 5150 

G600 with terminals 



The Avaya G650 Media Gateway is a fourteen slot, rack mounted carrier configured for TN form 

factor circuit packs. The G650 Media Gateway is used with the S8500 and S8700-series Media 

Servers. 


The G650 is 8U or 14 inches (35.6 centimeters) high and mounts in a standard 19 inch (48.3 

centimeters) data rack. The G650 uses one or two 655A power supplies, operating on AC and/ 

or DC input power. Either power supply can provide all the power needed by the G650. When 

two power supplies exist, they share the power load. One power supply can operate on AC 

power and the other on DC power. However, each power supply has its own AC power cord so 

that both power sources can power the Media Gateway simultaneously. Both power supplies 

can take input power from the DC input cable if their AC power fails. 

The system will always use AC power if available. 

See Figure 41: G650 Media Gateway on page 175 for an example of the G650 Media 

Gateway. 


Figure 41: G650 Media Gateway 

Figure notes: 


1. Wrist strap for ESD (electrostatic discharge). 

2. 655A power supply 

3. TN2312BP IP server interface (IPSI) 

4. TN799DP CLAN 


FAN OR POWER FAIL 

FAN AND POWER OK 

AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

2 

1 

3 4 

Power 2 7 11 12 13 Power 

1 14 

3 4 5 6 8 9 

10 




AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

5. TN2302AP IP Media Processor or TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 

The G650 can be rack mounted or, in single G650 configurations, table or floor mounted. 

Multiple G650s, up to five, can be mounted in a rack and connected by TDM/LAN cables to 

create a G650 stack. 

The G650 is mounted in industry standard EIA-310 19 inch (48.3 centimeters) open racks. The 

G650 provides options for front or mid mounting. Although the G650 can be mounted in a 19 

inch (48.3 centimeters) four-post data rack, the G650 does not mount simultaneously to all four 

posts. When mounted in a four-post rack, the G650 uses the front mounting position. 

5 

2 

scdlff02 LAO 081203 


Single G650 

A single G650, equipped with feet, can be table or floor mounted. Side-by-side G650s, 

connected by TDM/LAN cables, are not supported. In a single configuration, the G650 always 

has an A carrier address. 

Multiple G650s 

Multiple G650s, up to five, can be mounted in a rack and connected by TDM/LAN cables to 

create a G650 stack. Multiple G650s must be vertically adjacent and their front panels must 

align in the same vertical plane. For example, carrier A is always below carrier B, which is 

always below carrier C, and so on through carrier E. Note that existing TDM/LAN cables used 

for the G600 cabinets are not compatible with the G650. 

Multiple G650s, up to five, can be mounted in a rack but not connected by TDM/LAN cables. In 

this case each G650 is defined as a port network. Each gateway requires its own interface 

hardware (EI, ATM-EI, TN2312BP IPSI). Note that with this configuration, all the G650s have a 

carrier address of A. 

Carrier addressing 

The carrier position, A through E, must be set on all G650s. The carrier address is set using a 

small printed circuit card that is plugged into one of five, A through E, connectors inside the 

carrier. 

See Figure 42: Printed circuit card on page 176 for an example and location of the printed 

circuit card. 

Figure 42: Printed circuit card 

-48 VDC 

-48 VDC RETURN 


E 

D 

C 

B 

A 

E 

D 

C 

B 

A 

TOP 

swdlpdle LAO 072403


Multiple G650s can be rack mounted with some connected by TDM/LAN cables, and others not 

connected by TDM/LAN cables. For example, a customer can request that the G650 in the 

bottom of the rack not be connected to another G650. The carrier address of the G650 in the 

bottom of the rack is A. The customer can request that the next two G650s in the rack be 

connected together by a TDM/LAN cable. The carrier address of the lower of these two G650s 

is A, and the address of the upper G650 is B. And the customer can request that two additional 

G650s be placed in the rack and connected by a TDM/LAN cable. The carrier address of the 

lower of these two G650s is A and the address of the upper G650 is B. In this example, the 

G650s in the stack form three independent port networks: 

● PN 1 has one G650 with an A carrier address 

● PN 2 has two G650s with an A and B carrier address 

● PN 3 has two G650s with an A and B carrier address 

The carrier address of an individual rack mounted, table mounted, or floor mounted G650 is A. 

See Figure 43: G650 stack on page 178 for an example of a G650 stack. 


Figure 43: G650 stack 

Figure notes: 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

E 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

D 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

C 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

B 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

A 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

Power 11 12 13 Power 

14 

10 

Number Description Number Description 

1 & 2 S8700-series Media Servers 7 G650 Media Gateway: Carrier position "B" 

3 Ethernet switch 8 G650 Media Gateway: Carrier position "C" 

4 & 5 UPS units: one for each server 9 G650 Media Gateway: Carrier position "D" 

6 G650 Media Gateway: Carrier position 

"A" 

10 G650 Media Gateway: Carrier position "E" 




AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 


14 

10 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 


14 

10 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 


14 

10 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 


14 

10 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

2 

1 

1 

2 

1 

1 

13 

12 

24 

CONSOLE 

msdlrck3 LAO 081203 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5

Components 

Required circuit packs 

The G650 Media Gateway requires the following circuit pack: 


● 655A power supply on page 215 

If the G650 Media Gateway or G650 stack is connected as a port network (PN) to the 

S8700-series or S8500 Media Server for the control network, the following circuit pack is also 

required in the PN: 


If the G650 PN is connected by fiber to other PNs, one of the following circuit pack types is 

required: 

● TN570D Expansion Interface on page 225 for direct-connect or CSS-connect PNs 

● TN2305B ATM-CES trunk/port-network interface for multimode fiber on page 257 or 

TN2306B ATM-CES trunk/port-network interface for single-mode fiber on page 257 for 

ATM-connect PNs. 

If the G650 PN uses the IP-PNC method for connections to other PNs, connects to branch 

location media gateways in the network, supports IP endpoints, or serves as a gateway 

between fiber-PNC PNs and IP-PNC PNs in the PN configuration, the following circuit packs are 

required: 


page 267 

If the G650 PN connects to branch location media gateways or adjuncts in the network, 

supports IP endpoints, or uses IP trunks, the following circuit pack is also required: 


For each physical location of a PN or group of PNs, the following circuit pack is also required: 


Optional circuit packs 

Additional circuit packs can be used with the G650 Media Gateway. Their use depends on 

which media server is using the G650 Media Gateway, the S8500 Media Server or the 

S8700-series Media Server. See Appendix B: Optional components for media servers on 

page 421. 


I/O connections 

The fourteen slots of the G650 are equipped with twisted pair cables. These cables run from the 

backplane to the 25-pair type D, metal shelled I/O connector panel mounted on the rear of the 

carrier. The power supply slots (0 and 15) do not provide external I/O connections. 

I/O adapters 

You can use any existing adapter for input and output if the associated TN circuit pack is 

supported in the G650. 

Fan assembly 

The three-fan unit can operate at two different speeds: 

● Mid speed for normal cooling 

● High speed when a temperature threshold is exceeded or a fan failure is detected 



AC power 

Commercial AC is the primary input power source. Both slot 0 and slot 15 have dedicated AC 

input. The 655A power supply can operate on 90 - 264VAC AC input at 47 - 63Hz. The nominal 

ranges for AC power are: 

● 100 - 120VAC at 50 or 60Hz 

● 200 - 240VAC at 50 or 60Hz 

DC power 

Minus 48VDC power can be supplied simultaneously as backup power. One -48VDC power 

input point is provided on the G650 backplane and is distributed through the backplane to each 

power supply. 

Power output 

Power supply output voltage measurements—+5VDC, -5VDC, and -48VDC 


See the following table for power source information. 

Chassis style and 

power-distribution unit 


See Table 26: Circuit breakers for AC-powered chassis on page 181 for circuit breaker 

information for AC-powered chassis. 

Dimensions 

● AC or DC power 

supply. Apparatus 

Code 655A 

● A 655A power 

supply is required 

in slot 0. 

● A 655A power 

supply is optional 

in slot 15. 

The G650 Media Gateway has the following dimensions: 

● 14h x 22d x 19w (inches) 

● 36h x 56d x 48w (centimeters) 

● height in rack: 8 U 

Power source options Power input receptacles 

● Single phase 120 

VAC with neutral 

wire 

● Single phase 240 

VAC with neutral 

wire 

● -48VDC 

Table 26: Circuit breakers for AC-powered chassis 

● 120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15R 

● 240 VAC, 50 Hz IEC 320 

● When you instal G650s in 

Japan, use country specific 

receptacles for 100 and 200 

VAC, 50/60 Hz. 

● When you instal G650s in 

Mexico, use country specific 

receptacles for 127 VAC. 

Chassis type Circuit breaker size 

Rack mount chassis (120 VAC) 60 Hz 15 A 

Rack mount chassis (240 VAC) 50 Hz 10 A 

● weight: 35 - 39 pounds or 16 - 18 kilograms 

The G650 requires 12 inches, or 30 centimeters, of clearance in the rear and 18 inches, or 45 

centimeters of clearance in the front. This clearance allows for adequate ventilation and 

conforms with standards for the EIA3 10D data rack. In a multiple G650 configuration, the 

G650s are placed in a rack without any space between them. If the G650s are not correctly 

placed in the rack, the TDM/LAN cables cannot connect them. 


Operating conditions 

The normal operating conditions for the G650 are: 

● 41 o Fahrenheit (5 o Celsius) to 104 o Fahrenheit (40 o Celsius) 

● 10 percent to 90 percent relative humidity, not condensing below 10,617 feet (3,236 

meters. 


CMC1 Media Gateway 


The CMC1 Media Gateway supports the DEFINITY® Server CSI and Avaya S8700-series and 

S8500 Media Servers. 

Important: The 

! Important: 

CMC1 is not available in the European Union. 


A CMC1 Media Gateway has the following characteristics: 

● A wall-mount design, but also mountable on the floor or on a table where required. 

● Ten universal port slots, plus one power supply slot. In the CMC1 Media Gateway that 

contains the DEFINITY CSI server (TN2402) and tone clock (TN2182C) circuit packs, 

some slots are unavailable for port and service circuit packs. In the remaining CMC1 

Media Gateways that are connected to the server, all 10 slots are available for port circuit 

packs or service circuit packs. 

● Available with the standard reliability option only. 

● 25.5 inches (64.8 centimeters) wide, 24.5 inches (62.2 centimeters) high, and 11.3 inches 

(28.7 centimeters) deep. 

● Weighs from 50 to 60 pounds (22.7 to 27.2 kilograms). 

● Limited to one port network (PN) that consists of a maximum of three CMC1 Media 

Gateways. A control CMC1 is designated "A". One or two optional CMC1s are designated 

"B," and "C," respectively. The DIP switch on the backplane sets the cabinet address ID 

within the PN. 

● Circuit packs that are inserted and removed from the left side. Cabinet I/O is from the right 

side. 

● Shielded TDM/LAN bus cables that interconnect the CMC1s in a PN. 

● AC-powered only. There are no internal batteries, and external DC power is not an option. 

However, an external UPS is supported. 

● Two 12-volt DC variable-speed fans in the bottom of the cabinet provide CMC1 cooling. 

The 650A Global Power supply provides speed control. The 650A varies the fan input 

voltage between 8VDC and 14VDC depending on a temperature sensor that is mounted in 

the power supply. 

A DEFINITY Server CSI can support up to three CMC1 media gateways. 

The following figure shows an example of the CMC1 Media Gateway. 


Figure 44: CMC1 Media Gateway, left side 

scdflef2 LJK 083100 

The following figure shows the connections on the right side of the cabinet of the CMC1 Media 

Gateway. From 1 to 10 25-pair connectors provide an interface between port circuit packs and 

the cross-connect field or a cable access panel. 


MAJ 

MIN 

AMBER CARD IN USE 

RED EMER XFER ON EM XFR 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

T 

N 2402 

T 

N 2182

Figure 45: CMC1 Media Gateway, right side 

scdfrf2 KLC 061097 


The following figure shows a front view of a cabinet containing three CMC1 Media Gateways. 


Figure 46: Typical vertical installation, front view of the CMC1 Media Gateway, DEFINITY 

Server CSI configuration 

Figure notes: 

Letter Description of Connection 

A, B, and C Three CMC1 Media Gateways wall mounted for a DEFINITY Server CSI. 


B 

A 

C 

Floor 

indf3cmc KLC 110497

Components 


Required circuit packs for a CMC1 Media Gateway for DEFINITY Server CSI 

The CMC1 Media Gateway or CMC1 stack for DEFINITY Server CSI requires the following 

circuit packs: 

● TN2402 processor on page 265 

● TN2182C tone clock, tone detector, and call classifier (8 ports) on page 248 


If the CSI PN connects to branch location media gateways or adjuncts in the network, supports 

IP endpoints, or uses IP trunks, the following circuit pack is also required: 



S8700-series and S8500 Media Servers 

The CMC1 Media Gateway or stack is always connected as a PN to the S8700-series or S8500 

Media Server using the IP-PNC method. Therefore, the following circuit packs are always 

required in the PN: 


● TN2302AP IP media processor on page 256 


If the CMC1 PN connects to branch location media gateways or adjuncts in the network, 




SCC1 Media Gateway 

Note: 

Note: The SCC1 is no longer sold, but is still supported. 

Each SCC1 Media Gateway has vertical slots that hold circuit packs. A blank faceplate covers 

each unused slot. 


The following figure shows a typical SCC1 Media Gateway. 

Figure 47: Typical SCC1 Media Gateway 

Figure notes: 


1. Circuit packs 

2. Power supply 

scdfscci KLC 032502 

3. Cooling air exhaust vents 


1 

2 

3


SCC1 Media Gateways come in four configurations: 


● A control cabinet, for DEFINITY Server SI only, that contains a TN2404 processor, tone 

clock, and a power converter. The control cabinet forms the basis for the SI processor port 

network (PPN). A control cabinet is always in the A position of an SCC1 stack. 

● A duplicated control cabinet, for DEFINITY Server SI only, that contains the same 

equipment as the control cabinet. The duplicated control cabinet provides duplicated 

control in an SI PPN. A duplicated control cabinet is always in the B position of an SCC1 

stack. 

● An expansion control cabinet that contains port circuit packs, interfaces to the PPN (SI 

only) or media server (S8700-series/S8500), interfaces to other PNs, a maintenance 

interface, and a power supply. The expansion control cabinet is always in the A position of 

an SCC1 stack that is PN only for DEFINITY Server SI. 

● A port cabinet that contains port circuit packs, interfaces to other PNs, and a power supply. 

A port cabinet can be part of a PPN or a PN. A port cabinet can also contain an interface to 

the media server if it is in a duplicated control (high reliability) or duplicated control and 

bearer (critical reliability) system. 

A maximum of four SCC1 Media Gateways can be stacked to form a single PN. The position of 

the basic control cabinet or expansion control cabinet is always labeled A. Additional 

port-cabinet positions are sequentially labeled B, C, and D. 

A duplicated control cabinet, if any, is installed in position B. The following figure shows an 

example of a stack of SCC1 Media Gateways. 


Figure 48: Typical SCC1 stack 

Figure notes: 


1. Port cabinet in the D position 

2. Port cabinet in the C position 

3. Port cabinet or duplicated control cabinet in the B position 

4. Basic control cabinet or expansion control cabinet in the A position 

5. Cabinet clips 

lcdfsc1i KLC 012500 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

5 

5

For DEFINITY Servers SI: 


● Each stack of SCC1 Media Gateways requires one basic or expansion control cabinet at 

the bottom of the stack. 

● The maximum number of SCC1 Media Gateway stacks or port networks (PNs) is three. 

Cabinet clips connect the cabinets together. At the rear of the cabinets, a ground plate connects 

between the cabinets for ground integrity. 

For Avaya Media Servers: 

● Each SCC1 PN requires one expansion control cabinet, and in a stack of SCC1 Media 

Gateways, it is installed at the bottom of the stack. 

● S8500 - SCC1 Media Gateways are supported in fiber-PNC, IP-PNC, and a combination 

of fiber- and IP-PNC configurations 

- Maximum number of SCC1 stacks or PNs is 64. 

● S8700-series - SCC1 Media Gateways are supported in fiber-PNC, IP-PNC, and a 

combination of fiber- and IP-PNC configurations 

- Maximum number of SCC1 stacks or PNs is 64. 

Regardless of the server being used, the maximum number of SCC1 Media Gateways that can 

be stacked in a PN is four. 

Table 27: Cabinet circuit-pack slots 

Port A port slot is colored purple or gray and has a slot 

number on the label. A port slot accepts any circuit 

pack that has a purple label on the latch or a gray 

rectangle on the latch. 

Control A control slot is colored white and has a name on 

the label. A control slot accepts only a circuit pack 

with a name that matches the name on the slot 

label. 

Service A service slot is a port slot that has no I/O 

connector. A service slot is colored purple or gray. A 

service slot accepts a special type of circuit pack 

that also does not require an I/O connector. 

DEFINITY 

Server SI, 

S8700-series 

Media Server, 

and S8500 

Media Server 

DEFINITY 

Server SI, 

S8700-series 

Media Server, 


Media Server 

DEFINITY 

Server SI, 

S8700-series 

Media Server, 


Media Server 


Carriers 

Circuit packs labeled with gray and white latches have replaced the purple-colored and the 

white-colored circuit packs. A label with gray indicates a slot for a port circuit pack. A label with 

white indicates a slot for a control circuit pack. 

A 25-pair connector on the rear panel of the carrier connects to each port slot in the following 

carriers: 

● a port carrier 

● an expansion control carrier 

● a control carrier 

A cable attaches to each connector and routes to the cross-connect field. 

The following blank faceplates cover empty carrier slots to ensure proper cooling: 

● 158J (4 in/9.2 cm) covers the area to the left of slot 1 in port cabinets 

● 158P (0.75 in/1.9 cm) covers any unused slot. 

● 158N (0.50 in/1.27 cm) is used with the LAN Gateway in DEFINITY AUDIX Release 3 and 

CallVisor ASAI installations. 

● 158G (0.25 in/0.63 cm) is used with the TN755 or the TN2202 circuit pack. 

This section describes the carriers that the SCC1 Media Gateway can use. 

Basic control cabinet for a DEFINITY Server SI 

The basic control cabinet is in the PPN only and is used only by DEFINITY Server SI. This 

cabinet contains ports, a control complex to perform call processing, and an interface to an 

optional duplicated control cabinet. The basic control cabinet also interfaces to an optional 

Stratum-3 clock. 

The basic control cabinet has dedicated white-colored slots that contain specific control circuit 

packs. Dual-colored slots can contain any port circuit pack or a designated white circuit pack, 

such as a power unit like the TN755 or TN2202. AC or DC input power supplies provide power 

to the carrier. The following figure shows an example of the basic control cabinet. 


Figure 49: SCC1 basic control cabinet (J58890L) 

B 

AUTO 

A 

103577450 

TN792 DUPL INTERFACE 

S 

P 

E 

OVERIDE 

ALARMS 

MAJ 

MIN 

WRN 

ACK 

Lucent 

98DR07125243 

T 

N 

7 

9 

2 

EMER TR 

ON 

AUTO 

T 

N 

2 

4 

0 

4 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

1 

5 

8 

P 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

2 

4 

0 

1 

The following table describes the connectors in the basic control carrier. 

Connector Function 


1 to 16 (A1 to A16) 25-pair connectors that provide interfaces between connect 

port circuit packs and the cross-connect field or a fiber optic 

transceiver 

AUX (auxiliary) Provides interfaces for customer alarms, attendant console 

power, emergency transfer panels, and an internal modem 

that is used for remote maintenance. 

DCE Connects the processor to call detail recording (CDR) 

equipment, a system printer, or an external modem that is 

used for remote maintenance. This connector can be used 

with any reliability option. 

TERMINAL Connects an administration terminal to the processor circuit 

pack in standard-reliability systems. The terminal connector 

always connects to the processor in the carrier of the 

terminal. 

Duplication Option 

Terminal (DOT) 

OFF 

C 

A 

R 

D 

I 

N 

U 

S 

E 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

2 

1 

8 

2 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

BBI 

LINK 

TRMT 

RCV 

T 

N 

7 

9 

9 

ccdfr8l KLC 021205 

Used in a high- or critical-reliability configuration to connect 

an administration terminal to the active processor through the 

duplication interface slot. The DOT connector can connect to 

the processor in another carrier. 

T 

N 

7 

5 

5 


Duplicated control cabinet for a DEFINITY 

Server SI 

The optional duplicated control cabinet resides only in the PPN for the DEFINITY Server SI. A 

duplicated control cabinet contains ports and a duplicated control complex. 

A duplicated control cabinet has dedicated white-colored slots for designated control circuit 

packs. A port circuit-pack slot can contain any port circuit pack. 

An AC or a DC power supply resides in the right side of the cabinet. The cabinet contains a 

duplication interface circuit pack in slot DUPN INTFC. The following figure shows an example of 

a duplicated control cabinet. 

Figure 50: Duplicated control cabinet (J58890M) 

B 

AUTO 

A 

103577450 


S 

P 

E 

OVERIDE 

ALARMS 

MAJ 

MIN 

WRN 

ACK 

Lucent 

98DR07125243 

T 

N 

7 

9 

2 

EMER TR 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

T 

N 

2 

4 

0 

4 

The following table describes the connectors in the duplicated control cabinet. 


B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

1 

5 

8 

P 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

C 

A 

R 

D 

I 

N 

U 

S 

E 

T 

N 

2 

4 

0 

1 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

2 

1 

8 

2 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

01 to 16 (A01 to A16) 25-pair connectors that provide interfaces between port circuit packs 

and the cross-connect field or a fiber optic transceiver 

TERMINAL Can connect to the processor circuit pack in the duplicated control 

cabinet if the duplication interface circuit pack fails in the control 

carrier. 


T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

BBI 

LINK 

TRMT 

RCV 

T 

N 

7 

9 

9 

T 

N 

7 

5 

5 

ccdfr8m KLC 021205

Expansion control cabinet for a DEFINITY 

Server SI, S8700-series Media Server or S8500 Media Server 


An expansion control cabinet (J58890N) is always in the A position in an expansion PN stack of 

SCC1 Media Gateways. The expansion control cabinet contains ports. It also contains a TN775 

maintenance circuit pack. An AC or a DC power supply resides in the right side of the cabinet. 

An expansion control cabinet has optional port circuit packs in port slots 2 to 17. 

Fiber-PNC configurations - In fiber-PNC configurations, the expansion control cabinet 

contains a tone clock and one or two expansion interface circuit packs to connect to the other 

PN(s), a CSS, or an ATM switch. However, if the PN has an IPSI circuit pack for a control 

connection to the S8500 or S8700-series Media Server, the tone clock is not used. Instead the 

built-in tone clock capability of the IPSI circuit pack is used. In this case, the IPSI circuit pack is 

connected by faceplate ribbon cable to the TN775D Maintenance circuit pack. 

IP-PNC configurations - In an IP-PNC PN, the expansion control cabinet is necessary in the A 

position. It contains a TN775 Maintenance circuit pack in MTCE slot and an IPSI circuit pack in 

the tone clock slot. At least one IP Media Processor or IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack is 

required in the PN and should be inserted into the A01 position of the expansion control cabinet. 

Additional IP Media Processors or IP Media Resources may be inserted in any other cabinets or 

slots in the PN. The other slots in an expansion control cabinet can contain optional port circuit 

packs. 

CAUTION: Inserting 

! CAUTION: 

the wrong circuit pack into the A01 slot of the expansion control cabinet 

may result in no ringing, circuit pack conflicts, and outages when lightning strikes. 

The A01 slot should contain only an Expansion Interface circuit pack, an IP 

Media Processor, or an IP Media Resource 320. 

An IP Media Processor or IP Media Resource 320 can be inserted into almost 

any slot in the carrier. But in a conversion from a fiber-PNC to an IP-PNC 

configuration, one of these circuit packs should be inserted into the A01 slot that 

is vacated by removal of the EI circuit pack. 

If the SCC1 PN connects to branch location media gateways or adjuncts in the network, 




Figure 51: Expansion control cabinet (J58890N) 

CLK 

ALARMS 

MAJ 

MIN 

WRN 

ACK 

EMER TR 

ON 

The following table describes the connectors in the expansion control cabinet. 


AUTO 

OFF 

Mtce 

T 

N 

7 

7 

5 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

N 

E 

T 

W 

O 

R 

K 

T 

N 

2 

3 

1 

2 

A 

P 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

1 (A1) Provides a fiber-optic cable interface to an expansion interface (EI) 

circuit pack in slot 1 1 or a copper cable interface for a DS1 Converter. 

2 to 17 (A2 to A17) 25-pair connectors that provide interfaces between the port circuit 

packs and the cross-connect field or a fiber optic-transceiver. 

AUX (auxiliary) Provides interfaces for customer alarms, attendant console power, 

and emergency transfer panels. 

TERM (terminal) Connects an administration terminal to the maintenance circuit pack 

and is used only for the DEFINITY Server SI. This connector is not 

used for the S8700-series Media Server or the S8500 Media Server. 

1. In systems that use ATM-PNC, the fiber connectors for the OC-3/STM-1 interfaces to the ATM switches 

reside on the faceplates of the TN2305 or TN2306 circuit packs. 

Port cabinet for a DEFINITY Server SI, 

S8700-series Media Server, or S8500 Media Server 

Port cabinets reside in the DEFINITY Server SI PPN and in expansion PNs. An AC or a DC 

power supply resides in the right side of each cabinet. A TN755 neon power unit can be 

installed in slot 18, which uses some of the space of slot 17 and prevents the use of slot 17. 

For a DEFINITY Server SI PPN, all slots are available for optional circuit packs. 

For a fiber-PNC PN, slot 1 contains a Tone-Clock circuit pack when the port cabinet is in 

the B position of a PN in a duplicated control/duplicated bearer (critical-reliability) system. 


B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

1 

5 

8 

P 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

1 

5 

8 

P 

ccdf11n KLC 021105


Slot 2 contains an EI or, for S8700-series Media Server only, an ATM Interface circuit pack 

for a critical-reliability system. Slot 3 would also contain an EI circuit pack for direct-connect 

critical-reliability system. Otherwise, all slots are available for optional circuit packs. 

For an IP-PNC PN, slot 1 contains an IPSI circuit pack when the cabinet is in the B position 

and the PN is connected to a duplicated control (high reliability) network. The other slots in 

a port carrier can contain optional port circuit packs. 

The following figure shows an example of a port cabinet. 

Figure 52: Port cabinet (J58890H) 

The following table describes the connectors to the port cabinet. 


2 to 3 

(B2 to B3) 

1 to 18 

(B1 to B18, C1 

to C18, or D1 to 

D18) 

CLK 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

N 

E 

T 

W 

O 

R 

K 

T 

N 

2 

3 

1 

2 

A 

P 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

ccdf11h KLC 021105 

An Expansion Interface port that provides an interface for a fiber-optic 

cable. This cable runs either to an Expansion Interface circuit pack in 

another PN or a Switch Node Interface circuit pack in a center-stage 

switch. For an ATM configuration, these slots contain an ATM interface 

circuit pack, and a fiber-optic cable connects out of the front of the circuit 

pack to an ATM data switch. 

25-pair connectors that provide interfaces between the port circuit packs 

and the cross-connect field or a fiber optic transceiver. 


MCC1 Media Gateway 

Note: 

Note: The MCC1 is no longer sold, but is still supported. 

An MCC1 Media Gateway can be used as a port network (PN) cabinet. Doors in front of and 

behind the MCC1 Media Gateway protect the internal equipment and allow easy access to the 

circuit packs. Each MCC1 Media Gateway rolls on casters. Leveling feet keep the cabinet from 

rolling. Each lower corner of an MCC1 Media Gateway can be bolted to the floor, if required. 


An MCC1 Media Gateway is a 70-inch (178-centimeter) cabinet that has up to five carriers. 

MCC1 Media Gateways are one of four types: 

● A DEFINITY Server SI PPN that contains the ports, SPE, an interface to an EPN, and 

possibly a CSS. 

● A PN or multiple PN configuration in an S8500 or S8700-series Media Server configuration 

● A DEFINITY Server SI Expansion Port Network (EPN) that contains additional ports, 

interfaces to the PPN cabinet and other EPNs, and the maintenance interface. 

● A PN that contains a switch node, which is an SN in a system that has a CSS. 

Carriers hold circuit packs and connect the circuit packs to power, the TDM bus, and the packet 

bus. Carriers are one of five types: 

● Control carrier (DEFINITY Server SI PPN only) 

● Optional duplicated control carrier (DEFINITY Server SI PPN only) 

● Optional port carrier (PPN, EPN, and PN) 

● Expansion control carrier (EPN and PN) 

● Optional switch node carrier (PPN, EPN, and PN) 

See Typical PN cabinet for all server models on page 200 for an example of the MCC1 Media 

Gateway layout. 


Components 

Auxiliary cabinet 


The auxiliary cabinet contains the hardware to install optional equipment. The cabinet allows 

carrier, rack (width of 23 in. [58.4 cm]), and panel types of mounting. An auxiliary cabinet 

contains the following components: 

● A fuse panel (J58889AB) that distributes -48 VDC to fused cabinet circuits 

● An AC power receptacle strip that provides switched and unswitched 120-VAC receptacles 

● A DC connector block for cabinets powered by: 

- An external DC source 

- An AC-to-DC converter that: 

● Accepts AC power from a switched outlet of an AC power strip 

● Sends converted DC power onto the required DC connector block 

Processor Port network cabinet for DEFINITY Server SI 

A PPN cabinet for DEFINITY Server SI contains the following carriers: 

● One to four port carriers (J58890BB) 

● One control carrier (J58890AH) in the A position 

● One duplicated control carrier (J58890AJ), in a high reliability or critical reliability 

configuration, in the B position 

Port network cabinet for the S8700-series Media 

Server 

A PN cabinet for the S8700-series Media Server contains the following components: 

● One to four port carriers (J58890BB) 

● An ATM Interface circuit pack in a configuration with Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 

● Switch node (SN) carrier (J58890SA) in a configuration with center stage switch (CSS) 

- Minimum of one SN carrier in a standard reliability or a duplicated control (high reliability) 

network configuration with a CSS 

- 2 SN carriers in a duplicated bearer (critical reliability) configuration 

See Typical PN cabinet for all server models on page 200 for an example of a typical PN 

cabinet. 


Figure 53: Typical PN cabinet for all server models 

Figure notes: 


1. Port carrier in position C 

2. Port or control carrier in position B 

3. Control or expansion control carrier in position A 

4. Fan unit in position F 

5. Port or switch node (SN) carrier in position D 

6. Port or SN carrier in position E 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

7. Power-distribution unit in position G 


lcdfpdui KLC 031202

Port network cabinet for Avaya S8500 Media Server 


The Avaya S8500 Media Server supports the MCC1 Media Gateway in migrations from a 

DEFINITY R or DEFINITY SI simplex configuration. A maximum of three PNs are supported in a 

direct connect configuration only. However, up to 64 PNs are supported when IP-PNC PNs are 

combined with fiber-PNC PNs in the configuration. 

Expansion port network cabinet for DEFINITY Server SI 

An expansion port network (EPN) cabinet contains the following carriers: 

● One to four port carriers (J58890BB), one of which may serve as a duplicated expansion 

control carrier in a critical reliability configuration in position B 

● One expansion control carrier (J58890AF) in position A 

An EPN cabinet is the same as the PPN cabinet, except the carrier in the A position and, 

sometimes, the carrier in the B position differ from those in a PPN cabinet. See MCC1 EPN or 

PN cabinet on page 202 for an example of an MCC1 EPN cabinet. 


Figure 54: MCC1 EPN or PN cabinet 

Figure notes: 

Port carrier 1 

Expansion 

control carrier 

Port or switch 

node carrier 


Power 

4 distribution 

unit 

1. Port carrier in position C 

2. Port carrier in position B 

3. Expansion control carrier in position A 

4. Fan units in position F 

5. Port or switch node (SN) carrier in position D 

6. Port or SN carrier in position E 

7. Power-distribution unit in position G 

In a minimal dual-port-network EPN cabinet configuration, the A, B, and C carrier positions are 

intended for the first PN in the cabinet. The D and E carrier positions are intended for the 

second PN in the cabinet. When a cabinet has two PNs, carrier position E must be used and 

populated first. Carrier position D is added and populated second. 


Port carrier 


node carrier 

lcdfpdu4 LJK 081999


Carriers 


The following table lists the types of carriers that can be installed in the MCC1 Media Gateway 

with the DEFINITY Server SI, S8700-series Media Server, and S8500 Media Server. Each 

carrier is described in detail later in this section. 

Carrier 

type 

Control 

carrier. 

Port carrier 

(optional) 

Expansion 

control 

carrier 

Switch 

node carrier 

Duplicated 

control 

carrier 

(optional) 

Control carrier for DEFINITY Server SI 

Description Cabinet Server 

Contains the processor circuit packs to 

perform call processing, maintenance, 

and administration. The carrier can also 

contain port circuit packs. 

For SI PPN, contains the port and 

service circuit packs. 

For duplicated bearer EPN in B position, 

contains extra ports, Tone Clock or IPSI, 

and EI circuit packs. In C, D, and/or E 

PN position, contains extra port and 

service packs. 

For fiber-PNC, contains extra ports, 

Tone-Clock or IPSI maintenance 

interface, and EI circuit packs. 

For IP-PNC, contains IPSI 

(server-connected), maintenance 

interface, and IP Media Processor/IP 

Media Resource 320. 

For fiber-PNC, contains the SNI and 

SNC circuit packs that make up the 

CSS. 

Contains the duplicate processor circuit 

packs to perform call processing, 

maintenance, and administration 

identical to that of the control carrier. 

The duplicated control carrier can also 

contain port circuit packs. 

PN DEFINITY 

Server SI 

PN or 

EPN 

DEFINITY 

Server SI, 

S8700-series 

Media Server, 


Media Server 

EPN DEFINITY 

Server SI, 

S8700-series 

Media Server, 


Media Server 

EPN or 

PPN 

S8700-series 

Media Server 

PPN DEFINITY 

Server SI 

The control carrier (J58890AH) is used for a DEFINITY Server SI. This carrier is not used for an 

S8700-series Media Server or an S8500 Media Server. 


The following figure, Control carrier (J58890AH) on page 204 shows an example of a control 

carrier. 

Figure 55: Control carrier (J58890AH) 

The control carrier has dedicated white-colored circuit pack slots that always contain specific 

control circuit packs. Dual-colored slots can contain any port circuit pack or the designated 

white circuit pack, such as a DS1 circuit pack or a power unit. AC or DC input power supplies 

provide power to the carrier. 

The following table describes the connectors in the control carrier. 


1 to 9 (A1 to A9) 25-pair connectors that provide interfaces between port circuit 

packs and the cross-connect field or fiber transceiver. 

AUX (Auxiliary) Provide an interface for alarms, attendant console power, 

emergency power transfer panels, and an internal modem that is 

used for remote maintenance. 

Duplication option 

terminal 

Z100A1 

blanks 

or 

631DA 

Used in high- and critical-reliability systems to connect an 

administration terminal to the active processor from the duplication 

interface slot position. 

Terminal Connects a system management terminal to the processor in the 

control carrier. 

P1 and P2 Connect the carrier to the cabinet wiring harness 

Data communications 

equipment 

Z 

1 

0 

0 

C 

B 

AUTO 

A 

103577450 


S 

P 

E 

OVERIDE 

ALARMS 

MAJ 

MIN 

WRN 

ACK 

Lucent 

98DR07125243 

T 

N 

7 

9 

2 

EMER TR 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

T 

N 

2 

4 

0 

4 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

Connects the processor to call detail recording (CDR) equipment or 

an external modem that is used for remote maintenance. This 

connector can be used with any reliability option. 


B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

C 

A 

R 

D 

I 

N 

U 

S 

E 

T 

N 

2 

4 

0 

1 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

2 

1 

8 

2 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

7 

7 

1 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

BBI 

LINK 

TRMT 

RCV 

T 

N 

7 

9 

9 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

7 

5 

5 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

B 

l 

a 

n 

k 

631DB 

or 

649A 

ccdfr8ah KLC 021205

Duplicated control carrier for DEFINITY Server SI 

A duplicated control carrier (J58890AJ) contains the following slots: 

● Dedicated white-colored slots that always contain specific control circuit packs. 

● Gray and purple slots that can contain port circuit packs. 


● White, gray, or purple dual-colored slots can contain port circuit packs or designated white 

circuit packs. These designated packs include expansion interfaces or a power unit. 

If used, the 649A power unit resides on the right side of the carrier. Other AC or DC input power 

units reside at each end of a duplicated control carrier. 

Expansion Control Carrier for all server models 

Fiber-PNC port network 

In fiber-PNC PNs, the expansion control carrier (J58890AF) contains an EI or an ATM Interface 

circuit pack in port slots 1 and 2. These circuit packs are used with fiber-optic cable to connect 

to another cabinet or the CSS, which may be in the same MCC1 cabinet. The slots in an 

expansion control carrier can contain optional port circuit packs. 

An expansion control carrier also contains port slots 3 to 19 and AC or DC power units. The 

Maintenance and Tone-Clock circuit packs are also shown. Slots 18 and 19 can contain an 

optional neon power unit. 

The following figure, Figure 56: Expansion control carrier (J58890AF) on page 205, shows an 

example of an expansion control carrier. 

Figure 56: Expansion control carrier (J58890AF) 

Z100A1 

blanks 

or 

631DA1 

Z 

1 

0 

0 

C 

ALARMS 

MAJ 

MIN 

WRN 

ACK 

EMER TR 

ON 

AUTO 

OFF 

T 

N 

7 

7 

5 

T 

N 

2 

1 

8 

2 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

631DB1 

or 

649A 

ccdf10af KLC 101601 


The following table describes the connectors in an expansion control carrier. 

IP-PNC port network 

In an IP-PNC PN, the expansion control carrier is necessary in the A position. It contains a 

required TN775 Maintenance circuit pack in the MNTC slot and an IPSI circuit pack in the tone 

clock slot. At least one IP Media Processor or IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack is required in 

the PN and should be inserted into the A01 position of the expansion control carrier. Additional 

IP Media Processors or IP Media Resources may be inserted in any other carriers or slots in the 

PN. The other slots in an expansion control cabinet can contain optional port circuit packs. 

CAUTION: Inserting 


1 and 2 

A1 and A2 

1 to 19 

A1 to A19 

Provides a fiber-optic cable interface to an Expansion Interface (EI) circuit 

pack in slot 1 1 or a copper cable interface for a DS1 converter 

25-pair connectors provide interfaces between port circuit packs and the 

cross-connect field or fiber transceiver 

Auxiliary (AUX) Provides interfaces for customer alarms, attendant console power, and 

emergency transfer panels 

Terminal Connects a management terminal to the Maintenance circuit pack in an 

expansion control carrier 

P1 and P2 Provides access to alarm and control circuits. Also, they connect ringing 

voltage from the ring generator to the carrier. 

1. In systems that use ATM-PNC, the fiber connectors for the OC-3/STM-1 interfaces to the ATM switches 

reside on the faceplates of the TN2305 or TN2306 circuit packs. 

! CAUTION: 

the wrong circuit pack into the A01 slot of the expansion control cabinet 

may result in improper call processing. The A01 slot should contain only an 

Expansion Interface circuit pack, an IP Media Processor, or an IP Media 

Resource 320. 

An IP Media Processor or IP Media Resource 320 can be inserted into almost 

any slot in the carrier. But in a conversion from a fiber-PNC to an IP-PNC 

configuration, one of these circuit packs should be inserted into the A01 slot that 

is vacated by removal of the E.I. circuit pack. 


Port carrier for DEFINITY Server SI, 

S8700-series Media Server, or S8500 Media Server (J58890BB) 

A port carrier (J58890BB) contains the following slots: 


● Port slot locations 1 to 20 for the port circuit packs. 

For a DEFINITY Server SI PPN, all slots are available for optional circuit packs. 

For a fiber-PNC PN, slot 1 contains a Tone-Clock or IPSI circuit pack when the port carrier 

is in the B position of an EPN cabinet in a duplicated bearer configuration. Slot 2 contains 

an EI or ATM Interface circuit pack for a duplicated bearer configuration. Slot 3 would also 

contain an EI circuit pack for a direct-connect configuration. Otherwise, all slots are 

available for optional circuit packs. 

For an IP-PNC PN, slot 1 contains an IPSI circuit pack when the port carrier is in the B 

position of a PN in a duplicated control network configuration. An IP Media Processor or IP 

Media Resource 320 circuit pack is required in the PN, but can be inserted into any carrier 

included in the PN. The other slots in a port carrier can contain optional port circuit packs. 

If the MCC1 PN connects to branch location media gateways or adjuncts in the network, 


- TN799DP control LAN (C-LAN) interface on page 244 

● A power unit service slot in which a power unit circuit pack or service circuit pack can be 

installed. 

● Slots at each end of the carrier for AC or DC power units. 

The following figure, Figure 57: Port carrier (J58890BB) on page 207, shows an example of a 

port carrier. 

Figure 57: Port carrier (J58890BB) 

Z100A1 

blanks 

or 

631DA1 

Z 

1 

0 

0 

C 

T 

N 

2 

1 

8 

2 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

631DB1 

or 

649A 

ccdf10bb KLC 101601 


The following table describes the connectors in the port carrier. 


1 to 20 25-pair connectors that provide interfaces between port circuit packs and 

the cross-connect field or fiber transceiver 

P1 Provides a position indicator of the carrier and access to alarm and 

control circuits 

Switch node carrier for S8700-series Media Server 

The switch node carrier (SNC) (J58890SA) can contain: 

● One or two switch node clocks 

● Up to 16 Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit packs 

● One or two DS1 converter circuit packs 

● One EI circuit pack 

● Two AC or DC power units 

An AC or DC power unit resides at each end of an SNC. An SNC can be used when connecting 

from 2 to 44 PNs, but must be used when connecting three or more EPNs. 

See Figure 58: Switch node carrier (J58890SA) on page 208 for an example of a switch node 

carrier. 

Figure 58: Switch node carrier (J58890SA) 

631DA 

or 

649A 

Z 

1 

0 

0 

C 

b 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

5 

7 

0 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 


T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

E EXPN INTFC 

SWITCH NODE INTERFACE SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH NODE INTERFACE 

NODE 

DS1 

TEST NODE 

CLOCK CLOCK 

CONV 

Power Unit DS1 CONV 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

2 

Z 

1 

0 

0 

A 

b 

l 

a 

n 

k 

T 

N 

5 

7 

2 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

5 

7 

3 

T 

N 

1 

6 

5 

4 

631DA 

or 

649A 

POWER UNIT 

ccdf0005 KLC021105

The following table describes the connectors in a switch node carrier. 



1 (E1) EI connector for a duplicated PN only. EI connector for the cable between 

the EI circuit pack in slot 1 and the Switch Node Interface (SNI) circuit 

pack in slot 2. Also used for a DS1 Converter circuit pack in slot 1. 

2 to 9 and 13 to 

20 (E2 to E19 and 

E13 to E20) 

Fiber-optic cable interfaces to the SNI circuit packs and other circuit packs 

that are connected to SN ports or circuit packs in expansion PNs. 

21 (E21) Interface to connect the DS1 Converter circuit pack to the cross-connect 

field and an SNI circuit pack. 

P1 Provides the position indicator of the SN carrier and provides access to 

alarm circuits and control circuits. 

Table 28: Carrier circuit pack slots 

Type Description Server 

Port A port slot is colored purple or labeled with a gray 

rectangle. A port slot can accept any purple- or 

gray-labeled circuit pack. 

Control A control slot is colored white or labeled with a outlined 

white rectangle. A port slot can accept any purple- or 

gray-labeled circuit pack. 

Circuit packs and slots that are colored with gray and white replaced the purple- and the 

white-colored circuit packs and slots, respectively. A label with a solid gray rectangle indicates a 

slot for a port circuit pack. A label with an outlined white rectangle indicates a slot for a control 

circuit pack. Each port slot attaches to a 50-pin (25-pair) connector on the rear panel of the 

carrier. A cable attaches to each connector and is routed to the cross-connect field. Each slot 

that contains a fiber-optic interface circuit pack uses a fiber-optic transceiver on the rear panel 

of the carrier. The circuit packs types are EI or SNI. 

Terminators on the backplane terminate each end of the processor expansion bus. 

The following blank faceplates cover unused circuit pack slots in the carriers to maintain proper 

air flow: 

● Z100A1, 0.75 inches (1.9 centimeters) 

● Z100C, 0.5 inches (1.27 centimeters) 

● Z100D, 0.25 inches (0.64 centimeters) 

DEFINITY Server SI 

and S8700-series 

Media Server 

DEFINITY Server SI 



Circuit packs, channel service units, 

and power supplies 

120A channel service unit 

120A channel service unit 

The 120A channel service unit (CSU), when combined with a DS-1 circuit pack, provides an 

integrated CSU that: 

● Converts digital frames for communications between a local area network and wide area 

network 

● Provides a barrier for electrical interference from either side of the unit 

● Echoes loopback signals for testing the network 

The 120A CSU performs similar functions to an external CSU but with the following advantages: 


● Uses less equipment and space 

● Powered by the system 

● Easier to install and operate 

The 120A CSU connects to a DS1 circuit pack via the I/O connector panel on the back of the 

cabinet. A modular cable plugs into the CSU module at one end and into a 700A loopback jack, 

smart jack, or other service-provider interface on the other end. 


Circuit packs, channel service units, and power supplies 

Figure 59: 120A CSU 

2.5 inches 

The following circuit packs support the 120A CSU: 

● TN464E to TN464HP 

● TN2464CP and earlier 

● TN767D or TN767E 

120A6 

CSU MODULE 

● TN2313 or TN2313AP 

The 120A CSU is supported on DEFINITY, Multivantage, and Communication Manager media 

servers that support TN circuit packs. 


4.25 inches 

A 700A DSI LOOPBACK 

JACK MUST BE INSTALLED 

WITH THIS UNIT. 

ALARM CONTACTS NETWORK 

120a6 

h1dfcsu1 LAO 072506

1217B AC power supply 

1217B AC power supply 

Note: 

Note: This power supply is no longer sold. 

A 1217B power supply is used only with an SCC1 Media Gateway. This power supply provides 

additional protection in the event of an overload. An overload triggers a power supply alarm, but 

the system’s cooling fans continue to run, and the power supply continues to function. This 

power supply replaces the WP-91153 L3 and L4-25 and is fully backward compatible. 

This power-factor-corrected supply accepts 50- or 60-Hz AC input, while auto-ranging between 

90- and 264-VAC input. This multiple-output power supply provides regulated DC outputs and 

AC ringer outputs that are switch-selectable 20- or 25-Hz AC. The 1217B power supply meets 

the: 

● Harmonic-distortion requirements of IEC1000-3-2 (PFC) 

● Immunity requirements of IEC 1000-4 

● Safety requirements of IEC 950 

● Current UL requirements and CSA requirements 

The 1217B power supply mounts in a carrier’s power supply slot. A power cord with a 

three-prong plug on one end connects the supply to a dedicated AC power source. 

631DA1 AC power unit 

Note: 

Note: This power unit is no longer sold. 

A 631DA1 power unit accepts 60-Hz, 120-VAC input power. The unit provides +5V DC power 

and up to 60A for the carrier backplanes of an MCC1 Media Gateway. 

If AC input power fails, the power unit can convert 144 VDC from optional batteries in an 

AC power-distribution unit to +5 VDC. A circuit in the optional battery charger detects the higher 

equivalent (AC- or DC-input) voltage and changes to the correct input voltage. 



631DB1 AC power unit 

A 631DB1 power unit accepts 60-Hz, 120-VAC input power. The unit provides DC power for the 

backplanes of an MCC1 Media Gateway’s carriers at the following voltages: 

● –48 V at 8 A 

● –5 V at 6 A 

. The DC output of –48 V also drives the cabinet’s fans. 

If AC input power fails, the power unit can convert 144 VDC from optional batteries in an 

AC power-distribution unit to +5 VDC. A circuit in the optional battery charger detects the higher 

equivalent (AC- or DC-input) voltage and switches in the correct input voltage. 

649A DC power converter 

Note: 

Note: This power converter is no longer sold. 

A 649A power converter converts a DC input of –48 V into DC outputs of: 

● –48 V at 10 A 

● ±5 V at 6 A 

for an MCC1 Media Gateway. Within a carrier, these outputs are distributed to the circuit packs’ 

slots. Only one 649A converter is required per carrier except for switch node (SN) carriers. SN 

carriers require two converters, one on each end. The use of the 649A power unit also allows an 

increase in the number of telephones that each carrier can support. 

650A AC power unit 

This global power-factor-corrected supply accepts 47- to 63-Hz AC input, while auto-ranging 

between 85-VAC and 264-VAC input. The 650A power unit provides 330 watts of total output 

and provides multiple DC outputs as follows: 

● +5.1 VDC at 28 A 

● –5.1 VDC at 1.0 A 

● –48 VDC at 4.5 A 


655A power supply 

● +8- to +14 VDC at 1.6 A (fan-speed control) 

This output (+12 VDC nominal) controls the fans’ speed. The voltage varies with the 

ambient air temperature at the inlet below the power supply. If this voltage reaches +14 

VDC, the system activates a FANALM signal. 

● –115 to –150 VDC at 200 mA (neon bus) 

The 650A power unit has three switch-selectable outputs for ringing: 

● 20-Hz AC output at 85 V RMS and 80 mA, — centered about –48 VDC at 180 mA 

● 25-Hz AC output at 72 V RMS and 8 to 80 mA, — centered about –48 VDC at 180 mA 

● Two 50-Hz AC outputs at 28 V RMS, effectively 56 V, and 220 mA, — biased about –48 

and 0 VDC at 70 mA balanced 


The G650 can use one or two 655A power supplies that can have both AC and DC input power 

present. Either power supply can provide all the power needed by the G650. When there are 

two power supplies, they share the power load. One power supply can operate on AC power 

and the other on DC power. But, if AC power is available, the system always uses AC power. 

The 655A power supply is: 

● The only power supply supported in the G650 

● Not backward compatible to other carrier types 

If you use only one 655A power supply, place it in slot 0. If you are using two power supplies, 

place them in slots 0 and 15. 

Note: You 

Note: 

can insert or remove a redundant power supply and not affect the G650 if the 

other 655A power supply is operating. 


Input power 

The 655A power supply can operate on either AC or DC input power. But, if AC power is 

available, the system always uses AC power. One power supply can operate on AC power, and 

the other on DC power. The power supplies use AC power first and switch to DC power if AC 

power fails or is not present. 



LEDs 

AC power 

Commercial AC is the primary input power source. Both slot 0 and slot 15 have dedicated AC 

input. The 655A power supply can operate on AC input that ranges from 90 to 264 VAC at 47 to 

63 Hz. The nominal ranges for AC power are: 

● 100 to 120 VAC at 50 or 60 Hz 

● 200 to 240 VAC at 50 or 60 Hz 

DC power 

Minus 48VDC power can be supplied simultaneously as backup power. One -48VDC power 

input point is provided on the G650 backplane and is distributed through the backplane to each 

power supply. 

The five LEDs on the faceplate of the 655A power supply are in a vertical line with the red LED 

on top. These five LEDs provide the following status: 

● Red - This LED: 

- Lights when there is a failure in either the power supply or the fans. For a G650 with 

redundant power supplies, a failure in the fan assembly results lights this LED on both 

power supplies. 

- Flashes off once per second when the software shuts down the ring voltage output of a 

power supply 

● Yellow - This LED: 

- Lights when the status of the power supply and fans is OK 

- Flashes once per second when the software shuts down a single power supply, in a 

carrier with operational redundant power supplies 

● Green - Lights when there is AC power applied to the power supply 

● Green - Lights when there is DC power applied to the power supply 

● Green - Lights when the power supply is supplying ringing to the G650 

See Figure 60: 655A faceplate LEDS on page 217 for an example of 655A faceplate LEDs 


Figure 60: 655A faceplate LEDS 

655A ring generation 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 


The 655A provides either North American ringing (20Hz) or European/International (25Hz) 

ringing. The 655A also has a setting to provide no ringing. This setting is applicable when the 

customer supplies a ring generator that is external to the power supply. An example of an 

external ring generator is the TN2202 French ringing circuit pack. 

The 655A power supply provides a physical slide switch to select the frequency of the ring 

generator. The options are: 

● 20Hz — North American 

● 25Hz — European and international 



AC INPUT 

DC INPUT 

ACTIVE RING 

2 3 4 5 

● Other — No ringing output. Applicable when an external ring generator is used such as the 

TN2202 French ringing circuit pack. 

You must remove the power supply from the G650 when you change the ringing frequency 

selection. The ringing frequency selection switch is on the back of the power supply. 

1 

Power 

CLK 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

N 

E 

T 

W 

O 

R 

K 

1 

evdlpow2 LAO 081203 



Only one 655A supplies ringing to the G650. The power supply in slot 0 in the G650 with an A 

carrier address is the default for ringing. The system uses this default 655A unless the 655A 

has failed or the software has commanded it to shut down. When a G650 carrier has redundant 

power supplies, one supply automatically supplies ringing if the other power supply fails. 

A 655A provides ringing to only one G650 carrier. For example, the 655A power supplies in 

carrier A supply ringing to carrier A only. Meanwhile, the power supplies in carrier D supply 

ringing to carrier D only. If the ring generation in both of a carrier’s power supplies fail, no other 

power supply provides ringing for the carrier. 

655A replaceable DC-input fuse 

The 655A provides a replaceable 25 ADC-input fuse that protects the DC input from reverse 

voltage on the -48Vdc input. If reverse voltage is applied to the G650 and 655A power supply, 

the 655A fuse will blow open protecting the 655A from damage. 

If the G650 will not operate on DC input (only), the fuse should be inspected by removing the 

655A power supply from the G650 and inspecting the protection fuse. 

The fuse is located on the rear surface of the 655A power supply. A spare fuse is also located 

on the rear surface. 

676D DC power supply 

Note: 

Note: This power supply is no longer sold. 

A –48 VDC source supplies power to the DC power supply at up to 25 A. The 676C power 

supply for the SCC1 Media Gateway, produces DC outputs of +5, –5, –48, and +12 VDC. The 

DC outputs are distributed across the cabinet’s backplane to each circuit pack’s slot. The output 

value and frequency of the AC ringing voltage depend on the country of use. The power supply 

has circuit breakers and electromagnetic interference (EMI) filtering. 

982LS current limiter 

Note: This 

Note: 

current limiter is no longer sold. 

The 982LS current limiter connects behind the processor circuit pack’s slot only in the processor 

port network (PPN) of a DEFINITY SI system. The 982LS provides current-limited accessory 

48-VDC, emergency transfer logic, current-limited 5-VDC to trip the main circuit breaker. The 

circuit breaker is tripped if high temperature is detected, and duplicated 48-VDC to fans in the 

PPN cabinet. 


CFY1B current limiter 

CFY1B current limiter 

The CFY1B current limiter is used only with the S8700-series Media Server. 

The CFY1B circuit pack supports the processor port network (PPN) and the MCC1 and SCC1 

Media Gateway expansion port networks (EPNs). The CFY1B current limiter connects behind 

the Maintenance circuit pack’s slot. The CFY1B provides: 

● current-limited accessory 48-VDC, 

● emergency transfer logic, 

● current-limited 5-VDC to trip the main circuit breaker if high temperature is detected, and 

● duplicated 48-VDC to fans in an EPN cabinet. 

ED-1E568 DEFINITY AUDIX R4 

For information about ED-1E568 DEFINITY AUDIX R4, see TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice 

Mail System (part of ED-1E568) on page 225. 

J58890MA-1 Multiapplication Platform for DEFINITY 

(MAPD) 

The J58890MA-1 is a variation of the MAPD platform that transports ASAI links between a 

DEFINITY LAN gateway system and an Ethernet LAN. The J58890MA-1 circuit pack assembly 

uses the TN801B MAPD (LAN Gateway Interface). This interface is a circuit pack that is built 

from industry-standard PC processors, interfaces, buses, and ISA/PCI expansion boards. The 

J58890MA-1 takes up three adjacent slots in the carrier. In a CMC1 Media Gateway the 

J58890MA uses only two slots if placed in slot six or seven. There are different lists of the 

J58890MA. The number at the end after the dash indicates the list. A list represents a different 

hardware configuration of the same circuit pack. 

The following descriptions are the capabilities of the different J58890MA lists: 

● J58890MA-2 supports CallVisor ASAI and LAN Gateway. 

● J58890MA-10 supports IP trunking. 

● J58890MA-20 supports CallVisor ASAI, Avaya Computer Telephony, and Basic Call 

Management System Reporting Desktop. 

● J58890MA-30 supports IP solutions. 



NAA1 fiber-optic cable adaptor 

The NAA1 adapter reroutes fiber-optic cable from the front of an ATM circuit pack to the rear of 

a CMC1 Media Gateway. The NAA1 fiber-optic cable adaptor looks like a circuit pack, but the 

cable is electrically and optically passive. 

TN429D incoming call line identification (ICLID) 

The TN429 incoming call line identification (ICLID) circuit pack provides eight ports for direct 

inward/outward dialing (DIOD) trunks. Each port provides a 2-wire interface to the central office 

(CO) public exchange for incoming calls and outgoing calls. The CO provides caller names and 

numbers to the circuit pack. The CO displays the names and numbers on digital telephones, 

DCP and BRI, that are equipped with a 32-character or a 40-character alphanumeric display. In 

the US, the ICLID supports name and number. In Japan, and other countries that comply with 

ICLID requirements, the ICLID displays the number only. 

This ICLID is required for the Japan ANI feature where the calling number passes through to the 

switch. An in-band detector/converter might be required. Contact your Avaya representative for 

more information. 

The ICLID provides the required CO disconnect functions and the interface to CAMA/E911. 

TN433 speech synthesizer 

The TN433 speech synthesizer for Italian provides four ports. These ports retrieve fixed 

messages for leave word calling, automatic wake up, and attendant console features for the 

visually impaired. These fixed messages include good morning, time-of-day, and extension 

number. Each of the ports has touchtone detection. The TN433 speech synthesizer has 

administrable A- and Mu-Law companding capabilities. 

TN436B direct inward dialing trunk (8 ports) 

The TN436B direct inward dialing (DID) trunk for Australia provides eight ports for DID. These 

ports are independently connected to a public network. Each port is an interface between a 

2-wire analog line from a CO and the 4-wire TDM network in the system. The TN436B DID for 

Australia has administrable timers. 


TN438B central office trunk (8 ports) 


The TN438B CO trunk for Australia provides eight ports for loop-start CO trunks. Each of the 

eight ports has tip and ring signal lead. The TN438B can detect 12-kHz and 50-Hz periodic 

metering pulses from the CO. Additional features include call still held timing and automatic 

guard fault-detection circuitry. 

TN439 tie trunk (4 ports) 

The TN439 tie trunk circuit pack for Australia and Japan provides four ports for 2-wire tie trunks 

with loop disconnect signaling. The TN439 has administrable A- and Mu-Law companding and 

administrable timers. 

TN457 speech synthesizer 

The TN457 speech synthesizer for British English provides four ports. These ports retrieve fixed 

messages for leave word calling, automatic wake up, and attendant console features for the 

visually impaired. These fixed messages include good morning, time-of-day, and extension 

number. Each of the ports has touchtone detection. The TN457 speech synthesizer has 

administrable A- and Mu-Law companding capabilities. 


The TN459B DID circuit pack for the United Kingdom provides eight ports for immediate- or 

wink-start DID trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal leads. Each port is an interface between 

a 2-wire analog line from a CO and the 4-wire TDM network in the system. The TN459B DID 

circuit pack has administrable timers and a backward busy circuit that complies with signaling 

requirements. 



TN464HP DS1 interface, T1 (24 channels) or E1 (32 

channels) 

The TN464HP circuit pack provides: 

● Circuit-pack-level, administrable A- or Mu-Law companding 

● CRC-4 generation and checking (E1 only) 

● Stratum-3 clock capability 

● ISDN-PRI T1 or E1 connectivity 

● Line-out (LO) and line-in (LI) signal leads for unpolarized, balanced pairs 

● Support for CO, TIE, DID, and off-premises station (OPS) port types that use any of the 

following protocols: 

- robbed-bit signaling protocol, 

- proprietary bit-oriented signaling (BOS) 24th-channel signaling protocol, or 

- DMI-BOS 24th-channel signaling protocol 

● Support for Russian incoming ANI 

● Support for universal, digital, signal level-1equipment in wideband ISDN-PRI applications 

● Test-jack access to the DS1 or E1 line, and support of the 120A integrated channel-service 

unit (ICSU) module 

● Support for the enhanced maintenance capabilities of the ICSU. These circuit packs can 

communicate with Avaya Interactive Response System. 

● Downloadable firmware 

● Support for echo cancellation. 

The echo cancellation capability of the TN464HP is selectable on a per-channel basis. The 

TN464HP DS1 interface automatically turns off echo cancellation when the interface 

detects a 2100-Hz phase-reversed tone generated by high-speed modems (56-kbps). But 

the interface does not turn off echo cancellation when the interface detects a 2100-Hz 

straight tone generated by low-speed modems (9.6-kbps). Echo cancellation improves a 

low-speed data call. 

The TN464HP DS1 interface is intended for customers who are likely to encounter echo. 

This echo can be over circuits that are connected to the public network. The occurrence of 

echo is higher if the switch is configured for ATM, IP, or other complex services and 

interfaces to certain local service providers. These local service providers do not routinely 

install echo cancellation equipment in all their circuits. A common source of echo is "hybrid" 

circuits, where conversions between 2-wire analog circuits and 4-wire digital circuits take 

place. The TN464HP DS1 interface cancels echo with delays of up to 96 milliseconds. 


TN465C central office trunk (8 ports) 

The TN465C CO Trunk circuit pack supports multiple countries. 

● This circuit pack contains: 

● eight analog CO trunk ports, 

● loop-start trunk signaling, 

● 12- and 16-kHz periodic pulse metering (PPM) detection and counting, 

● administrable timers, 

● battery-reversed signaling, and 

● multicountry selectable signaling. 

For more information about a TN465C, contact your Avaya representative. 

TN479 analog line (16 ports) 


Note: 

Note: This circuit pack is no longer sold. 

The TN479 analog line circuit pack has 16 ports, and supports three ringer loads and three 

simultaneous ringing ports. Only one telephone can have an LED message waiting indicator. 

Neon message waiting indicators are not supported. The TN479 supports µ-Law companding. 

The following table lists the TN479-supported telephones and shows each of their wiring sizes 

and ranges. 

Telephone Wire size (metric area/ 

diameter) 

Maximum range 

(feet) 

500-type 24 AWG (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3,000 (914 m) 

2500-type 24 AWG (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3,000 (914 m) 

7100-series 24 AWG (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3,000 (914 m) 

7101A not supported not supported 

7103A not supported not supported 





TN497 tie trunk (4 ports) 

Note: 


The TN497 tie trunk circuit pack for Italy has four ports for 2-wire tie trunks with loop disconnect 

signaling. Each port can be administered for: 

● A- or Mu-Law companding timers, 

● Translatore Giunzione Unscente (TGU) (outgoing tie), 

● Translatore Giunzione Entrante (TGE) (incoming tie), and 

● Translatore Giunzione Interno (TGI) (internal tie). 

TN556D ISDN-BRI 4-wire S/T-NT interface (12 ports) 

The TN556D ISDN-BRI circuit pack has 12 ports that connect to ISDN-BRI terminals. Each port 

on a TN556 ISDN-BRI circuit pack has: 

● TXT, 

● TXR, 

● PXT, and 

● PXR signal leads. 

Up to eight ports can be used for Adjunct Switch Application Interface (ASAI) links. Each port 

operates at 192 kbps and has 2 B-channels and 1 D-channel. 

The TN556D ISDN-BRI circuit pack has a maximum range of up to 1900 feet (579 meters) from 

the system to the telephone when the circuit pack is connected with 24-AWG (0.20 mm2 /0.51 

mm) wire. The TN556D uses standard ANSI T1.605 protocol. Up to 24 terminals can be 

connected, where each terminal uses 1 B-channel and shares the D-channel. The TN556 also 

has multipoint support. Capacity for the multipoint support depends on the protocol. In countries 

that do not support Service Profile Identifier (SPID), there is a limitation of one BRI telephone 

per port. 

The TN556D ISDN-BRI circuit pack supports A- or Mu-Law companding. The TN556D 

ISDN-BRI circuit pack also functions as a trunk when connecting to a TE interface, such as a 

TN2185B in another switch. It can be used for lines and trunks simultaneously. The TN556D 

ISDN-BRI circuit pack provides end-to-end outpulse signaling when the circuit pack is in 

tie-trunk mode with a TN2185B ISDN-BRI S/T-TE interface (4-wire, 8 ports). 


TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice Mail System (part of ED-1E568) 

TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice Mail System (part of 

ED-1E568) 

Note: 


The TN568 circuit pack is a component of the ED-1E568 t. The TN568 supports an DEFINITY 

AUDIX voice mail system using an embedded 386EX processor. The DEFINITY AUDIX 

systems can be interconnected. Interconnected systems create large voice mail networks that 

support up to 100,000 subscribers and store up to 100 hours of messages. Each circuit pack 

has eight ports available for calls when networking is enabled. Without networking, 12 ports are 

available. 

The TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX voice mail system takes up two adjacent slots. 

The TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack includes a writable magneto-optical disk drive for 

backing up and upgrading system software. The circuit pack also has a hard disk for storing 

messages. The TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX circuit pack also includes an: 

● RS-232 connection for a maintenance and administration terminal, 

● Ethernet port for the Message Manager PC desktop application, 

● Amphenol connection to the switch, and 

● RS-232 port for an external modem that is used for maintenance. 

TN570D Expansion Interface 

The TN570 Expansion Interface (EI) is an interface between the TDM bus and the packet bus, 

and fiber-optic links that interconnect the cabinets. The TN570D circuit pack is used in a port 

network (PN) between a PN and another PN in a direct-connect system. The TN570D is also 

used between a PN and a switch node interface (SNI) in a switch node carrier in a 

CSS-connected system. 

The TN570 circuit pack provides control-channel applications and time-slot interchanging 

between the processor port network (PPN) and expanded port networks (EPNs). The TN750 is 

used when ISDN-BRI, ASAI, or both are connected in an EPN. 

The TN570 circuit pack carries: 

● circuit-switched data, 

● packet-switched data, 

● network control, 



● timing control, and 

● DS1 control. 

The TN570 circuit pack also communicates with an EPN’s TN775B Maintenance circuit pack to 

send the EPN’s environmental and alarm status to the SPE. 

The TN2305 circuit pack or the TN2306 circuit pack replaces the TN570 circuit pack when an 

ATM switch replaces the CSS. 

The TN570 circuit pack is used in an EPN that is supported by a Survivable Remote Processor 

(SRP). 

TN572 Switch-Node Clock 

The TN572 switch-node clock circuit pack is used with the S8700-series Media Server only. 

The TN572 circuit pack distributes the timing signals that synchronize the SN carrier. The 

TN572 circuit pack also receives maintenance data. 

TN573B Switch-Node Interface 

The TN573B Switch Node Interface (SNI) routes circuit, packet, and control messages. The 

TN573B circuit pack is an interface that is installed in an SN carrier in a CSS. The TN573B 

circuit pack terminates a fiber-optic link from: 

● A SNI in an SN carrier to an SNI in another SN carrier 

● An EI in a processor port network (PPN), and an EI in an expansion port network (EPN). 

One TN573B is used per PN and supports the TN574 DS1 converter circuit pack. 

The TN573B circuit pack vintage B and higher provides an interface to the single-mode fiber 

optic transceiver. The TN573B also supports the TN1654 circuit pack and TN574 DS1 converter 

circuit pack. 

TN574 DS1 Converter — T1, 24 Channel 

The TN574 is supported. However, it has been replaced by TN1654. 


TN725B speech synthesizer 

TN725B speech synthesizer 

The TN725B speech synthesizer supports English and is used in the US. 

The TN725B speech synthesizer circuit pack has four ports that send voice message 

information to telephones. These messages activate leave word calling, automatic wake up, 

voice message retrieval, and Do Not Disturb features. The ports can detect tones. 

TN726B Data Line (8 ports) 

Note: 


The TN726B data line circuit pack has eight serial asynchronous EIA port. These ports have 

modem interfaces that are connected through asynchronous data units (ADUs) to EIA ports, 

such as RS-232, on DTE. The TN726B circuit pack uses Mode 2 or Mode 3 data transfer 

protocol. The DTE can be adjuncts and peripheral equipment such as: 

● data terminals, 

● printers, 

● host computers, 

● personal computers (PCs), 

● graphics and fax systems, 

● and call detail acquisition and processing systems (CDAPSs). 

With software-administered system access ports, a TN726B circuit pack connects through a 

cross-connect field to a TN553 packet data line circuit pack. The TN553 circuit pack then 

converts mode 2 protocol to mode 3 protocol. Mode 3 protocol transfers the TN726B circuit 

pack from the packet bus to the TDM bus for EIA connections. 

Each port on a TN726B circuit pack has: 

● TXT (terminal, transmit, and tip), 

● TXR (terminal, transmit, and ring), 

● PXT (port, transmit, and tip), and 

● PXR (port, transmit, and ring) signal leads. 



TN735 MET line (4 ports) 

Note: 


The TN735 MET line circuit pack has four ports that connect to multibutton electronic telephone 

(MET) sets. Each port has tip and ring signals (analog voice) and digital signals to control 

terminals such as BT, BR, LT and LR. 

TN744E call classifier and tone detector (8 ports) 

The TN744 call classifier and tone detector circuit pack has eight ports of tone detection on the 

TDM bus. The TN744 circuit pack does not support call progress tone generation or clocking. 

The tone detectors are used in vector prompting, outgoing call management (OCM), and call 

prompting applications in the United States and Canada. The tone detectors are also used for 

call classifier options for various countries. The TN744 circuit pack detects special intercept 

tones that are used in network intercept tone detection in OCM. The TN744 circuit pack also 

detects tones when a central office (CO) answers a call. 

The TN744 circuit pack provides tone generation and detection for R2-MFC direct inward 

dialing (DID) signaling. DID signaling is used in installations outside the United States. The 

TN744 circuit pack supports A- and Mu-Law companding. TN744 also allows gain or loss to be 

applied to pulse code modulation (PCM) signals that are received from the bus. The TN744 

circuit pack detects 2025-, 2100-, or 2225-Hz modem answerback tones and provides normal 

broadband and wide broadband dial-tone detection. 

The TN744 circuit pack supports digital signal processing of PCM signals on each port to 

detect, recognize, and classify tones and other signals. Generation of signaling tones is also 

supported for applications such as R2-multifrequency code (R2-MFC), Spain MF, and Russia 

MF. Gain or loss and conferencing can be applied to PCM signals that are received from the 

TDM bus. Additional support includes DTMF detectors to collect address digits during dialing, 

and A- and µ-Law companding. 

In normal operation, a port on the TN744 circuit pack can serve as an incoming register for 

Russia multifrequency shuttle register signaling (MFR). Use the TN744 with the TN429C analog 

line CO trunk for CAMA/E911. 


TN746B analog line (16 ports) 

TN746B analog line (16 ports) 

Note: 


The TN746B analog line circuit pack has 16 ports. Each port supports one telephone. 

Supported auxiliary equipment includes: 

● fax machines, 

● answering machines, 

● modems, and 

● amplifier handsets. 

The TN746B circuit pack supports on-premises building wiring with either touchtone or rotary 

dialing, and with or without the LED and neon message waiting indicators. The TN746B circuit 

pack supports off-premises wiring with either DTMF dialing or rotary dialing. Off-premise wiring 

occurs out-of-building only with certified protection equipment. LED or neon message waiting 

indicators are not supported off-premises. The TN746B circuit pack provides -48 V DC current 

in the off-hook state. Ringing voltage is -90 V DC. 

The TN746B, along with a TN755B neon power unit per carrier or per single-carrier cabinet, 

supports on-premises telephones. These telephones are equipped with neon message waiting 

indicators. The TN746B circuit pack supports three ringer loads. Only one telephone can have 

an LED or neon message waiting indicator. 

TN746B supports A- and Mu-Law companding and administrable timers. The TN746B supports: 

● Queue warning-level lights that are associated with the direct department calling (DDC) 

features and the uniform call distribution (UCD) features 

● Recorded announcements that are associated with the Intercept Treatment feature 

● PagePac paging system for the Loudspeaker Paging feature 

Additional support is provided for external alerting devices. These devices are associated with 

the Trunk Access from Any Station (TAAS) feature, neon message waiting indicators, and 

modems. Secondary lightning protection is provided on the TN746B circuit pack. The TN746B 

circuit pack supports up to eight ports simultaneously-ringing. The system can achieve the 

maximum of eight ports ringing simultaneously. To do so, the system uses four ports from the 

set of ports numbered one through eight and four ports from the set of ports numbered 9 

through 16. 

Combined conversion of Modem Pooling requires a port for each combined resource that is to 

be supported. One port must be on a TN754 and another port on a TN742, TN746B or TN769 

Analog circuit pack. 



The following table lists the TN746B-supported telephones and shows each of their wiring sizes 


Telephone Wire size (AWG) Maximum range 

(feet) 

2500 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

7100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

7101A 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 15,200 (4,633 m) 

7103A 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 15,200 (4,633 m) 

8100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

9100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 


The TN747B CO trunk circuit pack has eight ports for loop- or ground-start CO, foreign 

exchange (FX), and wide area telecommunications service (WATS) trunks. Each port has tip 

and ring signal leads. A port can connect to a PagePac paging system. The TN747B supports 

the abandoned call search feature in automatic call distribution (ACD) applications, if the CO 

has this feature. Vintage 12 or greater of the TN747B circuit pack also provides 

battery-reversed signaling. 

TN750C recorded announcement (16 channels) 

Note: 

Note: The TN2501AP circuit pack replaces the TN750 circuit pack. However, the 

TN750 circuit pack is still supported. 

The TN750 recorded announcement circuit pack records and stores announcements to be 

played back on demand as part of a calling feature. The TN750 circuit pack has sampling rates 

of 16, 32, or 64 kilobits per second (kbps). The TN750 circuit pack records announcement 

messages from on-premises telephones or off-premises telephones. The circuit pack can store 

up to 128 recorded announcements to a maximum of 8 minutes total. The TN750 circuit pack 

has 16 channels, and each channel can play any announcement. Up to 25 call connections can 

listen to each channel. 



A total of 10 TN750C circuit packs in a system provides an announcement capacity of 42.6 

minutes (at 32 kbps) and 160 ports. In other words, 160 announcements can play 

simultaneously. The compression rate, which is adequate for VDN of origin announcements, 

provides a total capacity of 85.3 minutes. Use of multiple TN750C circuit packs allows a more 

efficient method of providing many types of announcements and provides improved 

management of integrated announcements. 


The TN753B DID trunk circuit pack has eight ports that used for immediate- or wink-start direct 

inward dialing (DID) trunks. Each port has tip and ring signal leads. For the Slovak Republic, 

vintage 17 (or greater) is required. The TN753B circuit pack supports A- and µ-Law companding 

with vintage 17 or greater. 

The Brazil Block Collect Call requires the TN753B circuit pack. 

TN754C DCP digital line (4-wire, 8 ports) 

The TN754C DCP digital line circuit pack has eight asynchronous, 4-wire DCP ports that can 

connect to: 

● 7400- and 8400-series digital telephones, 

● 302A/B/C attendant consoles, 

● or data modules. 

The TN754 circuit pack has administrable A- and Mu-Law companding. 

The following table lists the TN754-supported equipment and shows each of their wiring sizes 


Supported equipment Wire sizes (AWG) Maximum range 

(feet) 

7400 data modules 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 5000 (1524 m) 

7400 data modules 26 4000 (1219 m) 

7400 series telephones 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3500 (1067 m) 

7400 series telephones 26 2200 (670 m) 



Supported equipment Wire sizes (AWG) Maximum range 

(feet) 

8400 series data modules 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3500 (1067 m) 

8400 series telephones 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3500 (1067 m) 

The TN754 circuit pack provides greater call-handling capacity for high-traffic applications and 

supports the group paging feature. 

Combined conversion of Modem Pooling requires two ports for each combined resource that is 

supported. One port is on a TN754 circuit pack and another port is on a TN746B circuit pack or 

a TN769 analog circuit pack. 

TN755B neon power unit 

Note: 


The TN755B neon power unit circuit pack is used with all DEFINITY servers except the 

DEFINITY CSI and the G600 Media Gateway. The CSI and G600 have neon built into their 650 

power supplies. The TN755B circuit pack produces 150 VDC to operate neon message waiting 

lights on terminals that are connected to TN746B analog line circuit packs. 

A TN755B circuit pack is required for each carrier where neon message waiting indicators are 

connected. 

This circuit pack and the neon message waiting function are not available on systems that use 

the TN2202 ring generator circuit pack for France balanced-ringing. 

TN758 Pooled Modem (2 ports) 

Note: 


The TN758 pooled modem circuit pack has two conversion resources ports, such as a trunk 

data module. These ports allow switched connections between digital data endpoints (data 

modules) and analog data endpoints (modems). A TN758 circuit pack is required for each two 

conversion resources provided with the integrated type of modem pool. The TN758 circuit pack 

supports Mu-Law companding only. 


TN760E tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) 

TN760E tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) 

The TN760 tie trunk circuit pack has four ports. These ports are used for Type 1 or Type 5 

4-wire E & M lead signaling tie trunks. Trunk types include automatic, immediate-start, 

wink-start, and delay-dial. Each port on a TN760 circuit pack has the following signaling leads: 

● T 

● R 

● T1 

● R1 

● E 

● M. 

The TN760 circuit pack provides release link trunks that are required for the Centralized 

Attendant Service (CAS) feature and has administrable A- and Mu-Law companding. The 

TN760 circuit pack supports outgoing, Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP). 

Option switches on each TN760 circuit pack port can select the following connections: 

● Type 1 E & M standard unprotected format, 

● Type 1 E & M compatible unprotected format, 

● Type 1 E & M compatible protected format, and 

● Type 5 simplex format 

For Belgium, the Slovak Republic, the Commonwealth of Independent States, and the 

Netherlands, vintage 11 or greater is required. 

TN762B hybrid line (8 ports) 

The TN762B hybrid line circuit pack has eight ports that connect to multiappearance hybrid 

analog and digital telephones. The TN762B can connect to 7300-series telephones, an 

MDC-9000 cordless telephones, and an MDW-9000 cordless telephone with separate base 

station and charging stations. 

Each port on a TN762B circuit pack has VT and VR (analog voice), CT, CR, P-, and P+ signal 

leads. P+ signal leads are digital signals that control terminals. 

Note: This 

Note: 

circuit pack is not used in a G650 Media Gateway. 



TN763D auxiliary trunk (4 ports) 

The TN763 auxiliary trunk has four ports. Each port has the following signal leads: 

● T 

● R 

● SZ 

● SZ1 

● S 

● S 

The TN763D circuit pack is used to access on-premises applications such as music on hold, 

loudspeaker paging, code calling, and recorded telephone dictation. The TN763 circuit pack 

supports external recorded announcement equipment, and is administrable to select A- or 

µ-Law companding. 

TN767E DS1 interface, T1 (24 channels) 

Note: 

Note: This circuit pack is not used in a G650 Media Gateway. 

The TN767 DS1 interface circuit pack provides a DSX1-level physical interface to the DS1 

facility. The TN767 circuit pack has unpolarized line out (LO) and line in (LI) signal lead pairs. 

The TN767 circuit pack supports DS1 rate digital facility connectivity. The circuit pack supports 

CO, Tie, DID, and off-premises stations (OPS) port types. These port types use the robbed-bit 

signaling protocol. On DEFINITY CSI and SI Media Servers, this circuit pack supports 

ISDN-PRI connectivity. For these applications, the signaling D-channel can connect from the 

TN767 circuit pack to the processor interface by a permanent switched call over the TDM bus. 

On S8500 and S8700-series Media Servers, this circuit pack does not directly support 

D-channel signaling and thus does not directly support ISDN-PRI connectivity. However, the 

TN767 circuit can indirectly support D-channel signaling provided that the central office 

supports nonfacility associated signaling (NFAS). In this case, you use NFAS administration on 

the server. This administration associates the D-channel of another T1/E1 circuit pack, usually a 

TN464, with the TN767 circuit pack. 

The TN767 circuit pack communicates with Avaya IVR. The TN767 also provides the enhanced 

maintenance capabilities of the 120A channel-service unit (CSU) and the enhanced integrated 

channel-service unit (ICSU). 


DS1 tests include: 

● loopback tests at the DS1 circuit pack edge or the 120A (if used), 

● bit error rate (BER) loopback tests at the far-end CSU, and 


● BER 1-way DS1 facility tests. 

Other tests include loopback testing specifically designed to locate DS1 facility faults. 


Note: 


The TN769 analog line circuit pack has eight ports, each with tip and ring signal leads. The 

TN769 circuit pack supports: 

● On-premises or off-premises wiring with either touchtone or rotary dialing and with or 

without LED or neon message waiting indicators 

● Three ringer loads, such as three telephones with one ringer load each 

● Up to four simultaneous ports ringing 

● Queue warning-level lights that are associated with the direct department calling (DDC) 

feature and uniform call distribution (UCD) feature 

● Recorded announcements for intercept treatment 

● Dictating machine for the Recorded Telephone Dictation Access feature 

● PagePac paging system for the loudspeaker paging feature 

● External alerting devices for the Trunk Access from Any Station (TAAS) feature 

● Modems 

The TN769 circuit pack does not support off-premises message waiting indicators. 

The TN769 circuit pack provides secondary lightning protection, and supports µ-Law 

companding. 

Each carrier with neon message indicators requires the TN769 circuit pack, along with a 

TN755B neon power circuit pack to support neon message waiting indicators. Only one 

telephone can have an LED or neon message waiting indicator. 

Combined conversion of Modem Pooling requires both 

● a port on a TN754B circuit pack and 

● a port on a TN746B circuit pack or a TN769 analog circuit pack 

for each combined resource that is to be supported. 






(feet) 

500 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

2500 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

7102 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

7101A 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 15,200 (4,633 m) 

7103A 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 15,200 (4,633 m) 

8100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 10,000 (3,048 m) 

9100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 10,000 (3,048 m) 

TN771DP maintenance and test 

The TN771DP maintenance test circuit pack performs maintenance functions. These functions 

include packet bus reconfiguration. This reconfiguration allows diagnosis and correction of 

recoverable packet bus failures before the link access procedure on the D-channel (LAPD) links 

fail. LAPD is a link-layer protocol on the ISDN-BRI and ISDN-PRI data link layer (level 2). LAPD 

provides data transfer between two devices and error and flow control on multiple logical links. 

LAPD swaps spare leads with the malfunctioning leads to recover packet bus failures that 

involve up to three malfunctioning leads. Malfunctioning leads, in this case, are 1 or 2 data or 

parity leads and one control lead. 

Other maintenance functions include ISDN-PRI testing that originates and terminates loopback 

tests on ISDN facilities. The testing provides bit and block error rate information that indicates 

ISDN facility quality. 

The TN771DP circuit pack can be updated using the firmware download feature, which requires 

use of the TN799 C-LAN circuit pack interface. 

A TN771DP circuit pack is required for: 

● Any CSI system that uses a TN2198 BRI circuit pack. Otherwise, a TN771DP circuit pack 

is not required. 

● An SI system processor port network (PPN) that is equipped with packet endpoints 

(ISDN-BRI lines or trunks, ISDN-PRI trunks, IP trunks, IP stations, ATM-CES, and ASAI). 

Or the PPN is a critical reliability, or fully duplicated, system. A critical reliability system 

with packet endpoints requires a TN771DP circuit pack in each expansion port network 

(EPN). Otherwise, a TN771DP circuit pack is not required. 


TN775C maintenance 

● All R system PPNs. A critical reliability R system requires a TN771DP circuit pack in each 

EPN. An R system with ATM network duplication requires a TN771DP circuit pack in each 

PPN and EPN. 

● All CSI models that use a TN2198 BRI circuit pack 

A maximum of one TN771DP circuit pack is allowed in any port network. 

A TN771DP circuit pack is never used with the S8100 Media Server. 

TN775C maintenance 

Note: 


The TN775C circuit pack is used in maintenance to monitor power failure signals in an 

expansion port network (EPN) cabinet. The TN775C circuit pack also monitors the clock, 

monitors and controls the power supplies and battery charger, and monitors air flow and 

high-temperature sensors. The TN775C circuit pack provides two serial links to communicate 

with Expansion Interface (EI) circuit packs. The TN775C also provides an RS-232 interface for 

connection to an administration terminal. Each circuit pack contains a 3-position switch to 

control emergency power transfer. 

The TN775C contains a DC-to-DC power converter. The TN775C is used in maintenance to 

monitor the processor in an EPN. A Survivable Remote Processor (SRP) supports this EPN. 

TN780 tone clock 

Note: 


The TN780 tone clock circuit pack connects to and monitors an optional external stratum-3 

clock for digital frame timing. The TN780 circuit pack also couples the clock output to local 

clocks. The TN780 circuit pack supplies master timing to the system and produces the 

following: 

● call-progress tones 

● touchtones 

● answer-back tones 

● trunk-transmission test tones 



The TN780 circuit pack has 2-MHz, 160-kHz, and 8-kHz clocks. The TN780 circuit pack can 

transmit the system clock and tones on either TDM bus A, TDM bus B, or both. 

The TN780 circuit pack is administrable to produce five tone plans. For countries outside the US 

six tones can be customized in each plan. The TN780 circuit pack supports A- or Mu-Law 

companding. 

A TN780 circuit pack is never used with the S8100 Media Server. 

TN787K multimedia interface 

Note: 


The TN787 multimedia interface circuit pack is used in conjunction with the TN788 multimedia 

voice conditioner circuit pack. The TN787 provides service circuit functionality for the 

Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature. This feature provides both voice and multimedia 

data service between multimedia complex endpoints. Up to six endpoints can conference to a 

single multimedia call occurrence. 

The TN787 circuit pack provides a TDM-bus interface and a DS1 adjunct cable interface. The 

TN787 circuit pack routes the H.221 multimedia information to the DS1 interface to free more 

TDM-bus timeslots. Freeing more timeslots allows the system to carry more audio, video, and 

data bit streams between multimedia complex endpoints. The TN787 circuit pack provides 

support for multiple port networks (PNs). 

TN788C multimedia voice conditioner 

Note: 


The TN788C multimedia voice conditioner circuit pack is used in conjunction with the TN787F/G 

multimedia interface circuit pack. Together, they provide service circuit functionality for the 

MMCH feature. This feature provides both voice service and multimedia data service between 

multimedia complex endpoints. 

Note: A 

Note: 

TN788C V1 circuit pack only supports µ-Law companding. A TN788C V2 or 

later supports A- and µ-Law. 


TN789B radio controller 

The TN788C circuit pack is the audio processor for the Px64 multimedia conference bridge. The 

TN788C circuit pack contains eight digital signal processors. The processors include four for 

encoding and four for decoding. Each encoder/decoder pair is assigned to a Px64 endpoint to 

process its audio channel. Connection to and from the audio of the endpoint is by way of a 

TN787 multimedia interface port. This connection is through the TDM-bus timeslots. 

Each of the eight digital signal processors communicate with the main processor on the circuit 

pack through eight individual dual-port random access memory (DPRAMs). No read-only 

memory (ROM) is available on this circuit pack. The DPRAM is used for program download. 

TN789B radio controller 

Note: 


The TN789B radio controller circuit pack is an interface between a switch and two Wireless 

Fixed Base (WFB) radio units. This interface is used for the DEFINITY Wireless Business 

System. The TN789B circuit pack contains a main processor to handle data line circuit (DLC) 

and upper medium access (MAC) layers of firmware. The TN789B circuit pack also contains 

two lower MAC processors. one processor for each radio interface. Each radio interface is 

referred to as an I2 interface. 

The I2 link is the connection between the radio controller (RC) and the WFB. The RC supports 

up to two I2 links. Each link consists of three pairs of twisted-pair cable: the transmit pair, the 

receive pair, and the local power pair. The transmit pair transfers WFB control and frame 

information from the RC to the WFB. The receive pair transfers status and frame information 

from the WFB to the RC. If the RC cannot provide power to the WFB, a third pair, to the WFB, 

can supply local power. When possible, the transmit pair and the receive pair provide phantom 

power from the RC to the WFB. 

Each TN789B circuit pack includes a standard TDM-bus interface from a system, two radio 

interfaces to two separate radio units, and two synchronization ports. In addition, two RS-232 

interfaces provide for a debug terminal and for setting up the wireless terminal. 



TN791 analog guest line (16 ports) 

Note: 


The TN791 is a 16-port analog guest line circuit pack. The TN791 is used for international offers 

and for offer category B in the US and Canada. Each of the 16 ports support one telephone, 

such as 500 (rotary dial) and 2500 terminals (DTMF dial). LED and neon message waiting 

indicators are supported. A separate power supply is required for neon message indicators. 

The TN791 circuit pack supports on-premises wiring with either touchtone or rotary dialing, and 

with or without the LED and neon message waiting indicators. 

The TN791 circuit pack supports three ringer loads. Only one telephone can have an LED or 

neon message waiting indicator. The TN791 supports up to eight ports simultaneously-ringing. 

To achieve this maximum, the system uses four ports from the set of ports numbered one 

through eight and four ports from the set of ports numbered 9 through 16. 

The TN791 circuit pack supports A- and µ-law companding and administrable timers. 

Secondary lightning protection is provided. 




(feet) 

2500 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

6200 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

7100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

7101A 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 15,200 (4,633 m) 

7103A 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 15,200 (4,633 m) 

8100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

9100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 


TN792 duplication interface 

TN792 duplication interface 

Note: 


In a high reliability or critical reliability DEFINITY SI system, a duplication interface copies the 

contents of memory from the primary Switch Processing Element (SPE) to a standby SPE. 

Therefore, the standby SPE can take over immediately when the former fails. The TN792 

duplication interface (DUPINT) uses the Enhanced M-Bus of the DEFINITY SI TN2404 

processor for this memory shadowing function. The Enhanced M-bus supports 32-bit 

addressing and data access (versus 16-bit for the M-bus). In this case, the Enhanced M-bus 

transfers data faster and shadows a larger area of memory than the M-bus. The M-bus is still 

supported. 

You need two TN792 circuit packs, one for the primary control carrier and one for the standby. 

You can replace TN772 duplication interfaces with TN792s, but you must replace them in pairs. 

A TN772 circuit pack cannot communicate with a TN792 circuit pack. 

A duplex optical cable connects the TN792 circuit packs. This cable eliminates the additional 

electromagnetic emissions that otherwise results from the doubled data rate on the bus. The 

optical cable interface to the new DUPINT is on the front faceplate of the circuit pack. 

The TN792 circuit pack is compatible with existing duplication cables. 

TN793CP analog line with Caller ID for multiple countries 

(24 ports) 

The TN793CP is an analog line, 24-port circuit pack that supports caller ID telephones and 

caller ID devices that conform to Bellcore Standard GR-30-CORE, Issue 2, and 

Bellcore-compliant signaling using V.23 Frequency Signal Keying (FSK). This means that the 

TN793CP supports caller ID devices in the U.S. and most other countries. Each port can 

support one of the following: 

● Analog telephone, such as a 2500 telephone (DTMF dial) 

● Answering machine 

● FAX 

● Loop-start CO port (used for INTUITY AUDIX Messaging) 



The TN793CP provides: 

● Touchtone or rotary dialing 

● Rotary digit 1 recall 

● Ground-key recall 

● Programmable flash timing 

● Selectable ringing patterns 

● On premises LED and neon message waiting 

● Caller ID with Call Waiting 

● Secondary lightning protection 

! CAUTION: 

CAUTION: The TN793CP does not support the telephones (used primarily in France) that 

use 50 Hz balanced ringing. 

The TN793CP supports on-premises (in-building) wiring. The TN793CP circuit pack supports 

off-premises wiring with either DTMF or rotary dialing, but LED or neon message waiting 

indicators are not supported off-premises. 

The TN793CP circuit pack, along with a TN755B neon power circuit pack supports on-premise 

telephones that are equipped with neon message waiting indicators. The TN793CP supports 

three ringer loads. Only one telephone can have an LED or neon message waiting indicator. A 

maximum of twelve ports can be rung simultaneously. To achieve this maximum, the system 

uses four ports from the set of ports numbered one through eight, four ports from the set of ports 

numbered 9 through 16, and four ports from the set of ports numbered 17 through 24. 

The TN793CP circuit pack supports A- and µ-law companding and administrable timers. The 

TN793 circuit pack supports queue warning level lights. These lights are associated with the 

direct department calling (DDC) and the uniform call distribution (UCD) features, recorded 

announcements that are associated with the Intercept Treatment feature, and PagePac paging 

system for the Loudspeaker Paging feature. Additional support is provided for external alerting 

devices. These devices are associated with the Trunk Access from Any Station (TAAS) feature, 

neon message waiting indicators, and modems. The TN793CP provides -48 VDC current in the 

off-hook state. Ringing voltage is -90 VDC. 

The TN793CP supports DTMF sending levels that are appropriate for Avaya Interactive 

Response. 

The TN793CP circuit pack’s multinational support is identical to that of the TN2215 circuit pack. 

Therefore, the TN793CP allows country-specific transmission selection. The TN793CP is also 

impedance and gain selectable for multiple countries. For more information, contact your Avaya 

representative. 


TN797 analog trunk or line circuit pack (8 ports) 

The following table lists the TN793CP-supported telephones and shows each of their wiring 

sizes and ranges. 

TN797 analog trunk or line circuit pack (8 ports) 

Provides a combination 8-port analog trunk and line circuit pack for the US, Canada, and other 

countries that have the same analog standards. The TN797 circuit pack provides you with the 

capability to administer any of the eight ports as any of the following trunks or lines: 

● loop start or ground start CO trunk 

● CAMA E911 trunk 


(feet) 

2500 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

6200 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

7100 series 

(no longer 

sold) 

8100 series 

(no longer 

sold) 

9100 series 

(no longer 

sold) 

● wink-start or immediate-start DID trunk 

24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

● on-premises or an off-premises analog line with or without LED Message Waiting 

Indication 

The TN797 does not support incoming caller ID (ICLID) on the analog trunk to the CO. The 

TN797 does not support caller ID on the line side to the telephone. 



TN799DP control LAN (C-LAN) interface 

The TN799DP control LAN (C-LAN) interface provides TCP/IP connectivity over Ethernet or 

Point to Point Protocol (PPP) to adjuncts such as the following: 

● Avaya Call Management System (CMS) 

● INTUITY AUDIX 

● Distributed Communication System (DCS) 

● printers 

● call detail recording (CDR) 

● property management systems (PMS) 

The C-LAN operates at 10 or 100 Mbps and full duplex or half duplex, both of which are 

administrable. The C-LAN provides connectionless UDP sockets for IP solutions support. The 

C-LAN also supports 500 remote sockets, with support for 4-Kbyte UDP sockets. The C-LAN 

supports variable-length ping and the traceroute and netstat network testing commands. 

The C-LAN circuit pack provides call control for all IP endpoints that are connected to the 

S8700-series Media Server using the G600 Media Gateway or G650 Media Gateway. A 

maximum number of 64 C-LAN circuit packs can be used for each configuration. The number of 

required C-LAN circuit packs depends on the number of devices that are connected. The 

C-LAN number also depends on which options that the endpoints use. It might be 

advantageous to segregate IP voice control traffic from device control traffic as a safety 

measure. 

A CLAN socket is a software object that can connect a C-LAN to the IP Network. A simple 

calculation determines the default value for C-LAN socket usage of H.323 tie trunks. Divide the 

total number of H.323 tie trunks that use sharing by 31. Each IP endpoint requires the use of 

some number of C-LAN sockets. A C-LAN circuit pack supports a maximum of 500 sockets. 

The C-LAN differs from an IP Media Processor. The difference is that the C-LAN controls the 

call, while the IP Media Processor provides the codecs that are used for the audio on the call. 

To keep the firmware on the CLAN circuit pack up-to-date, you can download C-LAN firmware 

updates from the Web. To take advantage of this downloadable firmware capability, you must 

already have at least one C-LAN circuit pack in your system. You must also have access to the 

public Internet. The C-LAN can serve as an FTP or SFTP server for file transfers — primarily 

firmware downloads.The C-LAN cannot serve as an SFTP client. 

With Communication Manager Release 3.1 and later, the C-LAN can also receive firmware 

downloads from a central firmware depository on an SCP-enabled file server. 

More information on firmware downloads, and instructions for downloading, are available at: 

http://www.avaya.com/support/ 

Click Online Services > Download Software. 


TN801B MAPD (LAN gateway interface) 

TN801B MAPD (LAN gateway interface) 

The TN801 LAN gateway interface is part of the Multiapplication Platform DEFINITY (MAPD). 

The TN801 allows direct integration of PC-based applications into the switch. The TN801 circuit 

pack works as the interface for solutions such as Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) and 

Adjunct-Switch Application Interface (ASAI). The TN801 circuit pack provides: 

● packet bus and TDM-bus interfacing, 

● physical mounting for a CPU, 

● external interfaces, and 

● mapping of circuit-switched connections between the TDM bus and the expansion circuit 

pack. 

TN802B MAPD (IP interface assembly) 

The TN802 IP interface circuit pack supports voice calls and fax calls from the switch across a 

corporate intranet or the Internet. This circuit pack is still supported, but is now replaced with the 

TN2302AP IP media processor on page 256. The IP trunking software runs on an embedded 

PC that runs Windows NT. The TN802 circuit pack supports IP Solutions, including IP trunking 

and MedPro (H.323) with IP softphones. 

The TN802 IP Interface operates in two modes, IP Trunk and Media Processor (MedPro/ 

H.323). The TN802 defaults to IP Trunk mode. To use the TN802 in MedPro mode, you activate 

it through administration to use the H.323 trunking feature. MedPro mode is necessary to 

support IP softphones. 

TN1654 DS1 converter, T1 (24 channels) and E1 (32 

channels) 

The TN1654 converter installs in place of the conventional fiber. The TN1654 converter 

supports from one to four T1 or E1 facilities. The TN1654 also provides a total of 92 T1 

channels, or 120 E1 channels. These channels run each direction between the processor port 

network (PPN) and an expansion port network (EPN). This capacity is enough for the EPN to 

easily support several hundred stations. 

The switch architecture provides for EPNs that are remotely located from the PPN. An EPN that 

is within 5 miles (8 kilometers) of the PPN can be coupled using multimode fiber-optic cable. 



EPNs that are within 22 miles (35.4 kilometers) of the PPN can be coupled using single-mode 

fiber-optic cable. You must use a DS1 converter complex to connect an EPN when the distance 

between the PPN and the EPN exceeds a certain distance or private right-of-way is unavailable. 

The maximum distances are 5 miles (8 kilometers) for multimode cable, or 22 miles (35.4 km) 

for single-mode cable. One DS1 circuit pack is placed on each end of the DS1 converter 

complex. 

The TN1654 DS1 converter requires a set of Y-cables to connect to a TN570B Expansion 

Interface circuit pack. 

TN2138 central office trunk (8 ports) 

Note: 


The TN2138 central office (CO) trunk circuit pack provides eight analog loop start CO trunk 

ports for Italy. Each port has a tip and ring signal lead. The TN2138 has 50-Hz, 12-kHz, and 

16-kHz periodic pulse metering (PPM). 

TN2139 direct inward dialing trunk(8 ports) 

Note: 


The TN2139 direct inward dialing trunk for Italy provides eight analog direct inward dialing (DID) 

trunk ports for analog DID signaling. Each of the eight ports has a tip and ring signal lead. 

TN2140B tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) 

The TN2140B tie trunk is used in Hungary and Italy. The TN2140B provides four ports for 4-wire 

E&M lead signaling tie trunks. The TN2140 provides continuous E&M signaling and 

discontinuous E&M signaling. The TN2140 also provides administrable A- and µ-Law 

companding and standard Type 1 and Type 5 signaling. The TN2140B is required for Hungary. 


TN2146 direct inward dialing trunk (8 ports) 


Note: 


The TN2146 provides eight analog DID trunk ports for Belgium and the Netherlands. Each of 

the eight ports has tip and ring signal lead. The TN2146 uses four Dual Subscriber Line Audio 

processing Circuits (DSLACs). One DSLAC is used for each pair of ports. The circuits are 

administered to meet trunk transmission characteristics. The DSLACs can be set to either a 

resistive or complex balance impedance in the voice or AC talk path on the trunk interfaces. The 

DSLACs convert analog signals to digital signals and vice-versa to match the analog DID trunks 

to the digital TDM bus on the system. The TN2146 circuit pack provides either A-Law or 

Mu-Law companding. 


The TN2147 has eight analog central office (CO) trunk ports. Each port has tip and ring signal 

leads. The TN2147 uses four (1 for each pair of ports) Dual Subscriber Line Audio processing 

Circuits (DSLACs). These DSLACs are administered to meet a given transmission and 

impedance requirement. The DSLACs convert analog signals to digital signals and digital 

signals to analog signals. These conversions interface the analog CO trunks to the system’s 

digital TDM bus of the system. 

The TN2147C provides multicountry signaling based on a trunk type of loop-start, ground start, 

or battery reverse loop-start. 

TN2181 DCP digital line (2-wire, 16 ports) 

Note: 


The TN2181 circuit pack has 16 DCP ports. These ports can connect to 2-wire terminals such 

as the 6400-, 8400-, and 9400-series digital telephones and the 302C and 302D attendant 

console. The maximum range of the 8400- and 9400-series terminals using 24-AWG (0.5 mm) 

wire is 3,500 feet (1067 meters). 

The TN2181 circuit pack supports either A- or µ-Law companding. The TN2181 also supports 

8400-series data modules. 



TN2182C tone clock, tone detector, and call classifier (8 

ports) 

Note: 


The TN2182 tone clock integrates the following functions onto one circuit pack for all system 

reliability configurations: 

● tone generator 

● tone detection-call classifier 

● system clock 

● synchronization 

The TN2182 supports eight ports for tone detection and allows gain or loss applied to PCM 

signals received from the bus. The TN2182 supports: 

● stratum-4 enhanced clock accuracy 

● MFC signaling, such as Russia MF 

● Russia multifrequency shuttle register signaling (MFR) 

● A- and Mu-Law companding 

The TN2182CP performs the following functions: 

● provides continuous cadenced and mixed tones 

● allows administrable setting of tone frequency and level 

● detects 2025-Hz, 2100-Hz, or 2225-Hz modem answerback tones 

● provides normal and wide broadband dial-tone detection 

In most configurations, the 2-circuit or 3-circuit pack combination can include either the tone 

generator, tone detector, and call classifier. This combination can be replaced with this one 

circuit pack to free one or two port slots. 

Use the TN2182CP circuit pack with the TN429D analog line central office trunk for CAMA/E911 

and incoming caller ID (ICLID). A TN2182 is required for main processor tone detection or for 

additional tones to support CCRON, Russian ANI, and others. 


TN2183/TN2215 analog line for multiple countries (16 ports) 

TN2183/TN2215 analog line for multiple countries (16 

ports) 

See TN2215/TN2183 analog line for multiple countries (16 ports) (international offers or Offer B 

only for US and Canada) on page 253. 

TN2184 DIOD trunk (4 ports) 

Note: This 

Note: 

circuit pack is not used in a G650 Media Gateway. 

Note: 


The TN2184 is a Direct Inward/Outward Dialing (DIOD) trunk circuit pack used for Germany. 

The TN2184 circuit pack contains four port circuits. Each circuit interfaces a 2-wire analog CO 

trunk with the TDM switching network of the system. Each port allows incoming calls and 

outgoing calls to include addressing information. This information is received from the CO for 

incoming calls. Or, this addressing information is being sent to the CO for outgoing calls. The 

TN2184 detects periodic pulse metering (PPM) signals for call-charge accounting on outgoing 

calls. 

The TN2184 combines the features of a CO trunk and a DID trunk. The TN2184 provides both 

outgoing calls and incoming calls with addressing information in both directions. 

TN2185B ISDN-BRI S/T-TE interface (4-wire, 8 ports) 

The TN2185B supports eight 4-wire ISDN-BRI line S interfaces. Each interface operates at 

192 kbps, with two B channels (64 kbps) and one D-channel (16 kbps). The TN2185B interfaces 

to the LAN bus and to the TDM bus to provide the TE side of the BRI interface. The TN2185B is 

similar to the TN2198 except that the TN2185B is a 4-wire S-interface instead of a 2-wire 

U-interface. 

For each port, information communicates over two 64-kbps bearer channels called B1 and B2. 

Information also communicates over a 16-kbps channel called the demand channel, or 

D-channel. The D-channel is used for signaling. Channels B1 and B2 can be circuit-switched 

simultaneously, or either of them can be packet-switched, but not both at once. The D channel 

is always packet-switched. For voice operation, the circuit pack has a Mu-Law or A-Law option 

that applies uniformly to all circuit-switched connections on the circuit pack. The circuit-switched 

connections operate as 64-kbps clear channels when in the data mode. The packet-switched 



channels support the LAPD protocol. However, the TN2185B does not terminate on LAPD 

protocol. The S-interface does not support switching of both B channels together as a 128-kbps 

wideband channel. 

The TN2185B has a maximum range up to 18,000 feet (5486 meters) from the system to the 

NT1 device. In an environment with multiple telephones, the B channels are shared only on a 

per-call basis. For example, if Channel B2 is for data, then the use of this channel by one 

telephone excludes the others from having access to Channel B2. When a device 

communicates over the D-channel to access B1 or B2, that channel is owned until the call is 

taken down. The D-channel is always shared among the terminals. The TN2185B circuit pack 

can be used as an alternative to the TN464 circuit pack or the TN2464 circuit pack. 

The TN2185B supports the ability to outpulse in-band DTMF signals or end-to-end signaling. 

QSIG Call Completion is supported, but QSIG Supplementary Services are not. ISDN-BRI 

trunks can be used as inter-PBX tie lines that use the QSIG peer protocol. 

TN2198 ISDN-BRI U interface (2-wire, 12 ports) 

The TN2198 circuit pack allows connection to the ANSI standard 2-wire U-Interface. The 2-wire 

interface from the TN2198 connects to an NT1 network interface. The 4-wire interface on the 

other side of the NT1 can connect to one or two telephones. Unlike the TN2185 circuit pack, the 

TN2198 does not provide a trunk-side interface. 

The TN2198 contains 12 ports that interface at the ISDN U reference point. For each port, 

information communicates over two 64-kbps bearer channels called B1 and B2. Information 

also communicates over a 16-kbps channel called the demand channel, or D-channel. The 

D-channel is used for signaling. Channels B1 and B2 can be circuit-switched simultaneously. 

The D-channel is always packet-switched. The TN2198 requires a packet control circuit pack. 

Each port supports one telephone, such as the 500 rotary dial analog telephone and 2500 

DTMF dial telephones. 

The D-channel supports the LAPD protocol and is consistent with the CCITT Q.920 

recommendations for D-channel signaling. 

In an environment with multiple telephones, the B channels are shared only on a per-call basis. 

For example, if the B2 channel is used for data, then the use of B2 by one telephone excludes 

the other telephones from having access to the B2 channel. When a device communicates over 

the D-channel to access B1 or B2, that channel is owned until the call is taken. The D channel is 

always shared among the telephones. The TN2198 interfaces with the TDM bus and the packet 

bus in the switch backplane and terminates with 12 ISDN basic access ports. 

The TN2198 has a maximum range of 18,000 feet (5486 meters) from the system to the NT1 

device and uses standard protocol ANSI T1.601. The TN2198 has a 160-kbps line rate, that 

consists of: 

● Two bearer channels at 64 kbps each 

● A D-channel at 16 kbps 


● Framing at 12 kbps 

● Maintenance at 4 kbps 

The TN2198 supports a maximum of 24 telephones or data modules. 

The TN2198 is not offered as a BRI Tie Trunk. 

TN2199 central office trunk (3-wire, 4 ports) 

TN2199 central office trunk (3-wire, 4 ports) 

The TN2199 central office (CO) trunk circuit pack is designed for use in Russia. 

The TN2199 is a 4-port, 3-wire, loop-start trunk circuit pack that can be used as a: 

● DID trunk 

● Two-way, one-way incoming, or one-way outgoing CO trunk 

The TN2199 combines the functionality of a DID trunk and a one-way outgoing CO trunk (DIOD 

trunk). To accomplish MF shuttle signaling, the TN2199 circuit pack must be combined with a 

TN744D Call Classifier circuit pack. 

The TN2199 circuit pack supports incoming automatic number identification (ANI). 

TN2202 ring generator 

The TN2202 ring generator circuit pack is designed for use in France. 

The TN2202 ring generator circuit pack supplies 50-Hz ringing power. The TN2202 supplies 

balanced ringing to telephones that connect to the TN2183/TN2215 multicountry analog line 

circuit pack. A modified backplane allows this balanced ringing. The telephones must be 

administered for France analog transmission. 

The TN2202 plugs into the power unit slot and is required for each carrier that contains analog 

lines requiring 50-Hz ringing. A 1-lead modification is required in a carrier backplane that uses 

the TN2202. This modification is required for all products that are made for France. The TN2202 

can: 

● produce two symmetric voltages (usually 28 V RMS) with respect to ground, 

● take –48 VDC, –5 VDC, and ground from the backplane, and 

● generate 2 × 28 V RMS with added –48 VDC. 

For CMC1 systems, this circuit pack is not needed. 



TN2207 DS1 interface, T1 (24 channels) and E1 (32 

channels) 

Note: 


The TN2207 circuit pack supports digital signal level 1 (DS1) rate (24-channel) and E1 rate 

(32-channel) digital facility connectivity. All TN2207 suffixes support CO, Tie, DID, and 

off-premises station (OPS) port types that use the following protocols: 

● Robbed-bit signaling 

● Proprietary bit-oriented signaling (BOS) 24th-channel signaling 

● DMI-BOS 24th-channel signaling 

The circuit packs also support ISDN-PRI connectivity T1 or E1. 

In a 24-channel DS1 mode, a DS1 interface is provided to the DS1 facility. The TN2207 circuit 

packs provide circuit-pack-level administrable A- and Mu-Law companding, CRC-4 generation 

and checking for E1 only, and stratum-3 clock capability. 

The TN2207 provides test jack access to the DS1 or E1 line and supports the 120A integrated 

channel-service unit (CSU). 

All suffixes have line-out (LO) and line-in (LI) signal leads. The line-out and line-in leads are 

unpolarized balanced pairs. 

The TN2207 has additional hardware to support direct cables to a TN787 MMI circuit pack. 

TN2209 tie trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) 

The TN2209 tie trunk was designed for use in Russia. 

The TN2209 tie trunk has four ports used for Type 1 or Type 5 4-wire E&M lead signaling tie 

trunks. The tie trunks can one of four types: automatic, immediate-start, wink-start, and 

delay-dial. The TN2209 provides an interface between these four frequency signaling tie trunk 

lines and the switch TDM network. Based on a TN760D each port has modified E&M signal 

leads for universal hardware compatibility. The TN2209 provides release link trunks that are 

required for the Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) feature and has administrable A- and 

Mu-Law companding. 


TN2214CP DCP digital line (2-wire, 24 ports) 


The TN2214CP is designed for use in the US, Canada, and international countries for offer B 

only. 

The TN2214 has 24 DCP ports that can connect to 2-wire digital telephones. Such telephones 

include 2400- and 6400-series telephones, the 302C and the 302D attendant console, and the 

Callmaster IV, V, and VI. 

The TN2214 supports either A- or Mu-Law companding. 

The following table lists the TN2214CP-supported telephones and shows each of their wiring 

sizes and ranges. 

TN2215/TN2183 analog line for multiple countries 

(16 ports) (international offers or Offer B only for US and 

Canada) 

The TN2215 and the TN2183 analog line circuit packs are designed for international offers or 

for offer B in the US and Canada. 

The TN2215 and the TN2183 provide 16 analog port interfaces. Each port supports one 

telephone, such as 500 (rotary dial) and 2500 telephones (DTMF dial) from a tip/ring pair. Each 

port also sends or receives signaling to and from a device, such as: 

● analog telephone, 

● answering machine, 

● FAX, and 


(feet) 

302C/D console 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) or 26 3,500 (1,067 m) 

Callmaster-series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) or 26 3,500 (1,067 m) 

2400-series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) or 26 3,500 (1,067 m) 


● loop-start CO port. 



The TN2215 and the TN2183 provides rotary digit 1 recall, ground-key recall, and 

programmable flash timing. Additional support is provided for selectable ringing patterns, LED 

message waiting, and secondary lightning protection. 

The TN2215 and TN2183 supports on-premises wiring with either touchtone or rotary dialing, 

and with or without the LED message waiting indicators. The TN2215 and TN2183 supports 

off-premises wiring with either DTMF or rotary dialing. LED message waiting indicators are not 

supported off-premises. Neon message waiting indicators are not supported. 

A maximum of six to eight simultaneous ringing ports is allowed depending on the ringing 

cadence selected. The TN2215 and the TN2183 supports A- and Mu-Law companding and 

administrable timers. 

The TN2215 and the TN2183 also supports balanced ringing. When balanced ringing is 

configured for France, use the TN2202 ring generator circuit pack. 

The TN2215 and the TN2183 supports DTMF sending levels that are appropriate for Avaya 

IVR. 

The TN2215 and the TN2183 is impedance and gain selectable for multiple countries. For more 

information, contact your Avaya representative. 

The following table lists the TN2215- and TN2183-supported telephones and shows each of 

their wiring sizes and ranges. 

Telephone Wire size (AWG) Maximum range (feet) 

2500 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 20,000 (6,096 m) 

6200 type 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 

7102A series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 3,100 (945 m) 

8100 series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) 12,000 (3,657 m) 


The TN2224CP has 24 DCP ports that can connect to 2-wire digital telephones. Such 

telephones include the 6400-, 8400-, or 9400-series telephones and the 302C or 302D 

attendant console. 

The TN2224 circuit pack supports either A-Law or Mu-Law companding. 


TN2242 digital trunk 




(feet) 

302C/D console 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) or 26 3,500 (1,067 m) 

Callmaster-series 24 (0.2 mm 2 /0.5 mm) or 26 3,500 (1,067 m) 



TN2242 digital trunk 

The TN2242 digital trunk circuit pack supports versions of channel-associated signaling and 

ISDN-PRI signaling. These signaling versions are peculiar to the TTC private networking 

environment that is used in Japan. The TN2242 supports the special line-coding and framing 

that are used on 2.048-Mbps Japanese trunks. The TN2242 connects the switch with other 

vendor equipment and with other DEFINITY switches through the TDM device. The TDM device 

is commonly used throughout Japan for this purpose. 

TN2301 logic switch 

The TN2301 provides service to the customer when one of the following is true: 

● the link to the main processor fails 

● the link to the main processor is severed 

● the processor or Center Stage Switch (CSS) fails 

The TN2301 Survivable Remote Switch (SRS) circuit pack connects the expansion port network 

(EPN) links to the appropriate processor port network (PPN) for call processing. The EPN links 

can be fiber or T1/E1. This connection is under the control of the TN775C Maintenance circuit 

pack which monitors the health of the expansion interface TN570B. 

The TN2301 logic switch circuit pack is not used in an ATM-PNC. 



TN2302AP IP media processor 

The TN2302AP IP Media Processor is the H.323 audio platform and includes a 10/100 BaseT 

Ethernet interface. The IP Media Processor provides voice over internet protocol (VoIP) audio 

access to the switch for local stations and outside trunks. The IP Media Processor provides 

audio processing for between 32 and 64 voice channels, depending on the CODECs in use. 

The IP Media Processor is compatible with and can share load balancing with the TN2602AP 

Media Resource 320 circuit pack. See Comparison of TN2302AP Media Processor and 

TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 on page 272. 

The IP Media Processor supports hairpin connections and the shuffling of calls between TDM 

connections and IP-to-IP direct connections. The IP Media Processor can also perform the 

following functions: 

● Echo cancellation 

● Silence suppression 

● Fax relay service using T.30 and T.38 standards 

● Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) detection 

● Conferencing 

The IP Media Processor can be updated using the firmware download feature. 

The TN2302AP, starting with vintage 32, supports the following conversion resources for codec 

regarding voice, conversion between codecs, and fax detection: 

● G.711, A-law or Mu-law, 64 kbps 

● G.723.1, 6.3 kbps or 5.3 kbps audio 

● G.729A, 8 kbps audio 

● G.729, G.729B, G.729AB 

The TN2302AP also supports transport of the following devices: 


● Fax, Teletypewriter device (TTY), and modem calls over a corporate IP intranet using 


● Fax and TTY calls using proprietary relay mode 



● 64kbps clear channel transport in support of BRI secure telephones and data appliances 

(does not include support for H.320 video) 

● T.38 Fax over the Internet (including endpoints connected to non-Avaya systems) 

● Modem tones over a corporate IP intranet 


TN2305B ATM-CES trunk/port-network interface for multimode fiber 

Note: 



See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504, 

for more information. 


interface for multimode fiber 

Note: 


The TN2305 provides an ATM-based replacement for the TN570D Expansion Interface. The 

interface uses OC-3c or STM-1 155-Mbps multimode fiber. The TN2305 supports both trunk 

and port network (PN) connectivity. As a trunk, the TN2305 uses Circuit Emulation Service 

(CES) to emulate up to eight ISDN-PRI trunks on an ATM facility. As a PN expansion interface, 

the TN2305 connects PNs to an ATM switch that provides PN connectivity. The TN2305 

provides echo cancellation. 

The TN2305 does not support hybrid PNs that use both ATM and CSS simultaneously. 

TN2305s must connect all port networks through the ATM switch. Direct connect expansion port 

networks (EPNs) are not supported. Category B offers are not supported. 


interface for single-mode fiber 

The TN2306 circuit pack has the same features as the TN2305B ATM-CES trunk/port-network 

interface for multimode fiber, but the TN2306 supports single-mode fiber. The TN2306B is not 

available with Category B offers. 


The TN2308 uses eight ports for immediate- or wink-start direct inward dialing (DID) trunks for 

Brazil. Each port has tip and ring signal leads. 



The switch requires the TN2308 to support Brazil Block Collect Call. The TN2308 transmission 

characteristics comply with Brazilian telecommunication standards for PBXs. 

TN2312BP IP server interface 

The TN2312BP IP server interface (IPSI) provides transport of control messages. The 

messages are sent between the S8500 or S8700-series Media Server to the media server’s 

port networks (PNs) using the customer’s LAN and WAN. Through these control messages, the 

media server controls the PNs. 

See Figure 61: IPSI faceplate for an example of the IPSI faceplate 

Figure 61: IPSI faceplate 

ckdfips2 LAO 081203 

700060643 

TN2312AP IPSI 

01DR06142246 


Dedicated and nondedicated network for control messages 

You can configure the path for control messages to be over a LAN dedicated to communication 

between the server and IPSI. In this case, the network for carrying calls, the bearer path, is 

separate from the dedicated LAN for control messages. The bearer path uses the customer’s 

nondedicated LAN, a center stage switch (CSS) configuration, or an asynchronous 

transmission mode (ATM) network. 

You can also configure the path for control messages to use the customer’s nondedicated LAN. 

In this case, the bearer path and control path use the same network. 

IPSI capabilities 

The IPSI always resides in the tone clock slot on a media gateway and uses a 10/100 BaseT 

interface to connect to: 

● The server 

AVAYA 

● A laptop computer connected to the server through a services port 


N 

E 

T 

W 

O 

R 

K 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

CLK

The IPSI provides the following functions: 

● PN clock generation and synchronization for Stratum 4 type II only 

● PN tone generation 

● PN tone detection, global call classification, and international protocols 

● Processing of product serial numbers for license file activation 

● Environmental maintenance, only on a G650 Media Gateway 


Note: 

Note: When the TN2312BP IPSI is used in an MCC1or SCC1, a TN775D provides the 

environmental maintenance. 

The IPSI can be accessed remotely using the Telnet and SSH protocols. The IPSI can serve as 

an SSH client, as well, for remote access from the IPSI to the Communication Manager server. 

The C-LAN can also serve as an FTP or SFTP server for file transfers — primarily firmware 

downloads. 

Note: 

Note: The IPSI cannot serve as an SFTP client. Additionally, the SSH/SFTP capability 

is only for the control network interface, not the Services interface. 

The IPSI supports the following functions and devices: 

● Eight global call classification ports 

● Network diagnostics 

● Download of SIPI firmware updates using Communication Manager Web pages, the 

loadipsi command from the server’s Linux command line, or the Software Update 

Manager. 

The TN2312BP IPSI is compatible with the following gateways: 

● CMC1 

● MCC1 

● SCC1 

● G600 

● G650 

But the TN2312BP provides environmental maintenance only when it is used in a G650 Media 

Gateway. 



IPSI support for system maintenance 

A TN2312BP IPSI placed in a G650 with a carrier address set to A acts as the serial bus master. 

A TN2312BP IPSI can only be placed in a G650 with a carrier address set to A or B. Only a 

TN2312BP IPSI in a G650 with a carrier address set to A can function as an serial bus master. 

The TN2312BP IPSI also provides environmental maintenance for the G650. This includes: 

● Power supply, cabinet, and ring generator maintenance 

● External device alarm detection 

● Emergency transfer control 

● Customer-provided alarm device control 

The TN2312BP IPSI and the 655A power supply provide the following information to the G650: 

● Environment maintenance 

- Inlet temperature of the G650 

- Exhaust temperature of G650 

- Hot Spot temperature status 

- Voltage, +5, -5, or -48 

- Fan speed 

- Fan alarm 

- Ring status 

- Ring control 

- Ringer Setting 

- Ring Detection 

- Input Power, AC or DC 


The external device alarm detection uses two external leads. External devices such as an 

uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or voice messaging system can use these leads to 

generate alarms. The external device uses the Avaya Communication Manager alarm 

reporting capability. Ground potential on either of these leads results in an alarm being 

generated. You can administer the alarm level, product ID, alternate name, and alarm 

description for each lead. The alarm levels are major, minor, and warning. 


Emergency transfer control provides -48 VDC to operate an external emergency transfer 

panel. The Communication Manager controls the state of the emergency transfer. When the 

emergency transfer is set to other than auto, an alarm is generated. 



● Customer-provided alarm device (CPAD) control 

CPAD provides a contact closure across a pair of external leads. These leads can control a 

customer-provided alarm device or an alarm indicator. The level of alarm can be 

administered system wide to cause a contact closure. The alarm levels are major, minor, 

warning, or none. When the alarm level matches the alarm level that was administered, the 

TN2312BP IPSI closes this contact for all G650s. This closure occurs by a carrier address 

set to A. When the TN2312BP IPSI is in emergency transfer, this contact is closed to 

activate the CPAD. 

I/O adapters 

The TN2312BP IPSI requires an adapter that provides for the alarm input, CPAD, and 

emergency transfer leads. This adapter also allows the IPSI Ethernet connection to be made to 

the back of the IPSI slot. 

Compatibility 

The TN2312BP IPSI can replace the TN2312AP IPSI in the following gateways: 

● SCC1 

● MCC1 

● CMC1 

● G600 

However, the IPSI does not provide environmental maintenance for these media gateways. 

Environment maintenance requires monitoring of the AuxSig backplane lead cabinet when the 

TN2312BP is installed in a CMC1 or G600 media gateway with Communication Manager 2.0. 

This lead sends an alarm if a failure is detected in either the power supply or fan assembly. The 

CMC1 and G600 are supported only in a nondedicated control path configuration with 

Communication Manager 2.0. 

See the following table for IPSI and media gateway compatibility. 

Media 

Gateway 

Communication 

Manager 1.x 

Communication 

Manager 2.0 

DEFINITY 

R10 

Environmental 

maintenance 

provided by: 

SCC1 Yes Yes Yes TN775D 

MCC1 Yes Yes Yes TN775D 

CMC1 Yes Monitoring the AuxSig 

backplane lead 



Media 

Gateway 

Communication 

Manager 1.x 

G600 Yes Monitoring the AuxSig 


G650 Yes TN2312BP IPSI 

Number of IPSI circuit packs per configuration 

For configurations where voice bearer is over CSS or ATM, each IPSI usually controls five port 

networks. Each IPSI achieves control by tunneling control messages over the bearer network to 

PNs that do not have IPSIs. An IPSI cannot be placed in: 

● A PN that has a Stratum-3 clock interface 

● A remote PN that is using a DS1 converter 

● A Survivable Remote Expansion Port Network (SREPN) 

A simple formula determines the number of IPSI-connected PNs that should support an S8500 

or S8700-series configuration. Divide the total number of PNs in the configuration by five and 

add one. The additional IPSI provides fault tolerance. For example, if you have 20 PNs, divide 

20 by 5 to get 4, then add 1. You need a minimum of five IPSIs to support the 20 PNs. 

For configurations where voice bearer is over IP, there must be one IPSI in each PN. 

A direct connect configuration only supports one IPSI-connected PN. 

TN2313AP DS1 interface (24 channels) 

The TN2313AP DS1 port circuit pack interfaces a DS1 trunk to the switch backplane by port 

slots that are standard for DEFINITY products. The TN2313AP is compatible with the following: 

● previous 24-channel DS1 circuit packs, including the TN464F, vintage 19 and below 

● TN2464,vintage 19 and below 

● TN767E DS1. 

Except, the TN2313AP does not provide for packet adjunct capabilities. The TN2313AP 

supports a variety of applications, including networking of the following: 

● DEFINITY switches 

● international trunk types 

● video teleconferencing 

● wideband data transmission 

Communication 

Manager 2.0 

DEFINITY 

R10 


Environmental 

maintenance 

provided by:

TN2401 network control/packet interface for SI 

On S8500 and S8700-series Media Servers, this circuit pack does not directly support 

D-channel signaling and thus does not directly support ISDN-PRI connectivity. However, the 

TN767 circuit can indirectly support D-channel signaling provided that the central office 

supports nonfacility associated signaling (NFAS). In this case, use NFAS administration on the 

server to associate the D-channel of another T1/E1 circuit pack, usually a TN464, with the 

TN767 circuit pack. 

The TN2313AP DS1 interface can be configured as 24 channels at 1.544 Mbps. The TN2313 

can supply two 8-kHz reference signals to the switch backplane. These signals can be used by 

the tone-clock circuit pack to synchronize the system clock and the received line clock. 

The TN2313AP is firmware downloadable. 

TN2401 network control/packet interface for SI 

Note: This 

Note: 

circuit pack is supported only for Communication Manager R2.2 and earlier. 

Note: 


The TN2401 network control and packet interface is used with DEFINITY SI only. 

The TN2401 Net/Pkt interface circuit pack provides the: 

● network control interface (NETCON), 

● packet interface (PACCON), and 

● processor interface (PI) if BX.25 connectivity is not required. 

The TN2401 communicates control channel messages between the processor circuit pack and 

the distributed network of port circuit packs on the TDM bus. The TN2401 provides eight 

asynchronous data channels that process and route information directly from the processor 

circuit pack to customer-connected equipment. The TN2401 does not include modems. The 

TN2401 is required for the SI model to save translations to the 5-volt ATA flash memory card. 



TN2401/TN2400 network packet interface 

complex assembly for SI upgrades 

Note: This 

Note: 


Note: 


The TN2401/TN2400 network packet interface complex provides: 

● A network control interface (NETCON) 

● A packet interface (PACCON) 

● A processor interface (PI) if BX.25 connectivity is not required 

● Eight asynchronous data channels 

The TN2401/TN2400 does not include modems. 

The TN2401/TN2400 is required for the SI model to save translations to the 5-volt ATA flash 

memory card. 

The TN2401/TN2400 complex and the TN2404 processor is required for the following 

upgrades: 

● A G1 or G3iV1 MCC1 with a TN773 Processor 

● An SI system with a TN786B Processor when reusing the existing control carrier cabinet 

● An SI system with a TN790 or 790B Processor. Any R5 or R6 system has the old control 

carrier backplane and requires the TN2401/TN2400. R7 and R8 systems can have either 

the old control carrier backplane or the new control carrier backplane. The backplane type 

must be verified before the upgrade order is placed so that the right characteristic 

selection can be made. If the type of carrier is not known, a visual inspection of the R7 or 

R8 system is required. The old backplane is being used if the system has a TN794/ 

TN2400 in the network control and packet control slots. If nothing is in the packet control 

slot, the new backplane is being used. 


TN2402 processor 


A TN2402 processor circuit pack resides in slot one of cabinet A. The TN2402 processor 

platform runs at 25 MHz. The TN2402 includes a 32-bit RISC CPU complex and a maintenance 

processor complex that provides serial communications and maintenance functions for 

DEFINITY CSI. The TN2402 also terminates ISDN LAPD signaling over the TDM bus from PRI 

and BRI trunk circuit packs. 

This circuit pack contains 32 MB of DRAM memory, which is provided by one SIMM, and 32 MB 

of flash memory. The software is stored on flash memory and on removable memory through 

flash-ROM that plugs directly into the TN2402 processor circuit pack. The flash is not 

interleaved. The memory on the processor circuit pack contains the generic program and the 

system translations. The cartridge contains a copy of the system translations and the error log. 

The TN2402 also provides: 

● A 5-volt ATA PC-card memory card interface 

● Three external RS232 interfaces [CD1] 

● A SAT terminal interface 

● An SMDR printer or other DTE interface 

● A connection for an external modem to dial out alarms 


Note: This 

Note: This 

Note: 


Note: 

circuit pack is no longer sold. 

The TN2404 processor circuit pack has 32 MB of DRAM memory and flash memory. The 

TN2404 processor for DEFINITY SI can handle errors that are associated with the EM-BUS. 

The TN2404 must be used with the C-LAN (TN799) and the Net/Pkt (TN2401) in DEFINITY SI 

configurations. 



TN2464CP DS1 interface with echo cancellation,T1/E1 

The TN2464CP DS1 circuit pack is designed for international use in both category A and 

category B. The TN2464CP has echo cancellation circuitry and firmware download capability. 

The TN2464CP supports T1 (24-channel) and E1 (32-channel) digital facilities. The TN2464CP 

has the same functionality as the TN464HP, which is for US and Canada offers only. 

The TN2464CP circuit pack provides: 

● Test jack access to the T1/E1 line. 

● Circuit-pack-level administrable A-law and Mu-law companding. 

● CRC-4 generation and checking (E1 only). 

● Support for the 120A channel service unit module. 

● CO, TIE, DID, off-premises station (OPS) port types that use robbed-bit signaling protocol, 

proprietary bit-oriented signaling (BOS) 24th-channel signaling protocol, or DMI-BOS 

24th-channel signaling protocol. 

● Unpolarized, balanced-pair, line-out (LO) and line-in (LI) signal leads. 

● Support for Russian incoming ANI. 

● Support for the enhanced maintenance capabilities of the enhanced integrated channel 

service unit (ICSU). 

● Support for Avaya Interactive Response. 

● Channel-associated signaling protocols for many countries. For details, contact your 

Avaya representative. 

The TN2464CP can be updated using the firmware download feature, which requires use of the 

TN799 C-LAN interface. 

TN2501AP voice announcements over LAN (VAL) 

The TN2501AP is an integrated announcement circuit pack that: 

● Offers up to 1 hour of announcement storage capacity 

● Provides shorter backup and restore times 

● Is firmware downloadable 

● Plays announcements over the TDM bus, similar to the TN750C circuit pack 


TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 

● Has 33 ports, including 

- One dedicated telephone access port for recording and playing back announcements 

using port number 1 

- One Ethernet port using port number 33 

- 31 playback ports using ports 2 through 32 

● Uses a 10-/100-Mbps ethernet interface to allow portability of announcements and 

firmware files over a LAN 

● Uses announcement files that are in ".wav" format (CCITT A- and µ-law, 8 kHz, 8-bit 

mono) 

The VAL can serve as an FTP or SFTP server for file transfers — primarily firmware 

downloads.The VAL cannot serve as an SFTP client. 

With Communication Manager Release 3.1 and later, the VAL can also receive firmware 

downloads from a central firmware depository on an SCP-enabled file server. 

More information on firmware downloads, and instructions for downloading, are available at: 

http://www.avaya.com/support/ 

Click Online Services > Download Software. 


The TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 provides high-capacity voice over Internet protocol 

(VoIP) audio access to the switch for local stations and outside trunks. The IP Media Resource 

320 provides audio processing for the following types of calls: 

● TDM-to-IP and IP-to-TDM — for example, a call from a 4602 IP telephone to a 6402 DCP 

telephone 

● IP-to-IP — for example, a non-shuffled conference call 

See Figure 62: IP Media Resource 320 faceplate for an example of the IP Media Resource 320 

faceplate. 

Figure 62: IP Media Resource 320 faceplate 

700261928 

TN2602AP Media Resource 320 

04J219701400 HV2 

AVAYA 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

SRVC 

FDX 

ACT 

PORT 2 

LNK 

FDX 

ACT 

LNK 

PORT 1 

FDX 

ACT 

LNK 

ckdf2602 LAO 102705 



The TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack has two capacity options, both of which are 

determined by the license file installed on Communication Manager: 

● 320 voice channels, considered the standard IP Media Resource 320 

● 80 voice channels, considered the low-density IP Media Resource 320 

Only two TN2602AP circuit packs are allowed per port network. 

Note: The 

Note: 

TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 is not supported in CMC1 and G600 

Media Gateways. 


Load balancing 

Up to two TN2602AP circuit packs may be installed in a single port network for load balancing 

The TN2602AP circuit pack is also compatible with and can share load balancing with the 

TN2302 and TN802B IP Media Processor circuit packs. Actual capacity may be affected by a 

variety of factors, including the codec used for a call and fax support. 

Note: When 

Note: 

two TN2602AP circuit packs, each with 320 voice channels, are used for 

load balancing within a port network, the total number of voice channels available 

is 484, because 484 is the maximum number of time slots available for a port 

network. 

Bearer duplication 

Two TN2602AP circuit packs may be installed in a single port network (PN) for bearer 

duplication. In this configuration, one TN2602AP is an active IP media processor and one is a 

standby IP media processor. If the active media processor, or connections to it, fail, active 

connections failover to the standby media processor and remain active. This duplication 

prevents active calls in progress from being dropped in case of failure. The interchange 

between duplicated circuit packs affects only the PN in which the circuit packs reside. 

Note: The 

Note: 

4606, 4612, and 4624 telephones do not support the bearer duplication 

feature of the TN2602AP circuit pack. If these telephones are used while an 

interchange from active to standby media processor is in process, calls may be 

dropped. 


Virtual IP and MAC addresses to enable bearer duplication 


Duplicated TN2602AP circuit packs in a PN share a virtual IP and virtual MAC address. These 

virtual addresses are owned by the currently-active TN2602. In addition to the virtual IP 

address, each TN2602 has a "real" IP address. All bearer packets sent to a PN that contains 

duplicated TN2602AP circuit packs, regardless of whether the packets originate from TN2602s 

in other PNs or from IP phones or gateways, are sent to the virtual IP address of the TN2602 

pair in that PN. Whichever TN2602AP circuit pack is active is the recipient of those packets. 

When failover to the standby TN2602 occurs, a negotiation between TN2602s to determine 

which TN2602 is active and which is standby takes place. State-of-health, call state, and 

encryption information is shared between TN2602s during this negotiation. The newly-active 

TN2602AP circuit pack sends a gratuitous address resolution protocol (ARP) request to ensure 

that the LAN infrastructure is updated appropriately with the location of the active TN2602. 

Other devices within the LAN will update their old mapping in ARP cache with this new 

mapping. 

Requirements for bearer duplication 

The Communication Manager license file must have entries for each circuit pack, with the 

entries having identical voice channels enabled. In addition, both circuit packs must have the 

latest firmware that supports bearer duplication. 

Duplicated TN2602AP circuit packs must be in the same subnet. In addition, the Ethernet 

switch or switches that the circuit packs connect to must also be in the same subnet. This 

shared subnet allows the Ethernet switches to use signals from the TN2602AP firmware to 

identify the MAC address of the active circuit pack. This identification process provides a 

consistent virtual interface for calls. 

Combining duplication and load balancing 

A single port network can have up to two TN2602AP circuit packs only. As result, the port 

network can have either two duplicated TN2602AP circuit packs or two load balancing 

TN2602AP circuit packs, but not both a duplicated pair and a load-balancing pair. However, in a 

Communication Manager configuration, some port networks can have a duplicated pair of 

TN2602AP circuit packs and other port networks can have a load-balancing pair of TN2602AP 

circuit packs. Some port networks can also have single or no TN2602AP circuit packs. 



Note: If 

Features 

Note: 

a pair of TN2602AP circuit packs previously used for load balancing are 

re-administered to be used for bearer duplication, only the voice channels of 

whichever circuit pack is active can be used. For example, If you have two 

TN2602 AP circuit packs in a load balancing configuration, each with 80 voice 

channels, and you re-administer the circuit packs to be in bearer duplication 

mode, you will have 80 (rather than 160) channels available. If you have two 

TN2602 AP circuit packs in a load balancing configuration, each with 320 voice 

channels, and you re-administer the circuit packs to be in bearer duplication 

mode, you will have 320 (rather than 484) channels available. 

The IP Media Resource 320 supports hairpin connections and the shuffling of calls between 

TDM connections and IP-to-IP direct connections. The IP Media Resource 320 can also 

perform the following functions: 

● Echo cancellation 


● Adaptive jitter buffer (320 ms) 

● Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) detection 

● AEA Version 2 and AES media encryption 

● Conferencing 

● QOS tagging mechanisms in layer 2 and 3 switching (Diff Serv Code Point [DSCP] and 

802.1pQ layer 2 QoS) 

● RSVP protocol 

The TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack supports the following codecs for voice, 

conversion between codecs, and fax detection: 

● G.711, A-law or Mu-law, 64 kbps 

● G.726A-32 kbps 

● G.729 A/AB, 8 kbps audio 

The TN2602AP also supports transport of the following devices: 

Note: V.32 

● Fax, Teletypewriter device (TTY), and modem calls using pass-through mode 

● Fax, V.32 modem, and TTY calls using proprietary relay mode 

Note: 






● T.38 fax over the Internet, including endpoints connected to non-Avaya systems 

● 64-kbps clear channel transport in support of firmware downloads, BRI secure telephones, 

and data appliances 

The TN2602AP supports STRP media encryption. 

Firmware download 

The IP Media Resource 320 can serve as an FTP or SFTP server for firmware downloads to 

itself. However, this capability is activated by and available for authorized services personnel 

only. 

I/O adapter 

The TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack has a services Ethernet port in the 

faceplate. The TN2602AP circuit pack also requires an input/output adapter that provides for 

one RS-232 serial port and two 10/100 Mbs Ethernet ports for LAN connections (though only 

the first Ethernet port is used). This Ethernet connection is made at the back of the IP Media 

Resource 320 slot. See Figure 63: IP Media Resource 320 I/O adapter on page 271. 

Note: The 

Note: 

TN2302AP can also use this I/O adapter. 

Figure 63: IP Media Resource 320 I/O adapter 

Figure notes: 

1. Amphenol connector to 

backplane connector 

corresponding to TN2602AP slot 

2. RS-232 connector for services 

2 

1 

addf2602 LAO 112105 

PORT 1 

3 

4 

PORT 2 

3. Port 1: RJ45 LAN cable connection for 

100 Mbps CAT5 cable 

4. Port 2: RJ45 LAN connection for 

future use (do not use) 



Comparison of the TN2602AP and TN2302AP circuit packs 

The following table compares key features of the TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 circuit 

pack and the TN2302AP Media Processor circuit pack. 

Table 29: Comparison of TN2302AP Media Processor and TN2602AP IP Media 

Resource 320 

Supported Features TN2302AP Media 

Processor (V10 and 

Higher) 


TN2602AP IP Media 

Resource 320 

(standard and low 

density) 

VoIP Media Processing Channels 64 (G.711) 320 (standard) or 80 

(low density), based 

on license 

License control no yes 

T.38 Fax Interoperability yes yes 

Fax Pass Through yes yes 

Fax Relay – Proprietary yes yes 

Modem Pass Through yes yes 

Modem Relay – Proprietary yes yes 

TTY Pass Through yes yes 

TTY Relay yes yes 

Clear channel yes yes 

Echo Cancellation yes 

(32ms full tail) 

DTMF Detection/Generation yes yes 

Communication Manager can load 

balance between multiple boards 

yes yes 

Bearer duplication no yes 

AEA.2, AES media encryption yes (use of AES reduces 

channel availability by 

25%) 

Resiliency to DOS attacks yes yes 

yes 

(128 ms tail, 24ms 

window) 

yes (use of AES does 

not reduce channel 

availability) 

1 of 3



Resource 320 (continued) 



Higher) 

Firmware download yes (requires C-LAN) yes 

(self-downloadable) 

Reporting and recovery from bad/corrupt 

embedded SW 

Built-in test support 

● Sanity confirmation at boot 

● Loop back tests 

● Shallow IP and TDM loop back 

mode 

● Embedded firmware self test 

routines upon board initialization 

yes yes 

yes yes 

Ping test support yes yes 

VoIP engine monitoring yes yes 

VoIP engine resets yes yes 

Trace route support yes yes. 1 

RS232 port user interface yes yes 

Enable/disable FTP & Telnet services Enable/disable Telnet 

only in V58 and higher. 

yes 

Enable/disable SFTP and SSH services no yes 

Service access RS232 port out the back 

– no password required 


Resource 320 


density) 

Faceplate services 

Ethernet port or 

RS232 port in the 

back. VxWorks shell 

access. Password 

protected 

2 of 3 




Resource 320 (continued) 



Higher) 

Ethernet ports A single 10/100Mbps 

Ethernet port out the 

back. Uses an adapter. 

Codecs ● G.711 (64 

channels 

maximum, 

unencrypted; 48 

channels 

maximum, 

encrypted) 

Hardware requirements 

The TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 feature requires the following hardware: 

● TN2602AP circuit pack with one 10/100BaseT Ethernet port for services access 

● Media Resource 320 adapter with one RS-232 serial port and two 10/100BaseT Ethernet 

ports 

● Slot in the media gateway that is CAT5 compliant. A new kit (PEC cod 63275) with twisted 

pair wires is available for the MCC1 media gateway. 

● A CAT5 or better cable (customer supplied) 

● G.729B and 

G.723.1 (32 

channels 

maximum, 

unencrypted; 24 

channels 

maximum, 

encrypted) 



Resource 320 


density) 

Two 10/100Mbps 

Ethernet ports. Only 

one used. Uses an 

adapter to access 

both ports. 

● G.711 (320 

channels 

maximum, 

unencrypted or 

encrypted) 

● G.729A, 

G.729AB, (320 

channels 

maximum, 

unencrypted or 

encrypted) 

● G.726A (320 

channels 

maximum) 

1. For additional information on trace route, including limitation with the TN2602AP circuit pack, see the 

Maintenance documentation. 

3 of 3

TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack 

The TN2602AP works in the SCC1, MCC1, and G650 media gateways (cabinets/carriers) 

supported by Release 3.1 of Avaya Communications Manager. The G650 Media Gateway is the 

preferred media gateway. 

TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack 

The TN8400 Media Server circuit pack is the platform for an S8400 Media Server, which is a 

Linux-based server that occupies a single slot on a standard TN carrier. The S8400 Media 

Server provides Avaya Communication Manager processing functions in stand-alone, single 

port network telephony systems requiring up to 500 stations. 

For information on the S8400 Media Server and TN8400 Media Server circuit pack, see Avaya 

S8400 Media Server on page 40. 

TN8412AP S8400 server IP interface 

The TN8412AP S8400 server IP interface (SIPI) is used in an S8400 system. It provides 

transport of control messages between the S8400 Media Server and the media server’s port 

network (PN) using direct connections. (Connections using the customer’s LAN and WAN are 

possible but not typical.) Through these control messages, the media server controls the PN. 

See Figure 64: TN8412AP SIPI faceplate on page 276 for an example of the TN8412AP SIPI 

faceplate. 



Figure 64: TN8412AP SIPI faceplate 


SIPI capabilities 

The SIPI always resides in the tone clock slot on a media gateway and uses a 10/100 BaseT 

interface to connect to: 

● The S8400 server 

● A laptop computer connected to the server through a services port 


CLK 

ETR 

700332430 

TN8412AP S8400 IP INTERFACE 

AVAYA 

04J219701400 HV1 

S 

E 

R 

V 

I 

C 

E 

N 

E 

T 

W 

O 

R 

K 

ckdf8412 LAO 111705

The SIPI provides the following functions: 

● PN clock generation and synchronization for Stratum 4 type II only 

● PN tone generation 

● PN tone detection, global call classification, and international protocols 


● Environmental maintenance 

The SIPI can be accessed remotely using the Telnet and SSH protocols. The SIPI can serve as 

an SSH client, as well, for remote access from the SIPI to the Communication Manager server. 

The C-LAN can also serve as an FTP or SFTP server for file transfers — primarily firmware 

downloads. 

Note: 

Note: The SIPI cannot serve as an SFTP client. Additionally, the SSH/SFTP capability 

is only for the control network interface, not the Services interface. 

The SIPI supports the following functions and devices: 

● Eight global call classification ports 

● Network diagnostics 

● Download of SIPI firmware updates using Communication Manager Web pages, the 

loadipsi command from the server’s Linux command line, or the Software Update 

Manager. 

The TN8412AP SIPI is compatible with the S8400 media server and the G650 gateway. It is 

also compatible with the G600 and CMC1 gateways in migration systems. 

Note: An 

Note: 

S8400 system is shipped with a TN8412AP SIPI circuit pack. However, the 


SIPI support for system maintenance 

A TN8412AP SIPI placed in a G650 with a carrier address set to A acts as the serial bus master. 

A TN8412AP SIPI can only be placed in a G650 with a carrier address set to A. The TN8412AP 

SIPI also provides environmental maintenance for the G650. This includes: 

● Power supply, cabinet, and ring generator maintenance 



● Customer-provided alarm device control 



The TN8412AP SIPI and the 655A power supply provide the following information to the G650: 

● Environment maintenance 

- Inlet temperature of the G650 

- Exhaust temperature of G650 

- Hot Spot temperature status 

- Voltage, +5, -5, or -48 

- Fan speed 

- Fan alarm 

- Ring status 

- Ring control 

- Ringer Setting 

- Ring Detection 

- Input Power, AC or DC 


The external device alarm detection uses two external leads. External devices such as an 

uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or voice messaging system can use these leads to 

generate alarms. The external device uses the Avaya Communication Manager alarm 

reporting capability. Ground potential on either of these leads results in an alarm being 

generated. You can administer the alarm level, product ID, alternate name, and alarm 

description for each lead. The alarm levels are major, minor, and warning. 


Emergency transfer control provides -48 VDC to operate an external emergency transfer 

panel. The Communication Manager controls the state of the emergency transfer. When the 

emergency transfer is set to other than auto, an alarm is generated. 

● Customer-provided alarm device (CPAD) control 

CPAD provides a contact closure across a pair of external leads. These leads can control a 

customer-provided alarm device or an alarm indicator. The level of alarm can be 

administered system wide to cause a contact closure. The alarm levels are major, minor, 

warning, or none. When the alarm level matches the alarm level that was administered, the 

TN8412AP SIPI closes this contact for all G650s. This closure occurs by a carrier address 

set to A. When the TN8412AP SIPI is in emergency transfer, this contact is closed to 

activate the CPAD. 


Compatibility 


The TN8412AP SIPI also supports an S8400 Media Server in the following gateways: 

● CMC1 

● G600 

However, the SIPI does not provide environmental maintenance for these media gateways. 

Environment maintenance requires monitoring of the AuxSig backplane lead cabinet when the 

TN2312BP is installed in a CMC1 or G600 media gateway with Communication Manager 2.0. 

This lead sends an alarm if a failure is detected in either the power supply or fan assembly. The 

CMC1 and G600 are supported only in a nondedicated control path configuration with 

Communication Manager 2.0. 

See the following table for the location of the TN8400AP and TN8412 SIPI in different 

gateways: 

See the following table for SIPI and media gateway compatibility. 

Media 

Gateway 

I/O adapters 

Circuit Pack G650 G600 CMC1 

TN8400AP Media Server A02 A01 A01 

TN8412AP SIPI A01 A02 A02 

Communication 

Manager 1.x 

Communication 

Manager 2.0 

DEFINITY 

R10 

Environmental 

maintenance 

provided by: 

SCC1 Yes Yes Yes TN775D 

MCC1 Yes Yes Yes TN775D 

CMC1 Yes Monitoring the AuxSig 


G600 Yes Monitoring the AuxSig 


G650 Yes TN8412AP SIPI 

The TN8412AP SIPI requires an adapter that provides for the alarm input, CPAD, and 

emergency transfer leads. This adapter also allows the SIPI Ethernet connection to be made to 

the back of the SIPI slot. The adapter also provides an Ethernet connection to the customer’s 

LAN or directly to the S8400 with a crossover cable to port EthA on the S8400. 



TNCCSC-1 PRI to DASS converter 

The TNCCSC-1 circuit pack converts ISDN-PRI to a Direct Access Secondary Storage (DASS) 

interface. DASS is a 2-Mbps interface that uses a 75-Ohm coaxial transmission facility. One 

TNCCSC-1 circuit pack can support two TN464 DS1 interface circuit packs. A Y-cable and an 

888B 75-Ohm coaxial adapter connect to the public network facility. 

TNCCSC-2 PRI to DPNSS converter 

The TNCCSC-2 circuit pack converts ISDN-PRI to a Digital Private Network Signaling System 

(DPNSS) interface. DPNSS is a 2-Mbps interface that uses a 75-Ohm coaxial transmission 

facility. One TNCCSC-2 circuit pack can support two TN464 DS1 interface circuit packs. A 

Y-cable connects to the public network facility. 

TNCCSC-3 PRI to DPNSS converter 

The TNCCSC-3 circuit pack is the same as the TNCSSC-2 circuit pack, except that the 

TNCSSC-3 has a 120-Ohm twisted pair interface. 

TN-C7 PRI to SS7 converter 

The TN-C7 converter provides a gateway interface between the TN464 circuit pack and the 

public signaling network. The TN-C7 integrates DASS, DPNSS, and SS7 into a single circuit 

pack type. The TN-C7 supports international service provider call center customers. The TN-C7 

is not designed for operation in the US or Canada. 


TN-CIN voice, fax, and data multiplexer 

TN-CIN voice, fax, and data multiplexer 

The TN-CIN Provides QSIG and private networking transparency on demand across a switched 

network. The TN-CIN integrates circuits over a single separate digital link. The circuits include 

up to three G.728 LD-CELP voice or fax circuits, six CAFT voice or fax circuits, and two data 

circuits. The three or six voice or fax circuits are presented as a G.703 E1 data stream that uses 

either QSIG peer-to-peer or channel-associated signaling. 

All voice or fax circuits support low bit rate voice compression at 8 to 16 kbps when the circuits 

use CAFT. The same voice compression is supported at 16 kbps when circuits use LD-CELP. 

LD-CELP voice compression supports FAX at V.29 (7200 bps). CAFT voice compression 

supports FAX at V.27ter (4800 bps). The Composite port supports V.11 and V.35 at speeds up to 

128 kbps. 

The TN-CIN features an on-demand voice networking mode for use with time-based 

communications links like ISDN. A high-speed data port is available for data applications. This 

port uses V.24 or V.11 or V.35 at up to 115.2 kbps synchronous or V.24 at up to 115.2 kbps 

asynchronous. The port also incorporates dynamic bandwidth allocation, also known as 

variable data clocking. A low-speed V.24 data port of up to 96 kbps synchronous or 57.6 kbps 

asynchronous is available for data applications. 




Media modules 

MM312 DCP Media Module 


The Avaya MM312 Media Module provides 24 Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) ports 

with RJ-45 jacks. The MM312 supports simultaneous operation of all 24 ports. Each port can be 

connected to a 2-wire DCP telephone.The MM312 does not support 4-wire DCP telephones. 

Note: The 

Note: 

MM312 is not supported in the G700 Media Gateway. 

The MM312 supports a loop length as follows: 

CAUTION: The 

● 5500 feet (1676 meters) over 0.65 mm (.025 in.) wire (22 AWG) 


● 2200 (671 meters) over 0.4 mm (.016 in.) wire (26 AWG) 

! CAUTION: 

ports on the MM312 are intended for in-building use only. Phone lines 

connected to those ports are not to be routed out-of-building. Failure to comply 

with this restriction could cause harm to personnel or equipment. 


MM314 LAN Media Module 

The Avaya MM314 Media Module provides: 

● 24 Ethernet 10/100 Base-T Ethernet access ports with inline Power over Ethernet (PoE). 

● One Gigabit Ethernet Small Form-Factor Pluggables (SFP) GigaBit Interface Converter 

(GBIC) slot which supports any of the following SFP GBICs: 1000-SX, 1000-LX, 1000-ELX 

or 1000-TX. 

Note: 

Note: The MM314 is not supported in the G700 Media Gateway. 

The MM314 supports 48V DC inline power provided over standard category 5 UTP cables, up 

to 100-m range, on each PoE port. 

The MM314 features: 

● Priority power budgeting with configurable priorities 

● Automatic load detection on ports 

● Automatic device discovery 

● Enable/disable port powering option 

● Port monitoring 

● Automatic recovery from overload shutdown 

● Automatic recovery from no-load shutdown 

ALM 

2 4 6 8 

10 12 14 16 

51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

18 20 22 24 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 


h2cmm314 LAO 111705


The MM316 LAN media module provides: 


● 40 Ethernet 10/100 Base-T Ethernet access ports with inline Power over Ethernet (PoE). 

● One Gigabit Ethernet copper port for server connection or uplink to another switch or 

router. 

ALM 

The MM316 supports 48V DC inline power provided over standard category 5 UTP cables (up 

to 100m range) on each PoE port. 

The MM316 features: 

● Priority power budgeting with configurable priorities 

● Automatic load detection on ports 

● Automatic device discovery 

● Enable/disable port powering option 

● Port monitoring 

2 4 6 8 

10 12 14 16 

51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

18 20 22 24 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

26 28 30 32 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 

34 36 38 40 

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 

h2cmm316 LAO 111605 

● Automatic recovery from overload shutdown 

● Automatic recovery from no-load shutdown 

The MM316 is compatible with ACM version 2.0 and higher, and G350 Media Gateway firmware 

version 25.0.0 and higher. 


MM710 T1/E1 Media Module 

The Avaya MM710 T1/E1 Media Module terminates a T1 or an E1 connection to either private 

enterprise network trunks or to trunks to the public network. The MM710 has a built-in Channel 

Service Unit (CSU). An external CSU is not necessary. 

Figure 65: Avaya MM710 T1/E1 Media Module 

Note: The 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

SIG 

Note: 

MM710 is supported in both the G700 and G350 Media Gateways. 


Highlights of the MM710 include: 

● Software-selectable T1 or E1 operation 

● An integrated CSU 

● Both A-law (E1) and µ-law (T1) gain control and echo cancellation ability 

● D4, ESF, or CEPT framing 

● ISDN PRI capability: 23 B-channel + 1 D-channel or 30 B-channel + 1 D-channel 

● AMI, ZCS, B8ZS (T1) or HDB3 (E1) line coding 

● Trunk signaling to support US and international central office (CO) or tie trunks 

● Echo cancellation in either direction 

● Fractional T1 support 

● An OIC DB 25-pin interface 



● A Bantam loopback jack tests T1 circuits or E1 circuits. 

The MM710 supports the universal DS1 that conforms to the ANSI T1.403 1.544 Mbps T1 

standard and to the ITU-T G.703 2.048 Mbps E1 standard. 

The MM710 does not support Code Mark Inversion line coding used in Japan. 


mmdc710 KLC 020402

Echo cancellation 

MM710 T1/E1 Media Module 

The MM710 Media Module can cancel echoes in either direction for any DS0. The MM710 can 

cancel echoes with tail-end delays up to 96 milliseconds. the MM710 is compatible with either 

A- or Mu-law code. 

CSU function 

The CSU functionality that is built into the MM710 Media Module has the following capabilities: 

● Capable of long-haul or short-haul transmission 

● Can receive signals as low as -36 dB 

● Can compensate for distances up to 655 feet (200 meters) in short-haul operation 

● Attenuation up to -22.5 dB can be programmed when driving repeaters for long-haul 

transmission 

Loopback and BERT functions 

The loopback and bit error rate testing (BERT) functionality in the MM710 Media Module has 

the following characteristics: 

● Provides a passive loopback for the far-end in an unpowered state 

● Can be set up for line or payload loopbacks. 

● Supports incoming and outgoing ESF FDL requests 

● Can generate and respond to in-band loop up and loop down codes per ANSI-T1.403 

● Supports the generation and detection of test patterns and injection of bit errors for Bit 

Error Rate Testing 

E1 impedance 

By itself, the MM710 Media Module can be configured for balanced 120-ohm E1 operation. An 

external balun is required for 75-ohm unbalanced operation. 

Bantam jacks 

Six bantam jacks on the faceplate of the MM710 Media Module provide access to the incoming 

and outgoing T1 signals or E1 signals: 

● SM allows passive monitoring of the incoming line. 

● EM allows passive monitoring of the outgoing line. 

● SO allows intrusive monitoring of the incoming signal from the network. When used, the 

SO jack breaks the connection of that signal to the framer. 


LEDs 

● EI allows injection of a signal towards the framer. When used, the EI jack isolates the 

network Rx signal. 

● SI allows injection of a signal towards the network. When used, the SI jack isolates the 

framer Tx signal from going out to the network. 

● EO allows intrusive monitoring of the signal from the framer. When used, the EO jack 

breaks the connection of that signal to the network jack RJ48C. 

Four LEDs are supported on the faceplate. These LEDs include the three standard Media 

Module LEDs and the SIG LED that indicates that the MM710 Media Module is receiving a valid 

signal. 

DB 25 DCE connector 

A DB DCE connector is included and can connect a data service unit (DSU) in a future release. 

Loopback jack 

When your order an MM710 T1/E1 Media Module, Avaya recommends that you include the 

optional 700A loopback jack. With the loopback jack installed, you can loop back the T1 up to 

the network facility without a dispatch. If the MM710 is sold with an Avaya Service Agreement, 

the jack must be ordered and installed to save time and money on service calls. 

The jack is usually used for CO trunk installations. The jack is inserted as close to the network 

or service provider T1 facility as possible. When the jack is activated from the G700 Media 

Gateway, the jack sets up loopbacks in both directions. The G700 Media Gateway can then 

send and receive a test pattern. The test pattern verifies the function of the MM710 and T1 

cable up to the network T1 facility. In normal operation, the jack passes the T1 signals through 

undisturbed in both directions. 


MM711 Analog Media Module 


The Avaya MM711 Analog Media Module provides features and functionality for analog trunks 

and telephones. 

Figure 66: Avaya MM711 Analog Media Module 

Note: The 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

Note: 



The MM711 provides you with the capability to configure any of the eight ports of this analog 

circuit pack as: 

● A loop start or a ground start central office trunk with a loop current of 18 to 120 mA. 

● A wink-start or an immediate-start Analog Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk 

● A two-wire analog Outgoing CAMA E911 trunk, for connectivity to the public switched 

telephone network (PSTN). MF signaling is supported for CAMA ports. 

● Analog tip/ring devices such as single-line telephones with or without LED message 

waiting indication. 

The MM711 Analog Media Module also supports: 

● Three ringer loads, which is the ringer equivalency number, for all eight ports, for the 

following loop lengths: 




At .1 or less REN ringer loads, the supported loop length is 20,000 feet (6096 meters) at 22, 

24, and 26 AWG. 

● Up to eight simultaneously-ringing ports 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

8 

mmdc711 KLC 022702 


Note: 

Note: The media gateway achieves this number of ports by staggering the ringing and 

pauses between two sets of up to four ports. 

If it has more than four ports, the MM711 also supports: 

● Type 1 caller ID and Type 2 caller ID 

● Ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences 

A hard-wired ground wire is added for each IROB-to-earth ground 

External interfaces on the CO trunk side 

Caller ID 

The following requirements apply to the external interfaces on the CO trunk side: 

● The tip and ring default input impedance is 600 ohms. The default impedance can be 

configured to accommodate other tip and ring impedances. One such impedance is the 

900 ohms that is used in Brazil. Another is the complex impedance that is used in the 

European Union. 

● A hard-wired ground wire is added for each IROB-to-earth ground. 

● The MM711 supports DTMF, MF, and pulsing. 

● The MM711 supports R2MFC address signaling, and provides -48 VDC for ports that are 

set up as direct inward dialing (DID). 

● Acceptable loop range for the CO trunk is 18 to 60 mA 

● The MM711 supports direct inward and outward dialing (DIOD) for Japan. 

The following trunk types are supported: 

● Loop-start and ground-start CO trunks 

● DID 

● CAMA 

The MM711 Analog Media Module supports incoming caller ID (ICLID) on analog CO loop-start 

trunks for all supported countries that require this feature. The MM711 supports Type 1 caller ID 

(CID) devices, and firmware signaling requirements are implemented on a per-port basis. The 

firmware supports these formats: 

● Single Data Message Format (SDMF) 

● Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF) 

● Caller ID generation on line ports 

The MM711 accommodates on-hook transmission, which is necessary to receive caller ID 

signals. 



A call can still be terminated on a trunk that is administered for ICLID. The call is terminated 

even if there is no ICLID information or error in transmission of ICLID information. Japan is an 

exception. 

Analog line interface requirements 

The MM711 provides pass through for fax signals. 

The MM711 supports analog telephone sets with: 

Companding 

● An impedance range of Rs: 215 to 300 ohms, Rp: 750 to 1000 ohms, Cp: 115 to 220 pF 

● A ringing frequency range of 20 Hz, 25 Hz, or 50 Hz 

● A DC current range of 20 to 60 mA 

● A hook flash range of 90 to 1000 ms 

MM711 allows for A- or Mu-law selection at installation. This is a software-selectable capability 

that applies to all ports on the MM711. 



Use the MM712 DCP Media Module to connect up to eight two-wire Digital Communications 

Protocol (DCP) voice terminals. 

Figure 67: Avaya MM712 DCP Media Module 

Note: The 

Note: 


Hardware interface 

Signal timing specifications for the MM712 support TDM bus timing in receive and transmit 

modes. The G700 Media Gateway supplies only +5 VDC and –48 VDC to the MM712 Media 

Module. Any other required voltages must be derived on the module. 

Loop range secondary protection is provided on the MM712. The MM712 is also self-protecting 

from an over-current condition on a tip and ring interface. The MM712 supports a loop length as 

follows: 

CAUTION: The 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 

8 




! CAUTION: 





mmdc712 KLC 022702



The Avaya MM714 Media Module provides four analog telephone ports and four analog trunk 

ports. 

Note: The 

Note: The 

Note: 

four analog trunk ports can not be used for analog DID trunks. Instead, the 

four analog line ports must be used for analog DID trunks. 

Note: 



The MM714 provides you with the capability to configure any of the four trunk ports as: 

● A loop start or a ground start central office trunk with a loop current of 18 to 120 mA. 

● A two-wire analog Outgoing CAMA E911 trunk, for connectivity to the public switched 

telephone network (PSTN). MF signaling is supported for CAMA ports. 

The MM714 provides you with the capability to configure any of the four line ports as: 

● A wink-start or an immediate-start Analog Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk 


waiting indication. 


● Three ringer loads, which is the ringer equivalency number, for all four line ports, for the 

following loop lengths: 







● Up to four simultaneously-ringing ports 



A hard-wired ground wire is added for each IROB-to-earth ground 

External interfaces on the CO trunk side 

Caller ID 

The following requirements apply to the external interfaces on the CO trunk side: 

● The tip and ring default input impedance is 600 ohms. The default impedance can be 

configured to accommodate other tip and ring impedances. One such impedance is the 

900 ohms that is used in Brazil. Another is the complex impedance that is used in the 

European Union. 

● A hard-wired ground wire is added for each IROB-to-earth ground. 

● The MM714 supports DTMF, MF, and pulsing. 

● The MM714 supports R2MFC address signaling. 

● Acceptable loop range for the CO trunk is 18 to 60 mA 

● The MM714 supports direct inward and outward dialing (DIOD) for Japan. 

The MM714 Analog Media Module supports up to four incoming caller ID (ICLID) on analog CO 

loop-start trunks for all supported countries that require this feature. The MM714 supports Type 

1 caller ID (CID) devices, and firmware signaling requirements are implemented on a per-port 

basis. The firmware supports these formats: 

● Single Data Message Format (SDMF) 

● Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF) 

● Caller ID generation on line ports 

The MM714 accommodates on-hook transmission, which is necessary to receive caller ID 

signals. 

A call can still be terminated on a trunk that is administered for ICLID. The call is terminated 

even if there is no ICLID information or error in transmission of ICLID information. Japan is an 

exception. 


Analog line interface requirements 

The MM714 provides pass through for fax signal on its analog line ports. 

The MM714 supports up to four analog telephone sets with: 


● An impedance range of Rs: 215 to 300 ohms, Rp: 750 to 1000 ohms, Cp: 115 to 220 pF 

● A ringing frequency range of 20 Hz, 25 Hz, or 50 Hz 

● A DC current range of 20 to 60 mA 

● A hook flash range of 90 to 1000 ms 

The MM714 provides -48 VDC for ports that are set up as direct inward dialing (DID) 

Companding 

MM714 allows for A- or Mu-law selection at installation. This is a software-selectable capability 

that applies to all ports on the MM714. 



The MM716 provides 24 analog ports supporting telephones, modem, and fax. These ports can 

also be configured as DID trunks with either wink-start or immediate-start. The 24 ports are 

provided via a 25 pair RJ21X amphenol connector, which can be connected by an amphenol 

cable to a breakout box or punch down block. 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

The MM716 provides you with the capability to configure any of the 24 ports as: 


waiting indication 

● A wink-start or an immediate-start DID trunk 


● Three ringer loads, which is the ringer equivalency number, for all ports, for the following 

loop lengths: 






● Up to 24 simultaneously-ringing ports 

● Type 1 caller ID 


The MM716 is compatible with Avaya Communication Manager release 3.1 and higher, and 

branch gateway firmware version 25.0.0 and higher. 


MM716 

ANALOG 

VH0



The Avaya MM717 Media Module provides 24 Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) ports 

connected through an RJ21X Amphenol connector. The MM717 supports simultaneous 

operation of all 24 ports. Each port can be connected to a 2-wire DCP telephone.The MM717 

does not support 4-wire DCP telephones. 

Figure 68: Avaya MM717 DCP Media Module 

Note: 

Note: The MM717 is supported in both the G700 and G350 Media Gateways. 

Signal timing specifications for the MM717 support TDM Bus Timing in receive and transmit 

modes. The G700 and G350 Media Gateways supply only +5 VDC and –48 VDC to the MM717 

Media Module. 

Loop range secondary protection is provided on the MM717. The MM717 is also self-protecting 

from an over current condition on a tip and ring interface. The MM717 supports a loop length as 

follows: 




The MM717 Media Module is connected to the wall field or breakout box with a B25A 

unshielded 25-pair cable. 

CAUTION: The 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

mmdc717 LAO 102505 

! CAUTION: 





MM720 BRI Media Module 

The MM720 BRI Media Module contains eight ports that can be administered either as BRI 

trunk connections or BRI endpoint (telephone and data module) connections. 

Note: 

Note: The MM720 BRI Media Module cannot be administered to support both BRI 

trunks and BRI endpoints at the same time. Also, the MM720 BRI Media Module 

does not support combining both B-channels together to form a 128-kbps 

channel. Finally, if the MM720 BRI Media Module is administered to support BRI 

endpoints, it cannot be used as a clock synchronization source. 

For BRI trunking, the MM720 BRI Media Module supports up to eight BRI interfaces, or up to 16 

trunk ports, to the central office at the ISDN S/T reference point. 

For BRI endpoints, each of the 8 ports on the MM720 BRI Media Module can support one 

integrated voice/data endpoint or up to 2 BRI stations and/or data modules. Supported 

endpoints must conform to AT&T BRI, World Class BRI, or National ISDN NI1/NI2 BRI 

standards. The MM720 BRI Media Module provides -40 volt phantom power to the BRI 

endpoints. 

Information is communicated in two ways: 

● Over two 64-kbps channels, called B1 and B2, that can be circuit-switched simultaneously 

● Over a 16-kbps channel, called the D-channel, that is used for signaling 

The circuit-switched connections have an A- or Mu-law option for voice operation. The circuitswitched 

connections operate as 64-kbps clear channels when in the data mode. 

Note: The 

Note: 

MM720 is supported in both the G350 and the G700 Media Gateways. 




The Avaya MM722 Media Module provides two 4-wire S/T ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) 

2B+D access ports with RJ-45 jacks. Each port interfaces to the central office at the ISDN T 

reference point. Information is communicated in the same manner as for the MM720. 

The MM722 is supported in both the G700 and G350 Media Gateways. 


MM340 E1/T1 data WAN Media Module 

The Avaya MM340 Media Module provides one WAN access port for the connection of an E1 or 

T1 data WAN. The MM340 may be deployed as an interface to an IP-routed private enterprise 

network or as an interface to an Internet service provider. 

Note: The 

Note: 



MM342 USP data WAN Media Module 

MM342 USP data WAN Media Module 

The Avaya MM342 Media Module provides one USP WAN access port. The MM342 may be 

deployed as an interface to an IP-routed private enterprise network or as an interface to an 

Internet service provider. The MM342 supports the following WAN protocols: 

● EIA530 

● V.35/ RS449 

● X.21 

For these connections, one of the following cables is necessary: 

Note: The 

● Avaya Serial Cable DTE V.35 (USP to V.35) 

● Avaya Serial Cable DTE X.21 (USP to X.21) 

Note: 



MM760 VoIP Media Module 

The MM760 VoIP Media Module is a clone of the motherboard VoIP engine. The MM760 

provides an additional 64 VoIP channels with G.711 compression. 

Note: The 

Note: 


Figure 69: Avaya MM760 VoIP Media Module 


The capacity of the MM760 is 64 G.711 TDM/IP simultaneous calls, or 32 compression codec, 

G.729 or G.723, TDM/IP simultaneous calls. These call types can be mixed on the same 

resource. In other words, the simultaneous call capacity of the resource is 64 G.711 Equivalent 

Calls. 

Note: Some 

Note: 

customers might want an essentially nonblocking system. You must add 

an additional MM760 Media Module if the customer uses more than two MM710 

Media Modules in a single chassis. The additional MM760 provides an additional 

64 channels. 

Ethernet interface 

ALM 

TST 

ACT 

The MM760 must have its own Ethernet address. The MM760 requires a 10/100 Base T 

Ethernet interface to support H.323 endpoints for DEFINITY IP trunks and stations from another 



mmdc760 KLC 022702

Voice compression 

MM760 VoIP Media Module 

The MM760 has resources for compression and decompression of voice for G.711 (A- and 

Mu-law), G.729 and 729B, and G.723 (5.3K and 6.3K). 

The VoIP engine supports the following functionality: 

● RTP and RTCP interfaces 

● Dynamic jitter buffers 

● DTMF detection 

● Hybrid echo cancellation 


● Comfort noise generation 

● Packet loss concealment 

● STRP media encryption 

The MM760 also supports the following types of transmissions: 

Note: The 


Note: The 

● Fax, Teletypewriter device (TTY), and modem calls over a corporate IP intranet using 


● Fax and TTY calls using proprietary relay mode 

Note: 

path between endpoints for fax transmissions must use Avaya 




● 64kbps clear channel transport in support of BRI Secure Phone and data appliances 

● T.38 Fax over the Internet (including endpoints connected to non-Avaya systems) 

● Modem tones over a corporate IP intranet 

Note: 

path between endpoints for modem tone transmissions must use Avaya 


See Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager, 555-233-504, 

for more information. 




TIM514 analog media module 

The IG550 supports the TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module, TIM510 E1/T1 Telephony 

Interface Module, and the TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module. 

TIM514 analog media module 

The TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module provides four analog telephone ports and four 

analog trunk ports. 

Note: The 

Note: 

four analog trunk ports, ports 5 through 8, cannot be used for analog DID 

trunks. Instead, the four analog line ports, ports 1 through 4, must be used. 

Figure 70: The TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 

ALM 

ACT 

TIM514 

Analog 

Configuring TIM514 ports 

The TIM514 provides you with the capability to configure any of the four trunk ports as: 

● A loop start or a ground start central office trunk with a loop current of 18 to 120 mA 

● A two-wire analog Outgoing CAMA E911 trunk, for connectivity to the PSTN. MF signaling 

is supported for CAMA ports. 

Configuring TIM514 line ports 

1 2 Line 3 4 

The TIM514 provides you with the capability to configure any of the four line ports as: 

● A wink start or an immediate start DID trunk 

5 6 Line 7 8 

h3macrd2 LAO 080206 


waiting indication 



TIM514 also supports 

● Three ringer loads, which is the ringer equivalency number for up to 2,000 feet (610 

meters) for all eight ports 

● Up to four simultaneously-ringing ports 



TIM510 E1/T1 Telephony Interface Module 

The TIM510 T1/E1 Telephony Interface Module terminates a T1 or E1 trunk. The TIM510 has a 

built-in Channel Service Unit (CSU) so an external CSU is not necessary. The CSU is only used 

for the T1 circuit. 

The TIM510 features: 

● DS1 level support for a variety of E1 and T1 trunk types 

● Trunk signaling to support US and International CO or tie trunks 

● Echo cancellation in either direction 

Figure 71: The TIM510 Telephony Interface Module 

ALM 

ACT 

TIM510 

E1/T1 

TST 

SIG 



h3macrd3 LAO 080206

TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module 

TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module 

The TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module provides four ports with RJ-45 jacks that can be 

administered as BRI trunk connections. 

The TIM521 supports up to four BRI interfaces to the central office at the ISDN T reference 

point. Information is communicated over each port in two ways: 

● Over two 64-kbps channels, called B1 and B2, that can be circuit-switched simultaneously 

● Over a 16-kbps channel, called the D-channel, that is used for signaling. The TIM521 

occupies one time slot for D-channel use, regardless of whether one, two, three, or four D 

channels are in use. 

The circuit-switched connections have an A- or Mu-law option for voice operation. The 

circuit-switched connections operate as 64-kbps clear channels when in the data mode. 

Each port interfaces to the central office at the ISDN T reference point. 

Figure 72: The TIM521 Telephony Interface Module 

Note: The 

ALM 

ACT 

TIM521 

BRI 

h3macrd4 LAO 080206 

Note: 

TIM521 module does not support BRI stations or combining both B channels 

together to form a 128-kbps channel. 

Juniper Physical Interface Modules for serial and WAN connectivity 

1 

For details about the optional Juniper Physical Interface Modules, see J4350 and J6350 

Services Router Getting Started Guide, Release 8.2. 

2 

3 

4 




Telephones and speakerphones 

Avaya IP Softphones 

Avaya IP Softphone 

Avaya IP Softphone is a collection of computer telephony integration (CTI) applications. IP 

Softphone allows you to control telephone calls, both incoming and outgoing, directly from your 

personal computer (PC). From the IP Softphone window, you can: 

● Make calls 

● Answer calls 

● View the calling/called party information for each call (commonly known as caller ID), if 

available 

● Take notes during calls 

● Place calls on hold 

● Hang up calls 

● Transfer calls 

● Set up and manage conference calls 

● Program speed dial buttons 

● Invoke Communication Manager feature buttons 

● Send and receive messages by the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) 

● Use clipboard dialing 

● Rename features on an IP telephone or features downloaded from the switch 

● Use SIP-based URI dialing 

● Define and use screen pops associated with various call events 

● Maintain and use a contact directory and LDAP client directory 

● Use another TAPI application to control calls from your PC 

● Use an H.323 PC audio application such as Microsoft NetMeeting 3.0x to hear and speak 

to the other party on a call 

● G.711, G.729a, G.723.1a audio voice codecs 

● Secure IP Softphone calls with a variety of VPN solutions, including Avaya VPNremote 

client software and Avaya SG200/203/208 security gateways 



● Advance Encryption Standard (AES) encryption of digits 

● Use iClarity IP Audio for endpoint registration and audio paths 

● Share call control with the 4601, 4602, 4606, 4602SW, 4610SW, 4612, 4620, 4620SW, 

4624, and 4630 IP telephones 

● Share call control with the 6402, 6402D, 6408D, 6416D, 6424D, and 2420 DCP 

telephones 

● Use languages that require multibyte fonts such as Simplified Chinese, Japanese, and 

Korean 

You can run IP Softphone with the following systems: 

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional or Server for Intel x86 with Service Pack 3 or later 

● Microsoft Windows XP Home or Professional for Intel x86 with Service Pack 1 or later 

Avaya IP Softphone for Pocket PC 

The Avaya IP Softphone for Pocket PC brings full-featured enterprise-grade telephony to 

hand-held computers. These computers must run the Microsoft Pocket PC 2002 and Pocket PC 

2003 operating systems. The IP Softphone for Pocket PC allows mobile workers to access 

enterprise telephony functions from a meeting room down the hall or from any location around 

the world. Users can access the IP Softphone the same way and with the same full feature 

functionality as if users were at their office desks. Avaya IP Softphone for Pocket PC provides 

this capability by standard, off the shelf Pocket PC devices and standard 802.11 wireless 

interfaces. No specialized hardware is required. 

IP Softphone for Pocket PC has the following characteristics: 

● Can share call control with the 4601, 4610SW, 4620SW, and 4630 IP telephones 

● Can share call control with the 6402D, 6408D, 6416D, 6424D, and 2420 DCP telephones 

● Internationalization - Can support multiple languages through the installation of language 

packs, including multibyte fonts 

● Emergency Call Handling 911 feature 

● Swap Skins Tool 

● Call Log History 

● Voice over IP configuration (road warrior) 

● Dual connection (telecommuter) for toll quality audio 

● Easy-to-use graphical user interface 

● Access to Communication Manager station features and buttons programmed on the 

user’s telephone extension 

● Multiple call appearances and line status indicators 


● Conference, Transfer, Hold, Mute, Drop buttons 

● Message indicator 

● Email integration button 

● Network diagnostic tools 

● Dial from Microsoft Outlook Contact List 

● G.711 Mu-Law and A-law 

IP Softphone for Pocket PC requires the following software and hardware: 

● Avaya Communication Manager software 

● Avaya media server 

● Avaya IP Softphone license 

● Microsoft Pocket PC 2000 with the H3600 Series Pocket PC ROM Update, or Microsoft 

Pocket PC 2002 

● Compaq iPAQ or Hewlett Packard Jornada with minimum of 206 MHz Strong Arm 

processor 

● 802.11 Wireless LAN connectivity 

● For telecommuter mode - CDPD service and second telephone line 

● PDA headphones 

Audio quality varies from toll quality to less than cell phone quality depending on: 

● Pocket PC processor performs simultaneous tasks of other applications during the call 

● Bandwidth of the wireless connectivity 

● Ambient noise because current supported PDAs have external microphones 

● Network performance and quality of service 

Avaya one-X Deskphone family of IP telephones 

9610 IP telephone 

The Avaya 9610 IP telephone is specifically designed for use in common areas such as building 

lobbies or hallways. In most instances, the 9610 telephone will not belong to a single user, but 

rather will be shared by visitors or building employees. Through its integrated web browser and 

backlit display, the 9610 supports productivity-enhancing phone applications such as access to 

building directories, visitor information, news, and events. 

The Avaya 9610 IP telephone has the following characteristics: 



Hardware 

● Backlit display —- 3.33" diagonal 1/4 VGA quality gray-scale pixel based with adjustable 

display angle 

● Ergonomic wideband hearing-aid compatible handset supporting TTD acoustic coupler 

● Message waiting indicator 

● Flip-stand/dual position 

● Wall mountable 

● Four way navigation cluster button 

● Two contextual softkey buttons 

● Volume button (separate volume levels in the handset and ringer) 

● Telephony application (hard button) 

● Directory/contacts button 

● Single Ethernet (10/100) line interface 

● POE 802.3af compliant class 1 device (auxiliary power available) 

Software 

● Supports a single call appearance 

● Contacts application (250 entry) with hard button 

● Call log (100 entry) with hard button/LED for missed call indication 

● H.323 protocol with future support for SIP 

● Standards-based wideband codec G.722 and the following narrow band codecs: G.711, 

G.726, G.729A/B 

● Support for the Avaya Push API application interface for third party telephone applications 

● Support for the following languages: English, Canadian French, Parisian French, Latin 

American Spanish, Castilian Spanish, German, Italian, Dutch, Brazilian Portuguese, 

Japanese (Kanji, Hiragana, Katakana), Simplified Chinese, Korean, Russian Cyrillic, and 

Hebrew 


The Avaya 9620 IP telephone is specifically designed for the everyday telephone user — those 

who rely on multiple communications tools such as email and instant messaging, yet still require 

a high-quality and intuitive telephone for voice communications. The high fidelity audio of the 

9620 IP telephone provides crystal clear sound, eliminating background noise. The backlit 

display and intuitive interface simplifies access to critical telephone features, such as one-touch 

dialing from the contact list and accessing recent call information from call logs. 


Through its integrated web browser and application interface, the 9620 supports 

productivity-enhancing phone applications such as corporate LDAP directories and the receipt 

of broadcast reminders and alerts. 




display angle 

● Full duplex speaker phone 


● Two message waiting indicators 

● Flip-stand/dual position 


● Four-way navigation cluster button 

● Four contextual softkey buttons 

● Volume button (separate volume levels in the handset, speaker, and ringer) 

● Avaya menu button (browser, options and settings access) 

● Message button (LED) 


● Mute button (LED) 

● Speaker button (LED) 

● Headset button (LED) 

● Contacts button 

● Call log button (LED) 

● Three line appearance LEDs 

● Ethernet (10/100) line interface with secondary Ethernet interface 

● Module interface (for future modules such as speakerphone module) 


● Adapter interface 

● USB interface 

● Wideband headset interface 



Software 

● Supports 12 call appearances or administrable feature keys 

● Contacts application (250 entry) with hard button 




G.726, G.729A/B 





Hebrew 


The Avaya 9630 IP telephone delivers advanced communications capabilities in a solution 

designed for those who are absolutely dependent on voice communications for their business 

operations. 

The 9630 IP telephone supports higher quality wideband audio in both the handset and 

speakerphone, which provides crystal clear audio with the elimination of background noise. The 

backlit display and intuitive interface simplifies access to Avaya Communication features, such 

as simultaneously managing multiple calls and selectively muting and dropping conference call 

participants. 

Through its integrated web browser and application interface, the 9630 supports productivity 

enhancing phone applications such as LDAP corporate directories and integration with 

Microsoft Outlook calendars. 




display angle 

● Six line appearance buttons with LEDs 

● Full-duplex wideband speaker phone 



● Innovative dual position flip-stand 





● Forward/mobility button (LED) 











● Module interface to support add-ons 

● Supports one 24-button expansion module (up to three with Avaya Communication 

Manager 4.0, when available) 


● Two adapter interfaces 



Software 


● 250-entry contacts application (hard button) 




G.726, G.729A/B 





Hebrew 





designed for those who are absolutely dependent on voice communications for their business 

operations. 

The 9640 IP telephone supports a high-resolution color display with integrated web browser and 

application interface. It is the ideal telephone to support productivity enhancing phone 

applications such as LDAP corporate directories, integration with Microsoft Outlook calendars, 

and surveillance cameras/web cams (refreshed still images). 



color display and intuitive interface simplifies access to Avaya Communication features, such as 

simultaneously managing multiple calls and selectively muting and dropping conference call 

participants. 



● Color display —- 3.8" diagonal 1/4 VGA quality gray-scale pixel based with adjustable 

display angle 

● Six line appearance buttons with LEDs 



























Software 






G.726, G.729A/B 





Hebrew 



designed specifically for those who are employed to speak on the telephone for the majority of 

the day — positions such as building receptionists and executive administrative assistants. 



backlit display and intuitive interface simplifies access to Avaya Communication features, such 

as simultaneously managing multiple calls and selectively muting and dropping conference call 

participants. The 9650 supports built-in button module functionality (16 buttons) with the user 

interface enhanced to provide simple one-touch access to bridged appearances, speed dials 

and feature keys. 

Through its integrated web browser and application interface, the 9650 supports productivity 

enhancing phone applications such as LDAP corporate directories and integration with 

Microsoft Outlook calendars. 





● Color display —- 3.8" diagonal 1/4 VGA quality gray-scale pixel based with adjustable 

display angle 

● Three line appearance buttons with LEDs 

● Eight additional "auxiliary" buttons used as line appearances or feature keys 

● One aux shift button 



























Software 






G.726, G.729A/B 





Hebrew 

Avaya IP telephones 

Avaya 4601 IP telephone 

The Avaya 4601 is an entry-level IP telephone with 2 call appearances. 

The following characteristics are included in an Avaya 4601 IP telephone: 

● 2 call appearances with LEDs 

● Fixed button with LED for voice mail retrieval 

● Five fixed feature buttons that include the following features: 

- Hold 

- Transfer 

- Conference 

- Drop 

- Redial 

● Supports power over Ethernet 

● Supports Quality-of-Service features including RTCP and RSVP 

● Wall or desk mount 

● 10/100Base-T Ethernet network connection with RJ-45 interface 

● Supports G.711, G.729A, and G.729B audio voice codecs 

● Supports H.323 V2, except for automatic unnamed registration 



● IP address assignment using DHCP 

● Downloadable firmware for future upgrades 

● Native support that provides the user with the capability to administer and maintain the 

4601 IP telephone without using an alias 

● 12-button touch-tone dial pad with raised bar on the button labeled five for the visually 

impaired 

● Message waiting light (LED) 

● Hearing aid compatible 

● Adjustable volume control 

● Available in dark gray 

Avaya 4602 IP telephone 

The Avaya 4602 is an entry-level IP telephone with 2 call appearances. 


● 2-line × 24-character display 

● Two call appearances 

● One fixed button for voice mail retrieval 

● 1-way speaker 

● Seven fixed feature buttons: 

- Speaker 

- Mute 

- Hold 

- Transfer 

- Conference 

- Drop 

- Redial 

● Supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) 

● Supports Quality-of-Service (QOS) features, including RTCP and RSVP 

● Wall or desktop mountable 

● 10/100Base-T Ethernet network connection with an RJ-45 interface 

● Supports G.711, G.729A, and G.729B audio voice codecs 

● Supports H.323 V2 

● Send and receive messages using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) 


Note: SIP 

Note: 

support requires SIP firmware to be installed. The 4602 IP telephone cannot 

be administered for SIP and H.323 at the same time. 

● Supports Web interface for phone settings (SIP-enabled only) 

● IP address assignment using DHCP or statically configured 

● Integrated Ethernet repeater hub for optional PC connection 


● Native support that provides the user with the capability to administer and maintain the 

4602 IP telephone without using an alias 

● 12-button touchtone dial pad with raised bar on button labeled five for the visually impaired 




● Available in dark gray 

Avaya 4602SW IP telephone 

The 4602SW IP telephone has the same feature set as the 4602 with the addition of a built-in 

Ethernet switch instead of the hub. 


The Avaya 4610SW IP telephone provides advanced feature functionality with an intuitive and 

innovative user interface. The Avaya 4610SW provides telephony, speed dial, call log, and Web 

browsing functionality. 

The Avaya 4610SW IP telephone has the following characteristics: 

● High-end feature set 

● Medium screen graphic display (168 x 80 pixel, 4 grayscale) 

● Advanced user interface that supports 48 speed dialing buttons, 45 call log entries, and up 

to three redial buttons on display 

● Avaya Call Processing label editing 

● Speed Dial entry editing 

● User screen options 

● Call log 

● WML browser capability 

● Full duplex speakerphone with echo cancellation 




● Integrated Ethernet switch for an optional PC connection 

● Supports G.711, G.729A, and G.729B audio voice coders 


● Can receive and display extensible markup language (XML) page content that is pushed 

from an application server 

● Can receive and play streaming audio that is pushed from an application server 



● 12 call appearance or feature buttons with downloadable labels 

● Adjustable desk stand 

● Global icons 


● 12-button touchtone dial pad with raised bar on the 5 key for the visually impaired 



● Supports CTI applications from the Avaya Softphone and is CTI-ready for other 

applications 



● Can display network audio quality information during calls 

● Supports multibyte fonts 

● Native support that gives the customer the ability to administer and maintain the telephone 

without using an alias 

● Four softkeys, located under the display, that enhance the user interface 

● Available in dark gray. 


Avaya 4620SW IP telephone provides advanced feature functionality with an intuitive and 

innovative user interface. The Avaya 4620 telephone provides telephony, speed dial, call log, 

and Web browsing functionality. 

The Avaya 4620SW IP telephone has the following characteristics: 

● Large screen graphic display (168-pixel by 132-pixel 4-grayscale) 

● Support of multi-byte fonts 


● Advanced user interface that supports 108 speed dialing buttons, 90 call log entries, and 

up to 6 redial buttons on the display 

● Avaya Call Processing label editing 

● Speed Dial entry editing 

● EU24 label-button editing 

● User screen options 

● Wireless Markup Language (WML) browser capability 



● Supports G.711, G.729A, and G.729B audio voice coders 



● Can receive and display extensible markup language (XML) page content that is pushed 

from an application server 

● Can receive and play streaming audio that is pushed from an application server 

● Infrared (IR) port to support IR dialing and other applications 


● 24 call appearance or feature buttons with downloadable labels 

● Adjustable desk stand 

● Function key expansion unit jack to support an optional 24-button feature expansion unit 

(EU24) 

● Global icons 


● A 12-button touch-tone dial pad with raised bar on the 5 key for the visually impaired. 

● A message waiting light (LED) 


● Supports CTI applications from the Avaya Softphone and is CTI ready for other 

applications 






● Four softkeys, located under the display, that enhance the user interface 

● Available in dark gray. 




Avaya 4621SW IP telephone is based on the 4620SW IP telephone hardware. The two phones 

have 99% of the same user interface. The 4621SW telephone provides advanced feature 

functionality with an intuitive and innovative user interface. The Avaya 4621SW telephone 

provides telephony, speed dial, call log, and Web browsing functionality. 

The changes in the 4621SW are as follows: 

● Large screen with backlit graphic display. 

● Backlight can be adjusted by the user. 

● Backlight can be administered to turn off during idle or it may stay lit continuously. 

● Does not support IR interface. 

● Stand with one extra height setting. This setting is the same as the highest setting for the 

4610SW telephone. 



● Supports the EU24BL adjunct. The EU24BL is the same as the EU24 except the former 

has a backlit display. 


Avaya 4622SW IP telephone is based on the 4620SW IP telephone hardware. The 4622SW 

telephone provides the same advanced feature functionality with an intuitive and innovative 

user interface as the 4620SW IP telephone. The 4622SW telephone is designed for the call 

center environment. 

The changes in the 4622SW are as follows: 

● Does not have a handset or speakerphone microphone. 

● Has two headset jacks. 

● Has a large screen backlit graphic display. 

● Backlight can be adjusted by the user. 

● Backlight can be administered to turn off during idle or it may stay lit continuously. 

● Does not support IR interface. 

● Stand has one extra height setting. This setting is the same as the highest setting for the 

4610SW telephone. 



● Supports the EU24BL adjunct. The EU24BL is the same as EU24 except has a backlit 

display. 



Avaya 4625SW IP telephone is similar to the Avaya 4620SW IP telephone. The Avaya 4625SW 

provides advanced feature functionality with an intuitive and innovative user interface. The 

Avaya 4625SW telephone provides telephony, speed dial, call log, and Web browsing 

functionality. 

The Avaya 4625SW IP telephone has all of the applications and options of the 4620SW IP 

telephone. The changes in the 4625SW are as follows: 

● Color 1/4-VGA backlit display 



● Does not support multibyte characters or multi-byte User Interface languages 

● Does not support an IR interface 

Avaya 4630 IP Screenphone 

The Avaya 4630 Screenphone is a fully Internet-capable IP appliance that supports IP 

standards. The Avaya 4630 IP Screenphone provides a user-friendly window into IP enabled 

applications, a full suite of Communication Manager features, Lightweight Directory Access 

Protocol (LDAP) directory, and voice mail features of INTUITY AUDIX. Up to six telephony 

related applications are provided through a unique user interface that was developed for ease 

of use and minimal touch access. 

The Avaya 4630 Screenphone has the following characteristics: 

● 1/4 VGA color touch-screen display with user screen options 

● Five fixed feature buttons: 

- Speaker 

- Mute 

- Hold 

- Headset 

- Volume control 


● 120 speed dial buttons that are organized into groups for easier access 

● 100 total entries in the call log of incoming and outgoing calls 

● Up to eight redial buttons can be presented on the display 

● 10/100 Base-T Ethernet network connection with RJ-45 interface 

● Directory access to corporate telephone directory information on an LDAP server 



● Voice mail access to Web-based voice mail messaging capabilities of Avaya Web 

Messaging 

● User-customizable stock ticker 

● Access to Web-based information, including support for downloading Java applets 

● G.711, G.729A, and G.729B audio voice coders 

● H.323 V2 


● Infrared (IR) port to support IR dialing and other applications 

● Supports CTI applications from the Avaya Softphone and is CTI ready for other 

applications 





● A built-in Ethernet switch 


● 12-button touch-tone dial pad with raised bar on the 5 key for the visually impaired 


● Integrated modular headset jack for direct connection of headset 

● Adjustable volume control for the handset, the speaker, and the ringer 

● K-style handset with 9-foot modular cord 

● 14-foot (4.27-meter) modular line cord 

● Available in black or white 

Optional available components: 

● 12-foot (3.66 meter) modular handset cord 


● Base stand 

● Avaya headsets 

● Amplifier handset 

● Noisy environment handset 

● Push-to-talk handset 


Avaya 4690 IP conference telephone 

The Avaya 4690 IP Speakerphone provides the convenience and productivity benefits inherent 

in a purpose-built hands-free conference phone. It also delivers the extensive set of Avaya 

Communication Manager features directly to the conference room. It offers many of the same 

features as other Avaya Speakerphones such as 360-degree coverage, two optional extended 

microphones for expanded coverage, and full-duplex operation. But this speakerphone has 

additional capabilities. These capabilities include downloadable software upgrades and 

simplified wiring to IP network by ethernet LAN connectivity. 

The Avaya 4690 IP Speakerphone has the following characteristics: 

● 3 soft keys to give access to common telephony features, automatically labeled from the 

system 

● 5 fixed feature and navigation keys: On/Off Hook, Redial, Mute and Volume Up & Down 

● 5 menu and navigation keys 

● 12 key telephone keypad 

● Graphical display (248 x 68 pixels) 

● Full duplex Ethernet connectivity with auto-negotiation, 802.3 flow control, VLAN support 

● G.711, G.729A voice codecs 

● QoS Options of Diffserv and 802.1p/q 

● Support for Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 2 

● DHCP client and statically (manual) configurable IP Addressing 

● AC powered with power brick (provided) 

● Downloadable software for future upgrade capability 

● Icon button labeling with English printing on the housing 

● 5 personalized ring patterns 

● Must be administered as a 4620 IP telephone 

Avaya digital telephones 

Avaya 2402 digital telephone 

The Avaya 2402 is a low-cost, low function, 2-wire digital telephone. The 2402 can be aliased 

as a 6402 telephone. 

The Avaya 2402 telephone has the following characteristics: 

● 2 line × 24 character LCD 

● 2 call appearance buttons 



● Handset and 12-button dialpad 


● Display of downloaded extension number 

● Highly visible message waiting indicator 

● Message button for expedited access to voice mail 

● Buttons for conference, transfer, drop, hold, and redial 

● Built-in one-way speaker with group listen operation 

● Speaker, feature, and mute buttons, each with LED indicators 

● Feature button allows access, by way of the dial pad, to 12 Communication Manager 

features that do not require indicators 


● Electronically stored part ID and serial number for use with Automatic Customer 

Telephone Rearrangement 

● 9-foot phone cord and 14-foot (4.27-meter) gray, modular line cord 

● Stand included 

● Native support gives the customer the ability to administer and maintain the telephone 



The Avaya 2410 is a 2-wire digital telephone. The display of the Avaya 2410 consists of a 

monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) which is 29 characters wide by 5 lines tall. A 5-column 

by 8-row matrix of dots defines the character display. This matrix supports 5- × 7-dot European 

or Katakana characters. 


● 5-line × 29 character LCD 

● Handset and 12-button dialpad 

● Adjustable viewing angle 


● Six general purpose buttons to access up to 12 system call appearance or features 


● Downloaded call appearance or feature button labels 

● Four local softkey feature buttons 

● Exit, previous, and next buttons for display navigation 





● Headset jack that is separate from the handset jack 

● Built-in speakerphone with group listen operation 

● Speaker, headset, mute buttons, each with LED indicators 

● Volume up or volume down buttons for: 

- handset, 

- headset, 

- speakerphone, and 

- ringer 

● 48 Entry Call Log (total incoming answered, incoming unanswered, and outgoing calls) 

● Automatic Gain Control on all audio interfaces 



● Native support that will give the customer the ability to administer and maintain the 

telephone without using an alias 


The Avaya 2420 is a 2-wire digital telephone. The display of the Avaya 2420 consists of a 

monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) which is 29 characters wide by 7 lines tall. A 5-column 

by 8-row matrix of dots defines the character display. This matrix supports 5- × 7-dot European 

or Katakana characters. 


● Monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) (7-line × 29 character) 

● Handset and 12-button dial pad 

● Adjustable viewing angle 


● Eight general purpose buttons to access up to 24 system call appearances or features 

● Downloaded call appearance or feature button labels 

● Four local softkey feature buttons 

● Exit, previous, and next buttons to navigate the display 






● Headset jack that is separate from the handset jack 


● Speaker, headset, mute buttons, each with LED indicators 

● Volume up or volume down buttons for: 

- handset, 

- headset, 

- speakerphone, and 

- ringer 

● 100-entry call log that records the total incoming answered, incoming unanswered, and 

outgoing calls 


● Automatic gain control on all audio interfaces 



● Optional 24 button feature key expansion unit 

● Optional analog interface application module 

● Native support allows users to administer and maintain the 2420 using the associated 

Feature Expansion Module 

Avaya 6402 and 6402D digital telephones 

The Avaya 6402 and 6402D are single-line digital telephones. The difference between the 

Avaya 6402 and the 6402D is the Avaya 6402D is equipped with a 2-line by 24-character 

display. 



● Six fixed buttons: 

- Speaker 

- Feature 

- Hold 

- Redial 

- Transfer 

- Conference 

● The feature button allows access by way of the dial pad, to 12 Communication Manager 

features that do not require indicators or display messages. 



● 2-wire connectivity through 2-wire digital line circuit packs. 

● Internal self test for the LEDs. 

● Option of eight ringing patterns. 

● Usable with or without the stand. 

● Desktop or wall mountable. 

● Matching 9-foot (2.7-meter) handset cord and a 7-foot (2.1-meter) modular line cord. 

● No Adjunct jack interface for external speakerphones or headset modules. 

● Headsets must be connected through the handset. 

● Available in dark gray and white. 

Avaya 6408D+ digital telephone 

The 6408D+ is a digital telephone with eight buttons. 

The Avaya 6408D+ telephone has the following characteristics: 

Note: Drop 

● 2-line by 24-character LCD display shows the time and the date when the telephone is in 

idle status. 

● Tiltable display with three viewing angles. 

● Eight call appearance and colored feature buttons with dual LEDs. 

● Built-in 2-way speakerphone with 1-way group listen operation. 

● Six fixed buttons: 

- Speaker 

- Mute 

- Hold 

- Redial 

- Transfer 

- Conference 

Note: 

must be administered on a softkey. 

● Twelve system features can be administered on softkeys. The softkeys are associated 

with the display. 

● Four buttons to access softkey features such as: 

- the menu button, 

- the exit button, 



- the previous button, and 

- the next button. 

● Can answer a call with the handset onhook when the headset feature is administered. 

● Adjustable volume control for the handset, the speaker, and the ringer. 

● Message Waiting Light (LED). 

● 2-wire connectivity through 2-wire digital line circuit packs. 

● Accepts download from Communication Manager of country-specific voice and touchtone 

transmission parameters. 

● Internal self-test to determine if LEDs light. 

● Option of eight ringing patterns. 

● Line powered. 

● Can be used with or without a stand. 

● Desk or wall mountable. 

● Matching 9-foot (2.7-meter) handset cord and a 7-foot (2.1-meter) modular line cord. 


Avaya 6416D+M digital telephone 

The Avaya 6416D+M telephone is a multiappearance digital telephone with 16 call 

appearances or feature buttons. 

The Avaya 6416D+M has a modular plug. This plug allows you to install a 100-A tip/ring module 

to the desktop stand on the telephone for increased set functionality. The tip/ring module 

provides a connection to adjuncts such as answering machines, fax machines, modems, analog 

speakerphones, and Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TDD) machines. 

A XM24 expansion module can be connected to any Avaya 6416D+M telephone to expand the 

number of buttons that you can use. However, when the expansion module is connected, you 

must connect an auxiliary power supply to the telephone. Avaya recommends an 1151C1 local 

power supply or an 1151C2 local power supply with battery holdover. 

The Avaya 6416D+M telephone has the following characteristics: 

● 10 fixed features buttons: 

- Speaker 

- Mute 

- Hold 

- Redial 

- Transfer 

- Conference 


- Menu 

- Exit 

- Previous 

- Next 

● 12 assignable soft key features that are associated with the display 


● Headset jack for direct connection of headset 




● Eight personalized ringing options 

● K-style handset with 9-foot (2.7-meter) modular cord 


● Pull-out card tray with feature references 

● Can be wall or desk mounted 

● International portability 

● Downloadable transmission parameters 

● Meets Class B requirements for use in residential locations 

● Available in gray or white 


● 12-foot (3.66-meter) modular handset cord 


● HIC-1 headset interface cord 

● Headset modular base unit M12LUCM 

● Avaya headset 


● Noisy environment handset 

The approximate dimensions of the 6416D+M are: 

● Width, 10.35 inches (26.35 centimeters) 

● Depth (front to back), 8.5 inches (21.59 centimeters) 

● Height (with deskstand and handset in place), 4.75 inches (12.07 centimeters) 



Avaya 6424D+M digital telephone 

The Avaya 6424D+M telephone is a multiappearance digital telephone with 24 call 

appearances and feature buttons. 

The Avaya 6424D+M has a modular plug. This plug allows you to install a 100-A tip/ring module 

to the desktop stand on the telephone for increased set functionality. The tip/ring module 

provides a connection to adjuncts such as answering machines, fax machines, modems, analog 

speakerphones, and Telecommunications Device for the Deaf (TDD) machines. 

A XM24 expansion module can be connected to any Avaya 6424D+M telephone to expand the 

number of buttons that you can use. However, when the expansion module is connected, you 

must connect an auxiliary power supply to the telephone. Avaya recommends an 1151C1 local 

power supply or an 1151C2 local power supply with battery holdover. 

The Avaya 6424D+M telephone has the following characteristics: 

● 2-line × 24-character LCD display showing time and date when the telephone is in an idle 

status. 

● A tiltable display with three viewing angles. 

● Built-in 2-way speakerphone with a 1-way group listen operation 

● Six fixed feature buttons: 

- Speaker 

- Mute 

- Hold 

- Redial 

- Transfer 

- Conference 

● Twelve system features that can be administered on the softkeys associated with the 

display. 

● Four buttons to access softkey features such as menu, exit, previous, and next. 

● A single next button that is used with both the softkeys and the directory function. 

● A ribbon connector under the telephone to connect optional modules that fit into the stand. 

● Headset jack under the telephone, next to the handset jack, for direct connection of a 

headset. 

- Can answer a call with the handset onhook (when the headset feature is administered) 

- Can put handset into listen-only mode for monitoring while headset button turned on 

● No adjunct jack interface for external S201/S203 speakerphone adjuncts or headset 

adjuncts 


● User-customizable call appearance and feature buttons, with system administrator 

permission 


● Message waiting light 

● 2-wire connectivity through 2-wire digital line circuit packs only 

● Internal self test 

● Option of eight ringing patterns 

● Can be used with the stand or without the stand when the 100A Analog Interface module is 

not present 

● Desktop mountable or wall mountable (if the 100A Analog Interface Module is not present) 

● Meets Class B requirements for use in residential location. 



● Supports optional XM24 expansion module that allows for an additional 24 call 

appearance and feature buttons with dual LEDs. 

The Avaya 6424D+M telephone is powered from the system to which the telephone is 

connected. Adjunct station or closet power is necessary only when connecting an XM24 

expansion module or the 100 A Analog Interface Module. If both modules are connected to the 

6424D+M, only one power supply is necessary. The 6424D+M continues to work if the auxiliary 

power is interrupted, but the modules do not work. 

Avaya Callmaster IV (603H) digital telephone 

The Avaya Callmaster IV telephone supports applications that use the Automatic Call 

Distribution (ACD) feature. The ergonomic design of the Avaya Callmaster IV allows agents to 

handle large volumes of calls more quickly and efficiently. VuStats, a display of agent and call 

center statistics on the Avaya Callmaster IV, provides agents with real-time information. 

The Avaya Callmaster IV works in a 2-wire environment. The older Avaya Callmaster IV (603F) 

has a separate jack for the older 4-wire environment, and reduced wiring expenses and 

installation change adjustments. 

The Avaya Callmaster IV includes as standard a built-in Recorder Interface Module (RIM) that 

supports connections to agent recording equipment. 

The Avaya Callmaster IV can be used in home office environments with a DEFINITY ® Extender. 

The Avaya Callmaster IV has the following characteristics: 

● Six rubber-domed administrable call appearance or flexible feature buttons 

● 15 rubber-domed administrable flexible feature buttons 



● Eight fixed feature buttons: 

- Conference 

- Transfer 

- Drop 

- Hold 

- Mute 

- Volume 

- Release 

- Login 

● 80-character alphanumeric LCD display 

● 12-button touchtone dial pad with raised bar on the number five key for the visually 

impaired 


● Recorder interface module 

● Dual headset jacks 

● Eight personalized ringing options 

● Adjustable volume control for the handset and the ringer 

● Stand for desktop use 

● International portability 


Avaya Callmaster V (607A) digital telephone 

The Avaya Callmaster V telephone supports applications that use the Automatic Call 

Distribution (ACD) feature. The ergonomic design of the Avaya Callmaster V allows agents to 

handle large volumes of calls more quickly and efficiently. VuStats, a display of agent and call 

center statistics on the Avaya Callmaster V, provides agents with real-time information. 

The Avaya Callmaster V has the same look and feel of the 6400-series telephones. There are 

two significant additional features that maximize the value of this telephone in a call center 

environment: 

● Two built-in headset jacks 

● A built-in Recorder Interface Module (RIM) with Warning Tone. The RIM supports 

recording of both the agent’s voice and caller’s voice on a voice-activated analog tape 

recorder. A soft beep warning tone is repeated every 13.5 seconds to notify the agent and 

the calling party that the call is being recorded. The user can deactivate the warning tone 

The Avaya Callmaster V can be used in home office environments with a DEFINITY Extender. 


The Avaya Callmaster V has the following characteristics: 

● 16 dual-LED call appearance or feature buttons 

● An adjustable 48-character liquid crystal display (LCD) 

● 10 fixed feature buttons such as: 

- speaker 

- mute 

- conference 

- transfer 

- hold 

- redial 

- menu 

- exit 

- previous 

- next 

● 12 assignable soft key features associated with the display 

● One-way listen-only speaker for group listening, dialing while the handset in place, or 

hands-free listening 


● Works in a 2-wire environment 

Avaya Callmaster VI (606A) digital telephone 

The Callmaster VI telephone is a small digital voice telephone. The Callmaster VI is used with 

the application software that runs on a PC. The Callmaster VI is powered from the PBX and 

connects to the PC by way of a standard EIA or TIA-574 serial port interface. 

The Avaya Callmaster VI has the following characteristics: 

● Two headset input jacks, both of which can be used 

● Optional headset with custom cable 

● Message waiting indicator 

● Five preset buttons: 

● Headset on and off 

● Mute 

● Two call appearances 

● Release 



● Three administrable feature buttons 

● Voice announcement recording feature 

- Up to six announcements that are 9.6 seconds in length 

- Announcements can be played automatically for incoming calls 

Avaya attendant consoles 

Avaya 302D attendant console 

The Avaya 302D attendant console is a 2-wire unit with an optional 26C expansion module. The 

Avaya 302D cannot be used in a 4-wire environment. 

The Avaya 302D attendant console has the following characteristics: 

● Power is required from the desktop or the telephone closet. 

● Desktop mountable only. 

● 1-line × 40-character display that supports Katakana, Roman and Euro font Character set. 

Label languages are Japanese, English, French, Dutch, Spanish Latin America, Italian, 

German, Canadian French, Brazilian Portuguese. Two labels are included with each 302D 

console. 

● Handset and headset connection is a single modular plug on the front. 

● Service observing must be done through the Communication Manager by the Service 

Observing feature. 

● Available in dark gray, black and white. 


● 26C Selector Console: 

- Has 20 Hundreds group buttons and 100 Tens group buttons. Each Hundreds group 

button is assigned the first digit or first two digits of each group of 100 extension (room) 

numbers.The Tens group buttons are automatically assigned a tens and ones digit. The 

buttons can be used for 3- or 4-digit extensions. 

The following example is for dialing 4-digit extensions. If you have rooms numbered from 

7000 to 7099, you can have a Hundreds button labeled "70" and a tens group button 

labeled "01." Press "70", then "01" to dial extension 7001 with only two button presses. 

- Has busy or idle status display for each button. 

● An H1C or M12L for the headset. 

● An optional Training-Y connector. This connector can be used in conjunction with the 

headset connection for desktop listen-only supervisor support. 


Avaya Softconsole 

Avaya Softconsole is a software attendant console solution. Avaya Softconsole is available for 

industry standard IP and Avaya Digital Communications Protocol (DCP). IP connectivity is 

available in both Voice over IP configuration (Road Warrior) and dual connection 

(Telecommuter) for toll-quality audio. 

The Avaya Softconsole has the following characteristics: 

● Busy Lamp Fields (BLF), directory and display windows can all be on the same screen at 

the same time. 

● Flexible screen arrangement for the attendant that is saved from session to session. 

● Application window scales intelligently from a minimum useful size to a full screen. Useful 

information is added to the display as the attendant increases the window size. 

● On-request line status, such as on-hook and off-hook, is displayed for the selected entry in 

the directory window. 

● Queue status display 

● Feature buttons offered as tools in multiple tool bars with pop-up, full word tool tip displays 

for each. 

● 32-bit application 

● Maximum of 100 directories 

● Ability to generate e-mail to users at the click of a tool bar button or a keyboard command 

● Step-by-step wizard for both installation and initial administration, with help and warning 

text presented with each step. 

MasterDirectory Data Manager 

MasterDirectory Data Manager is included as part of Avaya Softconsole. MasterDirectory is a 

database application that is specifically designed for directory data management. With this 

information management tool, users can import and consolidate directory information from 

voice and data systems, and export the information to directory-enabled applications. 

MasterDirectory can import, export, and transfer data through standards-based protocols, 

including the following protocols: 

● Open Data Base Connectivity (ODBC) 

● Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) 

● File Transfer Protocol (FTP) 

● Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) 

● Text delimited files (CSV) 



Using these protocols, MasterDirectory can: 

● Extract data from multiple sources 

● Apply filters and business logic to consolidate data 

● Populate directory services and databases for use by applications 

For example, MasterDirectory can collect information from multiple Avaya media servers, 

consolidate the data with human resource databases, and send the processed data to an LDAP 

directory service. This directory service provides data for telephone attendant applications, 

Internet white pages and yellow pages, and other applications. 

Avaya analog telephones 

Avaya 2500 and 2554 analog telephones 

The Avaya 2500 and the Avaya 2554-series telephones are basically the same, but are 

equipped with small different attributes. These telephone models include: 

● Desk models: 

- 2500 MMGN 

- 2500 YMPG 

● Wall models: 

- 2554 MMGN 

- 2554 YMPG 

All Avaya 2500 and 2554 telephones are single appearance analog telephones with 

conventional touchtone dialing. The 2554 YMGP telephones are equipped with the following 

buttons: 

● flash button 

● message waiting light, 

● redial button 

● hold button 

● mute button. 

Features on all four of these telephones are accessed by the star (*) or the pound (#) key and 

the appropriate feature access codes. 


The Avaya 2500 and Avaya 2554 telephones have the following characteristics: 

● The 2500 MMGN and 2554 MMGN telephones are manufactured without Positive 

Disconnect and without a flash button. The 2500 YMPG and 2554 YMPG have Positive 

Disconnect permanently enabled. When the flash button is pressed, access is provided to 

switch features. When the switchhook is depressed, the call is automatically disconnected, 

and a dial tone is provided for a completely new call. The bottom of older models has a 

Positive Disconnect switch with ON and OFF positions: 

- The ON position hangs up the telephone for approximately 2 seconds, even if the 

switchhook depression is less. This prevents inadvertent switchhook flashes. To start 

switchhook flash in this mode, press the flash button. 

- In the OFF position, the switchhook functions normally. 

● K-type handset 

● All 2500-series telephones are equipped with a 12-button touchtone dial pad. 

● All 2500-series telephones contain two jacks. The handset cord jack is on the left side of 

the telephone. The line cord jack is on the right rear of the set. 

● All 2554-series telephones have one jack and one mounting cord. The handset cord jack is 

on the bottom of the telephone. The line cord is on the rear of the telephone to plug into 

the wall outlet. 

● A coiled 6-foot (1.82-meter) modular handset cord and a 7-foot (2.13-meter) modular line 

cord are supplied with all four of these 2500-series model telephones. A 12-foot 

(3.66-meter) handset cord and 14-foot (4.27-meter) and 25-foot (7.62-meter) line cords 

are available as options. A coiled 6-foot (1.82-meter) modular handset cord and a 

permanently-attached 4-inch (10.2 centimeter) modular mounting cord are supplied with 

2554-series model telephones. A longer 12-foot (3.66 meter) handset cord is available as 

an option. 

● All 2500-series telephones have an electronic tone ringer. There is a three-position ringer 

volume control on the bottom of the 2500 telephone and the side of the 2554 telephone. 

● The 2500 YMPG, telephones can only be mounted on a desktop. They cannot be mounted 

on the wall. The 2554 YMPG telephones are wall-mounted telephones. They cannot be 

mounted on a desktop. 

● All 2500-series telephones are available in black or cream. 

● The tip and ring leads power all Avaya 2500- and 2554-series telephones. The telephones 

do not require any external power supply. 

● All Avaya 2500-series and 2554-series telephones can be used as an emergency station 

during power failure transfer conditions. The 2554 sets can only be used as a power failure 

set in a loop start environment. A 2500 set can be used as a power failure set in either a 

loop start or a ground start environment. Use in a Ground Start environment requires the 

optional Modular Ground Start button. 

● The 2500 and 2554 telephones are FCC registered. 



Avaya 6211 analog telephone 

The Avaya 6211 telephone is a single-line analog telephone. 


● 7-foot modular line cord 



● Flash button 

● Set hold button with an LED indicator 

● Last number redial button 


● Positive disconnect through switchhook 

● Can be mounted on a desktop or wall-mounted 

● RJ-11 data jack 

● FCC approved for emergency power failure transfers 

● Line powered 



● 12-foot (3.66 meter) handset cord 

● 14-foot (4.27-meter) line cord 

● 25-foot (7.62-meter) line cords 



The Avaya 6219 telephone is a single line analog telephone. 


● A 7-foot modular line cord 




● Set hold button with LED Indicator 




● Positive disconnect through switchhook 

● Desk and wall mounting available 

● RJ-11 data jack 

● FCC approval for emergency power failure transfers 

● Line powered 

● Ten memory dialing buttons 

● Personalized ringing 



● 2-foot handset cord 

● 14-foot (4.27 meter) and 25-foot (7.62 meter) modular line cords 



The Avaya 6221 telephone is a single line analog telephone. 


● Handset volume control 

● Ringer volume control 



● Set hold button with LED Indicator 

● Mute button 


● RJ-11 Data jack 


● Ten programmable dialing buttons 

● Personalized ringing 

● Built-in speakerphone, accessed with the SPEAKER button 



AT&T TTY 8840 Analog Telephone 

The TTY 8840 is an analog single line telephone that is specifically designed for the 

communications needs of either the Hearing or Speech Impaired. It can make voice telephone 

calls or TTY calls. Features include: 

● 2-line by 24 character LCD display, 

● Fastdial directory, 

● Handset Volume control, 

● visual Ring Flash, 

● Ringer, 

● Auto Answer, 

● Auto Greeting, 

● Tone or Pulse dialing, and 

● TTY On/Off button to switch between TTY and Tone dialing. 

Can be installed behind a digital phone with a tip/ring module. This telephone also provides 

access to switch features when in the touch-tone mode. Access to switch features is obtained 

by the * or # keys, and the appropriate feature access codes. 

AT&T 958 Analog Telephone Caller ID and Speakerphone 

The 958 Caller ID Telephone is a single-line analog set that is desk/wall convertible and 

requires one tip and ring pair for operation. The 958 telephone features: 

● Caller ID/Call Waiting Capability, 

● 99 Name/ Number Caller ID History, 

● Remove button, 

● Message Waiting/New Call Light, and 

● 3 line by 15 character Display that supports Call display in English/Spanish/French. 

This telephone can be used on Avaya PBXs or Central Office lines. The 958 telephones are 

equipped with: 

● Hands Free Speakerphone, 

● 50 Name/Number Directory, 

● data port, 

● receiver/speaker volume control, 

● Hold buttons, 

● FLASH button, 

● REDIAL button, 


● ringer volume control, 

● power failure operation, 

● memory Loss Protection, and 

● Hearing Aide compatibility. 

This telephone model also provides access to switch features in the touch-tone mode. Access 

is gained through the * or # dial keys and the appropriate feature access codes. 

Avaya EA401 and EA401A Explosive Atmosphere telephones 

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) lists these Explosive Atmosphere telephones for the 

following explosive atmosphere classifications and conditions: 

● Class I explosive gas or vapors, group B, C, and D 

● Class II combustible dusts, group E, F, and G 

! DANGER: 

DANGER: They are not to be installed in locations where acetylene gas may become 

present in the atmosphere. 

The EA401 Explosive Atmosphere telephone provides safe and reliable communication in 

hazardous locations, up to and including Class I Division 1. Only standard wiring and fittings are 

required to connect the telephone to the system. No barrier is necessary. Since the heavy duty 

cast aluminum enclosure is basically soundproof, an external device to signal incoming calls, 

such as the EA20R Explosive Atmosphere Line Powered Telephone Ringer, is required. 

Additionally, the EA10 Explosive Atmosphere handset is required. 

Note: 

Note: The EA401A Explosive Atmosphere telephone is an EA401 telephone that 

comes already assembled with an EA20R ringer and EA10 handset. 

The EA401 Explosive Atmosphere telephone has the following characteristics: 

● A 10-foot (3-meter) handset cord 

● Standard 12-button configuration, with an additional row of buttons for Last Number 

Redial, Link/Flash to access PABX features and Line Release to duplicate hanging up the 

handset 

● No handset volume control, in compliance with the FCC Waiver 

● Designed for wall mounting 

● Cast copper free aluminum with powder coat finish 

● One-inch (2.54 cm) diameter buttons for gloves-on operation 

● Magnetic Reed Hook Switch, with no moving parts, that activates when the handset is 

removed from or placed in the telephone cradle 



● Circuit boards with a UV cured epoxy coating, which provides protection from corrosive 

agents such as H2S, SO2, and NH3, and environments with high humidity 

● A fitting in the bottom of the enclosure for access to the fuse 

● Uses an EA10 handset, which is compatible with inductively coupled hearing-aid devices 

Avaya wireless telephones 

Avaya TransTalk 9040 

The Avaya TransTalk 9040 is a small wireless telephone with a full feature set and an 

alphanumeric display. 

The TransTalk 9040 has the following characteristics: 

● A 1 line × 16 character display shows internal calling party information and the external 

called number. 

- The backlit display includes three rows for line or intercom terminations and one-button 

feature access. 

- Icons such as out-of-range, low battery, and message waiting are visible on the display. 

● Weighs just 8 ounces (226.7 grams) 

● Dimensions are 6 inches (15.2 centimeters) × 2 inches (5.08 centimeters) × 1 inches (2.54 

centimeters) 

● A maximum of 12 virtual button appearances for lines, intercoms, and features. 

● Redial button with fixed redial for busy numbers. 

● User-replaceable antenna. 

● Vibrator alert, for times when a ringing telephone is intrusive. 

● Field registration: If a handset needs to be replaced, the user must return only the 

handset. The corresponding radio module does not have to be returned. When a new 

handset is received, the user or technician registers the handset with the appropriate dual 

radio module (DRM). 


● Headset Option: works with the Supra (over the head) or Radium (over the ear) mobility 

headsets. Can be used with the wireless headset for the MDW 9000 and MDW 9010 with 

an adaptor. 

● Backlit display: for easier use in poorly lit areas such as warehouses and manufacturing 

plants. 


Battery charges have the following characteristics: 

● Batteries charge fully in 1.5 hours. 

● Batteries are discharged and recharged. This process eliminates the memory effect that 

reduces battery life. The spare is automatically reconditioned. The handset battery is 

reconditioned in the cradle if manually selected. 

● Users get 3.5 hours of talk time, and over 22 hours of standby time. 

● Users can continue to screen calls because the upright position keeps the display clearly 

visible. 

● An optional extended-use battery provides up to 8 hours of talk time and 72 hours of 

standby time. 

Avaya 3410 wireless telephone 

The 3410 wireless telephone solution consists of: 

- 3410 handsets, 

- line-powered four-channel wireless base stations, and 

- a Master Control Unit (MCU). 

The 3410 wireless telephone solution requires one DCP port per handset, has up to six line 

appearances and twelve feature buttons, and emulates an 8410D desk telephone. 

Then MCU has two scalable configurations: 

The 3410 wireless telephone solution uses 902-928 MHz spread spectrum frequency hopping 

radio technology. The solution uses a high level of integration with enterprise telephone 

switching to provide an advanced wireless telephone system. 

Avaya 3606 wireless VoIP telephone 

Link 3000 Link 

150 

Wireless phones 3200 64 

Base stations 1000 16 

Simultaneous calls 1600 32 

Coverage (million sq. ft.) 100 1.5 

The 3606 wireless VoIP telephone solution is an IEEE 802.11b standards-based, 2.4 GHz 

wireless LAN telephone system. Using voice over IP (VoIP) technology, the 3606 wireless VoIP 

telephone solution provides high quality mobile voice communications throughout the 

workplace. 



The 3606 telephone has the following characteristics: 

● A 2 × 16 alphanumeric display, plus line and status indicators 

● Weighs just 6.4 ounces (181.4 grams) 

● Dimensions are 6" × 2" × 1" (15 × 5 × 2.5 cm) 

● DHCP or static IP addressing 

● AWTS Open Application Interface (OAI) gateway that enables third-party software 

applications to communicate with the telephone 

● Downloadable upgrade firmware from a TFTP server 

● Text messaging support 

● Hold button 

● A maximum of 6 button appearances that can be used for call appearances and features. 

● Four fixed feature buttons: 

- mute 

- last number dialed 

- transfer 

- conference. 

● Headset Option: works with the Supra (over-the-head) or Radium (over-the-ear) mobility 

headsets. Can be used with the wireless headset for the MDW 9000 and MDW 9010 with 

an adaptor. New 2.5-mm jack makes connecting a headset to the 9040 easier than ever. 

Backlit display: for easier use in poorly lit areas such as warehouses and manufacturing 

plants. 

● Vibrator Alert: for times when a ringing telephone would be intrusive (standard on all 

Pocket Phones). 

The 3606 wireless VoIP telephone solution, which supports the G.711 codec, requires one IP 

port per handset and emulates a 4606 IP desk telephone. The 3606 wireless VoIP telephone 

solution also requires the following four components: 

● 3606 wireless telephones 

● A SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP) server 

● An Avaya Voice Priority Processor 

● An 802.11b wireless LAN with SVP-enabled access points, such as the Avaya AP-1, AP-2, 

AP-3 AP-4, or AP-6 access point 

The battery charge has the following characteristics 



reduces battery life. The spare is automatically reconditioned and the handset battery is 


econditioned in the cradle if manually selected. Batteries cannot be manually 

reconditioned. 

● Users get 2.0 hours of talk time, and over 80 hours of standby time 


visible 

● An optional extended-use battery, provides up to eight hours of talk time and 72 hours of 

standby time. 





workplace. 



● Weighs just 4.2 ounces (119 grams) 

● Dimensions are 5.5" × 2.0" × 0.9" (14 × 5 × 2.3 cm) 

● Supports the G.711 and G.729 codecs 

● A maximum of 10 virtual button appearances for lines and features. 

● Five fixed functions: 

- mute 

- last number dialed 

- hold, transfer 

- conference. 



● AWTS Open Application Interface (OAI) gateway that allows third-party software 




● Headset Option: works with the RF Supra Monaural Noise Canceling Headset with a 

2.5mm QD adapter cable. Also works with the Avaya AMX-100 Cellphone Headset 


Pocket Phones). 



The 3616 wireless VoIP telephone solution requires one IP port per handset and emulates a 

4606 IP desk telephone. The 3616 wireless VoIP telephone solution also requires the following 

four components: 


● Avaya Voice Priority Processor 


AP-3, AP-4, or AP-6 access point. 

The battery charge has the following characteristics: 




reconditioned in the cradle if manually selected. Batteries cannot be manually 




visible. 





workplace. 



● Weighs just 6.0 ounces (170 grams) 

● Dimensions are 5.9" × 2.2" × 1.0" (15 × 5.6 × 2.5 cm) 

● Supports the G.711 and G.729 codecs 

● A maximum of 10 virtual button appearances for lines, intercoms, and features 

● A push-to-talk radio capability and push-to-talk radio button for use as a walkie-talkie 



● AWTS Open Application Interface (OAI) gateway that allows third-party software 





● Headset Option: works with the RF Supra Monaural Noise Canceling Headset with a 

2.5mm QD adapter cable. Also works with the Avaya AMX-100 Cellphone Headset 


Pocket Phones) 

The 3626 wireless VoIP telephone solution requires one IP port per handset and emulates a 

4606 IP desk telephone. The 3626 wireless VoIP telephone solution also requires the following 

four components: 


● Avaya Voice Priority Processor 


AP-3, AP-4, or AP-6 access point. 

The battery charge has the following characteristics: 




reconditioned in the cradle if manually selected. Batteries cannot be manually 




visible. 

● A gang charger that can charge up to 4 batteries is available. 

Avaya 3701 IP DECT Telephone 

The 3701 IP DECT Telephone is part of the Avaya IP Digital Enhanced Wireless 

Telecommunications (DECT) solution, available only in the EMEA and APAC regions. The IP 

DECT solution provides businesses with a highly functional wireless solution with the ability to 

scale to support large numbers of users. The system also supports users in different offices 

connected via a wide area network (WAN). 


● Listen-only handsfree speaker 

● SOS Emergency key for speed dialling an emergency number 

● Information key that can be used for: 

- Phone number lists and voice mail indication 

- Information and speaker key flash when active 

● 50 phone book entries in every handset, independent of the system phone book 

● 10 possible ring tones with temporary mute 



● 4-level signal strength display 

● Speaker and handset volume, 3-levels and mute capability 

● Manual and automatic key lock (1 minute timer) 

● Temporary ring tone muting 

● Silent charging 

● 12 menu languages: Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, 

Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, and Swedish. 

● Illuminated 3-line graphic display (96 x 33 pixels), variable 3-level contrast 

● Stand-by time of up to 200 hours 

● Talk time of up to 20 hours 

● Charge time of maximum 6 hours for empty batteries 

● Weight of 138 grammes including 3 AAA (NiMH) batteries 

● Dimensions (height x width x depth) are 146 mm x 55 mm x 28 mm 

● Optional accessories include a desktop charger, an adapter cord for use with headsets, 

and a heavy-duty belt clip 

Avaya 3711 IP DECT Telephone 

The 3711 IP DECT Telephone is part of the Avaya IP Digital Enhanced Wireless 

Telecommunications (DECT) solution, available only in the EMEA and APAC regions. The IP 

DECT solution provides businesses with a highly functional wireless solution with the ability to 

scale to support large numbers of users. The system also supports users in different offices 

connected via a wide area network (WAN). 

The 3711 telephone supports the same features as the 3701 IP DECT handset, but with the 

following differences: 

● Full hands-free speakerphone operation 

● Headset connection (2.5 mm jack) 

● Vibrating alarm 

● Personal phone book with 100 entries, independent of system phone book 

● Voice mail indication 

● Choice of 30 ring tones 

● Speaker and handset volume, 7-levels and mute capability 

● 10 menu languages: Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, 

Portuguese, Spanish, and Swedish. 

● Illuminated 5-line graphic display (96 x 60 pixels), variable 7-level contrast 


Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device 

The Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device is a small wireless telephone that supports 

Seamless Communication solutions. The CN620 has dual network functionality. Within the 

enterprise/company workplace, the phone uses Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) as the 

on-campus wireless data network. Outside the range of the enterprise’s WLAN, the phone 

seamlessly transitions to a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) cellular network of 

the user’s selected wireless carrier. The phone keeps its enterprise phone number and key 

phone functionality as the user travels. 

The CN620 Mobile Office Device has the following characteristics: 

● Weight: 145 grams 

● Dimensions: 97 x 52 x 29 mm 

● Three fixed feature buttons: 

- Mute Hold, Speaker 

● Push-to-talk button 

● 8-segment navigation dial for selecting applications from the internal display 

● Menu key 

● Two smart context-aware soft keys 

● The following built-in feature options: 

- Call transfer 

- Conference 

- Call forwarding 

- Speed dial 

- Four line appearances 

- Message waiting indication 

● Internal Display: 

- 65K active color display 

- 176 x 220 pixels 

- 34.8 x 43.6 mm active area 

● External display: 

- 2 line black and white 

- 96 x 32 pixels 

- One line for ICONs and one line for text 

- Earpiece7 volume levels for tone/voice plus vibrate mode. 

- -30dB attenuation from speaker to microphone. 



● Speakerphone with 7 volume levels. 

● Volume control for the handset, speaker, and ringer. 

● Smart network sensing that routes calls over preferred networks. 

● A single enterprise voice mailbox for WLAN and GSM calls. 

● Enterprise voice quality. 

● Multiple simultaneous active calls: up to two in the GSM network and up to four in the 

WLAN network 

● Internet/intranet access. 

● Text messaging support. 

● Built-in email POP3/IMAP4 client. 

● 25-call log. 

● 1000 contacts. 

● Calendar. 

● Synchronization of calendar, contacts and tasks to Microsoft Outlook. 

● Call timers and meters. 

● Feature-named extensions, which are Direct-Inward-Dial numbers that access 

Communication Manager features otherwise not available over wireless connections (for 

example, Call Pickup, Group Page, and Whisper Page). 

● E911 location reporting with Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN). 

● Multiple Headset Options: contact your sales representative for specific options. 

● TTY device support. 

● Vibrate and ring options for incoming calls. 

● Voice-activated dialing using contacts directory. 

● HTML 4.0 and WAP 2.0 browsers. 

● Microsoft Windows CE.NET operating system with .NET application framework. 

● IPSec-based VPN client on GSM utilizing username and password challenge. 

● Theft protection with user-managed phone lock password challenge. 

● Dynamic memory. 

● Bands/Modes: 

- GSM/GPRS — 850/1900 Mhz. 

- WLAN — 802.11a. 

● Vocoders: GSM — AMR, EFR; VoIP — G.711 and G.729. 

● DHCP IP addressing. 


● Upgradable firmware 

● 802.11 WPA-based security solution utilizing 802.x. 

● 802.11 EAP-TLS based 2 factor authentication. 

● GSM/GPRS security utilizing standard SIM-based authentication. 

The battery has the following characteristics: 

Note: For 

● Batteries: 800 mAHr Lithium ION Slim or 1100 mAHr Lithium Ion High Performance. 

● Battery charge time is 2.5 hours for the Slim battery and 3.5 hours for the High 

Performance battery. 

● 150 - 190 minutes of talk time, and over50 - 80 hours of standby time. 

Note: 

more information on the CN620 feature capabilities, see the Seamless 

Communication Total Solution Guide, 21-300041. 

Supported Avaya telephones 

The following telephones are supported, but no longer sold: 

● IP telephones 

- Avaya 4606 





● Explosive atmosphere analog telephone 

- Avaya 2520B 



Power for Avaya IP telephones 

Power for Avaya 4602 and Avaya 4620 IP telephones 

An Avaya 4602 or an Avaya 4620 IP telephone is powered through the RJ45 jack that resides 

on the telephone. There are two methods of powering the telephone through the RJ45 jack: 

● Power supplies that are designed to the IEEE 802.3af-2003 Power over Ethernet 

standard, which can include either of the following: 

- Avaya PoE switches, which includes the C364T-PWR, C363T-PWR and P333T-PWR 

switches, for new Ethernet network installations. 

- The1152A1 mid-span power-distribution unit is used for configurations that use existing 

Ethernet network. 

● Local power using the 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply 

Power for Avaya 4601, 4602, 4602SW, 4610SW, and 4620 family IP 

telephones 

There are two generations of Avaya 4601, 4602, 4602SW, 4610SW, and 4620 family IP 

telephones. The first generation (Gen-1) IP telephones support local power over pins 7 and 8 

using the 1151C1 or 1151C2 power supply. The second generation (Gen-2) IP telephones are 

designed to the IEEE 802.3af-2003 Power over Ethernet specifications. 

There are two ways to identify the first generation of an Avaya IP telephone: 

● Label identification — The product label beneath an IP telephone contains a 12-character 

(US only), or 16-character (international) model number or apparatus code. The model 

number indicates the generation by either a 01A (Gen-1) or 02A (Gen-2) identifier. 

● Display identification — The model for an IP telephone can be retrieved via the display 

after the telephone has been powered up. 

Power for Avaya 4630 IP telephones 

An Avaya 4630 IP telephone must be powered locally using the barrel connector beneath the 

telephone. The power supply for an Avaya 4630 is provided with the telephone. 

Note: The 

Note: 

4630SW IP telephone does not use the barrel connector. 


Power for Avaya 4690 IP telephones 

SoundPoint and SoundStation speakerphones 

An Avaya 4690 IP telephone must be powered locally using the power brick (provided). 


3127 SoundPoint speakerphone 

The SoundPoint speakerphone adjunct connects to a telephone and provides high quality 

audioconferencing for desktop environments. The analog version plugs into any standard 

analog telephone jack. The DCP version plugs into the adjunct port of the 7400-, 7500-, 8400-, 

and 8500-series telephones. 

The full-duplex operation eliminates the clipping of speech and the dereverberation technology 

helps to reduce the hollow, "bottom of the well" sound that is often associated with common 

speakerphones. 

SoundPoint automatically adapts itself to both the room and the line conditions to ensure the 

best full-duplex operation. This adaptation is especially critical when you have multiparty 

international conference calls operating over a bridge. This adaptation is an automatic and 

continuous process to accommodate for changing room conditions. 

Highlights 

● 180 degrees of microphone coverage, ideal for desktop applications 

● Tabletop, user installable solution for ease of setup and use 

● Neodymium speaker tuned to reproduce the human voice 

● Avaya DM1000 Directional Microphone for best voice clarity 

● Auto Answer capable for hands free applications 

● Microphone muting for privacy 

● Dual color LED for on and mute display lights 



Models 

3127-ATR Avaya SoundPoint Analog 

The analog version of SoundPoint plugs into any analog port or terminal and comes will all 

appropriate cabling. In addition, the analog version of SoundPoint can automatically answer 

(Auto-Answer) calls placed to its extension. 

3127-DCP Avaya SoundPoint DCP 

The 3127-DCP SoundPoint connects to the adjunct port of the 7400-, 7500-, 8400-, and 

8500-series telephones and comes with all appropriate cables. 

3127 SoundStation speakerphone 

The SoundStation speakerphone has three microphones that provide 360 degrees of coverage 

for offices and small conference rooms. The amplified speaker provides enough audio for 

groups of up to 10 people. The analog version plugs into any standard analog telephone jack. 

The DCP version plugs into the adjunct port of the 7102, 8102, and 7400- and 8400-series 

terminals. 

The full-duplex operation eliminates the clipping of speech, and Acoustic Clarity Technology 

helps to eliminate background noise. SoundStation automatically adapts itself to both the room 

and the line conditions to ensure the best full-duplex operation. This is especially critical when 

you have multiparty international conference calls operating over a bridge. This adaptation is an 

automatic and continuous process to accommodate for changing room conditions. 

Highlights 

● 360 degrees of microphone coverage, ideal for desktop applications 

● Digitally-tuned speaker with Acoustic Clarity Technology 

● Full duplex operation, talk and listen at the same time 

● Tabletop, user installable solution for ease of setup and use 

● Extension microphones available for up to 20 people 

● Integrated dial pad 


● Dual color LED for on and mute display 

● Wireless, lapel microphone available for stand-up presenters 


Models 


3127-STD Avaya SoundStation Analog 

The analog version of SoundStation plugs into any analog port or terminal and comes with all 

appropriate cables. The SoundStation requires an analog line and a power outlet and is easy to 

install and use. The 3127-STD SoundStation is good for groups of up to 10 people. 

3127-EXP Avaya SoundStation Ex Analog 

This analog version of SoundStation includes two extension microphones, which can be used to 

enhance the room coverage to support up to 15 people. The 3127-EXP SoundStation plugs 

directly into an analog port. 

3127-DCS Avaya SoundStation DCP 

The DCP version of SoundStation connects to the adjunct port of the 7102, 8102, and 7400and 

8400-series telephones. This SoundStation is user installable and comes with all 

appropriate cables, and does not work with a 6400-series telephone. The 3127-DCS Avaya 

SoundStation is good for groups of up to 10 people. 

3127-DCE: Avaya SoundStation Ex DCP w/Mics 

This DCP version of SoundStation includes two extension microphones, which can be used to 

enhance the room coverage to support up to 15 people. The DCP version connects to the 

adjunct port of the 7102, 8102, and 7400- and 8400-series terminals. The 3127-DCE 

SoundStation does not work with a 6400-series telephone. The 3127-DCE SoundStation comes 

with all appropriate cabling and is user installable. 

3127 SoundStation Premier audioconferencing speakerphone 

The SoundStation Premier speakerphone has three microphones that provides 360 degrees of 

coverage for offices and small conference rooms. The amplified speaker provides enough audio 

for groups of up to 25 people. 

The analog version plugs into any standard analog telephone jack. The DCP version plugs into 

the adjunct port of the 7102, 8102, and 7400- and 8400-series telephones and the 6400-SSDP 

version plugs directly into a DCP jack. 

The full-duplex operation eliminates the clipping of speech, and Acoustic Clarity Technology 

helps to eliminate background noise. In addition, SoundStation Premier focuses a microphone 

on the main speaker, to eliminate the hollow sound that is common with standard 

speakerphones. A full feature remote control and display is also included. 

SoundStation Premier automatically adapts itself to both the room and the line conditions to 

ensure the best full-duplex operation. This adaptation is especially critical when you have 

multiparty international conference calls operating over a bridge. This adaptation is an 

automatic and continuous process to accommodate for changing room conditions. 



Highlights 

Models 

● 360 degrees of microphone coverage – ideal for desktop applications 

● Digitally tuned speaker accurately reproduces the human voice 

● Full duplex operation, talk and listen at the same time 

● Dereverberation, reduces the hollow, "bottom of the well" sound 

● Tabletop, user installable solution that is easy to set up and use 

● Extension microphones available to support up to 25 people 

● Integrated dial pad and full-featured remote control 


● Dual color LED for on and mute display 

● Wireless, lapel microphone optional for stand-up presenters 

3127-APE Avaya SoundStation Premier Ex Analog 

The analog version of SoundStation Premier plugs into any analog port or telephone and comes 

will all appropriate cables. Expansion ports are available for adding on the optional extension 

microphones. The 3127-APE SoundStation requires just an analog line and a power outlet and 

is easy to install and use. The 3127-APE SoundStation is good for groups of up to 15 people. 

3127-APX Avaya SoundStation Premier Ex/MICS Analog 

This analog version of SoundStation Premier EX/Mics includes two extension microphones, 

which can be used to enhance the room coverage to support up to 25 people. The 3127-APX 

SoundStation plugs directly into an analog port. 

3127-DPE Avaya SoundStation Premier DCP Ex 

A DCP version of SoundStation Premier Ex connects to the adjunct port of the 7102, 8102, and 

7400- and 8400-series telephones. Expansion ports are available for adding on the optional 

extension microphones. The 3127-DPE SoundStation comes with all appropriate cabling and is 

user installable. The 3127-DPE SoundStation is good for groups of up to 15 people. The 

3127-DPE SoundStation does not work with the 6400-series telephones. 

3127-DPX Avaya SoundStation Premier DCP Ex w/Mics 

This DCP version of SoundStation Premier Ex includes two extension microphones, which can 

be used to enhance the room coverage to support up to 25 people. The DCP version connects 

to the adjunct port of the 7102, 8102, and 7400- and 8400-series telephones. The 3127-DPX 

SoundStation comes with all appropriate cabling and is user installable. The 3127-DPX 

SoundStation is good for groups of up to 25 people. The 3127-DPX SoundStation does not work 

with a 6400-series telephones. 



3127-DDP Avaya 6400-SSDP – SoundStation DCP Premier Ex 

The DCP version of SoundStation Premier Ex that connects directly into a DCP jack. The 

3127-DDP SoundStation works with any 6400-, 7400-, or 8400-series telephones or without a 

telephone. Expansion ports are available for adding on the optional extension microphones. 

The 3127-DDP SoundStation comes with all appropriate cables and is user-installable. The 

3127-DDP SoundStation is good for groups of up to 15 people. 

3127-DDX Avaya 6400-SSDP – SoundStation DCP Premier w/Mics 

The 3127-DDX SoundStation includes two extension microphones, which can be used to 

enhance the room coverage to support up to 25 people. The 3127-DDX SoundStation connects 

directly into a DCP jack. The 3127-DDX SoundStation works with any 6400-, 7400- or 

8400-series terminal or without a terminal. The 3127-DDX SoundStation comes with all 

appropriate cabling and is user-installable. 

3127-MIC Avaya SoundStation Wireless Lapel Mic 

This clip-on microphone is designed for stand-up presenters and consists of a small transmit/ 

receive pack that clips onto your belt and collar. This microphone has a 100’ range and comes 

in two individual frequencies. 

3127-PMI Extension Microphones for SoundStation Premier 

These two extension microphones to enhance and expand room coverage are compatible with 

3127-APE, 3127-DPE and 3127-DDP. 




Avaya Video Telephony Solution 

In a joint offer, Avaya and Polycom ® offer the Avaya Video Telephony Solution for desktop and 

group video communication. The Avaya Video Telephony Solution enables Avaya 

Communication Manager to merge a set of enterprise features with Polycom’s 

videoconferencing adjuncts. It unifies Voice over IP with video, web applications, Avaya’s video 

enabled IP softphone, third party gatekeepers and other H.323 endpoints. 

A user can place and receive video calls on Avaya IP Softphone enabled with Avaya Video 

Integrator and Polycom ® video. Video is displayed on a PC if a user makes or answers a video 

call on their Avaya IP Softphone. Both desktop to desktop calls and multiparty conferences can 

be video-enabled depending on the user’s components. A single IP infrastructure integrates 

voice, data, and video applications. Avaya Communication Manager Release 3.1 is 

video-enabled, and serves the desktop video endpoints, room videoconference systems, and 

videoconferencing control units. 

Components 

The basic components for the Avaya Video Telephony Solution include the following hardware 

and software. Telephones are optional. Different configuration modes require different 

components. The videoconferencing gatekeeper is a video-enabled release of Avaya 

Communication Manager. Optional third party gatekeepers can include the Polycom 

PathNavigator. 

Video capable devices include the following components: 

● Avaya IP Softphone with Avaya Video Integrator and Polycom ® video 

● Polycom VSX3000m, VSX7000 and VSX8000 conferencing systems 

● Polycom MGC Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) 

● Video endpoints such as: 

- Polycom Viewstation FX 

- Third party H.320 video endpoints. Note that Avaya does not support these endpoints. 

Hardware associated with Avaya IP Softphone can include the following components: 

● PC 

● Handset or headset 

● USB or Polycom ® ViaVideo camera 

Issue 4 April, 2005 363

Avaya Video Telephony Solution 

Connectivity 

The Video Telephony components connect to the customer’s LAN which then interconnects all 

the components. Media streams between devices travel directly across the LAN. The streams 

do not traverse any of the signaling components. These components may include Avaya 

Communication Manager or a Polycom gatekeeper. These components may have been used to 

establish the streams. 

Each of the video capable devices register with an H.323 gatekeeper. Avaya Communication 

Manager can be used for: 

● Avaya IP Softphone with Avaya Video Integrator and Polycom ® video, 

● Polycom MGC multipoint control unit, and 

● Polycom VSX. 

The gatekeeper for Polycom Viewstation is either the Polycom PathNavigator gatekeeper or a 

third party gatekeeper. 

Other H.323 compliant audio and video devices might function in this configuration, but none 

are Avaya supported. The H.323 components connect through the LAN. The H.320 

components connect through the circuit switched ISDN BRI. 

364 Hardware Guide for Avaya Communication Manager

Avaya UPS Units 

AS1 1000 VA 120 V online uninterruptible power supply (UPS) 

The following Avaya uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) are available: 

● AS1 1000 VA 120 V online uninterruptible power supply (UPS) on page 365 

● AS1 1000VA 230V online UPS on page 366 



Various UPS add-on modules are also available. See UPS add-on modules on page 367. 

All AS1 UPSs have the following characteristics: 

● A UPS groups the six available 5-15R receptacles into two groups of three. With two 

groups, users can shut down one set of loads to allow longer run times for more critical 

loads during a power failure. 

● Power management software is included. 

● A UPS can be installed in a tower or mounted in a data rack. 

● Serial interface capabilities and DEFINITY alarm contacts are standard. 

● Output is through six 5-15 R receptacles in two load segments: sine wave, voltage +/- 3% 

of nominal. 

● Type and number of UPS batteries are two (1000 VA) or four (1500 VA) 12 V 9 A/H sealed, 

lead-acid batteries or maintenance free batteries 

● UPS dimensions are (H x W x D): 3.5 inches (8.9 centimeters) x 17 inches (432 

centimeters) x 19.4 inches (494 centimeters) 

● UPS weight is: 

- 1000 VA models, 34 pounds (15 kilograms) 

- 1500 VA models, 50 pounds (23 kilograms) 

AS1 1000 VA 120 V online uninterruptible power supply 

(UPS) 

The 1000 VA 120 V online uninterruptible power supply (UPS) provides 1000 VA/490 watts/8.3 

A at 120 VAC and battery holdover of five minutes at full load. Two optional Extended Battery 

Modules (EBM24) extend the run time to 104 minutes at full load. 



1000 VA 120 V models include the following accessories: 

● Extended Battery Module (EBM24) 

● Bypass Distribution Module 1000 VA to 1500VA 120 volts 

● SNMP module 

Safety Compliance: UL, CSA, NOM 

EMC Compliance: FCC Class B, VCCI Class II. 

Input: 120 Vac, 45-65 Hz, auto sensing; user-selectable 100 or 127 VAC; 6-foot (183 

centimeter) attached cord with 5-15 P 

AS1 1000VA 230V online UPS 

The 1000 VA 230 V online UPS provides up to 700 watts and basic battery holdover of 5 

minutes at full load. Output current for 208/220/230/240 volts is 4.8/4.5/4.3/4.2 A. Two optional 

extended battery modules (EBM24) extend the run time to 104 minutes at full load. 

1000VA 230 V models include the following accessories: 


● Bypass Distribution Module 700-2000 VA 230 V 

● SNMP Module 

Safety Compliance: UL, CSA, NOM, CE 

EMC Compliance: FCC Class B, EN 50091-2, VCCI Class II, IECS-003 

Input: 230Vac, 50/60 Hz, auto sensing, user-selectable 220, 240; 2-meter cord with 

unterminated plug-end. 


The AS1 1500 VA 120 V online UPS provides 1500 VA/1050 watts/12.5 A at 120 Volts AC and 

battery holdover of 8 minutes at full load. Four optional extended battery modules-EBM48 

extend the run time to 144 minutes at full load. 

The AS1 1500 VA model includes the following accessories: 

● Extended battery module (EBM48) 

● Bypass distribution module AS1 1000-1500 VA 120 V 

● SNMP module 



Safety Compliance: UL, CSA, NOM 


Input: 120 Vac, 45-65Hz, auto sensing; user-selectable 110, 127 VAC; 6-foot attached cord with 

5-15P. 


The AS1 1500 VA 230 V online UPS provides up to 1050 watts and basic battery holdover of 8 

minutes at full load. Output current for 208/220/230/240 volts is 7.2/6.8/6.5/6.2 A. Four optional 

extended battery modules (EBM48) extend the run time to 144 minutes at full load. 

1500 VA 230 V models include the following accessories: 


● Bypass Distribution Module 1000-2000VA 230V 

● SNMP Module 

Safety Compliance: UL, CSA, NOM, CE 

EMC Compliance: FCC Class B, EN 50091-2, VCCI Class II, IECS-003 

Input: 230 Vac, 50/60 Hz, auto sensing, user-selectable 220, 240; 2-meter cord with 

unterminated plug-end. 

UPS add-on modules 

Extended battery module-EBM24 1000 VA 

The extended battery module-EBM24 supports the 1000 VA online UPS with a 24-volt battery 

string to extend the run time to 104 minutes. The EBM can be installed in a tower or 

rack-mounted in a 2U space. No other battery module or cabinet is compatible with the 1000 VA 

Online UPS. 

Maximum: Up to two Extended Battery Module (EBM24) per 1000VA Online UPS. 

Safety Compliance: UL, CSA, NOM. 


Dimensions: (H x W x D) 89 mm x 432 mm x 494 mm = 3.5" x 17" x 19.4" 

Weight: 65 pounds = (29.5 kilograms) 



Extended battery module-EBM48 1500 VA to 2000 VA 

The UPS extended battery module-EBM48 supports the 1500 VA and 2000 VA online UPS with 

a 48-volt battery string. This configuration extends the run time up to 144 minutes at full load. 

The EBM can be installed in a tower or rack-mounted in a 2U space. 

Maximum: Up to four Extended Battery Module-EBM48 per 1500 or 2000 VA Online UPS. 

Safety Compliance: UL, CSA, NOM. 

EMC Compliance: FCC Part 15 (Class B) and VCCI Class II. 

Dimensions: (H x W x D) 89 mm x 432 mm x 494 mm = 3.5" x 17" x 19.4" 

Weight: 65 pounds (29 kilograms) 

SNMP Module 1000 VA to 2000 VA 

The SNMP module is included in the 1000 VA package, adding direct control and monitoring 

capabilities in SNMP-based networks. The module is hot-swappable with the standard serial 

interface module. 

Dimensions: (H x W X D) 4.5 inch (11.4 centimeters) x 4 inch (10.2 centimeters) x 1 inch (2.54 

centimeters) 

Weight: 0.2 pounds (.09 kilograms) 

Bypass distribution module 120V 1000 VA to 1500 VA 

The bypass distribution module (BDM) allows for replacement of the UPS or internal batteries 

without shutting down the connected load. 

Dimensions: (H x W X D) 12 inch (30.5 centimeters) x 5 inch (12.7 centimeters) x 4 inch (10.2 

centimeters) 

Weight: 5.0 pounds (2.27 kilograms) 

PWR UPS bypass distribution module S1 1000 VA to 2000 VA 

The bypass distribution module (BDM) allows for replacement of the UPS or internal batteries 

without shutting down the connected load. 

Dimensions: (H x W X D) 12 inch (30.5 centimeters) x 5 inch (12.7 centimeters) x 4 inch (10.2 

centimeters) 

Weight: 5.0 pounds (2.27 kilograms) 


Avaya Wireless Solutions 

W310 WLAN Gateway 

The W310 WLAN Gateway, using Light Access Points, provides a standards-based 

infrastructure and a new solution for wireless applications. The W310 Mobility Gateway 

provides a rich feature set in the security, mobility and management area and also provides a 

lower overall cost of ownership for medium/large enterprise or a hotspot service provider. 

Instead of adding functionality to the Access Point, the W310 serves as a WLAN Gateway that 

centralizes the Access Point features, while the Access Points are reduced to simpler, cheaper 

devices, responsible for only basic functions. 

Note: The 

CAUTION: The 

Note: 

W310 WLAN Gateway also supports AP600 (an AP-4, AP-5, or AP-6 that 

has been upgraded for Light AP support) access points if the access points have 

the most recent firmware. 

! CAUTION: 

W310 WLAN Gateway provides wireless mobility service totally independent 

of Communication Manager and the media servers that support Communication 

Manager. The W310 WLAN Gateway has no interactions with Communication 

Manager-based systems. For wireless applications that use Communication 

Manager for call-handling, see W310 WLAN Gateway for Seamless 

Communications on page 373 or Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station on 

page 376. 

Figure 73: W310 WLAN Gateway 

The chassis features: 

● 16 10/100BaseT Ethernet ports (ports 1 through 16), connected with Category 5 copper 

cable with RJ-45 termination for 100Base-T ports. Use all eight wires in the cable. The 

maximum copper cable length connected to a 10/100Base-T port is 100m (328 ft.) 

● Two SFP GBIC Gigabit copper or fiber ports 

● A console port. 



● Fixed ports and buttons, including: 

- Port LEDs for each Ethernet port 

- 11additional system function LEDs 

- Left and right LED select buttons. 

The following customer-supplied equipment is also required: 

● An SFP GBIC (Small Form Factor Pluggable Gigabit Interface Converter), using LC or 

MT-RJ fiber cables or RJ copper cables, depending on the GBIC type. 

● APC (Advanced Power Conversion PLC) Front End AC-DC Power Shelf 

● One APC 800W PSUs 

● 2 Power cables (20AWG or thicker) to connect the APC Power Shelf to W310 switches. 

Cables must have terminals suitable for M3.5 screws 

Voice-Enabled Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) 

Infrastructure 

The Avaya infrastructure centralizes much of the WLAN intelligence in a gateway platform. This 

provides better integration into the enterprise network and solves the problems that plague 

wireless today: 

● Management: Reduces deployment complexities / management 

● Security: Increases security by maintaining a single entry point 

Superior infrastructure for Voice over IP (VoIP) 

● Supports subnet and Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) roaming for better inbuilding 

mobility and higher voice quality 

● Low-cost Avaya W110 LAPs (Light Access Points) enable dense deployments required for 

in-building mobility 

Investment Protection 

● New features can be centrally stored for easy W110 upgrades 


Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway Features 

● IP Multicast filtering 

● Terminal and modem interface 

● Wireless Services 

● LAN Services 

● Multiple Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) per port 

● RADIUS protocol for security 

● 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 

● 802.1X PBNAC (Port Based Network Access Control) 

● 802.3af-2003 Power over Ethernet 

● Seamless Roaming 

● Policy Management 

● Stations Power Saving 

● MAC Access Control List 

● Multiple Service Set Identifiers (SSIDs) 

● User Group Monitoring 

● W110 Controller 

● Wireless Applications 

For more information, see the following: 

● Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway Installation and Configuration Guide, 21-300041 

● Avaya W310/W110 Quick Setup Guide Using the CLI, 21-300178 

W310 WLAN Gateway 

● Avaya W310/W110 Quick Setup Guide Using the W310 Device Manager, 21-300179 

● Wireless AP-4, AP-5, and AP-6 User Guide, 555-301-708, Issue 3 




Table 30 shows the site requirements of the W310 WLAN Gateway. 

Table 30: W310 specifications 


Ambient working temperature 0-40°C (32 - 104°F) 

Humidity 5-95% relative humidity (not condensing) 

DC input voltage 50 to 57 VDC 

DC input current 8 A 

DC isolation 1500 V RMS with respect to protective ground 

AC input voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

AC input current 4 A 

AC power dissipation 400 W maximum 

A readily accessible listed safety-approved protective device with a 15A rating must be 

incorporated in series with building installation AC power. 


W310 WLAN Gateway for Seamless Communications 


The W310 WLAN Gateway supports the Seamless Communications offer on an S8300, S8500, 

or S8700-series Media Server. Seamless Communications offers converged cellular, Wireless 

Local Area Network (WLAN), Internet Protocol (IP), and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone 

service. As a result, Seamless Communications enables users to use the Motorola CN620 

Mobile Office Device (see Avaya 3711 IP DECT Telephone on page 352) to experience 

seamless wireless phone mobility between on-premises and off-premises use. The W310 

WLAN Gateway, along with the Wireless Services Manager and W110 Lite Access Points 

(LAPs), combine with a Communication Manager media server and a Global System for Mobile 

Communication (GSM) cellular network to provide Seamless Communications service. 

Figure 74: W310 WLAN Gateway 

An S8500 or S8700-series Media Server can support a maximum of 64 W310 WLAN 

Gateways. An S8300 Media Server can support up to 50 W310 WLAN Gateways. Each W310 

WLAN Gateway can, in turn, support up to 16 W110 LAPs. One W310 WLAN Gateway can 

support up to 1024 users. However, the actual number of Seamless Communications users that 

a media server can support is limited to its SIP trunk capacities and licensing of SIP and CCS 

users. 

The W310 WLAN Gateway centralizes and performs many of the functions of the access points, 

such as seamless mobility, security policy enforcements, enforcement of QOS, and the supply 

of Power over Ethernet (PoE). 

In addition, the W310 WLAN Gateway has the following characteristics: 

● Dimensions (H x W x D): 1.75 inches (44 mm) x 19 inches (48.3 cm) x 17.7 inches (45 cm) 

Note: The 

● Layer 2 switching 

● Fits in a EIA-310-D standard 19-inch rack. 

● 16 10/100 Ethernet ports with PoE (802.3af) 

● 8 10/100 Ethernet ports without PoE (not currently available for use) 

● Supports up to 16 non-LAP "heavy" access points, such as Avaya’s AP-4, AP-5, and AP-6 

models once the device has been migrated to LAP functionality 

Note: 

W310 WLAN Gateway can support only 10 heavy access points at 15 Watts 

per port. 

● One 2-Gb Ethernet port to support redundancy or stacking (not currently available for use) 



● One RS-232 serial port for command-line access 

● Supports 64 wireless endpoints per LAP 

● Supports 320 simultaneous voice sessions 

● Supports 20 simultaneous VoIP (802.11a) calls per LAP 

● 100 meter maximum distance to access points 

● Two LEDs per 10/100 port to indicate PoE status and link status 

● One LED for power and one LED for the 2-Gb Ethernet port 

● Supports RADIUS server and Active Directory authentication 

● Supports firmware download to the W310 WLAN Gateway and from the W310 WLAN 

Gateway to the W110 LAP 

The following additional devices are used with the W310 WLAN Gateway Seamless 

Communications support: 

● Wireless Services Manager 

● W110 Lite Access Points 

Wireless Services Manager (for Seamless Communications) 

The Wireless Services Manager (WSM) handles Dispatch calling (communication between 

walkie talkies), a function allows Motorola CN620 handsets to communicate using the “push to 

talk” communications style while in the WLAN. The WSM also manages the CN620 handset 

administration and initialization sequences and serves as a SIP proxy and registrar for WLAN 

SIP signalling. The WSM consists of the WSM SIP Proxy/Registrar software, Dispatch software, 

and a V120 Sun server. 

Figure 75: Wireless Services Manager (WSM) 


The V210 Sun server has the following characteristics: 

● 650 MHz ultraSPARC server 

● 4 GB memory 


● Two 36 GB hard drives 

The WSM communicates with the media server over SIP trunk groups. For the S8500 and 

S8700-series Media Servers, the SIP trunk groups are connected over the CLAN board. For the 

S8300 Media Server, the SIP trunk groups are connected over a G700 Ethernet port. 

W110 Light Access Point (for Seamless Communications) 

The W110 Light Access Point (LAP) is an access point that operates the radio cards necessary 

for wireless transmission and reception. The W110 supports Seamless Communications and 

can be used only with a W310 WLAN Gateway. 

Figure 76: W110 Light Access Point 

The W110 LAP has the following characteristics: 

● Can be mounted on a wall, ceiling, or desktop 

● LEDs to indicate power, LAN traffic, and wireless traffic 

● Support 802.3af-2003 PoE 

● Firmware downloadable from the W310 WLAN Gateway 

● Up to 16 LAPs for one W310 WLAN Gateway 

● Supports 802.11a and 802.11b/g radios 



Additional documentation for Seamless Communications 

For information on installing Seamless Communications, see the Seamless Communications 

Total Solution Guide, 21-300041, and the Seamless Communications Configuration Guide. 

Additionally, see the following: 

Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway Installation and Configuration Guide, 21-300041 

Avaya W310/W110 Quick Setup Guide Using the CLI, 21-300178 

Avaya W310/W110 Quick Setup Guide Using the W310 Device Manager, 21-300179 

Wireless AP-4, AP-5, and AP-6 User Guide, 555-301-708, Issue 3 

Motorola NMS User Guide 

Motorola WSN User Guide 

Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station 

Avaya Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station application types provide users with the 

capability to have one administered phone that supports Avaya Communication Manager 

features for both an office phone and one outside phone. Off-PBX Station application types 

allow users to receive and place office calls anywhere, any time. Application types are 

Extension to Cellular, Outboard Proxy SIP (OPS), Seamless Converged Communications 

Across Network (SCCAN), and Cellular Service Provider (CSP). Extension to Cellular extends 

office calls to a user’s cellular phone. CSP performs the same functions as Extension to Cellular 

but is sold to a user by their cellular service provider. CSP differs from Extension to Cellular only 

in that a user of the CSP application type cannot disable the feature. OPS is used to administer 

a SIP phone. SCCAN offers voice and data access from a single SCCAN handset that is 

integrated with a desktop phone across the corporate Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), 

public Global System for Mobile communication (GSM), and cellular networks. A user can have 

more than one application type per station. 

Through all of these application types, people calling an office phone can reach users even if 

they are not in the office. This added flexibility also allows the user to access certain 

Communication Manager features from a phone that is outside the office phone network. 


Extension to Cellular and Off-PBX Station 

The following Avaya phone types may be administered as the “host phone” using Extension to 

Cellular/Off-PBX Station application types: 

2402 4606 4630 6408D 

2410 4610 6402 6408D+ 

2420 4612 6402D 6416D+ 

4601 4620 6408 6424D+ 

4602 4624 6408+ 

The previously-listed phones all support the Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device, as well as 

other wireless telephones. In support of the CN620, these desk phones may be administered 

using the Administration without Hardware feature. In this way, the actual desk phone does not 

need to be physically connected. 

Except for the purchase of cellular phones and cellular service by a public service provider, 

neither you nor users need any additional hardware for use of the Extension to Cellular/Off-PBX 

Station features. You simply administer the feature on the media server running Communication 

Manager. 





Avaya C360 Ethernet switches 


The Avaya C360 Ethernet switches are the recommended Ethernet switches for S8500 and 

S8700-series configurations and for G700 Media Gateway stacks. 

The Avaya C360 family of converged stackable switches includes: 

● A range of modules with 24 or 48 10/100 Mbps ports. The modules support PoE or non 

PoE and two GBIC SFP slots for Gigabit Ethernet connections. 

● A Layer 3 capability 

The available C360 switch models are as follows: 

● C363T converged stackable switch 

This switch has 24 10/100 Mbps ports and two GBIC SFP ports. 

Figure 77: C363T Converged Stackable switch 

● C363T-PWR converged stackable switch 

This switch has 24 10/100 Mbps ports with Power over Ethernet (PoE) and two GBIC SFP 

ports. 

Figure 78: C363T-PWR Converged Stackable switch 

● C364T converged stackable switch 

This switch has 48 10/100 Mbps ports and two GBIC SFP ports. 



Figure 79: C364T Converged Stackable switch 

● C364T-PWR converged stackable switch 

This switch has 48 10/100 Mbps ports with Power over Ethernet (PoE) and two GBIC SFP 

ports. 

Figure 80: C364T-PWR Converged Stackable switch 


A C360 switch can coreside in a stack with G700 media gateways and with selected P330 

switches. A C360 stack can contain up to 10 switches and up to three backup power supply 

units. The stacked switches connect using the stacking submodules that plug into a slot in the 

back of the C360. The X330RC cable connects the top and bottom switches in the stack and 

provides redundancy and hot-swappability. This characteristic is similar to how modules can be 

swapped in a modular switching chassis. 

Avaya C360 switches are multilayer switches and can be upgraded with a license to provide 

routing (Layer3) functionality. 

Stacking 

● Up to 10 switches can be stacked together. 

● Common features to the stack include: 

- Spanning Tree 

- Redundancy 

- VLANs 

- SMON 

● The Octaplane stacking system provides 8 Gbps stacking bandwidth to all switches in the 

stack. 

● C360 stacks continue to function even if one switch or link fails. 



● Switches in the stack can be added, removed, and replaced without disrupting operation. 

● An advanced election algorithm ensures optimal stack master selection. 

Layer 2 features 

● Auto-sensing simplifies configuration of LAN connections by automatically selecting the 

port speed for devices — either 10Mb or 100Mb. 

● Auto-negotiation simplifies configuration of LAN connections by automatically selecting the 

port transmission mode for devices — either half- or full-duplex. 

● Auto-MDIX automatically adjusts for straight-through or crossover cables on all 10/100-TX 

ports. 

● Traffic prioritization (802.1p) allows real-time traffic classification into 8 priority levels 

mapped to 4 queues. 

● There are four egress queues on all switch ports. The queues can be configured with the 

Weighted Round Robin (WRR) or strict priority scheduling algorithm. 

● The use of the IEEE 802.1Q tagging for VLANs and per-port VLAN is supported. 

● Multiple VLANs per port allow access to shared resources by stations that belong to 

different VLANs. 

● The use of the IEEE 802.1w standard for Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) provides 

rapid convergence of the spanning tree in case of link failure. 

● The use of the IEEE 802.1x standard for port-based network security ensures that only 

authorized clients get network access. 

● Up to 20 redundant-port pairs are supported to increase link resiliency. 

● Intermodule redundancy is supported with one pair in a stack. The switching time is 

approximately 1 second. 

● Link Aggregation Group (LAG) support of up to 7 trunks. Each trunk has up to 8 10/100 

links or 2 GB links, provides resiliency, load balancing, and bandwidth expansion. 

● LAG redundancy is supported through resiliency between two LAG groups. 

● Port mirroring of any switch port is supported. 

● RMON/SMON port statistics provide real-time top-down analysis of network traffic. 

● IP multicast filtering (snooping) filters multicast traffic to optimize network bandwidth. 

● Classification of ports as regular or valuable is supported so if a link fails, notification is 

generated for valuable ports only. 

● The L2 CAM table contains 16K MAC addresses. 




Note: An 

Management 

Note: 

additional license is required for Layer 3 features. 

● Static, RIPv1, RIPv2, OSPF IP routing protocols are supported. 

● Equal cost routing is used for load balancing and redundancy. 

● Router redundancy (VRRP) is supported. 

● NetBIOS rebroadcasting is available for applications such as WINS that use broadcasting 

but might need to also communicate with stations on other subnetworks or VLANs. 

● ICMP and ARP protocols are supported. 

● DHCP/BootP relay allows broadcast requests to be forwarded to servers. 

● Policy-based routing of packets provides enforcement of QoS and ACL rules. 

● The L3 CAM table contains 4K IP addresses. 

● Access to the management interfaces are password-protected at three levels, read-only, 

read-write access, and supervisor, to prevent unauthorized configuration changes. 

● You can access to the Command Line Interface (CLI) in the following ways: 

- Direct console or modem connection 

- Telnet, up to five simultaneous connections, or SSHv2, up to two simultaneous 

connections, over the IP network 

● You can use TFTP for the download/upload of configuration files or the download of 

firmware files 

● You can use Secure Copy Protocol (SCP) for secure download/upload of configuration 

files 

● You can use SSH encrypted login sessions as a secure way to manage the switches 

remotely 

● A Java-based Device Manager provides an intuitive Web-based interface for access 

● Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is supported. LLDP enhances the ability of network 

management tools to discover and maintain accurate network topologies in multi-vendor 

environments 

● SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 are supported, including authentication and encryption. 

● MAC security is supported. Security includes up to 1024 MAC ports per module. 

● Simple network time protocol (SNTP) or TIME protocols are available to provide a 

consistent time stamp to all switches from an external source. 

● A standard Power over Ethernet MIB is supported. 


● Radius authentication enables centralized user management. 


● You can use all appropriate tools of the Avaya Integrated Management suite for 

administration. 

● System logging can occur by terminal, internal file, or Syslog server. 

● Switch access can be restricted to specified protocols or services. 

● You an restrict access to management interfaces by IP address. 

● You can invoke a telnet client from the CLI. 

Power over Ethernet (PoE) 

● PoE is supported on the C363T-PWR and C364T-PWR switches. 

● PoE is fully compliant with the 802.3af-2003 standard. 

● PoE provides up to 15.4W per port, on 10/100 ports, over Ethernet cables. PoE uses 

802.3af-2003 standards to power IP phones, wireless access points, and other end points. 

● PoE automatically detects device connections and removal. 

● PoE automatic load detection: 

- Tests whether the device connected to the port requires remote powering. 

- Controls the power injection to the wires. 

● Power is distributed between the 24/48 PoE ports according to priorities that you 

configure. Power priority can be configured on each port. Distribution is calculated from 

actual power consumption. 

● Back up power supply (BUPS) improves switch availability 


The C360 converged stackable switches have the following characteristics: 

● Dimensions (h) x (w) x (d): 1U 1.75" (44.45 mm) x 17" (431 mm) x 14.4" (365 mm) 

● Weight: 

- C363T: 4.9 kg (10.8 lb) 

- C364T: 5.0 kg (11 lb) 

- C363T-PWR: 5.5 kg (12.1 lb) 

- C364T-PWR: 6.8 kg (15 lb) 



Environmental conditions 

The C360 converged stackable switches have the following environmental conditions: 

● Operating temperature: 32-104 oF (0-40 oC) 

● Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing 

Power consumption 

The C360 converged stackable switches have the following power requirements: 

● Power entry: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

● Power consumption: 

- C363T: 60 W max 

- C363T-PWR: 420 W max 

- C364T: 90 W max 

- C364T-PWR: 760 W max 

● AC Input current: 

- C363T: 1.3A max 

- C363T-PWR: 4.2A max 

- C364T: 1.3A max 

- C364T-PWR: 7.6A max 

● DC Input current: 

- C363T: 2 A max 

- C363T-PWR: 8 A max 

- C364T: 2 A max 

- C364T-PWR: 15 A max 

Safety and quality 

The C360 converged stackable switches meet the following safety and quality requirements: 

● EMC Emissions: 

- US - FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A 

- Europe - EN55022 class A and EN61000-3-2 

- Japan - VCCI-A 

● Immunity: Approved according to EN55024 and EN61000-3-3 


● Safety: 

- UL (for US) approved according to the UL 60950 Std. 

- C-UL (for Canada) approved according to C22.2 No.950 Std. 

- CE (for Europe) approved according to EN 60950 Std. 

Avaya P133 and P134 Ethernet switches 

Avaya P133 and P134 Ethernet switches 

Note: 

Note: The P133 and P134 Ethernet switches are no longer sold, but are still supported. 

The Avaya P133G2 and P134G2 are part of the Workgroup Ethernet switches. These 

cost-effective switches are part of the Avaya Switch Portfolio. The Avaya P133G2 and P134G2 

provide all the features needed to implement emerging applications, but are simple to install, 

operate, and manage. 

Customers who install the Avaya P133G2 and P134G2 Ethernet switches at the network edge 

of a small enterprise can easily build a feature filled network. The switches have integrated 

uplinks that allow connectivity to the network backbone, and you can scale up as you grow. Up 

to four P130 switches can be stacked to create a single logical switch. 

For the P133G2 and P134G2 products, Web-based management makes application 

configuration, network operation and network monitoring straightforward tasks. The P133G2 

and P134G2 products have the same management and monitoring capabilities as other Avaya 

Cajun switches. Therefore the Network Management suite of applications can centrally manage 

these switches. 

Like all Avaya multiservice network products, the new P133G2 and P134G2 products offer 

applications optimized for converged voice, video, and data networks. These switches can 

support a superior data network environment with capabilities for QoS, policy management, and 

redundancy support. This capability provides superior operational reliability and network 

availability. 


The P133G2 is a workgroup switch with 24 Fast Ethernet ports and two SFP GBIC slots for 

uplink and cascading. This unit has a wire speed switching and forwarding rate of 8.8 Gbps. 

The P134G2 configuration provides 48 Fast Ethernet ports and two SFP GBIC slots. 

The P133G2 and P134G2 switches have the following characteristics: 

● 802.3 compliant ports for full/half duplex traffic, auto-negotiation, and flow control 

● Port-based and 802.1Q VLAN 



Interfaces 

● QoS Support 

● Priority per-port and 802.1p support 

● Congestion control 

● Port redundancy 

● Link Aggregate Group (LAG) supports both load sharing and redundancy as an 

incremental way to scale link bandwidth 

● LAG Redundancy 

● Support for Spanning Tree Protocol 

● Load-Sharing Back-up Power Supply (BUPS) 

● Port mirroring 

● SMON (RFC2613) IETF SMON standard for Layer 2 

● 24 x 10/100Base-TX ports with RJ connectors 

● 2 x SFP GBIC connectors 

● RS-232 for terminal setup using a modem and PPP 

Standards supported 

● IEEE 802.3x flow control on all ports 

● IEEE 802.1Q/p VLAN tagging and priority on all ports 

● IEEE 802.1D spanning tree protocol 

● IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet ports 

● IETF MIB-II, Bridge MIB, RMON, SMON 


Dimensions 

The P133 switch and P134 switch have the following dimensions: 

● Height, 3.5 inches (8.8 centimeters), 2U 

● Width, 19 inches (48.3 centimeters) 

● Depth, 13.8" (35 centimeters) 


● Weight 

- P133G2, 11.4 pounds (5.2 kilograms) 

- P134G2, 13.2 pounds (6 kilograms) 


● Operating temperature: 23 o F to 122 o F (-5 o C to 50 o C) 

● Humidity: 5% to 95% noncondensing 

Power consumption 

● Power entry (AC): 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 1A, 50/60 Hz 

● Power consumption: 75 watts maximum 


● EMC emission: 

- US: FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A 

- Europe: EN55022 class A and EN61000-3-2 

- Japan: VCCI-A 

● Immunity: approved according to EN55024 and EN61000-3-3 

● Safety 

- UL for US-approved according to UL1950 Std. 

- C-UL (UL for Canada) approved according to C22.2 No.950 Std. 

- CE for Europe approved according to EN 60950 Std 

Avaya P330 Ethernet switches 

● CLEI Code According to Telcordia (Bellcore) KS-22022 standard NEBS Level 3 certified 


Note: 

Note: The P330 Ethernet switches are no longer sold, but are still supported. 

The Avaya P330 family of stackable Ethernet workgroup switches include: 

● A range of modules with 10/100/1000 Mbps ports 

● Multilayer capabilities 



An Avaya P330 stack can contain up to 10 switches and up to three backup power supply units. 

To connect the stacked switches, use the Avaya X330STK stacking submodules that plug into a 

slot in the back of the Avaya P330. If the stack is split between two racks, you can use the 

X330SC or X330LC cables to connect the P330s. The Avaya X330RC cable connects the top 

switch in the stack and the bottom switches in the stack. The cable provides redundancy and 

hot-swappability in the same way that modules can be swapped in a modular switching chassis. 

The Avaya P330 is fully compliant with IEEE standards for: 

● VLAN Tagging 

● Gigabit Ethernet 

● Spanning Tree 

● Flow Control. 

This full standards-compliance, combined with auto-negotiation for 10/100/1000 Mbps and half/ 

full duplex facilitates the expansion of your network to match your company's growing needs. 

Each P330 switch has: 

● A fixed number of Ethernet ports 

● A front panel expansion slot which allows the addition of further ports, except P330-ML 

models. 

● A rear panel option slot which allows the addition of the Octaplane stacking bus module. 

● An integrated network management agent. 


Models 

The family of P330 Ethernet switches includes the following models: 

● P333T Ethernet switch 

This switch has 24 10/100BASE-T Ethernet ports, an expansion slot, and a stacking slot. 

● P333R Multilayer Ethernet switch 

This multilayer switch has 24 10/100BASE-T Ethernet ports, an expansion slot, and a 

stacking slot. 

● P333T-PWR Power Over Ethernet switch 

This switch has 24 10/100BASE-T ports with Power Over Ethernet, an expansion slot, and 

a stacking slot. This switch complies with the 802.3af-2003 Power over Ethernet standard. 

● P334T Ethernet switch 

This switch has 48 10/100BASE-T Ethernet ports, an expansion slot, and a stacking slot. 


Stacking 


● P332MF Ethernet switch 

This switch has 12 100BASE-FX (MT-RJ) Ethernet ports, an expansion slot, and a stacking 

slot. 

● P333R-LB Multilayer and Load Balancing Ethernet switch 

This multilayer and Load Balancing Ethernet switch has 24 10/100BASE-T Ethernet ports, 

an expansion slot, and a stacking slot. 

● P332G-ML Multilayer Ethernet switch 

This multilayer switch has 12 GBIC SFP Ethernet ports and a stacking slot. 

● P332GT-ML Multilayer Ethernet switch 

This Multilayer switch has 10 100/1000 BASE-T and 2 GBIC SFP Ethernet ports and a 


● P334T-ML Multilayer Ethernet switch 

This multilayer switch has 48 10/100 BASE-T and 2 GBIC SFP Ethernet ports and a 


The P330 switches support the following expansion modules: 

The P330 switches also support ATM modules and the X330W WAN expansion module. 

● Up to 10 switches can be stacked together. 

● Features that are common to the stack include: 

- Spanning Tree 

- Redundancy 

- VLANs 

- SMON 

X330T16 X330L1 

X330F2 X330L2 

X330S1 X330GT2 

X330S2 X330G2 

● The Octaplane stacking system provides 8 Gbps stacking bandwidth to all switches in the 

stack. 

● P330 stacks continue to function even if one switch or link fails. 

● Switches in the stack can be added, removed, and replaced without disrupting operation. 



● An advanced election algorithm ensures optimal stack master selection. 

● P330-BUPS and P330-ML-BUPS can support BUPS functionality for up to 4 switches 


● Auto-sensing simplifies configuration of LAN connections by automatically selecting the 

port speed for devices — either 10Mb or 100Mb. 

● Auto-negotiation simplifies configuration of LAN connections by automatically selecting the 

port transmission mode for devices — either half- or full-duplex. 

● Traffic prioritization (802.1p) allows real-time traffic classification into 8 priority levels 

mapped to 4 queues. 

● The use of the IEEE 802.1Q tagging for VLANs and per-port VLAN is supported. 

● Multiple VLANs per port allow access to shared resources by stations that belong to 

different VLANs. 

● The use of the IEEE 802.1w standard for Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) provides 

rapid convergence of the spanning tree in case of link failure. 

● The use of the IEEE 802.1x standard for port-based network security ensures that only 

authorized clients get network access. 

● MAC security is supported. 

● Port redundancy is supported to increase link resiliency. 

● Intermodule redundancy is supported with one pair in a stack. 

● Link Aggregation Group (LAG) support provides resiliency, load balancing, and bandwidth 

expansion. 

● LAG redundancy is supported through resiliency between two LAG groups. 

● Port mirroring of any switch port is supported. 

● RMON/SMON port statistics provide real-time top-down analysis of network traffic. 

● IP multicast filtering (snooping) filters multicast traffic to optimize network bandwidth. 

● Classification of ports as regular or valuable is supported so if a link fails, notification is 

generated for valuable ports only. 


Note: Layer 

Note: 

3 features are available only on the P333R and P330-ML switches. 

● Static, RIPv1, RIPv2, OSPF IP routing protocols are supported. 

● Equal cost routing is used for load balancing and redundancy. 

● Router redundancy (VRRP) is supported. 


Management 


● NetBIOS rebroadcasting is available for applications that use broadcasting such as WINS. 

These applications might also need to also communicate with stations on other 

subnetworks or VLANs. 

● ICMP and ARP protocols are supported. 

● DHCP/BootP relay allows broadcast requests to be forwarded to servers. 

● Policy-based routing of packets provides enforcement of QoS and ACL rules. 

● Access to the management interfaces are password-protected at three levels, read-only, 

read-write access, and supervisor. These levels prevent unauthorized configuration 

changes. 

● You can access to the Command Line Interface (CLI) in the following ways: 

- Direct console or modem connection 

- Telnet, up to five simultaneous connections, over the IP network 

● You can use TFTP for the download/upload of configuration files or the download of 

firmware files 

● A Java-based Device Manager provides an intuitive Web-based interface for access 

● SNMPv1 is supported. 

● Simple network time protocol (SNTP) or TIME protocols are available to provide a 

consistent time stamp to all switches from an external source. 

● You can use all appropriate tools of the Avaya Integrated Management suite for 

administration. 

● You an restrict access to management interfaces by IP address. 

Power over Ethernet (PoE) 

● PoE is supported on the P333T-PWR switch. 

● PoE is fully compliant with the 802.3af-2003 standard. 

● PoE provides up to 15.4W per port (on10/100 ports) over Ethernet cable. PoE uses 

802.3af-2003 standards to power IP phones, wireless access points, and other end points. 

● PoE automatically detects device connections and removal. 

● PoE automatic load detection performs the following actions: 

- Tests whether the device connected to the port requires remote powering. 

- Controls the power injection to the wires. 



● Power is distributed between the 24/48 PoE ports according to priorities that you 

configure. Power priority can be configured on each port. Distribution is calculated from 

actual power consumption. 

● Back up power supply (BUPS) improves switch availability 


Physical characteristics 

The P330 switches have the following characteristics: 

● Dimensions (h) x (w) x (d): 2U 3.5" (88mm) x 19" (482.6mm) x 17.7" (450mm) 

● Weight: max18.7 lb. (8.5Kg) 


The P330 switches have the following environmental conditions: 

● Operating temperature: 23 to 122 oF (-5 to 50 oC) 

● Humidity: 5% to 95%, not condensing 


● Power entry: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

● Power consumption: Max. 150 W, except for P333T-PWR, with Max. 400 W 

● Input Current for the P330 AC Version: 2 A @ 100 VAC or 1 A @ 200 VAC 

● Inrush Current for the P330 AC Version: 25 A @ 100 VAC maximum or 50 A @ 200 VAC 

maximum 

● Input Current (P330-ML AC Version): 2.2 A @ 100 VAC or 1.1 A @ 200 VAC 

● Inrush Current (P330-ML AC Version): 15 @ 100 VAC maximum or 35 @ 230 VAC 

maximum 


The P330 switches meet the following safety and quality requirements: 

● EMC Emissions: 

- US - FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class A 

- Europe - EN55022 class A and EN61000-3-2 

- Japan - VCCI-A 


● Immunity: Approved according to EN55024 and EN61000-3-3 

● Safety: 

- UL (for US) approved according to the UL60950 Std. 

- C-UL (for Canada) approved according to C22.2 No.950 Std. 

CE (for Europe) approved according to EN 60950 Std. 





Appendix A: Specifications for DEFINITY media 

gateways 

Environmental requirements 

Altitude and air pressure 

For altitudes above 5,000 feet (1,525 meters), you must reduce the maximum short-term 

temperature. Reduce this temperature limit by 1 oF (1.8 oC) for every 1,000 feet (304.8 meters) 

of elevation above 5,000 feet (1,525 meters). For example, at sea level, the maximum 

short-term temperature limit is 120 oF (49 oC). At 10,000 feet (3,050 meters), the maximum 

short-term temperature limit is 115 oF (46 oC). The normal operating air pressure range is 9.4 to 15.2 pounds per square inch (psi) (648 to 

1,048 millibars). 

Air purity 

The CMC1, SCC1, and MCC1 Media Gateways contain an air filter to reduce the flow of 

particulates through the equipment. Do not install the equipment in an area where it might be 

exposed to excessive amounts of any of the following contaminants: 

- dust 

- lint 

- carbon particles 

- paper fiber contaminants 

- metallic contaminants 


Appendix A: Specifications for DEFINITY media gateways 

For example, do not install the cabinet near paper handling equipment such as copiers and 

high-speed printers, which introduce paper dust and print particles into the environment. Avoid 

Corrosive gases above the levels in the following table. 

Contaminant Average 

Particulate matter 185 micrograms per cubic meter 

Nitrate in particulate matter 12 micrograms per cubic meter 

Total hydrocarbons equivalent to methane 10 parts per million (ppm) 

Sulfur dioxide 0.20 ppm 

Oxides of nitrogen 0.30 ppm 

Total oxidants equivalent to ozone 0.05 ppm 

Hydrogen sulfide 0.10 ppm 

Cabinet dimensions and clearances 

Floor plans usually allocate space around the front, ends, and rear of the cabinets for 

maintenance purposes. Floor area requirements vary between cabinets. The following table 

lists the dimensions and clearances for the SCC1 Media Gateway and the MCC1 Media 

Gateway. 

Cabinet type Height 

(inches) 

SCC1 

1 cabinet 

2 cabinets 

3 cabinets 

4 cabinets 

20 (51 cm) 

39 (99 cm) 

58 (1.5 

meters) 

77 (2 meters) 

MCC1 1 70 

(1.8 meters) 

Cable slack 

manager 2 

Width (inches) Depth (inches) Clearance 

(inches) 

27 (69 cm) 

27 (69 cm) 

27 (69 cm) 

27 (69 cm) 

32 

(81 cm) 

22 (56 cm) 

22 (56 cm) 

22 (56 cm) 

22 (56 cm) 

28 

(71 cm) 

7 (18 cm) 32 (81 cm) 38 (97 cm) 


38 (97 cm) 

between cabinet 

and wall 

Rear 38 (97 cm) 

Front 36 (91 cm)

Cabinet type Height 

(inches) 

DC power cabinet 3 20 (51 cm) 27 (69 cm) 22 (56 cm) Front and rear 

38 (97 cm) 

Large battery 

cabinet 

100 

200 

300 

400 

27 (69 cm) 

42 (107 cm) 

42 (107 cm) 

57 (145 cm) 

Floor load requirements 

55 (140 cm) 

55 (140 cm) 

55 (140 cm) 

55 i (140 cm) 

21 (53 cm) 

21 (53 cm) 

21 (53 cm) 

21 (53 cm) 

1. This row includes the auxiliary cabinet, the global AC cabinet, and the global DC cabinet. 

2. Cable slack manager is used with MCC1 Media Gateway and the SCC1 Media Gateway. 

Front and rear 

38 (97 cm) 

3. DC power cabinet requires a floor area of 8 square feet (0.74 square meters). The DC power cabinet also 

requires 38 inches (97 cm) between the cabinet and the wall. 

The equipment room floor must meet the commercial floor loading code of at least 50 pounds 

per square foot (242 kilograms per square meter). Floor plans usually allocate space around the 

front, the ends, and, if necessary, the rear for maintenance access of the Media Gateways. 

Additional floor support might be required if the floor load is greater than 50 pounds per square 

foot (242 kilograms per square meter). The following table contains information about weight 

and floor loading for the media gateway and battery. 

Media 

Gateway 

Width (inches) Depth (inches) Clearance 

(inches) 

Weight (pounds) Floor loading (pounds 

per square foot) 

SCC1 125 (56 kg) 31 (148.9 kg/m 2 ) 

MCC1 200 to 800 (90 to 

363 kg) 

Notes 

130 (624.2 kg/m 2 ) Includes 

auxiliary, 

global AC, and 

global DC 

cabinets 



Media 

Gateway 

Battery 

100-A maximum 400 (181 

kg) 

200-A maximum 815 (370 

kg) 

300-A maximum1480 (671 

kg) 

400-A maximum 1580 

(717kg) 


180 (871.2 kg/m 2 ) 

328 foot.(1587.5 kg/m 2 ) 

476 (2303.8 kg/m 2 ) 

625 (3025 kg/m 2 ) 

Install the DEFINITY equipment in a well-ventilated area. Maximum equipment performance is 

obtained at an ambient room temperature up to 110 oF (43 oC) for continuous operation and 

between 40 °F and 120 oF (4 oC and 49 oC) for short term operation. Short term operation is not 

more than 72 consecutive hours or 15 days in a year. 

The relative humidity range is 10% to 95% at up to 84 oF (29 oC). Above 84 oF, the maximum 

relative humidity decreases from 95% down to 32% at 120 oF (49 oC). Installations outside 

these limits might reduce system life or impede operations. The recommended temperature and 

humidity range is 65 oF to 85 oF (18oC to 29 oC) at 20 to 60% relative humidity. 

The following table correlates room temperature with allowable relative humidity. 

Recommended room 

temperature (oF) 

Weight (pounds) Floor loading (pounds 

per square foot) 


temperature (oC) 

40 to 84 4.4 to 28.8 10 to 95 

86 30.0 10 to 89 

88 31.1 10 to 83 

90 32.2 10 to 78 

92 33.3 10 to 73 

94 34.4 10 to 69 

96 35.6 10 to 65 

98 36.7 10 to 61 


Notes 

Recommended 

relative humidity (%)


temperature (oF) 


This section describes AC power and DC power source requirements for the cabinet. 

Global AC MCC power supply 

The Global MCC (GMCC) power supply is for use in both US and international systems. The 

GMCC replaces the existing AC MCC1 cabinet configuration which is used in the US. This 

replacement reduces the number of power supplies and distribution units that are associated 

with the MCC1 platform. 

The GMCC automatically accepts 200 VAC to 240 VAC power at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The GMCC 

complies with all emissions and safety requirements for customer applications worldwide. The 

GMCC power system consists of: 

● An NP850 rectifier that consists of cabinet-level power units located in the 

power-distribution unit at the bottom of the MCC1 

● 649A power supplies the DC-to-DC converters that provide carrier-level power 

● One battery interface and alarm unit 

● Battery connections 

● Alarm outputs 


temperature (oC) 

100 37.8 10 to 58 

102 38.9 10 to 54 

104 40.0 10 to 51 

106 41.1 10 to 48 

108 42.2 10 to 45 

110 43.3 10 to 43 

112 44.4 10 to 40 

114 45.6 10 to 38 

116 46.7 10 to 36 

118 47.8 10 to 34 

120 48.9 10 to 32 

● One cabinet input cord, NEMA 6-30P in the US 

Recommended 

relative humidity (%) 



The GMCC power architecture offers both short-term and long-term power backup. Batteries 

inside the MCC1 provide short-term backup. External battery cabinets provide long-term 

backup. Therefore, the GMCC significantly reduces or eliminates the need for UPS and DC 

battery plants for most customer applications. 

AC power 

Power feeders from a dedicated power source that is usually located outside the building 

connect to an AC load center. These feeders do not provide power to other equipment. The AC 

load center distributes the power to receptacles. The power cords from the AC power 

distribution unit in each MCC1 and the AC power supply in each SCC1 plugs into a receptacle. 

60-Hz power sources 

Each of the following power sources can supply 60-Hz power to the AC load. The following 

figures contain information on 120-VAC to 240-VAC power sources. 

Figure 81: Single-phase, 120- to 240-VAC, 60-Hz source 

120 240 


120 

Phase A 

Neutral 

Ground 

Phase B 

To equipment room 

AC load center 

widf1phs LJK 072298

Figure 82: 3-phase, 120- to 208-VAC, 60-Hz source 

50-Hz power sources 

Either of the following power sources can supply 50-Hz power to the AC load. See the following 

figures for 220-VAC power source. 

Note: For 

Note: 

type of power see: 

120 

208 Neutral 

208 

120 

120 

Phase B 

● MCC1 is shown on the cabinet’s rear door 

● SCC1 is shown on the cabinet’s rear cover 

● CMC1 is shown on the right door 

Phase A 

Ground 

Phase C 



widf3phs LJK 071597 

Figure 83: International, 3-phase, 220- to 380-VAC, 50-Hz source 

220 V 

220 V 

380 V 

220 V 

380 V 

Phase A 

Phase B 

380 V 

Neutral 

Ground 

Phase C 



widf4wir LJK 071497 



Figure 84: International delta, 220- or 240-VAC, 50-Hz source 

The following table lists the AC power sources that can supply power to an AC load in a cabinet. 

A NEMA receptacle, or it’s equivalent, connects to the wires from the unit. The AC power cord 

from the power input of each unit plugs into a receptacle. 

Contact your Avaya representative for ordering information. 

Table 31: Cabinet AC power sources 

Cabinet style and powerdistribution 

unit 

CMC AC power supply 

(650A power unit) 

220 V 

220 V 

Power sources Power input receptacles 

Single phase 120 VAC with 

neutral 


neutral 

MCC1 AC power distribution Single phase 120 VAC with 

neutral 


neutral, or single phase of 

three-phase, 208 VAC with 

neutral 

Phase A 

220/240 V 

Phase B 

Phase C 


To equipment 

room AC load 

center 

widf3wir LJK 071497 

120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 5-15R 

240 VAC, 50 Hz IEC 320 

Note: Configurations that are 

installed in Japan use country 

specific receptacles for 100 

VAC and 200 VAC, 50/60 Hz 

120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 

5-50R 

or 

208/240 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 

1 of 2

Table 31: Cabinet AC power sources (continued) 

DC power 

Cabinet style and powerdistribution 

unit 

MCC1 AC power distribution Single phase 176-264 VAC 200 volts to 240 volts, 50-60 Hz 

NEMA L6-30R. Configurations 

that are installed outside the 

US require a receptacle 

suitable that is for use in the 

country of installation. 

SCC1 AC power supply 

(1217A power unit) 


neutral 

Single phase of 220 VAC or 

Single phase of 240 VAC 

DC-powered cabinets that contain a J58890CF power-distribution unit require a source of -42.5 

VDC to -56 VDC at up to 75 A. 

Circuit-breaker sizes for AC and DC cabinets 

Power sources Power input receptacles 

120 VAC, 60 Hz NEMA 5-20R 

or 5-15R 

220-VAC to 240-VAC at a 

country-specific receptacle 

The following tables list the circuit-breaker sizes for all AC-powered cabinets and DC-powered 

cabinets. 

Cabinet Circuit breaker size (A) 

AC-powered cabinets 

CMC1 (120 VAC) 60 Hz 15 

CMC1 (240 VAC) 50 Hz 10 

MCC1 (120 VAC) 60 Hz 50 

MCC1 (208 VAC) 60 Hz 30 

MCC1 (240 VAC) 60 Hz 30 

MCC1 (200 VAC to 240 VAC) 

50 Hz to 60 Hz 

30 

SCC1 (120 VAC) 15 or 20 

Auxiliary cabinet (120 VAC) 20 

2 of 2 



MCC1 power system 

Cabinet Circuit breaker size (A) 

DC-powered cabinets (-48 VDC) 

MCC1 75 

SCC1 25 

Auxiliary 20 

The MCC1 power system consists of an AC power distribution unit or a DC power distribution 

unit in the bottom of each cabinet. Cables distribute output voltages to power unit circuit packs 

in the carriers. These power systems also consist of power-converter circuit packs in the 

carriers. These circuit packs supply DC power to the circuit pack slots. The following tables list 

the input voltages and the output voltages of power unit circuit packs in the carriers of MCC1s. 

Table 32: Power units in the MCC1: inputs 

Model Inputs 

120 VAC 144 VDC -48 VDC 

AC 631DA1 Yes Yes No 

AC 631DB1 Yes Yes No 

DC 644A No No Yes 

DC 645B No No Yes 

DC 649A No No Yes 

Table 33: Power units in the MCC1: outputs 

Model Outputs 

+5 VDC 

60 A 

–5 VDC 

6 A 

AC 631DA1 Yes No No 

AC 631DB1 No Yes Yes 

DC 644A Yes No No 

DC 645B No Yes Yes 


–48 VDC 

8 A 

DC 649A Yes Yes 10 A

AC power distribution 

A typical AC power-distribution unit for an MCC1 contains: 

● Circuit breakers 

● Ring generator 

● Optional batteries 

● Optional battery charger 

The power distribution cables carry 120 VAC during normal operation and 144 VDC from 

optional batteries if AC power fails. Another cable connects 120-VAC to the battery charger. 

The following figures show an AC power-distribution unit and battery charger (J58890CE-2 List 

15 or later). The AC power-distribution unit and the battery charger sit at the bottom of some 

MCC1s. 

AC power-distribution unit (J58890CE-2) (front) 

Figure 85: AC power-distribution unit (J58890CE-2) (front) 

The AC power-distribution unit contains the following additional components that are not shown 

in the figure: 

● Electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter 

● AC input fuse 

● Five circuit breakers, one for each carrier 

● 20-A fuses 

● A signal connector 

631DB 

power unit 

Ring 

generator 

● -48 VDC fan power 

The optional battery charger sits at the bottom of some MCC1s. 

Circuit 

breakers 

Ring generator 

fuse 

psdfacpd RPY 053097 



Figure 86: Battery charger (optional part of J58890CE-2) (front) 

The battery charger is used only without an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). The charger 

contains: 

● Three 48-VDC batteries for backup power to the cabinet 

● A DC power relay to connect the batteries into the power circuit if a main power failure is 

detected 

Circuit breaker 

The circuit breaker protects the AC input power to the cabinet and serves as the main AC input 

disconnect switch. The circuit breaker has two poles for 120 VAC or three poles for 208 VAC or 

240 VAC. If a problem develops, the circuit breaker automatically opens and removes the AC 

power input. 

48-VDC batteries 

The three series-connected 48-VDC batteries produce a nominal 144 VDC that is fused at 20 A. 

The batteries are trickle-charged from the battery charger. 

Battery charger 

When AC power restores after an outage, the battery charger converts a 120-VAC input to a DC 

voltage that recharges the batteries. The batteries usually recharge within 24 hours. 

DC power relay 

Batteries 

The DC power relay disconnects the batteries from a system that is using AC power. The relay 

also disconnects the batteries if power fails for more than: 

● 10 minutes in a standard-reliability system 

● 5 minutes in high reliability and critical reliability systems 

● 10 minutes in an expansion port network (EPN) 

Battery 

charger 

psdfbatt RPY 053097 


The DC power relay protects the batteries from over discharging. 

EMI filters 

The Electromagnetic interference (EMI) filters suppress noise voltage on the AC input line to the 

MCC1 cabinet. 


The ring generator converts the -48 VDC input to a 67-VAC to 100-VAC, 20-Hz or 25-Hz ringing 

voltage. The analog line circuit packs use this AC voltage output to ring telephones. The AC 

outputs are routed from the ring generator to port carriers, expansion control carriers, and 

control carriers. 

Fuses 

20-A fuses protect the power in each cable that goes from the AC power distribution unit to 

power converters in the carriers. 

The following figure shows AC power distribution in some MCC1s. The DC power distribution 

cables are on both sides of the cabinet. These cables supply power to each of the carriers. The 

optional battery charger is at the right side of the power distribution unit. 

Figure 87: AC power distribution in MCC1 cabinets 

Power backup 

"E" Position 

Carrier 

Power 

distribution 3 

unit 

If AC power fails, three 48-VDC batteries power the system for: 

● 10 seconds in a PPN cabinet 

● 15 seconds in an EPN cabinet 

● 10 minutes in the control carrier of a standard reliability system 

"D" position 

carrier 

Battery 

charger 

(optional) 

lcdfacpd RPY 053097 

● 5 minutes in a control carrier of a high reliability or critical reliability system 

● 10 minutes in the expansion control carrier in the A position of an EPN cabinet 



UPS 

An external, uninterruptible power supply (UPS) provides a longer backup time than holdover 

batteries. These batteries have holdover times that vary from less than 10 minutes to up to 8 

hours. The UPS can replace the batteries and the battery charger. The UPS connects from the 

AC power source to a AC power cord on the cabinet. If AC power fails, the UPS supplies its own 

AC power to the cabinet. 

AC power-distribution unit (J58890CH-1) 

The following figure shows a typical AC power-distribution unit that is used in some MCC1 

cabinets. The AC power-distribution unit sits at the bottom of an MCC1 cabinet. 

Figure 88: AC power-distribution unit (J58890CH-1) (front) 

Power backup 

Two types of battery assemblies are used for power backup: small and large. The small 

batteries are usually located at the center rear of a MCC1 gateway. The large batteries are 

usually located inside the battery cabinet. 

Small batteries 

Circuit 

breakers 

Ring 

generator 

The small batteries are an 8 Amp-hour batteries that are fused for short circuit protection and 

charged by the J58890CH-1. The batteries also contain a thermal sensor that changes the 

charging voltage depending on battery temperature. 

The small batteries provide short-term battery holdover. If AC power fails, 48 VDC batteries 

supply system power for: 

● 10 seconds in a PPN cabinet 

● 15 seconds in an EPN cabinet 


fuse 

Rectifier 

modules 

Battery 

interface unit 

psdfacp1 RPY 053097 


● 10 minutes in the control carrier in a standard reliability system 

● 5 minutes in the control carrier in high reliability and critical reliability systems 

● 10 minutes in the expansion control carrier that resides in the A position of an EPN cabinet 

The following figure shows an example of the small batteries. 

Figure 89: Small battery assembly 

Battery 

connector 

Large batteries 

The large batteries provide holdover times of 2 to 8 hours, depending on the number of 

batteries. To use large battery holdover, one battery cabinet is required per system. The 24-cell 

battery cabinet must have a float voltage of 54.2-VDC. The 23-cell battery cabinet must have a 

float voltage of 51.75 VDC. A circuit breaker protects the batteries. The J58890CH-1 charges 

the batteries. 

The batteries also contain a thermal sensor that changes the charging voltage, depending on 

the battery temperature. The following table shows the battery holdover and recharge times for 

a typical 2500-watt load. 

Battery cabinet (A) Holdover time 

(hours) 

100 2 7 

200 4 13 

300 6 20 

400 8 26 

psdfbatw RPY 061797 

Recharge time (hours) 



The following figure shows a typical large battery cabinet, (200 A). 

Figure 90: Typical large battery cabinets 

DC power distribution 

The typical DC distribution system has a DC power converter and cables to provide the power 

to the system circuit packs. DC-powered cabinets require -42.5 VDC to -56 VDC. 

DC power-distribution unit (J58890CF-2) 

The following figure shows a power distribution unit that is used in some DC-powered MCC1 

cabinets. The DC power unit sits at the bottom of the MCC1 cabinet and contains the following 

components: 

● ring generator 

● 20-Amp circuit breakers 

● terminal blocks 

● system fan power 

Circuit 

breaker 

Large battery 

cabinets 

psdflbc1 RPY 053097 


Figure 91: DC power-distribution unit (J58890CF-2) (front view)) 

Ground isolation 

DC power 

distribution 

unit 

Circuit 

breakers 

Terminal 

block 

Ring 

generator 

psdfdpdu RPY 053097 

Each peripheral device that is connected to a system by the asynchronous (EIA) RS-232 

interface requires either a 105C, a 105D, or a 116A isolator interface. The interface isolates 

ground between the system and external adjuncts. 

The isolator interface sits behind a processor port network (PPN) control carrier or behind an 

expansion port network (EPN) expansion control carrier. The isolator interface is installed at the 

RS-232 interface between the peripheral equipment and the interface connector. 

The following figure shows the power distribution in some MCC1s with small battery, short term 

battery holdover. Switch node (SN) carriers require two 649A DC power converters and two 

cables. 



Figure 92: Power distribution in MCC1 

Port carrier 1 

Port or 

control carrier 

Fan unit 

649A DC power 

converter circuit pack 

Power 

4 distribution 

unit 

The following figure shows the DC power distribution in some MCC1s with large batteries or 

extended battery backup. Switch node (SN) carriers require two 649A DC power converters and 

two cables. 

Figure 93: DC power distribution in MCC1s 

Control 

carrier 

649A DC power 

converter 

circuit pack 

Power 

distribution 

unit 

649A DC 

power converter 

circuit pack 

Circuit 

breaker 

Switch node 

carrier 


649A DC 

power converter 

circuit pack 

Small battery 

(Inside cabinet) 

Control 

carrier 


node carrier 


node carrier 

lcdfpdu1 LJK 071497 

Large battery 

cabinets 

lcdfpdu2 LJK 110797

DC power converter (649A) 

The 649A converts the –48 VDC from the power-distribution unit to outputs of: 

● –48 VDC at 10 A, 

● +5 VDC at 60 A, and 

● –5 VDC at 6 A. 

These outputs distribute power to circuit pack slots in the carriers. 

AC and DC grounding 

Approved grounds 

An approved ground is the closest acceptable medium for grounding the building entrance 

protector or the entrance cable shield. An approved ground is also acceptable as a single-point 

ground of the system. 

If more than one type of approved ground is available on the premises, bond the grounds 

together. Follow the instructions in Section 250-81 of the National Electrical Code, or the 

applicable electrical code in the country where the equipment is installed. 

Protective grounds 

Acceptable grounds include the following materials: 

● Grounded building steel. The metal frame of the building where an acceptable metallic 

water pipe, concrete encased ground, or a ground ring grounds the building. 

● Acceptable water pipe. An underground water pipe must be at least .5 inch 

(1.3 centimeter) in diameter, and in direct contact with the earth for at least 10 feet (3 

meters). The pipe must be electrically continuous to the point where the protector ground 

wire is connected. The pipe can also be made electrically continuous by bonding around 

insulated joints, plastic pipe, or plastic water meters. 

● Concrete encased ground. An electrode must be encased by at least 2 inches (5 

centimeters) of concrete. The ground must be located within and near the bottom of a 

concrete foundation or footing and is in direct contact with the earth. The electrode must 

be at least 20 feet (6 meters) of one or more steel reinforcing bars or rods .5 inch (1.3 

centimeter) in diameter. Or the electrode must be at least 20 feet (6 meters) of bare, solid 

copper, 4 AWG (26 millimeter 2 ) wire. 

● Ground ring. A buried ground must encircle a building or a structure at a depth of at least 

2.5 feet (0.8 meter) below the surface of the earth. The ground ring must be at least 20 feet 

(6 meters) of 2 AWG (35 millimeter 2 ), bare, copper wire. 



If these grounds are not available, one of the following types of grounds can supplement the 

water pipe ground: 

● Other local metal underground systems or structures. Local underground structures such 

as tanks and piping systems. 

● Rod and pipe electrodes. A .63 inch (1.6 centimeter) solid rod or .75 inch (1.9 centimeter) 

conduit or pipe electrode that is driven to a minimum depth of 8 feet (2.5 meters). 

● Plate electrodes. Must have a minimum of 2 square feet (0.18 square meters) of metallic 

surface exposed to the exterior soil. 

The metal frame of the building, a concrete-encased ground, or a ground ring must supplement 

a metallic underground water pipe. 

Approved floor grounds 

! WARNING: 

WARNING: If you can only access the approved ground from within a dedicated power 

equipment room, then a licensed electrician must make the connections. 

Approved floor grounds are grounds on each floor of a high-rise building. These grounds can be 

connected to the ground terminal in the riser closet and to the cabinet equipment that are 

single-point ground terminals. Approved floor grounds might include the following grounds: 

Note: You 

● Building steel 

● The grounding conductor for the secondary side of the power transformer that feeds the 

floor 

● Metallic water pipes 

● Power feed metallic conduit that supplies panel boards on the floor 

● A point that is specifically provided in the building design for grounding 

Note: 

must ensure that you electrically connect all protective grounds together to 

form a single grounding electrode system. 

Coupled bonding conductor 

When you use a coupled bonding conductor (CBC) grounding in an AC-powered cabinet, 

maintain a minimum space of 1 foot (0.3 meters) between the CBC power and other power and 

ground leads. 

In AC-powered systems, attach the single-point ground terminal block for the system on the AC 

load or AC protector cabinet. 


SCC1 power systems 

Each SCC1 has one AC power supply or one DC power supply. These power supplies distribute 

DC power and AC ringing voltage to the circuit pack slots in the cabinet. 

AC power supply (1217A) 

In an AC-powered cabinet, the power supply slot contains a single, plug-in, multioutput AC 

power supply. A power cord, with a three-prong plug on one end and an appliance connector on 

the other end, connects the supply to a dedicated AC power source. 

The 1217A power supply is a global power unit for SCC1s. The 1217A power supply has a wide 

input voltage operating range of 90 VAC to 264 VAC and a 50 Hz or 60 Hz autoranging input. A 

multioutput power supply also provides regulated DC output. The 1217A also has a selectable 

20 or 25 Hz AC ringer. 

The 1217A power supply uses one of the following inputs, depending on the version: 

● 120-VAC, 60-Hz, 15-A to 20-A with three wires in the power cord: one hot wire, one neutral 

wire, and one ground wire 

● 220-VAC or 240-VAC, 50-Hz, 10-A with three wires in the power cord: one hot wire, one 

neutral wire, and one ground wire 

The AC power supply produces the following DC outputs: +5 VDC, –5 VDC, –48 VDC, +12 

VDC, and a battery-charging voltage. The DC outputs distribute power in the cabinet backplane 

to the circuit pack slots. Additionally, the -48 VDC output current is 0 A to 8.25 A. 

A holdover circuit in the power supply allows a system to operate normally during AC power 

interruptions. If AC input power fails, reserve batteries supply power to the memory and the 

processor circuit packs and the fans for 2 minutes. All port circuit packs are inactive during this 

time. The power supply contains a battery charger to charge the holdover batteries. 

DC power supply (676C) 

In a DC-powered SCC, the power slots contain a single, plug-in multioutput DC power supply. 

The 676C DC power supply has a wide input voltage operating range of -42 VDC to -60 VDC at 

up to 22 A. The 676C power supply produces the following outputs: 

● +5.1 VDC at 0 to 55 A 

● -5.1 VDC at 0 to 5.5A 

● +12 VDC at 0 to 2 A (surge to 2.8 A for 350 ms) 

● -48 VDC at 0 to 8.25 A. 

The outputs distribute power on the cabinet backplane to the slots for the circuit packs. The 

value and the frequency of the AC ringing voltage output value depend on the country of use. 

The power supply has circuit breakers and EMI filtering. 



DC power-distribution unit (J58890CG) 

The J58890CG is used with SCC1s. Individual DC output connectors can provide power for up 

to four SCC1s. Each output connector is separately fused at 25 A. The fuses are inside the DC 

power-distribution unit. The input for the DC distribution unit is from the DC power cabinet. 

Use the J58890CG DC power-distribution unit when the distance between the DC power 

cabinet and the cabinet stack is greater than 30 feet (9 meters). 

Enhanced DC rectifier cabinet (J58890R) 

The J58890R enhanced DC rectifier cabinet is used with SCC1s. Each rectifier assembly in the 

DC rectifier cabinet can supply up to 50 A of DC current. You can install a minimum of two 

rectifiers in each DC cabinet to supply a total of 100 A. A third rectifier assembly is used as a 

backup only. 

Each SCC1 can draw up to 15 A. Up to three DC cabinets can be stacked to supply power to 

single-carrier cabinets stacks. 

Each output connector is separately fused at 25 A. The fuses are inside each DC rectifier 

assembly. 

Note: A 

Note: 

J58890CG DC power-distribution unit is required if the distance between the 

DC cabinet and the cabinet stack is greater than 30 feet (9 meters). 

CMC1 AC power supply (650A) 

In the CMC1, a power cord with a three-prong plug on one end and an appliance connector on 

the other end connects the supply to a dedicated AC power source. The power supply is an AC/ 

DC converter that is corrected for global power factors. The converter provides multiple DC 

outputs and AC ring outputs. The converter is autoranging 

● 85 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, at 330 Watts, 

● 4.5 A (100 VAC to 120 VAC) at 500 VA, 

● or 2.3 A (200 VAC to 240 VAC) at 500 VA. 

The inputs to the power supply can be: 

● 120 VAC, 50 Hz to 60 Hz, 6 A, with 3 wires in the power cord: 1 hot wire, 1 neutral wire, 

and 1 ground wire 

● 220 VAC or 240 VAC, 50 Hz to 60 Hz, 3 A, with 3 wires in the power cord: 1 hot wire, 1 

neutral wire, and 1 ground wire 

The AC power supply produces the following outputs: +5 VDC, –5 VDC, and –48 VDC. The 

outputs distribute power on the cabinet backplane to the circuit pack slots. The AC ringing 

voltage output value and frequency depend on the country of use. The 650A also supplies 

power at 150 VDC for neon message waiting lamps. The power supply has EMI filtering. 


CMC1 UPS 

The uninterruptible power supply (UPS) provides surge protection for all connected cabinets. 

Connect the UPS to an electrical outlet that can handle the power requirements of all cabinets. 

To calculate the number of amps drawn, use the following formulas. 

● For 100 VAC to 200 VAC, multiply 3.5 A times the number of cabinets. 

● For 200 VAC to 240 VAC, multiply 1.8 A times the number of cabinets. 

Cabinet A (control carrier) is always connected to an unswitched or always on electrical outlet 

on the UPS. 

Cabinet cooling fans 

CMC1 fan unit 

Two variable-speed fans are at the bottom of the cabinet. The fans receive +8 VDC to +14 VDC 

from the power supply. An air filter, which can be removed and cleaned or replaced, is located 

above the fans. Outside air flows into the bottom of the cabinet. It then flows around the circuit 

packs, and out through the top of the cabinet. 

If the cabinet temperature reaches 158 oF (70 oC), the temperature sensor in the power supply 

shuts the system down and invokes the emergency transfer. 

MCC1 fans 

A fan unit that consists of six fans is mounted near the center of the cabinet. The three front fans 

blow up, and the three rear fans blow down. A removable air filter is provided on top and below 

each fan unit. Four sensors monitor the cabinet temperature. Three sensors are inside the 

cabinet top and one sensor is inside the cabinet bottom. One of the top sensors affects the 

speed of the front fans and the bottom sensor affects the speed of the rear fans. A speed control 

and thermal alarm circuit in each fan monitors the sensors. When a sensor indicates a change 

in cabinet temperature, the circuit in a fan changes the speed for that fan. 

A power cable from the power-distribution unit connects 

● -48 VDC to each fan, 

● +5 VDC to the speed control and thermal alarm circuit in each fan, and 

● temperature sensor signals to the equivalent circuit in each fan. 

One pair of wires is routed to each fan circuit. A minor alarm is triggered if the speed of any fan 

drops below minimum. The minor alarms are sent to the processor circuit pack in the PPN 

cabinet and to the maintenance circuit pack in an EPN cabinet. Alarm signals are also routed to 

the equivalent circuit in each fan. One pair of wires is routed to each fan circuit. 

A minor alarm occurs if a fan stops because of a loss of -48 VDC. One of the cabinet top 

thermal sensors sends an alarm if the exhaust temperature reaches 149 oF (65 oC). Another cabinet top sensor senses if the exhaust temperature reaches 158 o F (70 o C). If the 

temperature reaches 158 o F the system shuts down, and the Emergency Transfer is invoked. 



SCC1 fan unit 

Four constant-speed fans at the top rear of the cabinet receive -48 VDC from the backplane. An 

air filter is located below the fan unit. Air flows down through the filter over the circuit packs. The 

filter is removable and can be cleaned or replaced when necessary. 

If the cabinet temperature reaches 158 oF (70 oC), the temperature sensor in the power supply 

causes the system to shut down. The temperature sensor also invokes the Emergency 

Transfer. 

System protection 

The following types of system protection are provided to keep the switch active and online: 

● Over voltage 

● Sneak current 

● Lightning 

● Earthquake 

Protection from hazardous voltages 

Protection from hazardous voltages and currents is required for all off-premises trunks, lines, 

and terminal installations. Both sneak current protection and over-voltage protection from 

lightning, power induction, and so on, are required. 

Overvoltage protection 

The following devices protect the system from over voltages: 

● Analog trunks use the 507B Sneak Protector. The local telephone company usually 

provides over voltage protection. 

● Analog voice and 2-wire DCP terminals can use one of the following types of combined 

protection against over voltage and sneak current. The terminals can also use the 

equivalent of one of the following types: 

- Carbon block with heat coil for UL code 4B1C 

- Gas tube with heat coil for UL code 4B1E-W 

- Solid state with heat coil for UL code 4C1S 

● DCP and ISDN-BRI terminals use the solid state 4C3S-75 with heat coil protector, or 

equivalent. 

● DS1, E1, and T1 circuits require isolation from exposed facilities. A CSU (T1), lightwave 

integration unit (E1), or other equipment provides this isolation. 


Sneak current protection 

Extraneous power induces sneak current protection to protect building wiring with fuses. The 

fuses protect wiring between the network interface and trunk circuits. The fuses also protect the 

circuit packs. 

All incoming trunks and outgoing trunks and off-premises station lines pass through the sneak 

fuses. 507B sneak fuse panels are installed on the system side of the network interface. 

Sneak current protectors must be either UL-listed or CSA-certified or must comply with local 

safety standards. Sneak current protectors must have a maximum rating of 350 milliamperes 

(mA) and a minimum voltage rating of 600 volts, or as required by local regulations. 

Lightning protection 

A coupled bonding conductor (CBC) in the cabinet ground wiring protects the system from 

lightning. The CBC runs adjacent to wires in a cable and causes mutual coupling between itself 

and the wires. The mutual coupling reduces the voltage difference between ground and the 

switch. 

Ensure that the CBC connects to a telecommunications cable that is firmly connected to an 

approved ground. In multiple-story buildings, you must connect the CBC to an approved ground 

at each floor. 

The CBC can be any of the following configurations: 

● a 10 AWG (5.3 millimeters2/2.6 millimeters) ground wire, 

● a continuous cable sheath that surrounds wires within a cable, or 

● six unused pairs of wire within a cable that are twisted and soldered together. 

The CBC connects from the cabinet single-point ground bar in an AC-powered cabinet or the 

ground discharge bar in a DC-powered cabinet to the terminal bar at the cross-connect field. 

When there is an auxiliary cabinet, a 6 AWG (13.3 millimeters2 /4.1 millimeters) wire connects 

the system cabinet single-point ground block to the Auxiliary cabinet ground block. The ground 

wire routes as closely as possible to the cables that connect the system cabinet to the Auxiliary 

cabinet. 

If equipment is not present in the Auxiliary cabinet, you must preserve ground integrity. Plug the 

power supply for this equipment into one of the two convenience outlets on the rear of the 

MCC1. The convenience outlets are fused at 5 A. A dedicated maintenance terminal plugs into 

the other convenience outlet. 

Earthquake protection 

For earthquake or disaster bracing, the cabinets bolt to the floor. Other areas might require 

additional bracing. Contact your Avaya representative for earthquake requirements at the 

location of the system installation. 




Appendix B: Optional components for media servers 


Servers that support it 

Media Gateway S8300 S8400 S8500 S8700series 

G150 Media 

Gateway on page 103 

Avaya G250 Media 




G600 Media 






CMC1 Media 


SCC1 Media 


MCC1 Media 


IG550 Integrated 


G860 Media 


DEF 

CSI 

x x x x x x 

x x 1 x 1 x 1 

x x 1 x 1 x 1 

x x x 

x x x 

x x 1 x 1 x 1 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x 

x x x 

1. Available with an S8700-series Media Server only with a C-LAN connection through a 

G600, G650, SCC1, or MCC1 Media Gateway. 

x 

DEF SI 



Media modules 

Media module S8300, 

S8500, 

S8700- 

series with 

a G700 

MM312 DCP Media Module on 

page 283 

MM314 LAN Media Module on 

page 284 

MM316 LAN Media Module on 

page 285 

MM340 E1/T1 data WAN Media 

Module on page 300 

MM342 USP data WAN Media 

Module on page 301 

MM710 T1/E1 Media Module on 

page 286 

MM711 Analog Media Module on 

page 289 


page 292 


page 293 


page 296 


page 297 

MM720 BRI Media Module on 

page 298 

MM722 BRI Media Module on 

page 299 

MM760 VoIP Media Module on 

page 302 

Supported Configurations 

S8300, 

S8500, 

S8700- 

series with 

a G350 


x 

x 

x 

x x 

x x 

x x 

x x 

x x 

x x 

x x 

x x 

x 

x x 

x x 

S8300, 

S8500, 

S8700- 

series with 

a G250

Circuit packs 

Power circuit packs 

Supported Servers 

Circuit packs S8500 S8700series 

650A AC power unit on page 214 x 

655A power supply on page 215 x x 

631DA1 AC power unit on 

page 213 

631DB1 AC power unit on 

page 214 

1217B AC power supply on 

page 213 

649A DC power converter on 

page 214 

676D DC power supply on 

page 218 

982LS current limiter on 

page 218 

TN2202 ring generator on 

page 251 

TN755B neon power unit on 

page 232 

CFY1B current limiter on 

page 219 

DEF 

CSI 

x x x 

x x x 

x x x 

x x x 

x x x 

x x x 

DEF SI 

x 

x 

x 



Line circuit packs 


Circuit Pack Name S8500 S8700series 

TN479 analog line (16 ports) on 

page 223 

TN556D ISDN-BRI 4-wire S/T-NT 

interface (12 ports) on page 224 

TN746B analog line (16 ports) on 

page 229 

TN754C DCP digital line (4-wire, 

8 ports) on page 231 

TN762B hybrid line (8 ports) on 

page 233 

TN769 analog line (8 ports) on 

page 235 

TN791 analog guest line (16 

ports) on page 240 

TN793CP analog line with Caller 

ID for multiple countries (24 


TN797 analog trunk or line circuit 

pack (8 ports) on page 243 

TN2181 DCP digital line (2-wire, 

16 ports) on page 247 

TN2183/TN2215 analog line for 

multiple countries (16 ports) on 

page 249 

TN2185B ISDN-BRI S/T-TE 

interface (4-wire, 8 ports) on 

page 249 

TN2198 ISDN-BRI U interface 

(2-wire, 12 ports) on page 250 

TN2214CP DCP digital line 



DEF 

CSI 

x x x x 

x x x 

x x x x 

x x 1 x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

DEF SI

Trunk circuit packs 

TN2215/TN2183 analog line for 

multiple countries (16 ports) 

(international offers or Offer B 

only for US and Canada) on 

page 253 

TN2224CP DCP digital line 


1. Used with CSS or ATM configuration only. 



DEF 

CSI 

x x x x 

x x x x 



TN429D incoming call line 

identification (ICLID) on page 220 

TN459B direct inward dialing 

trunk (8 ports) on page 221 



TN464HP DS1 interface, T1 (24 

channels) or E1 (32 channels) on 

page 222 

TN465C central office trunk (8 


TN747B central office trunk (8 




TN760E tie trunk (4-wire, 4 


TN763D auxiliary trunk (4 


DEF 

CSI 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

DEF SI 

DEF SI 



TN767E DS1 interface, T1 (24 

channels) on page 234 

TN1654 DS1 converter, T1 (24 

channels) and E1 (32 


TN2140B tie trunk (4-wire, 4 


TN2146 direct inward dialing 


TN2147C central office trunk (8 


TN2184 DIOD trunk (4 ports) on 

page 249 

TN2199 central office trunk 


TN2207 DS1 interface, T1 (24 

channels) and E1 (32 


x x x x 

x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

TN2209 tie trunk (4-wire, 4 


x x x x 

TN2242 digital trunk on page 255 x x x x 

TN2305B ATM-CES trunk/ 

port-network interface for 

multimode fiber on page 257 

x1 x x 

TN2306B ATM-CES trunk/ 

port-network interface for 

single-mode fiber on page 257 

TN2308 direct inward dialing 


TN2313AP DS1 interface (24 


TN2464CP DS1 interface with 

echo cancellation,T1/E1 on 

page 266 

1. Used with ATM configuration only. 



x 1 x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 


DEF 

CSI 

DEF SI

Control circuit packs 


Circuit Pack Name S8400 S8500 S8700series 

TN570D Expansion Interface on 

page 225 

TN744E call classifier and tone 

detector (8 ports) on page 228 

TN771DP maintenance and test on 

page 236 

1. Used with CSS or ATM configuration only. 

DEF 

CSI 

x x x 

x x x 1 

x x 

x x x 

TN775C maintenance on page 237 x 1 x 1 x 

TN780 tone clock on page 237 x 1 x 

TN792 duplication interface on 

page 241 

TN799DP control LAN (C-LAN) 

interface on page 244 

TN2182C tone clock, tone detector, 

and call classifier (8 ports) on page 248 

TN2302AP IP media processor on 

page 256 

TN2312BP IP server interface on 

page 258 

TN2401 network control/packet 

interface for SI on page 263 

x x x x x 

x 1 x 1 x x 

x x x x x 

x x x 

TN2401 network control/packet 

interface for SI on page 263 

x 

TN2402 processor on page 265 x 

TN2404 processor on page 265 x 

TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 on 

page 267 2 

TN8412AP S8400 server IP 

interface on page 275 

2. Not supported in a CMC1 or G600 Media Gateway. 

x x x 

x 

DEF SI 


x


Service circuit packs 



TN433 speech synthesizer on 

page 220 

TN725B speech synthesizer on 

page 227 

TN787K multimedia interface on 

page 238 

TN788C multimedia voice 

conditioner on page 238 

TNCCSC-1 PRI to DASS 

converter on page 280 

TNCCSC-2 PRI to DPNSS 


TNCCSC-3 PRI to DPNSS 


TN-C7 PRI to SS7 converter on 

page 280 

TN-CIN voice, fax, and data 

multiplexer on page 281 


DEF 

CSI 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x 

x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 

DEF SI

Application circuit packs 

Wireless circuit packs 

Adapters 



TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 

Voice Mail System (part of 

ED-1E568) on page 225 

TN750C recorded announcement 

(16 channels) on page 230 

TN801B MAPD (LAN gateway 

interface) on page 245 

TN2501AP voice announcements 

over LAN (VAL) on page 266 

DEF 

CSI 

x x x 

x x 

x x x x 

x x x x 



TN789B radio controller on 

page 239 

DEF 

CSI 

x x x x 


adapter S8500 S8700series 

NAA1 fiber-optic cable adaptor on 

page 220 

DEF 

CSI 

x 

DEF SI 

DEF SI 

DEF SI 



Avaya telephones 

All telephones listed in Telephones and speakerphones on page 309 can be used with any 

media server that supports Communication Manager R3.0. 


Index 

Numerical 

4-wire S/T-NT interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 

4C3S-75 solid state protectors . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

120 channel service unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 

1217B Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 

2402 digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

2410 digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 

2500 and 2554 analog telephones . . . . . . . . . 340 

2520B explosive atmosphere telephone . . . . . . . 355 

507B sneak fuse panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

631DA1/B1 AC power units. . . . . . . . . . 213, 214 

649A DC power units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

302D attendant console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 

3410 wireless telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 


3606 wireless VoIP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . 347 





3701 IP DECT telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 

3711 IP DECT telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

4601 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 

4602 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 

4602SW IP Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 

4610SW IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 

4612 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

4620 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 





4630 IP screenphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 

4630 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

4690 IP conference telephone . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

4824 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

48-VDC batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 

507B sneak fuse panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

6211 analog telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 

6219 analog telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 

6221 analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 

631DA1/B1 AC power units. . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

6402 and 6402D digital telephones . . . . . . . . . 330 

6408D+ digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 

6416D+M digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 

6424D+M digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 


676B DC power units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

Index 

676C DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 

8700-series Media Server 

electromagnetic compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . 80 

environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 

power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 

safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 

temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 

8840 TTY analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

958 analog telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

9630 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 

9640 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 

9650 IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 

982LS Current Limiter for DEFINITY SI . . . . . . 218 

A 

AC power 

battery chargers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 

distribution units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

power feeders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 

supply 

WP-91153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

units 

631DA1/B1 . . . . . . . . . . . .213, 214, 404 

acoustic noise levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

ACT LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Adjunct Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 35 

alarm LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 139, 140 

alternate software bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Analog 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 296 

analog line 

TGM550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 

analog trunk 

TGM550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

approved grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

AS1 UPS 

1500VA 120V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 

1500VA 230V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 

700 VA 120V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 

700VA 230V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 

Add-on Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 

ASB button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 129, 140 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Attendant consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 

Auto fallback to primary controller . . . . . . . . . . 37 


Index 

AUX port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

Avaya 4622SW IP telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 

Avaya 4625 IP telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 

Avaya Telephones 

Attendant Consoles 

Softconsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 

Digital Telephones 

2420 digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 

supported, no longer sold . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

Wireless 

3616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 

B 

backup power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406, 408 

batteries 

48 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 

chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 

small assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 

bearer duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 

bearer network, definition of . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 

BRI 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

BRI lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 

BRI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

BRI transmission over clear channel . . . 157, 256, 303 

BRI trunking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 

button 

alternate software bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

Buttons 

ASB (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

RST (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

C 

C360 Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 

cabinets 

AC-powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

auxiliary (J58886N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

CBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 

cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 

DC-powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

dimensions/clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 

earthquake protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

power sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

Callmaster IV digital telephones. . . . . . . . . . . 335 

Callmaster V digital telephones . . . . . . . . . . . 336 

Callmaster VI digital telephones. . . . . . . . . . . 337 

CallVisor ASAI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 219 

CBCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 419 


CC port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

CCA port 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

CFY1B Current Limiter for DEFINITY R . . . . . . 219 

channel service unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 

circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403, 405, 406 

circuit packs 

sneak current protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

clear channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157, 256, 303 

CMC1 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 

CMCs (J58890T) 

fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 

CN620 Mobile Office Device . . . . . . . . . . . 353 

commercial floor loading code . . . . . . . . . .82, 397 

Communication Manager software. . . . . . . . . . 19 

comparison 

TN2302AP and TN2602AP . . . . . . . . . . 272 

CON port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

concrete encased grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

conduit, as ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 

Configuration 

possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

standalone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

Console port 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

console port 

J4350 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

J6350 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

TGM550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 

corrosive gas contaminants . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 

coupled bonding conductor (for grounding) . . . . . 414 

CSI swtich . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

Current Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218, 219 

D 

649A DC power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

DC power 

circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 

distribution units 

J58890CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 

J58890CG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 

grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

relays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 

requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403, 410 

units 

649A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

676B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

DCP 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 

ports (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

DECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351, 352

DEFINITY CSI 

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 

Reliability and recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 

DEFINITY SI 

Adjunct Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 90 

Digital Communications Protocol, see DCP . . . . . 283 

Digital Enhanced Wireless Telecommunications 351, 352 

DS! Converter (TN574). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

DS1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

duplicated bearer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 

duplicated control cabinets (J58890M) . . . . . . . 189 

E 

E1/T1 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 

E1/T1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

EA401 Explosive Atmosphere telephone . . . . . . 345 

earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

earthquake protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

EC500 (Extension to Cellular) . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

EIA530 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

electrical components, power distribution units. . . . 405 

electromagnetic compatibility 

8700-series Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 

Emergency Transfer Relay 

LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Emergency Transfer Relay, see ETR 

EMI filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 

EMMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

backing up data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

with CCS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 

enhanced DC rectifier cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 416 

Enteprise Survivable Server 

S8700 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

S8710 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

Enterprise Survivable Server . . . . . . . . . . .61, 85 

S8500 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 

environment 


EPN cabinets (J58890A) . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 201 

ESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 85 

S8500 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 

S8700/S8710 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

ETH LAN POE ports, G250. . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

ETH WAN port 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Ethernet 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285 

Ethernet ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

Index 


C360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 

Ethernet Switch for S8700 Fiber-PNC . . . . . . . . 82 

ETR (Emergency Transfer Relay) 

ports used (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

ports used (G350) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

Expanded Meet-me Conferencing 

capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 

Expanded Meet-me Conferencing Server . . . . . . 98 

expansion control cabinets 

J58890AF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 

SCCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 

expansion port carriers (J58890BB) . . . . . . . . 201 

Explosive atmosphere telephone . . . . . . . . . 345 

Extension to Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

F 

Fax over IP transmission . . . . . . . . .157, 256, 303 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

Fixed ports 

CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

CON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

LAN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

LINE 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

LINE1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

TRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

WAN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

floor grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 

floor loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 

Front panel 

G250 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

G250 fixed ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

G250-BRI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 

G250-DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 

G250-DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 

Front panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

fuse panels (J58889AB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

fuses 

20-amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 

sneak current protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

G 

G150 Media Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 

G150 2T+4A (4 VoIP) BackPanel. . . . . . . . 106 

G150 2T+4A (4 VoIP) Front Panel . . . . . . . 105 

Model G150 2T + 4A (4 VoIP) . . . . . . . . . 104 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 

G250-BRI 

front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 

physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 


Index 

G250-DCP 

front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

G250-DS1 

front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 


G350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

G600 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 

G650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 


Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 

Maintenance Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 

Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

Stacking Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 

System-Level LEDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 

G860 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 

gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

ground isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 

ground ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

ground wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

grounding cable for IG550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 

grounding, AC and DC . . . . . . . . . . . . 413, 414 

H 

humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 

I 

IG550 Integrated Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

grounding cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 

integrated channel service unit . . . . . . . . . . . 211 

integrated gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

international requirements . . . . . . . . . . 403, 410 

IP Softphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309, 310 

IPSI circuit pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 

determining the number required . . . . . . . . 262 

ISDN 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

ISDN BRI TRUNK port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

ISDN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

isolator interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 

J 

J4350 router 

console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 


ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

slot locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 


J4350 router, (continued) 

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

J58886N auxiliary cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

J58889AB fuse panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

J58890A EPN/PPN cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 

J58890AF expansion control cabinets . . . . . . . 201 

J58890BB port carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 201 

J58890CE-2 AC power distribution units/battery 

chargers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

J58890CF-2 DC power distribution units . . . . . . 410 

J58890CG DC power distribution units . . . . . . . 416 

J58890CH-1 AC power distribution units . . . . . . 408 

J58890R enhanced DC rectifier cabinets . . . . . . 416 

J58890SA SN carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 

J6350 router 

console port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 

ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

slot locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 


USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

J-series Services Router power cord specifications . 142 

K 

KS-21906, L9 48 VDC battery . . . . . . . . . . . 406 

L 

LAN 

ETH LAN POE ports (G250) . . . . . . . . . . 121 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285 

LAN 1 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

large battery power backup . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 

LED 

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 139, 140 

Emergency Transfer Relay. . . . . . . . . . . 140 

line activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

trunk activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

LINE 1 port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

LINE 2 port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

LINE ports 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

Local Survivable Processor (LSP) . . . . . . 37, 62, 86 

LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 62, 86 

auto fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

M 

Master Control Unit (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 

MCC1 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 203 

MCCs (multicarrier cabinets) 

auxiliary cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 

carrier types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 

DC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 

fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 

ground integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407, 408 

power systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

Media Gateway 

CMC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 

G150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 

G350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 

G600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 

G650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 

MCC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 

SCC1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 

media gateway 

TGM550 physical description . . . . . . . . . . 140 

media gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 

Media Module 

Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 305 

BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 

DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 297 

T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 

VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 

Media Module LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 

Media modules 

analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 296 

BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

E1/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 

ISDN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285 

MM312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 

MM314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 

MM316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 

MM340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 

MM342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

MM710. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 

MM711. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 305 

MM712. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 

MM714. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 

MM716. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 

MM717. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 

MM720. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 

MM722. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

MM760. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 

USP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 307 

media resource 320 adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 

Index 

Media server cable adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 

MGC (Media Gateway Controller) 

backup options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

primary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

mixed port network connectivity 

S8700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

MM312 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 






MM711 media module . . . . . . . . . . . . 289, 305 








modem 

SAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 

Modem for S8700 Fiber-PNC . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

Modem over IP transmission . . . . . . .157, 256, 303 

Modules 

supported in IG550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 

Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device . . . . . . . 353 

Multipoint Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

N 

NAA1 Fiber Optic Cable Adaptor (CMC1 Media 

Gateway) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 

non-US power requirements. . . . . . . . . . 403, 410 

O 

Off-PBX station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

overvoltage protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

P 

P133G2 and P134G2 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 

Agency Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 

Environmental Information . . . . . . . . . 387 

Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 

Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . 386 

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 

Supported Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 

P330 Ethernet Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380, 388 

peripherals, ground isolation . . . . . . . . . . . .411 


Index 

Physical description 

G250-BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117, 118 

G250-DCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 

pipe grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

Pocket PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 

PoE 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285 

PoE (Power over Ethernet) 

fixed ports (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Polycom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Polycom video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

ViaVideo camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Viewstation FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

VSX systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

port 

AUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

console, TGM550. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

port carriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 201 

Ports 

4 wire ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 

analog media module . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 296 

CCA (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Console (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

DCP (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

ETH LAN POE (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

ETH WAN (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

fixed (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

ISDN BRI TRUNK (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

LINE (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

PoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285 

PRI (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 

T1/E1 port (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 

TRUNK (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

USB (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

power 

backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407, 408 

DC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403, 410 

feeders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 

global requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . 403, 410 

outages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 

Power Backup for S8700 Fiber-PNC . . . . . . . . 82 

power button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

power converters 

631DA1/B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 214, 404 

649A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 413 

power LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

power specifications 


Power Supply, AC, WP-1217B . . . . . . . . 211, 213 



power units 

AC 

631DA1/B1 . . . . . . . . . . . .213, 214, 404 

J58890CE-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

DC 

649A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 

676B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

distribution (J58890CH-1) . . . . . . . . . . . 408 

electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 

inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 

PPNs 

cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 

PRI 

ports (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 

Primary MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 

protections, system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

protective grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 

R 

RAM disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 61 

relays, DC power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 

requirements 

international. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 

reset button 

J6350 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

TGM550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

ring generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 

router 

J4350 physical description . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

J4350 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

J4350 slot locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 

J6350 physical description . . . . . . . . . . . 138 

J6350 ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

J6350 slot locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 

router, J6350 physical description . . . . . . . . . 138 

RS449 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

RST button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

Russia 

MFR (TN2182C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 

MFR (TN744B/C/D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 

S 


Circuit Packs 

Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421, 428 

Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425, 427 

S8300 Media Server in a Local Survivable 

Processor Mode with an S8500 Multi-Connect . . . 62 


Processor Mode with an S8700 Fiber-PNC . . . 35, 86

S8300 Media Server in an LSP Configuration . . . . 37 

S8300 Media Server Web Interface . . . . . . . . . 26 

S8300 Media Server with G250 Media Gateway 

Configuration Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 





Media Server Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 26 

S8300 Media Server in an LSP Configuration. . . 37 

S8400 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 


as an ESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 

SAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 

S8500 Multi-Connect 


Processor Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 

S8500C Media Server 

back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 

detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 

EMMC server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 

front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 

S8700 Fiber-PNC 

Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 

Ethernet Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

High-level capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 86 


Processor Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 86 

UPS or Power Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

USB Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 

S8700 Fiber-PNC Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 86 

S8700 Fiber-PNC Reliability . . . . . . . . . . .84, 86 


as an ESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

Required System Components . . . . . . . . . 66 

S8700 Media Server IP Connect 

Circuit Packs 

Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 

S8700 Media Server IP-PNC 

Circuit Packs 

Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 

S8700 mixed port network connectivity . . . . . . . 87 

S8700 Multi-Connect 

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

S8700 Multi-Connect Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . 87 

S8700 Required System Components. . . . . . . . 66 


as an ESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 

components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 72 

Required System Components . . . . . . . . . 66 

Index 

S8710 Media Server components . . . . . . . . 68, 72 

S8710 Required System Components . . . . . . . . 66 

S8720 Media Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 

safety 


SAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 

modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 

Samsung Ubigate iBG-3026 Router . . . . . . . . 155 

SCC1 Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 

SCCs (single carrier cabinets) 

acoustic noise levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 

DC power supply (676B) . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

power systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

Seamless Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device . . . . . 353 

W110 Light Access Point . . . . . . . . . . . 375 

Wireless Services Manager . . . . . . . . . . 374 

WSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 

Server Availability Management Processor . . . . . . 57 

Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

single point ground terminals . . . . . . . . . . . 414 

SIP Enablement Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 

SIPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 275 

small battery power backup . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 

SN carriers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 

SN clock circuit packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

sneak fuse panels (507B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 

sneak protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

SNIs (TN573/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 226 

Softconsole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 

Softphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 

Softphone for Pocket PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 

Software duplication (S8720 Media Server) . . . . . 69 

solid state voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

Stand-alone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

startup LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 139 

supported telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 

system 

protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 

T 

T1/E1 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 

ports (G250) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 

T1/E1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

TCP/IP 

connectivity 

C-LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 


Index 

telephones 

Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 

2500 and 2554 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 

6211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 

6219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 

6221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 

8840 TTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

958 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

TTY 8840 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 

Attendant consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 

302D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 

CN620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 

Digital Communications Protocol (DCP) 

Telephone 

2402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

Digital Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

2410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 

2420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 

6402 and 6402D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 

6408D+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 

6416D+M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 

6424D+M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 

Callmaster IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 

Callmaster V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 

Callmaster VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 

EA401 and EA401A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 

Explosive atmosphere telephone . . . . . . . . 345 

IP Telephones 

4601 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 

4602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 

4602SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 

4610SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 

4620SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 

4621SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 

4622SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 

4625SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 

4630 IP screenphone . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 

4690 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 

IP Softphone for Pocket PC . . . . . . . . . 310 

Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 

3410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 

3606 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 

3616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 

3626 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 

3701 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 

3711 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

Motorola CN620 Mobile Office Device . . . . 353 

Transtalk 9040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 


analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 

BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

E1/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

TIM510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

TIM510 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

TIM514 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 

TIM521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 


temperature 


terminals 

grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 

TGM550 

analog line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

analog trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 

physical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 

TGM550 Gateway Module 


TIM510 E1/T1 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 

TIM514 analog module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 

TIM521 BRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

TN1654 DS1 Converter, T1 (24 channel) and E1 

(32 channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 

TN2138 CO Trunk for Italy (8 ports) . . . . . . . . 246 

TN2139 DID Trunk for Italy (8 ports) . . . . . . . . 246 

TN2140BTie Trunk for Hungary and Italy 

(4-wire, 4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 

TN2146 DID Trunk for Belgium and the Netherlands 

(8 port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 

TN2147C CO Trunk for Multiple Countries (8 ports). 247 

TN2181 DCP Digital Line (2-wire, 16 ports). . . . . 247 

TN2182C Tone-Clock, Tone Detector, and Call 

Classifier (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 

TN2183/TN2215 Analog Line for Multiple 

Countries (16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 

TN2184 DIOD Trunk for Germany (4 ports). . . . . 249 

TN2185 ISDN-BRI S/T-TE Interface (4-wire) . . . . 249 

TN2198 ISDN-BRI U Interface (2-wire). . . . . . . 250 

TN2199 CO Trunk for Russia (3-wire, 4 ports) . . . 251 

TN2202 Ring Generator for France . . . . . . . . 251 

TN2207 DS1 Interface, T1 (24-channel) and E1 

(32-channel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 

TN2209 Tie Trunk for Russia (4-wire, 4 ports) . . . 252 

TN2214B DCP Digital Line (2-wire, 24 ports) . . . . 253 

TN2215/TN2183 Analog Line for Multiple Countries 

(16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 

TN2224B DCP Digital Line (2-wire, 24 ports) . . . . 254 

TN2242 Digital Trunk (Japan 2MB TTC) . . . . . . 255 

TN2301 Logic Switch for DEFINITY R . . . . . . . 255 

TN2302 IP media processor. . . . . . . . . . . . 256 

TN2305 ATM-CES Trunk/Port-Network Interface for 

Multi-Mode Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 

TN2306 ATM-CES Trunk/Port-Network Interface for 

Single-Mode Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 

TN2308 DID Trunk for Brazil (8 ports) . . . . . . . 257 

TN2312BP IP server interface . . . . . . . . . . . 258 

TN2313AP DS1 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 

TN2313AP DS1 Interface (24-channel) . . . . . . 262 

TN2401 Net/Pkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 

TN2401 Network Control/Packet Interface for 

DEFINITY SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 

TN2401/2400 Net/Pkt sandwich circuit pack . . . . 264 

TN2401/TN2400 Net/Pkt Interface sandwich 

circuit pack assembly for DEFINITY SI/I upgrades. 264 

TN2402 Processor for DEFINITY CSI . . . . . . . 265

TN2404 Processor for DEFINITY SI. . . . . . . . . 265 

TN2464BP DS1 Interface with Echo Cancellation, 

T1/E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 

TN2501AP Voice Announcements over LAN (VAL) . 266 

TN2602AP features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 

TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 . . . . . . . . . 267 

TN572 SN clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN573/B SNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN2202 ring generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 

TN429D DIOD or Central Office Trunk (8 ports) . . . 220 

TN433 speech synthesizer Italy. . . . . . . . . . . 220 

TN436B DID Trunk for Australia (8 ports) . . . . . . 220 

TN438B CO trunk for Australia (8 port) . . . . . . . 221 

TN439 Tie Trunk for Australia and Japan . . . . . . 221 

TN457 Speech Synthesizer for British English . . . . 221 

TN459B DID Trunk for the United Kingdom . . . . . 221 

TN464C/D/E/F DS1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 

TN465C CO Trunk for Multiple Countries (8 port) . . 223 

TN479 Analog Line (16 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . 223 

TN497 Tie Trunk for Italy TGU, TGE, and TGI 

(4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 

TN556D ISDN-BRI 4-Wire Interface (12 ports) . . . . 224 

TN568 DEFINITY AUDIX 4.0 Voice Mail System . . . 225 

TN570D Expansion Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 

TN572 Switch-Node Clock for DEFINITY R . . . . . 226 

TN573/B SNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 

TN573B Switch Node Interface . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN574 DS1 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 

TN725B Speech Synthesizer for United States 

English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 

TN726B Data Line (8 ports). . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 

TN735 MET Line (4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 

TN744E Call Classifier Tone Detector for Multiple 

Countries (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 

TN746B Analog Line (16 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . 229 

TN747B CO Trunk (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 

TN750C Recorded Announcement (16 channels) . . 230 

TN753B DID Trunk (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 

TN755B Neon Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 

TN758 Pooled Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 

TN760E Tie Trunk (4-wire, 4 ports) . . . . . . . . . 233 

TN762B Hybrid Line (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 

TN763D Auxiliary Trunk (4 ports) . . . . . . . . . . 234 

TN767E DS1 Interface, T1 (24 channel) . . . . . . . 234 

TN769 Analog Line (8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 

TN771DP Maintenance/Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 

TN771DP maintenance/test circuit pack with 

firmware download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 

TN775C Maintenance circuit pack. . . . . . . . . . 237 

TN780 Tone Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 

TN787K Multimedia Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 

TN788C Multimedia Voice Conditioner . . . . . . . 238 

TN789B Radio Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 

TN791 Analog Guest Line (16 ports) . . . . . . . . 240 

TN792 Duplication Interface for TN2404 Processor 

for DEFINITY SI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 

TN793CP analog line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 

Index 

TN793CP Analog Line with Caller ID (24 ports) . . . 241 

TN797 US Analog Trunk or Line Circuit Pack 

(8 ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 

TN799/B/C CLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 

TN801 LAN Gateway interface . . . . . . . . . . 245 

TN801 MAPD (LAN Gateway Interface) . . . . . . 245 

TN801B MAPD LAN Gateway Interface . . . . . . 219 

TN802B MAPD IP Interface Assembly . . . . . . . 245 

TN8400AP Media Server circuit pack . . . . . .43, 275 

TN8412AP S8400 server IP interface . . . . . .43, 275 

TN-C7 ISDN-PRI to SS7 Converter . . . . . . . . 280 

TNCCSC-1 ISDN-PRI to DASS Converter . . . . . 280 

TNCCSC-2 ISDN-PRI to DPNSS Converter . . . . 280 

TNCCSC-3 ISDN-PRI to DPNSS Converter . . . . 280 

TN-CIN Voice/Fax/Data Multiplexer . . . . . . . . 281 

Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 

Toshiba SIP business phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 

Transtalk 9040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 

TRK port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

TRUNK port 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 

TTY over IP transmission . . . . . . . . .157, 256, 303 

U 

UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406, 408 

UPS for S8700 Fiber-PNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 

USB Modem for S8700 Fiber-PNC. . . . . . . . . . 83 

USB port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 

G250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

J4350 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 

J6350 router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 

USP 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

V 

V.35 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 

Video Telephony Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Videoconferencing over IP . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

Viewstation FX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

VSX systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 

W 

W110 Light Access Point 

Seamless Communication . . . . . . . . . . . 375 

W310 WLAN Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . 369, 371 

Seamless Communication . . . . . . . . . . . 373 

Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 

WAN 

ETH WAN port (G250). . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 

media modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301 

WAN 1 port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33, 129 


Index 

WAN media modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 

wireless 

Extension to Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 

telephones 

3410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 

3606 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 

3616 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 

3626 VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 

3701 IP DECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 

3711 IP DECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 

W310 WLAN Gateway . . . . . . . . . . 369, 371 

Wireless Services Manager 

Seamless Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . 374 

WP-1217B Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 

WP-91153 AC power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 

X 

X.21 

media module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya ... - Avaya Support

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?